
Class _-L0ll3_ 

Book ^^~ 

CoipigM : 

CLOFffilGHT DEPOSfE 



COPYRIGHT APPLIED FOR. 



MILITARY INSTRUCTORS 
MANUAL 



BY 



CAPTAIN JAMES P> COLE, 59th INFANTRY 

Instructor 3rd Battalion, I 7th Provisional Training Regiment, 

Plattsburg, N. Y. 



AND 



MAJOR OLIVER SCHOONMAKER, 76th DIVISION 

Assistant Instructor 3rd Battalion, 17th Provisional Training 

Regiment, Plattsburg, N. Y. 



"W|33 

At 



NOV 17 1917 

©O.A47T* 86 
V 1 



To 

COLONEL AVOLF 

Under whose careful supervision so many 
have received their Military Training in 
order that they may show the world in 
hattle the true spirit of American manhood. 



Acknowledgment. 

To have prepared this book within the time allotted to 
it, without the assistance of Candidates Alcott Far- 
rar Elwell and Lyle Milton Prouse wonld have 
been impossible, and grateful recognition is made of 
their services. Xot only much of the manual labor, but 
the preparation of entire chapters, has been in their 
hands. 

Candidates Charles Huntington Jacobs and 
Michael Francis McAleer have rendered very valua- 
ble assistance and we wish to thank the following candi- 
dates for the loan of materials used elsewhere, for type- 
writing and other work : 

Glenn Mack Ainswortii. 

Philip M. Brown. 

^Nelson P. Bump. 

Edwin G. Burrows. 

Philip Doremus. 

Walter Lane Hardenbrook. 

Albert Blanchard Kellogg. 

Henry Pratt McKean. 

Loren Ray Pierce. 

Harry Raphael Saftel. 

Roland Emery Packard. 

Hoyt Sherman. 



Introduction. 

The officer of to-day has big problems to face at short 
notice. His training has necessarily been so intensive 
that he cannot absorb a large amount of it. He has lit- 
tle time to make out schedules or even to look over the 
hasty notes he may have made during his training 
period, yet he finds himself facing problems which force 
him to immediate action. 

This book so condenses and systematizes general mili- 
tary instruction and the work done at Plattsburg so that 
it may be easily utilized in training other troops. ISTo 
broad claim for originality is made except in the ar- 
rangement of all available material; the bibliography 
makes acknowledgment to all text® so utilized. Besides 
bringing helpful reminders to new officers regarding 
the elements of modern warfare, much of the material 
will be found of radical importance, as it is practically 
new and never before condensed. Since under the new 
army organization the platoon leader virtually has as- 
sumed the roll of a captain of a company, it is 
not enough for him to know simply his own part; he 
must be ready with all the information that his non- 
commissioned officers and men should know, and more 
important still, he must know how to teach them. Hav- 
ing little or no time to work over and digest for himself 
this mass of new material pouring in upon him, the 
officer may find in this book, material condensed and 
already arranged. 

It is hoped that this work will serve to recall to many 
officers, valuable points of military training which 



would otherwise be lost to them in the mass of notes 
never looked at since the day they were made. More 
than this, every reader will find help in planning his 
work, saving thereby precious hours already too full 
of necessary duties, and will find fresh material for 
progress in the game of war. 

It is the purpose of this book to help men who are 
in the service of the United States, and through them 
to share in bringing victory. 



Cliapter 


I. 
II. 

III. 


Table of Contents. 

Schedules 


PAGE. 

1 


Cliapter 
Cliapter 


infantry drill regulations. 
Physical Training 


. 31 

. 91 



Voice Culture. 

Cliapter IV. Use of Modern Arms 105 

1. S. A. F. M. 

2. Range Practice. 

3. Pistol. 

4. Bayonet. 

5. Machine Guns. 

6. Grenade Instruction. 

Cliapter V. Map Sketching 143 

Cliapter VI. Articles of War. (Courts- 
Martial.) 161 

Cliapter VII. Army Regulations 175 

Chapter VIII. Practice Marches 187 

Field Work. 

Chapter IX. Feeding Men 213 

Camping and Camp Sanita- 
tion. 

Chapter X. Personal Hygiene 221 

First Aid. 

Chapter XL Signaling 229 

Chapter XII. Guard Duty 237 

Chapter XIII. Company Administration .... 245 



PAGE. 

Chapter XIV. 'Conferences 259 

Study. 

Small Problems in Infanty. 

Examinations. 

Chapter XV. Trench Warfare 287 

1. General Principles. 

2. Siting Trenches. 

3. Construction. 

4. Occupation. 

Conclusion 396 

Bibliography 397 

Chapter Index 403 



CHAPTER 1 
Schedules. 



SCHEDULES. 



Schedule op Instruction, 
Plattsburg, N. Y., August 27 



Organization. 

Issue of Equipment. 

Organization of 

Barracks 


Drill 
I. D. R. 


Drill 
Physical 
M. P. T. 


Monday, Aug. 27 

7.00-12.00 a. m. 
1.30-4.30 p. m. 






Tuesday, Aug. 28 


Without arms 

7.00-8.00 a. m. 

pars. 48-73 


8.00-8.30 a. m. 
pgs. 1-30 




8.30-10.30 a. m. 
pars. 101-132 


Wednesday, Aug. 29 


With arms 

7.00-8.00 a. m. 

pars. 48-100 


8.00-8.30 a. m. 
pgs. 1-33 




8.30-10.30 a. m. 
pars. 101-132 


Thursday, • Aug. 30 


7.00-8.00 a. m. 
pars. 48-100 

8.30-9.30 a. m. 
pars. 101-132 

9.30-10.30 a. m. 
pars. 159-1F.8 


8.00-8.30 a. m. 
pgs. 1-36 


Friday, Aug. 31 


7.00-8.00 a. m. 
pars. 48-100 

8.30-9.30 a. m. 
pars. 101-132 

9.30-10.30 a. m. 
pars. 159-198 


8.00-8.30 a. m. 
pgs. 1-39 



Saturday, Sept. 1 



As prescribed by Senior Instructors. 



SCHEDULES. 



Reserve Officers' Training Camp 
to September 1, 1917 



Practice 
March 


Musketry 

Training 

S. A. F. M. 


Study 


Conferences 






7.00-9.00 p. m. 

par. 1-21 

par. 48-73- 

101-132 

I. D. R. 








1.30-3.30 p. m. 

par. 1-21 

S. A. F. M. 

7.00-9.00 p. m. 

par. 74-100 

I. D. R. 


2.30-4.30 p. m. 

Care of arms and 

equipment 


Without arms 


1.30-2.30 p. m. 
par. 1-21 


2.30-3.30 p. m. 

par. 1-31 

S. A. F. M. 


3.30-4.30 p. m. 
Assembling and 
adjuscirg pack 


10.45-11.45 a.m. 


7.00-9.00 p. m. 

par. 159-158 

I. D. R. 


10.45-11.45 a.m. 
With arms 


1.30-2.30 p.m. 
par. 1-31 


7.00-9.00 p. m. 

par. 159-198 

I. D. R. 


2.30-4.30 p. m. 
Assembling and 
adjusting pack 


With arms and 

light pack 
10.45-11.45 a.m. 


1.30-3.30 p. m. 
par. 1-31 


7.00-9.00 p. m. 

par. 199-257- 
758-765 
I. D. R. 


3.30-4.30 p. m. 
Military 
Courtesy 



SCHEDULES. 



Schedule of Instruction, 
Plattsburg, N. Y., September 3 





Drill 
I. D. R. 


Drill 
Physical 
M. P. T. 


Monday, Sept. 3 


7.00-8.30 a. m. 

pars. 101-158 

159-193 


3.30-4.00 p. m. 
pgs. 1-42 


Tuesday, Sept. 4 


7.00-8.30 a. m. 

pars. 48-100 

158-198 


3.30-4.00 p. m. 
pgs. 1-45 


'Wednesday, Sept. 5 


7.00-8.30 a. m. 

pars. 101-158 

158-198 


3.30-4.00 p. m. 
pgs. 1-48 


Thursday, Sept. 6 


7.00-8.30 a. m. 

pars. 48-100 

159-198 


3.30-4.30 p. m. 
pgs. 1-52 


Friday, Sept. 7 


7.00-8.30 a. m. 

pars. 101-158 

159-198 


3.30-4.00 p. m. 
pgs. 1-55 


Saturday, Sept. 8 


As prescribed by Senior Instructor. 



SCHEDULES. 



Plattsburg Training Camp 
to September 8, 1917 



Musketry- 
Training 
S. A. F. M. 


Sem/aphxxre 
Signalling 


Companies 

Practice March 

Full Kit 


8.45-9.45 a. m. 
par. 1-31 


9.45-10.45 a. m. 




10.00-11.00 a. m. 
par. 1-31 


11.00-11.30 a. m. 


8.45-9.45 a. m. 


8.45-9.45 p. m. 
par. 1-31 


9.45-10.15 a. m. 




10.30-11.30 a. m. 
par. 1-31 




8.45-10.15 a. m. 


8.45-9.45 a. m. 
par. 1-31 


9.45-10.15 a. m. 





SCHEDULES. 



Schedule of Instruction, 
Plattsburg, N. Y., September 3 





Grenade Instruction 
(a) 


Bayonet Drill 


Monday. Sept. 3 


11.00-11.30 a.m. 


4.00-4.30 p. m. 

Lesson 1 

Notes on 

Bayonet Training 


Tuesday, Sept. 4 


11.30-12.00 m. 


4.00-4.30 p. m. 
Lessons 1 and 2 

Notes on 
Bayonet Training 


Wednesday, Sept. 5 


10.30-11.00 a. m. 


4.00-4.30 p. m. 
Lessons 1 and 3 

Notes on 
Bayonet Training 


Thursday, Sept. 6 


11.30-12.00 m. 


4.00-4.30 p. m. 
Lessons 1 and 4 

Notes on 
Bayonet Training 


Friday, Sept. 7 


10.30-11.00 a. m. 


4.00-4.30 p. m. 
Lessons 1 and 5 

Notes on 
Bayonet Training 


Saturday, Sept. 8 


As prescribed by Se 


nior Instructor. 



(a) As prescribed by Senior Grenade Instructor. 



SCHEDULES. 



Plattsburg Training Camp 

to September 8, 1917 — (Concluded) 



Voice Culture 


Conferences 


Study 


11.30-12.00 m. 


1.30-3.30 p. m. 
par. 1-100 I. D. R. 
pgs. 7-46 M. G. D. 


7.00-9.00 p. m. 

pars. 1-158 I. D. R. 

pgs. 7-46 

M. G. D. 




1.30-3.30 p. m. 

pars. 101-158 I. D. R. 

pgs. 7-88 M. G. D. 


7.00-9.00 p. m. 

par. 159-174 I. D. R. 

pgs. 47-88 

M. G. D. 


11.00-12.00 m. 


Physical Exam. 

1.30-3.30 p. m. 

pars. 159-174 
part 5, 6, 10, 19 
U. S. S. B. 


7.00-9.00 p. m. 

par. 175-198 I. D. R 

part III— U. S. 

Signal Book 




1.30-3.30 p. m. 

pars. 175-198,1-61 

S. A. F. M. 


7.00-9.00 p. m. 

par. 792-798 I. D. R. 

par. 1-61 

S. A. F. M. 


11.00-12.00 m. 


1.30-3.30 p. m. 

pars. 792-798 I. D. R. 

1-61 S. A. F. M. 


7.00-9.00 p. m. 

par. 199-220 1-61 

S. A. F. M. 



SCHEDULES. 



Schedule of Instruction, 
Plattsburg, N. Y., September 10 





Drill 
I. D. R. 


Musketry Training 
S. A. F. M. 




7.00-7.30 a. m. 
pars. 133-150 


8.30-9.30 a. m. 


Monday, Sept. 10 


7.30-8.00 a. m. 
pars. 123-127 


pars. 35-43 
Sight setting 




8.00-8.30 a. m. 
pars. 159-198 


and loadings 


Tuesday, Sept. 11 


Same as for Monday 


9.30-10.30 a. m. 
pars. 35-51 

Sight setting 
and loadings 




7.00-8.00 a. m. 
pars. 199-211 


8.30-9.30 p. m. 
pars. 35-57 
Sight setting 
and loadings 


"Wednesday, Sept. 12 


8.00-8.30 a. m. 
pars. 159-198 




7.00-8.00 a. m. 
pars. 199-224 


10.00-11.00 a. m. 
pars. 35-60 
Sight setting 
and loadings 


Thursday, Sept. 13 


8.00-8.30 a. m. 
pars. 159-198 


Friday, Sept. 14 


7.00-8.30 a. m. 
pars. 159-224 


8.30-9.30 a. m. 
pars. 35-61 
Sight setting 
and loadings 


Saturday, Sept. 15 


As prescribed by Senior Instructors. 



SCHEDULES. 



Plattsbtjrg Training Camp 
to September 15, 1917 



First Aid Manual, 

N. C. O's and 

Privates 


Signaling 
Morse Code 
(wig wag) 


Practice March 
Full Kit 


9.30-10.30 a. m. 

Wounds 

pgs. 286-288 


10.30-11.00 a. ra. 






10.30-11.00 a. m. 


8.30-9.30 a. in. 


9.30-10.30 a. m. 

Fractures 

pgs. 288-290 


10.30-11.00 a. m. 








8.30-10.00 a. m. 


9.30-10.00 a. m. 
Resuscitation 
pgs. 290-296 


10.00-11.00 a. m. r 





10 



SCHEDULES. 



Schedule of Instruction, 
Plattsburg, N. Y., September 10 





Grenade Instruction 
(a) 


Drill, Physical 
M. P. T. 


Monday, Sept. 10 


11.00-11.30 a. m. 


3.30-4.00 p. m. 

pgs. 1-58 
pgs. 133-134 


Tuesday, Sept. 11 


11.00-11.30 a. m. 


3.30-4.00 p. m. 

pgs. 1-61 
pgs. 133-134 


Wednesday, Sept. 12 


11.00-11.30 a. m. 


3.30-4.00 p. m. 

pgs. 1-64 
pgs. 133-134 


Thursday, Sept. 13 


11.00-11.30 a. m. 


3.30-4.00 p. m. 

pgs. 1-67 
pgs. 133-134 


Friday, Sept. 14 


11.00-11.30 a. m. 


3.30-4.00 p. m. 

pgs. 1-70 
pgs. 133-134 


Saturday, Sept. 15 


As prescribed by Senior Instructors. 



(a) As prescribed by Senior Grenade Instructor. 



SCHEDULES. 



Plattsbukg Training Camp 

to September 15, 1917 — (Concluded) 



Bayonet Drill 


Conference 


Study 


4.00-4.30 p. m. 


1.30-2.30 p. m. 

pars. 123-127, 

199-223 I. D. R. 


>> 

o 


7.00-8.00 p. m. 

pars. 123-127, 

199-223 I. D. R. 


2.30-3.30 p. m. 
pars. 32-61 S.A.F.M. 


8.00-9.00 p. m. 
pars. 32-61 S.A.F.M. 




1.30-3.30 p. m. 

pars. 225-248 I.D.R. 

pgs. 5-11 

Notes on 

Bayonet Training 


7.00-8.00 p.m. 
pars. 225-248 I.D.R. 


4.00-4.30 p. m. 


8.00-9.00 p. m. 

pgs. 5-11 

Notes on 

Bayonet Training 


4.00-4.30 p. m. 


1.30-3.30 p. m. 

pars. 249-257 I.D. R. 

pgs. 12-19 

Notes on 

Bayonet Training 


>, 7.00-9.00 p.m. 
£ pars. 249-257 I.D.R. 
g pgs. 12-19 
s Notes on 
h Bayonet Training 


4.00-4.30 p. m. 


1.30-2.30 p. m. 

Patrolling, messages, 

orders, etc. 

pgs. 12-24 F. S. R. 


VI 
D 

S) 


7.00-8.00 p.m. 

Patrolling, messages, 

orders, etc. 

pgs. 12-24 F. S. R. 


2.30-3.30 p. m. 

Notes on 

Grenade Warfare 


8.00-9.00 p. m. 

Notes on 

Grenade Warfare 


4.00-4.30 p. m. 


1.30-2.30 p. m. 

Advance and 

Rear Guards 

pgs. 25-34 F. S. R. 


>> 
a 

w 

u 

3 


7.00-8.00 p. m. 

Advance and 

Rear Guards 

pgs. 25-34 F. S. R. 


2.30-3.30 p. m. 
Training & Employ- 
ment of Bombers 


8.00-9.00 p. m. 
Training & Employ- 
ment of Bombers 



12 



SCHEDULES. 



Schedule of Instruction, 
Plattsburg, N. Y., September 17 



Drill, I. D. R. 



Musketry Training 
S. A. F. M. 



Monday, 



Sept. 17 



Tuesday, 



Sept. 18 



"Wednesday, Sept. 19 



Thursday, Sept. 20 



Friday, 



Sept. 21 



7.00-8.00 a. m. 

pars. 48-198 
close order only 



7.00-8.00 a. m. 

pars. 48-198 
close order only 



7.00-8.00 a. m. 

pars. 48-198 

close order only 



7.00-8.00 a. m. 

pars. 48-198 
close order only 



7.00-8.00 a. m. 

pars. 48-198 

close order only 



8.00-8.30 a. m. 
pars. 32-61 



8.00-8.30 a. m. 
pars. 32-61 



8.00-8.30 a. m. 
pars. 32-61 



8.00-8.30 a. m. 
pars. 32-70 



8.00-8.30 a. m. 
pars. 32-70 



Saturday, Sept. 22 As prescribed by Senior Instructors. 



(a) As prescribed by Senior Instructor in Sketching. 



September 24-29, 1917, 



SCHEDULES. 



13 



Plattsbxjkg Training Camp 
to September 22, 1917 



Drill, Physical 
M. P. T. 


Sketching 
(a) 


Study 


8.30-9.00 a. m. 
pgs. 1-73, 133-134 


9.00-11.30 a. m. 
1.30-4.30 p. m. 


7.00-9.00 p. m. 

pgs. 20-34 

Notes on Bayonet 

Training 

pars. 232-257, I.D.R. 

pars. 258-276, I.D.R. 


8.30-9.00 a. m. 
pgs. 1-76, 133-134 


9.00-11.30 a.m. 
1.30-4.30 p. m. 


7.00-9.00 p. m. 

Outposts 

pgs.35-42, F.S.R. 

pars. 277-289, I.D.R. 


8.30-9.00 a. m. 
pgs. 1-79, 133-134 


9.00-11.30 a.m. 
1.30-4.30 p. m. 


7.00-9.00 p. m. 

Orders 

pgs. 43-50, F.S.R. 

pars. 290-326, I.D.R. 


8.30-9.00 a. m. 
pgs. 1-82, 133-134 


9.00-11.30 a.m. 
1.30-4.30 p. m. 


7.00-9.00 p. m. 

Marches 

pgs. 51-65, F.S.R. 

pars. 1-9, 14-18, 

E. F. M. 


8.30-9.00 a. m. 
pgs. 1-85, 133-134 


9.00-11.30 a.m. 
1.30-4.30 p. m. 


7.00-9.00 p. m. 
pars. 37-42, 61-72. 
101-109, E. F. M. 



Construction of Trenches. 



14 



SCHEDULES. 



Schedule of Instktjction 
Plattsourg, N. Y., October 1 





Drill, I. D. R. 


Physical 
M. P. T. 


Monday, 


Oct. 


1 


Y 2 hour 
pars. 48-198 


y 2 hour 
pgs. 86-89 and 142 

Arm Combinations 


Tuesday, 


Oct. 


2 


Company 

Y 2 hour 
pars. 48-198 


y 2 hour 
pgs. 90-93 and 142 

Arm Combinations 


"Wednesday, 


Oct. 


3 


Battalion 

V* hour 

pars. 258-289 


y 2 hour 
pgs. 90-93 and 142 

Arm Combinations 


Thursday. 


Oct. 


4 


Battalion 

y> hour 
pars. 258-289 


y 2 hour 
pgs. 17-93 and 142 

Arm Combinations 


Friday, 


Oct. 


5 


Battalion 

y 2 hour 
pars. 258-289 


y 2 hour 
pgs. 17-93 and 142 

Arm Combinations 



Saturday, Oct. 6 As prescribed by Senior Instructors. 



(a) Per Bayonet Program. 



SCHEDULES. 



15 



Plattsbueg Training Camp 
to October 6, 1917. 



Bayonet 
(a) 


Range Practice 
(b) 


Signalling 


y% hour 


7.30-11.30 a. m. 
1.15-4.15 p. m. 




% hour 


7.30-11.30 a. m. 
1.15-4.15 p. m. 


1 hour 

Semaphore and 

"Wigwag 


% hour 


7.30-11.30 a. m. 
1.15-4.15 p. m. 




y 2 hour 


7.30-11.30 a. m. 
1.15-4.15 p. m. 


1 hour 

Semaphore and 

Wigwag 


V 2 hour 


7.30-11.30 a. m. 
1.15-4.15 p. m. 





(b) Per schedule Senior Instructor Musketry Training. 



16 



SCHEDULES. 



Schedule of Insteuction 
Plattshurg, N. Y., October 1 





Field Work 


Pistol 


Monday, Oct. 1 


1 hour 
Patrolling 


y 2 hour 

Nomenclature 

y 2 hour 
Manual 


Tuesday, Oct. 2 

• 




Same as for Monday 


Wednesday, Oct. 3 


1 hour 
Patrolling 


% hour 
Manual 

y% hour 
Position and Aiming 


Thursday, Oct. 4 




Same as for Wednesday 


Friday, Oct. 5 


1 hour 
Patrolling 


Same as for Wednesday 



Saturday, Oct. 6 As prescribed by Senior Instructors. 



SCHEDULES. 



17 



Plattsburg Training Camp 

to October 6, 1917 — (Concluded) 



Conference 



2 hours 
pars. 258-274. I. D. R. 
Prob. 1 to Situation 3 

S. P. I. 



2 hours 
pars. 275-285, I. D. R. 
Situation 3, Prob. 1. to 
end of Problem, S. P. I. 



2 hours 

pars. 286-304, I. D. R 

Problem 2, S. P. I. 



2 hours 
pars. 305-326, I. D. R 
Prob. 3 to Situation 4, 

S. P. I. 



2 hours 
pars. 327-349, I. D. R. 
Situation 4, Prob. 3, to 
end of Problem, S. P. I. 



Study 



7.00-9.00 p. m. 

pars. 263-285, I. D. R. 

Problem 1, S. P. I. 



7.00-9.00 p. m. 

pars. 286-304, I. D. R. 

Problem 2, S. P. I. 



7.00-9.00 p. m. 

pars. 305-326, I. D. R. 

Problem 3 to Situation 4 

S. P. I. 



7.00-9.00 p. m. 

pars. 327-349, I. D. R. 

Situation 4, Problem 3 to 

end of Problem, S. P. I. 



7.00-9.00 p. m. 

Per later 
announcement 



18 



SCHEDULES. 



Schedule of Instruction 
Plattsburg, N. Y., October 





Drill, I. D. R. 


Physical Drill 
M. P. T. 


Monday, October 8 


1 hour 
pars. 48-289 

1 hour 
pars. 123-158 
199-224 


¥> hour 
pgs. 17-93, 133-142 


Tuesday, October 9 


1 hour 
pars. 48-289 

1 hour 
pars. 123-158 
199-224 


% hour 
pgs. 17-93, 133-142 


Wednesday, October 10 


% hour 
pars. 48-289 

1 hour 
pars. 123-158 
199-224 


V» hour 
pgs. 17-93, 133-142 


Thursday, October 11 


1 hour 
pars. 48-289 

1 hour 
pars. 123-158 
199-224 


l£ hour 
pgs. 17-93, 133-142 


Friday, October 12 






Saturday, October 13 


As prescribed by Senior Instructors. 



(a) Per Bayonet Program. 



SCHEDULES. 



19 



Plattsburg Training Camp 
8 to October 13, 1917. 



Bayonet 
(a) 


Range Practice 
(b) 


Signaling 


V-2 hour 


7-30-11.30 a. m. 
1.15-4.15 p. m. 




1/2 hour 


7-30-11.30 a. m. 
1.15-4.15 p. m. 




V-2 hour 


7-30-11.30 a. m. 
1.15-4.15 p. m. 


% hour 


y. 2 hour 


7-30-11.30 a. m. 
1.15-4.15 p. m. 











(b) Rifle, pistol, machine gun, estimating distances, etc., as prescribed 
by Senior Instructor Musketry Training. 



20 



SCHEDULES. 



Schedule of Instruction 
Plattsburg, N. Y., October 8 



Ivlcnday, 



October 8, 



Field Work 

(Company) 

(c) 



Conferences 



2 hours 
Prob. 4 to Situation 5 

exclusive, S. P. I. 
pars. 596-622, I. D. R. 



Tuesday, 



October 9 



2 hours 
Situation 5, Prob. 4 to 
end of Problem, S. P. I. 
| pars. 623-660, I. D. R. 



Wednesday, October 10 




2 hours 

Problem 5, S. P. I. 

pars. 661-677, I. D. R. 


Thursday, October 11 




2 hours 

Problem 6, S. P. I. 

pars. 678-707, I. D. R. 


Friday, October 12 


7.00-11.30 a.m. 

1.30-4.30 p. m. 

Advance and rear 

guards, outposts, 

patroling, messages 

and orders 




Saturday, October 13 


As prescribed by Senior 


Instructors. 



(c) To include conferences and critique on the ground of exercise 
conducted. 

October 15-17,, 1917. 
October 18-19, 1917. Occupation of the Trexches 

19, 
October 20, 1917. 7.30 a. ji.-II a. m. Coxfek 



SCHEDULES. 



21 



Plattsburg Training Camp 

to October 13, 1917 — (Concluded) 



Study 






7.00-9.00 p. m. 

Problem 4, S. P. I 

pars. 596-660, I. D. R. 






7.00-9.00 p. m. 

Problem 5, S. P. I. 

pars. 661-677, I. D. R. 






7.00-9.00 p. m. 

Problem 6, S. P. I. 

pars. 678-707, I. D. R. 






7.00-9.00 p. m. 

Problem 7 to 

Situation 5, exclusive 

pars. 350-370, I. D. R. 






7.00-9.00 p. m. 
as per later 
announcement 




• 



Construction of Trenches. 

from 8.00 a. m. October 18, 1917 to 8.00 a. m. October 

1917. 

ekce of Trench Occupation, 11 a. m. Inspection. 



22 



SCHEDULES. 



Schedule of Instruction. 
Plattsburg, N. Y., October 22 





Drill, I. D. R. 


Physical Drill 
M. P. T. 


Monday, October 22 


1 hour 
pars. 48-289 


% hour 

pgs. 17-93 

pg. 149 


Tuesday, ' October 23 


1 hour 
pars. 48-289 


% hour 

pgs. 17-93 

pg. 149 


Wednesday, October 24 


1 hour 
pars. 48-289 


V-i hour 

pgs. 17-93 

pg. 149 


Thursday, October 25 


1 hour 
pars. 48-289 


% hour 

pgs. 17-93 

pg. 149 


Friday, October 26 






Saturday, October 27 


As prescribed by Senior Instructors. 



(a) Per Bayonet Program. 



SCHEDULES. 



23 



Plattsburg Training Camp 
to October 27, 1917 



Bayonet 
(a) 


Range Practice 
(b) 


Signaling 


y 2 hour 


7.30-11.30 a. m. 
1.15-4.15 p. m. 




y 2 hour 


7.30-11.30 a. m. 
1.15-4.15 p. m. 




V 2 hour 


7.30-11.30 a. m. 
1.15-4.15 p. m. 


y<z hour 


% hour 


7.30-11.30 a. m. 
1.15-4.15 p. m. 











Rifle, pistol, machine gun, estimating distances, etc., as prescribed 
by Senior Instructor of Musketry Training. 



(b) 



24 



SCHEDULES. 



Schedule of Instruction, 
Plattsburg, N. Y., October 22 





Field Work 
(c) 


Conferences 


Monday, October 22 




2 hours 
pars. 350-370, I. D R 
Review Problems 1-6 

S. P. I. 


Tuesday, October 23 




2 hours 
pars. 371-401, I. D. R 
Prob. 7 to Situation 5 

S. P. I. 


Wednesday, October 24 




2 hours 

pars. 402-442, I. D. R 

Situation 6, Prob. 7 

to end of prob. 


Thursday, October 25 




2 hours 

pars. 442-494, I. D. R. 

Problem 8, S. P. I. 


Friday, October 26 


7.00-11.30 a. m. 
1.30-4.30 p. m. 

Companies in attack 

and defense (to include 

siting of trenches) 




Saturday, October 27 


As prescribed by Senior Instructors. 



(c) To include conferences and critique on the ground of exercise 
conducted. 



SCHEDULES. 



25 



Plattsburg Training Camp 

to October 27, 1917 — (Concluded) 



Study 






3 hour? — -1 hour daily 

and 7.00-9.00 p. in. 

pars. 371-401, I. D. R. 

Prob. 7 to Situation 5, 

S. P. I. 






3 hours — 1 hour daily 

and 7.00-9.00 p. m. 

pars. 402-441, I. D. R. 

Situation 6, Prob. 7 to 

end of Prob. S. P. I. 






3 hours — 1 hour daily 

and 7.00-9.00 p. m. 

pars. 442-494, I. D. R. 

Prob. 8, S. P. I. 






3 hours — 1 hour daily 

and 7.00-9.00 p. m. 

pars. 495-536, I. D. R. 

Problem 9, S. P. I. 






7.00-9.00 p. m. 

as per later 
announcement 







26 



SCHEDULES. 



Schedule of Instruction, 
Plattsburg, N. Y., October 29 





Drill 


Physical Drill 


Monday, October 29 


1 hour 

Attack Formation 

[Trench] 


\'-2 hour 


Tuesday, October 30 


1 hour 

Attack Formation 

[Trench] 


% hour 


Wednesday, October 31 


1 hour 

Attack Formation 

[Trench] 


Y 2 hour 


Thursday, November 1 


1 hour 

Attack Formation 

[Trench] 


% hour 


Friday, November 2 






Saturday, November 3 


As prescribed by Senit 


>r Instructors. 



(a) Per Bayonet Program. 



SCHEDULES. 



27 



Plattsburg Training Camp, 
to November 3, 1917. 



Bayonet 
(a) 


Signaling 


Range Practice 
(b) 


Yi hour 




7.30-11.30 a. m. 
1.15-4.15 p. m. 


% hour 




7.30-11.30 a. m. 
1.15-4.15 p. m. 


y 2 hour 


V 2 hour 


7.30-11.30 a. m. 
1.15-4.15 p. m. 


y 2 hour 




7,30-11.30 a. m. 
1.15-4.15 p. m. 










(b) Rifle, pistol, machine gun, estimating distances, etc., as prescribed 
by Senior Instructor of Musketry Training. 



28 



SCHEDULES. 



Schedule of Instruction 
Plattsburg, N. Y., October 29 





Field Work 
(c) 


Conferences 


Monday, October 29 




2 hours 

pars. 495-536, I. D. R. 

Problem 9, S. P. I. 


Tuesday, October 30 




2 hours 

Problem 10, S. P. I. 

Battle Fire Training 

(let&on scheduled later) 


Wednesday, October 31 




2 hours 

Problem 11, S. P. I. 

Battle Fire Training 

(lesson scheduled later) 


Thursday, November 1 




2 hours 

Problem 12, S. P. I. 

Battle Fire Training 

(lesson scheduled later) 


Friday, November 2 


Eattalions in attack 
and defense 
(Field Kit) 




Saturday, November 3 


As prescribed by Senior Instructors. 



(c) To include conferences and critique on the ground of exercise 
conducted. 



SCHEDULES. 



29 



Plattsbxjrg Training Camp 

to November 3, 1917 — (Concluded) 



Study 






3 hours — 1 hour daily 

and 7.00-9.00 p. m. 

Problem 10, S. P. I. 

Battle Fire Training 

(lesson scheduled later) 






3 hours — 1 hour daily 

and 7.00-9.00 p. m. 

Problem 11, S. P. I. 

Battle Fire Training 

(lesson scheduled later) 






3 hours — 1 hour daily 

aud? 7.00-9.00 p. m. 

Problem 12, S. P. I. 

Battle Fire Training 

(lesson scheduled later) 






3 hours — 1 hour daily 

and 7.00-9.00 p. m. 

Problem 13, S. P. I. 

Battle Fire Training 

(lesson scheduled later) 






7.C0-9.00 p. m. 

as per later 
announcement 







(d) During the week each Battalion will be given % day's instruction 
in camouflage under direction Senior Engineer Instructor. 



30 SCHEDULES. 

Schedules. 
November $tli-9th, 1917. 

Infantry Drill Regulations, 2 hours. 

March in full kit, 2% hours. 

Signaling, % hour. 

Physical drill, 2% hours. 

Bayonet, 2% hours. 

•Machine gun instruction, 7% hours. 

Field fortification, 10 hours. 

Conferences, 10 hours. 

Study, 10 hours. 

In the study and conferences the following will be 
taken up: 

Manual of Courts j Martial — pp. 305 to end. 

First Aid. 

Personal Hygiene. 

Camp Sanitation. 

November 12tli-17tli, 1917. 

Physical, drill, 2% hours. 

Bayonet drill, 2% hours. 

Battalion ceremonies, 1% tours. 

Battalion march, full kit, 2'% hours. 

Field fortification and trench warfare, 23 hours. 

Study and conferences, 10 hours. 

In the study and conferences the following will be 
taken up: 

Trench Warfare. 

Grenades 

Gas Attack and Defense. 

Communication. 

November 19th-23rd, 1917. 
Physical, drill, 2% hours. 
Bayonet drill, 2 ,:L /2 hours. 
Infantry Drill Regulations, 2% hours. 
Company administration and Army regulations, 40 
hours. 

Ceremonies, parades and reviews, 5 hours. 



CHAPTER 2. 

Infantry Drill Regulations. 

The greatest lesson of the present war is that the 
keynote of success is discipline. In trenches the direct 
control of the men is even less than in extended order 
in open warfare, and only thoroughly disciplined 
troops with a trusted leader can hope to succeed. 

The successful officer will show anger or irritation 
only in rare cases, and then by design: he will know 
his men individually and be as considerate of them as 
possible, ready to do himself what he asks; to have done ; 
just in administering punishments; clear in giving his 
commands and insistent that they be carried out 
promptly; he will learn from drilling his men the 
quickest way a desired result can be accomplished, and 
to give the necessary commands in the most effective 
manner. 

He will read his Infantry Drill Eegulations through 
each month and will always find something that he 
never knew or has forgotten. He will always consult 
it before going to drill. In explaining movements he 
will use blackboard diagrams in conferences. On the 
field he will take the fewest possible men and have move- 
ment executed by the numbers properly before the 
other men. Then have all the men go through the 
movement a number of times. 

The object of each exercise or drill should be ex- 
plained to the men whenever possible. 

" Success in battle is the ultimate object of all mili- 
tary training." 

School of the Soldier. 

Instruction Without Arms. 

The object of the facings and marchings is to give 
the soldier complete control of his body in drills so that 
he can move easily and promptly at any command. 



32 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

Attention. 

Position of Attention".— This is the position a 
soldier assumes when in ranks or whenever the com- 
mand attention is given. 

In the training of anyone nothing equals the im- 
portance of a proper posture ; it is the very foundation 
upon which the entire fabric of any successful training 
must he founded. 

Instructors must persist in the development of this 
position until the men assume it from habit. 

At the command. 1. Company (Squad, etc.), 2. 
Attention, the following position is assumed : 

1. Heels Together and on a Line. — If the heels 
are not on a line, the hips and sometimes even the 
shoulders, are thrown out of line. 

2. F*eet Turned Out Equally, Forming an 
Angle of 45 Degrees. — If the feet are not turned 
out equally, the result will be the same as above. 

3. Knees Extended Without Stiffness. — 
Muscles should be contracted just enough to keep the 
knees straight. If locked, men tire easily and faint if 
at attention a long time. 

4. The Trunk Erect Upon The Hips, the spine 
extended throughout its entire length ; the buttocks well 
forward. 

The position of the trunk, spine and buttocks is most 
essential. In extending the spine the men must feel 
that the trunk is being stretched up from the waist 
until the back is as straight as it can be made. 

In stretching the spine the chest should be arched 
and raised, without, however, raising the shoulders or 
interfering with natural respiration. 

5. Shoulders Palling Naturally and moved 
back until they are square. 

Being square, means having the shoulder ridge and 
the point of the shoulder at right angles to a general 
anterior-posterior plane running through the body. 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 33 

They should never be forced back of this plane, but 
out rather in line with it. 

■6'. Arms Hanging Naturally, thumbs against the 
seams of the trousers, fingers extended, and back of 
hand turned out. 

The arms must not be forcibly extended nor held 
rigidly; if they are, a compensating faulty curve will 
occur in the lumbar region. 

7. Head Erect, Chin Raised until neck is vertical, 
eyes fixed upon some object at their own height. 

Every tendency to draw the chin in must be 
counteracted. 

8. When this position is correctly assumed, the men 
will be taught to incline the body forward until the 
weight rests chiefly upon the balls of the feet, heels 
resting lightly upon the ground. 

When properly assumed, a vertical line drawn from 
the top of the head should pass in front of the ear, 
shoulder and thighs, and find its base at the balls of the 
feet. 

Every tendency toward rigidity must be avoided; all 
muscles are contracted only enough to maintain this 
position, Which is one of co-ordination, of physical and 
mental alertness, that makes for mobility, activity and 
grace. A man who faints standing at attention has 
not taken the proper position. 

Rests. 

Position of Rest and at Ease. — When men are 
standing at rest or at ease they must be cautioned to 
avoid assuming any position that will nullify the object 
of the position of Attention. Standing ou one leg, 
folding arms, allowing shoulders or head to droop for- 
ward, must be discountenanced persistently until the 
men form the habit of resting with feet separated but 
on the same line, hands elapsed behind the back, — 

3 



34 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

head, shoulders and trunk erect, (m.p.t., pp. 21 
and 22.) 

Fall Out. — Leave ranks. 

Rest. — One foot in place. Can talk. 

At Ease. — One foot in place. Silence. 

Parade Eest. — Do not slouch down on right foot. 
Keep chest well up. 

Eyes Right, 2. Front. — Have it snappy. 

Right Face. — To face in marching and advance, 
turn on the ball of either foot and step off with the 
other foot in the new line of direction. (Do not con- 
fuse with the ordinary command, " Right Face.") 

Right Hale Face. — 45 degrees, used to show 
position in Right Oblique. 

About Face. — Have weight well back. Not neces- 
sary to move right foot after turn is made. 

Hand Salute. — Manner of rendering is index to 
manner in which all other duties are performed. 

Forward March. — Shift weight to right foot, 
mentflblly. 

Double Time, March. — Tendency to go too fast. 
Time it. 30 steps in 10 seconds. Take one step quick 
time, then take up double time. 

Mare: Time, March. — Given as either foot strikes 
the ground. To resume full step, Forward, March. 

ELalf Step, March. — All steps and marchings exe- 
cuted from a halt, except Right Step, begin with left 
foot. 

Right Step, March. Backward, March. — Exe- 
cuted in quick time only and at trail, without command. 
15 inch Step. 

Squad, Halt. — Given as either foot strikes the 
ground. 

By the Right Flank, March. — Step off with right 
foot. 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 35 

To the Rear, March. — Given as right foot strikes 
the ground. If marching in double time, turn to the 
rightabout taking 4 steps, in place, in cadence, and step 
oft with left foot. 

Change Step, March. — Being in march ; given as 
either foot strikes the ground. 

Manual of Arms. 

Purpose. — To make the man so accustomed to the 
rifle that he handles it without a thought. 

Eight rules govern the carrying of the piece. See 
paragraph 75, Infantry Drill Regulations. 

Six rules govern the execution of the manual. See 
paragraph 76, Infantry Drill Regulations. 

Commands and Cautions. 

Order, Arms. — See that all the fingers of the right 
hand are around the piece. 

Present, Arms. — Left forearm horizontal and 
against the body. 

Port, Arms. — Right forearm horizontal. Left fore- 
arm against the body. 

Right Shoulder, Arms. — Insist on an angle of 45 
degrees. Trigger guard in hollow of shoulder. Right 
hand does the work. 

Leet Shoulder, Arms. — Right hand in next to last 
position grasps small of stock. 

Parade, Rest. — Left hand grasps piece just below 
stacking swivel. Right foot straight back 6 inches. 

Trail, Arms. — Piece at angle of about 30 degrees, 
about 3 inches off the ground. 

Rifle Salute. — Left forearm horizontal. 

Fix Bayonet. — Parade Rest and resume order after 
bayonet is fixed. 



36 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

.Unfix Bayonet. — Parade Kest and resume order 
after bayonet is unfixed. 

Inspection Arms. — Be sure men glance down in 
chamber and keep bold of bolt handle. 

Parade, Kest can be executed only from order arms, 
and the command Attention follows Parade, Kest. 

Any movement not in the manual, e. g., Right, Pace, 
breaks the execution of movements by the numbers. 
The number of counts in the execution of each command 
must be remembered. 

Distinguish between raise and carry and throw. 

School of the Squad. 

Object. — To give basic element, the squad, its first 
lesson in team work. 

Team work wins battles just as it does football games. 

Avoid keeping men too long at the same movement. 

Composition of Soead. — 7 men and a corporal. 
K"ever less than 6 nor more than 11 men. 

Fall In. — Instructor 3 paces in front of where 
center is to be. 

Pall Out. — If under arms, always preceded by 
Inspection Arms. Does not mean dismissed. 

Count Off. — Kight file front and rear do not exe- 
cute eyes right. Front and rear rank men count off 
together. 

Inspection Arms. — 
Kight Dress, Front : 

(1) Company Commander must establish base file 

or files before giving the command Kight 
Dress. 

(2) Kight flank men remain facing to front. 
(3) 1 Be sure first four men are on desired line and 

rest of company can easily be made to 
conform. 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 37 

Inspection Arms — Eight Dress Front (Con.): 

(4) Eight guide may be established at any point 

desired and at command Eight Dress all 
march to their proper positions without 
other command, and at the trail. 

(5) Have men beyond base files step forward until 

one pace beyond where new line is to be 
and then dress back on line established. 

Guide Eight. — Keep head and eyes off the ground. 
Close in or open out gradually. 

Take Interval, to the Eight, March, Squad, 
Halt. — (At command " To the Eight ") Eear rank 
falls back 60 inches. At March, all face to right and 
leading man of each rank steps off, followed by the 
others at four-pace intervals, rear-rank men marching 
abreast of their file leaders. When halted all face to 
the front. 

To Eeform, Assemble to the Eight (left), 
March. 

Take Distance, March. — 1-2-3-4 front rank, 
1-2-3-4 rear rank, 4-pace intervals. Guide in each 
four is right. 

Assemble, March. — Xo. 1, Front rank stands fast. 

Stack Arms.- — Piece of even number front rank : 
butt between his feet, barrel to front. Even number 
rear rank passes piece to file leader. 

Take Arms. — Loose pieces are returned by even 
numbers front rank. If No. 2 of rear rank is absent, 
No. 1 rear rank takes his place in making or breaking 
stacks and resumes his post. Pieces are never stacked 
with bayonet fixed. 

Oblique, Mabch. — Taught from Eight half face. 
Half faced to front after obliquing, Forward, March. 
If at half step or mark time while obliquing, Oblique, 
March. 

In Place, Halt. — All halt and stand fast without 
changing position of pieces. 



38 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

Resume March. — Only given after In place, Halt. 

Right Tukn. — ■ Turn on moving pivot is used by 
subdivisions of a column in executing change of 
direction. 

Each rank successively and on same ground exe- 
cutes movement. All except pivot man execute two 
right obliques. No marking time. Arriving on new 
line, all take the half step, glance toward marching 
flank and take full step without command as last man 
arrives on the line. 

Right Haef Tur^.- — Executed in similar manner. 

Squads Right. — Turn on fixed pivot is used in all 
formations from line into column and the reverse. 
ISTo half step. Right flank man faces to right in march- 
ing and marks time. Rest of front rank oblique once 
to new position. Step off on 5th step. 

Squad Right About. — Front rank twice executes 
squads right. 

In rear rank, ~No. 3 with No. 4 abreast of him on 
his left and followed in column by the second and 
first moves straight forward until on prolongation of 
new line he is to occupy; faces to right in marching 
and proceeds to place. Then all face to the right in 
marching, mark] time and glance toward marching 
flank. As last man arrives on new line all step off 
without command on 9th step. 

Deploying as skirmishers and following the corporal 
are covered under Company Extended Order. 

School of the Company. 

The company is the basic fighting and administra- 
tive unit, and must be easily handled and capable of 
promptly carrying out the will of its commander. 

Team work among the squads, so that the company 
can be easily managed as a whole, is the purpose of 
company drill. 

Close order drill is for discipline. 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 39 

Numerical designations of squads or platoons do not 
change. 

Center squad is middle or right middle squad of tJhe 
company. 

8 (6-11) men =1 squad. 

7 (2-7) squads = 1 platoon. 

4 platoons =1 company (250 men, 6 

officers). 

4 (2- 6) companies =1 battalion (1,026 officers 
and men). 

3 battalions — 1 regiment (3,75'5, including 

medical detachment) . 

2 regiments =1 brigade (8,210 officers and 

men) . 

2 brigades = 1 division (27,152 officers 

and men). 

First Sergeant when not commanding a platoon is 
opposite the 3rd file from outer flank of first platoon, 
in line of file closers. 

Fall In. — First Sergeant 6 paces front of center, 
facing company. Right guide takes, post at such point 
that the center will be 6 paces from and opposite the 
First Sergeant. 

Squad leaders salute and report all present ; or 

Private (s) absent. First Sergeant does not 

return salute of squad leaders. 

'Captain takes post 12 paces in front of center of 
company in time to receive report of First Sergeant, 
" Sir, all present or accounted for," or names of un- 
authorized absentees. E'. G. A man in hospital might 
be reported absent by squad leader if he did not know 
where he was, but First Sergeant would know, and 
would not report him absent. 

Captain returns salute of First Sergeant who then 
takes his post without command. 



40 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

Platoox 'Movements in Platoon 'Column. 

Leading Platoon, C. 0. 

On Right into Line Right Turn. 

Column Right Right Turn. 

Right Front into Line Continue. ( caution) If 

halted, Forward. 

Bear Platoon, C. 0. 

On Right into Line Continue. (Caution) If 

halted, Forward. 
Column Right Continue. ( caution) If 

halted, Forward. 
Right Front into Line Right Oblique 

Questions Which 'Come Up In Daily Military 
Life. 

It is well to have a solution on hand. 

(1) The company is in line reversed, — 16th squad 
where 1st squad should be. Bring the company into 
proper line, 1-2-3-4; 5-6-7-8.; 9-1041-12; 13-14-15-16. 

(2) You are platoon leader. Your platoon is 
drilling separately and you get assembled in company 
line. 

16-15-14-13; 12-11-10-9 ; 4-3-2-1 ; 5-6-7-8. 
"What commands do you give to get the platoon into 
line properly arranged ? 

(i3) You are in charge of the company and find 
yourself marching into the company street in reverse 
order. ''TY]kat commands do you give to correct this ? 

(4) You are marching your company to the rear 
along a road through a narrow cut. Suddenly around 
a bend comes an ambulance. To let it pass you must 
immediately reduce your marching front. What is the 
quickest method? (This can be used also in arranging 
the advance party of the outguard.) 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 41 

(■5) You are marching jour company in company 
front, and wish to march in column of platoons. What 
do you command ? 

Answers. 

(1) Right (left) by squads. 
Column left (right). 
Squads right (left) 
Company, Halt. 

(2) Forward; 2 March. 

On left into line ; 2 Platoon ; 3 Halt. 

(3) On right (left) into line. 

(4) 1 Squads right; 2 March. 

2 By the left flank; 2 March. 

(5) 1 Right by squads; 2 March. 

2 Platoons left front into line; Double time; 
2 March. 

On the O. D. Shirt Collar Insignia is worn as 
follows : 

iC On the right side, in the middle of the collar, the 
letters (U. S.), (JY. ,S. R.), (U. S. ^s T . A.), and the 
insignia of rank ; the letters one inch from the end of 
the collar and the insignia of rank one-ihalf inch from 
letters. 

On the left side in the middle of the collar, and one 
inch from the end, the insignia of the arm of the 
service." 

For Second Lieutenants. 

On the right side, in the middle of the collar, and 
one inch from the end, the letters (U. S.), (U. S. R.), 
(XL S. tf. A.). 

On the left side, in the middle of the collar and one 
inch from the end, the insignia of the arm of service. 

When the Star Spangled Banner is played, an officer 
in uniform if uncovered stands at Attention. If 
covered he salutes. An officer " Presents his compli- 
ments " only to his juniors. 



42 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

1. Company Eight, March; Company, Halt; For- 
ward March. 

Being in line to turn. Right-flank man is pivot. 
Eight guide .steps back at command March, and marks 
time. 

2. Platoons Eight, March ; Company, Halt ; For- 

ward March. 
Line to Column Platoons, reverse. 
Guides mnst he covering. 

3. Squads Eight, March ; Company, Halt. 
Line to Column Squads, reverse. 

Line of Platoon to Column Platoons, reverse. 

4. Eight Turn, March ; Forward, March. 

Line to change direction. Eight guide is pivot. Men 
do not glance toward flank. Eear rank begins oblique 
on same ground as- front rank. 

All take full step at command, Forward, March. 

5. Column Eight. March. 
First Platoon Leader, Eight Turn. 

Other Platoon Leaders (if halted), Forward; (if 
marching), cautions, continue the march. All Platoons 
execute right turn on .same ground. 

Column of Platoons to change direction. 

6. Column Eight. March. 
Column Squads to change direction. 

7. Platoons, Column Eight, March. 
Column Squads to Line of Platoons. 

S. Squads Eight, Column Eight, March. 
Eight by Squads, March. 

Line to Column Squads and change direction. 
Eight guide posts himself and takes 4 short steps. 
Eight Squad conforms. 

9. Squads Eight, Platoons, Column Eight, 
March. 
Platoons right by Squads, March. 
Line to line of Platoons. Guide same as in S. 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 43 

10. Squads Eight About, March; Company, Halt. 
To face or march to the rear. 

About Face; Forward, March. 
To the rear a few paces. 

11. On Right Into Line, March ; Company, Halt, 

Front. 
Column Platoons or Squads to line to side. 
If executed in double time, leading squad marches 
double time until halted. 

12. Eight Front Into Line, March; Company, 

Halt, Front. 

Column Platoons or Squads to line (front). 

In double time, halting and aligning are omitted. 
Guide is toward side of first unit in line. If halted, 
leader of leading unit commands, Forward. 

13. Platoons, Eight Front Into Line, March; 

Company, Halt, Front. 
Column Squads to Column Platoons. 
Line of Platoons to Company line. 

14. Eoute ,Step, March. 

Muzzles kept elevated. Eanks cover, preserve dis- 
tances. (If halted, at rest.) 

At ease, March. Silence preserved. (Halted, at 
ease. ) 

15. Eight by Twos, March. 

All but 2 right files of leading Squad execute in 
place, Halt. 

Eight by Files, March. 

To diminish the front in Column Squads. 
1*6. Squads Eight Front Into Line, March. 

Twos right front into line, march. 

Twos or files to Column Squads. Leading file or 
files halt. 

!N". B. — If right by twos, then left into line or reverse. 

Dismiss the Company. — First .Sergeant places him- 
self 3 paces to front, 2 paces from nearest flank, salutes, 



44 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

faces toward opposite flank, commands, Inspection 
Arms, Port Arms, Dismissed. 

To Fall in Company When It Cannot be Formed 
ey Squads. — Inspection Arms. 

Right Shoulder Arms. 

Roll Call. Each man as name is called, executes 
Order Arms. 

For ATcster, Commands are: Open Ranks, 
March, Froxt. (At command Open Ranks, Rear 
Rank drops back 4 steps, 5 counts.) 

(As mustering officer approaches) Right Shoulder 
Arms. Attention to Muster. 

Each man, as name is called, answers " Here " and 
comes to Order Arms. 

Company Commander is on right flank, in same place 
as " Prepare for Inspection." 

In Axignixg Company. — Captain places himself 2 
paces from and facing the flank toward which dress is 
made, verifies alignment and commands Front. 

(Platoon leaders same position for Platoon align- 
ment. ) 

To March ,Squad Without Uxxecessary Com- 
mands. — The Corporal commands, Follow Me. 

ALem always at ease. Squad conform to pace of Cor- 
poral, and carry pieces as he does. 

In line or skirmish line, Xo. 2 front rank follows in 
trace of Corporal at 3 paces. Others guide on Xo. 2. 

As Skirmishers, March. — At run. Rear rank men 
on right of file leaders. All conform to Corporals 
gait. In squad alone, skirmish line is formed on Xo. 2, 
front rank, Corporal ahead when advancing, in rear 
when halted. 

Regular interval in skirmish line % pace = 1 yard 
per man. 

Squad deployed = 10 paces. 

Any number of paces may be specified, e. g. As 
Skirmishers, at 10 paces, March, 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 45 

Assemble, March. — Men form on corporal. If lie 
continues to advance, move in double time, form and 
follow. Do not assemble while marching to rear. 

(Kneel. — Left forearm and left lower leg form 
straight line. 

Lie Down. — On both knees, then both elbows. 

Rise. — Stand on point marked by both knees. 

(When deployed, may sit instead of kneel.) 

'Loadings and Firings. — Loadings are executed 
only in line and skirmish line. 

Firings are always executed at a halt. 

When kneeling and lying down in double rank, rear 
rank does not load, aim or fire. 

In both cease firing and suspend firing pieces are 
loaded and locked. (Sec. 150, i.d.r., April, 1917, 
is incorrect.) 

1. Aiming. — Target carefully pointed out. 

2. Sight-setting Announced. (Battle sight if 
none announced.) 

3. (If by volley), Beady, Aim, Squad Fire. 
To continue volley firing, Aim, Squad Fire. 
Volley fire is used against large, compact enemy or 

in fire of position. 

Fire at Will. — Normally employed in attack and 
defense; 3 shots per minute at effective ranges (600 to 
1,200 yards) ; 5 to 6' shots per minute at close ranges 
(up to 60>0 yards). 
Clip Fire : 

LTsed (1) To steady men. 

(2) To produce a short burst of fire. 

Unload. — Safety lock up. 

Extended Order. 
A squad acting alone, as one out on a patrol or for 
instruction, the corporal acts as the leader of a small 
platoon, leading the advance, and in rear when halted. 



46 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

Men come to trail as they come on the skirmish line. 
On halting, a deployed line faces front (direction of 
real or assumed enemy), and takes cover. 

Corporal Cautions. — By the Eight Flank (if 
halted). Corporal steps out looking back to get his 10- 
pace interval. Squad Halt. 

Left Face. — Base squad deploys as soon as it has 
room. 

Guide of a deployed squad is center without 
command. 

Captain indicates point on which corporal of base 
squad is to march. 

Company Right is executed as explained for front 
rank of Company, but at % pace intervals. 

Deployments. 

From Line , to Form Skirmish Line to Front. 

As Skirmishers, G-utde Right, March. — 1. If 
marching, corporal commands, Follow Me. Corporal 
of base squad moves straight to front, deploys as soon 
as possible and advances until Company, Halt, is 
given. 

Other squads move to left front and place squads on 
the line. 

If guide is center, other corporals on right of center 
squad move to the right, and squads on the left to the 
left, and bring their squads on the line. 

If guide is left, other corporals move to right front. 

2. If at halt, base squad deploys abreast of its 
corporal, 3 paces in front of the former line, as soon 
as it has room. 

Other squads are conducted by the left flank, to their 
places. 

To Deploy From Column of Squads, Forming 
Skirmish Line to the Front. — If at a halt, base 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 47 

squad deploys abreast of its corporal 3 paces in front 
of its former position. 

If marching, base squad deploys and moves straight 
to the front. 

If guide is right, other corporals move to left front 
and place squads on line. 

If guide is center, corporals in front move to right 
(if at a halt, to right rear), the corporals in rear of 
center squad move to left and come on line in 
succession. 

Column of twos or files are deployed by same com- 
mands in same manner. 

If deployment in an oblique direction is desired, the 
captain points out desired direction. 

'Column of squads may be turned to the flank or 
rear and then deployed. 

Assemble, March. — In skirmish line, men assem- 
ble at a run, to their places individually. Squads 
do not assemble and march to places as units as do 
platoons. 

Platoons, Assemble. — Men assemble individu- 
ally on the run, in their platoons and are then marched 
to relative position on base platoon as indicated by 
position or command of captain. 

Platoon Columns. — -Platoon leaders should be 
sure to go through center of platoon. 

Platoon guides in rear. 

Columns should be 20 yards apart, or more. 

(Used to take advantage of few favorable routes 
where cover is poor or ground difficult.) 

Squad Columns. — Men oblique and follow squad 
leader. No advantage in cover, but used to advance 
more quickly over rough or brush grown ground. 

(It might be desirable to teach men to take squad 
columns from column of squads.) 

In assembling from Platoon or Squad columns, the 
men reform by platoons or squads and are conducted 
by their leaders to point indicated by captain. 



48 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

Thin lines are used to cross wide stretches under 
artillery fire or heavy, long range rifle fire which can- 
not be profitably returned. 
No. l's Forward, March. 

First line is led by platoon leader, right platoon. 

Second line is led by platoon guide, right platoon. 

Third line is led by platoon leader, next platoon, etc. 

Quick time, unless conditions otherwise demand. 

Captain Points Out New Line. — Original inter- 
vals preserved. 

Disadvantage. — Serious loss of control over 
company. 

Advantage. — Offers less definite target and is less 
likely to draw fire. 

Being in Skirmish Line. 
By Platoon (2 Platoons, Squads, 4 Men, Etc.), 
From the Right, Rush. — Leader of rush usually 
platoon leader. 

(1) Selects new line. 

(2) Cease firing. 

(3) Prepare to rush. 

(4) Follow me. 

(5) Commence firing. 

When whole company rushes, it is led by Captain. 
Platoon leaders lead their platoons. 

'Commands. 

Commands should be so given as to be distinctly 
heard by all the men who have to execute them. It is 
unfair to expect good execution of a slovenly com- 
mand or one that cannot be heard. A sufficient inter- 
val should be allowed between the preparatory com- 
mand and the command of execution, proportioned to 
the size of the command, so that each man has time to 
grasp the movement before execution is required. 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 49 

School of the Battalion. 

Basis. — 4 companies to a battalion. 

Arrangement. — Right to left by rank of Captains. 
After formation order is not kept with reference to 
rank of Captains. 

Number. — From right to left in whatever direction. 

Center. — Actual center or right center company. 

Band. — Places itself as if it were an adjoining 
battalion on right. 

Dressing. — Each company is dressed by its Cap- 
tain who places himself on the flank toward which the 
dress is to be made. 

In battalion line beside the guide (or beside flank 
file of the front rank if guide is not in line) facing 
front. 

In column of companies — 2 paces from the guide 
and facing down the line. 

To Form the Battalion. 

Other than Ceremonies. — Column of squads. 
Adjutant does not take his post until companies are 
formed. Each 'Captain halts company and salutes 
Adjutant. Adjutant returns salutes and when last 
Captain has saluted, faces Major and reports " Sir, 
the Battalion is formed." He joins Major without 
command. 

For Ceremonies. — Or when directed, Battalion is 
formed in line. Adjutant places himself 6 paces to 
right of right company and facing in direction line is 
to extend. Guides precede companies on line by 20 
paces. Adjutant causes guides to cover. Companies 
are halted one pace in rear of line and dressed to right 
against arm of guide. When guides of left company 
have been posted, Adjutant by shortest route moves 
to post facing Battalion midway between post of 
Major and center of Battalion. Adjutant commands: 
4 



50 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

1. Guides, 2. Posts, 3. Present. 4. Arms. He then 
faces about and reports, " Sir, the Battalion is formed." 
Major commands, " Take jour post, sir." 

To Dismiss the Battalion. — Dismiss your 
companies. 

To Rectify the Alignment. — See Infantry Drill 
Regulations, paragraphs 273-274. 

To Rectify the Column. — See Infantry Drill 
Regulations, paragraph 275. 

Helpful Hints to Beginners. — These hold good 
with few exceptions. 

When in column of squads ; first command of Cap- 
tain begins with word " Column." 

When in column of companies ; first command of 
Captain begins with word " Squads." 

In Column of Squads. — 

Major: On right (left) into line. 

First Captain: Squads right. (Captain marches 
beside right guide.) 

Rear Captains: Continue to march (If halted, 
forward). 

Major: March. 

Rear Captains : (Upon uncovering preceding com- 
pany) 'Squads right. 

Major: Battalion. 

First Captain: Company. 

Major : Halt. 

First Captain: Right Dress, Front. 

Rear Captains: (Coming on line). Company 
Halt, Right Dress, Front. 

Major: Right (left) front into line. 

First Captain: Column right. 

Rear Captains : Column half right. 

Major: March. 

First Captain: (Halts and allows company to pass 
him and form column of squads to right.) Squads 
left, Company Halt, Left Dress, Front, 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 51 

Rear Captains : When company in column of squads 
arrives one pace in rear of the right flank of the com- 
pany that has formed in line. Column half right, 
March. The Captain then takes 5 paces beyond the 
flank of the last company in line, allows company to 
pass him, and as rear guide reaches him, commands : 
Squads left, March, Company Halt, Left Dress, Front. 

Major: Line of companies at (seven) paces, guide 
left (right). (Close on first company from column 
of squads is no longer used in Battalion drill.) 

First Captain: Continue to march (if halted, 
forward) . 

Rear Captains: Column half right. 

Major: March. 

Rear 'Captains : (When company reaches a position 
7 paces to the flank of the leading company.) Column 
half right. 

Major: Battalion. 

All Captains: Company. 

Major: Halt. 

Major : Column of companies, first company 
squads right (left). 

First Captain: Squads right. 

Rear Captains: Continue to march (if halted, 
forward.). 

As each company reaches the point where the first 
company formed line the Captain commands: Squads 
right, March. 

In Column of Companies or Close Column of 
Companies. — 

Major: On right (left) into line. 

First Captain: Right turn. 

Rear Captains: Continue to march (if halted, 
forward). 

Major: March. 



52 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

Hear Captains : Each Captain takes 5 paces beyond 
the left flank of the company that has just execnted 
the turn and commands : Right turn, March. 

Major: Battalion. 

First Captain: Company. 

Major: Halt. 
■ First Captain : Right Dress, Front. 

Rear Captains: (As they come on line.) Com- 
pany Halt, Right Dress, Front. 

Major: Right {left) front into line. 

First Captain: Company. 

Second Capt : Right by Squads. 

Third and fourth Captains: Squads Right. 

Major: March. 

First Captain: Halt, Left Dress, Front. 

Rear Captains: Column half left, March, Column 
half right March. Taking 5 paces from the flank of 
the company last on line and allowing the company to 
pass by him until the rear guide reaches him, Captain 
commands : Squads left, March, Company Halt, Left 
Dress, Front. 

Major: Close on first company (Never any other). 

First Captain: Company. 

Rear Captains: Continue to march (if halted, 
forward). 

Major: March. 

First Captain: Halt. 

Rear Captains: As each successive company closes 
to 8 paces from the company immediately in front, 
the Captain commands: Company Halt. 

Major: Extend on fourth company. (Never any 
other.) 

First Captain : Continue to march (if halted, 
forward). 

Rear Captains : Company. 
Major: March, 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 53 

Rear Captains : Halt. Then as each company in 
rear of the leading company gets the proper distance 
(company front plus 5 paces) the Captain commands: 
Forward March. 

Close column not extended in double time. 

Major: Column of squads, first company squads 
right (left). 

First Captain: Squads right. 

Rear Captains : Continue to march (if halted, 
forward). As each company reaches the point where 
the first company formed column of squads, the Cap- 
tain commands : Squads right, March. 

Major: Column right (left). 

First Captain : Right turn. 

Rear Captains: Continue to March (if halted, 
forward). 

Major: March. 

First Captain: When the marching flank of the 
company is one pace from the new line the Captain 
commands: Forward March. 

Rear Captains : Other companies march squarely 
up to the turning point and each changes direction at 
the Captain's command : Right turn, March, Forward, 
March. 

Line of Companies or Close Line of Companies. 
Major: Battalion right (left). 
First Captain : Column right. 
Flank Captains: Column half right. 
Major: March. 

Flank Captains: When each company has moved 7 
paces to the flank of the base company the command 
is: Column half right, March. The companies are 
then marched echeloned with an interval of 7 paces. 

Major: Battalion. 

First Captain: Company. 

Major : Halt 



54 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

Flank Captains: Continue to march. As each 
company comes into line with the base company 
the Captain commands : Company, Halt. 

Major: Close on first (fourth) company. 

Extend on first (fourth) company. Both movements 
executed in the same manner. 

First Captain: (If marching.) Halt. (If halted, 
cautions " Stand Fast.") 

Flank Captains : Squads right. 

Major: March. 

Flank Captains : Eight Oblique, March. (When 
the company has closed sufficiently) : Forward March, 
Squads left, March. (Then as the company comes on 
the line with first company) : Company, Halt. 

Major: Column of Squads, first (fourth) company, 
forward. 

First Captain: Forward. 

Flank Captains: Column half right (left). 

Major: March. 

Flank Captains: As their companies come onto the 
line behind the leading company (at 4.4 paces) the 
Captain commands : Column half right, March. 

I^r Battalion Line. 

Major: Close on first (fourth) company. 

First Captain: Stand fast (Caution). 

Second Captain: Squads right, column right. 

Third and fourth Captains: Squads right, column 
half right. 

Major: March. 

Second, third and fourth Captains: As each com- 
pany reaches a point 8 paces behind the company just 
preceding it into close column, the command is given: 
Column half right, March. (Cautioning " Guide 
left " when closing on first company — " Guide right n 
when closing on fourth company) : Squads left, March, 
Company, Halt. 

Major: Halt. 



PLATE No. 2A. 




CO. I — N. E. PROPER ARRANGEMENT OF SHELTER TENTS. 
PLATE No. 2B. 

mm 




LAYOUT OF EQUIPMENT FOR INSPECTION. 
TENT PINS SHOULD BE LAID IN ECHELON THREE INCHES APART. 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 55 

First Captain : Eight Dress, Front. 
Rear Captains: (As they come on the line) : Com- 
pany Halt, Right Dress, Front. 

Inspections. 

(Kitchen and mess inspections have been covered under 
Feeding Men.) 

Daily inspection of the barracks should be made and 
rigid discipline enforced as to the floors being kept 
clean, scrubbed once a week, bedding and bed clothes 
aired out of doors every Tuesday, shoes cleaned and 
kept in order under bunks, lockers under bunks, toilet 
articles and books all kept in order. Sheets, comforters 
and blankets should be shaken out, folded as for pack 
and laid on top of pillow until afternoon, each day. 

In inspecting men every week see that hair is kept 
short and feet clean and in good condition, toe nails 
trimmed. Insist on woolen socks. 

Equipment must be inspected carefully, each week, 
to see that it is in good condition. 

Special Points of Company Inspection. 

After Open Ranks, March, given from usual posi- 
tion in front of Company, the Captain takes his post 
3 paces in front of Right Guide, facing to the left and 
commands : 

1. Front. 2. Prepare for Inspection. 

The Lieutenants are 3' paces in front of the center 
of their respectives Platoons, facing to front. 

If equipment is also to be inspected, commands are 
as follows : 

1. Close Ranks. 2. March. Stack Arms. Back- 
ward, March. Take Interval to the Right, March. 
Company, Halt. 

1. Unsling Equipment. 2. Open Packs. 
Close Packs. Sling Equipment. 



56 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

Battalion Inspection. 

At command, Prepare for Inspection, given by the 
Major, each Captain commands, Open Ranks, They do 
not salute when the Major and Inspector approach. 

The Lieutenants take their places as in Company In- 
spection. Each Captain commands: 

Company Attention. Prepare for Inspection. 

Lieutenants face about and stand at ease, after being 
inspected or passed. 

After inspection : 

Close Ranks, march. 

Rest. 

Regimental Inspection. 

Commands mean and principles are same as for Bat- 
talion. (Look up Post of Colonel, par. 754, Infantry 
Drill Regulations.) 

Ceremonies. 

Battalion Review. 

After Battalion is formed in line, Major faces front. 

When Reviewing Officer halts, Major turns about 
and commands : 

Present Arms ; turns to front and salutes. Major 
turns about; commands Order Arms, and again faces 
front. 

When Reviewing Officer is within 6 paces, the Major 
salutes, takes post on the right and accompanies him. 

On arriving at the right of the line again, Major 
salutes, halts, takes his post in front of Battalion and 
commands : 

Pass in Review. Squads Right, March. 

Major and Staff execute Eyes Ri^ht and take post 
on right of Reviewing Officer remaining until Battalion 
has passed, when he salutes and rejoins it. 

Double time is given by Major when the Battalion 
comes to its original starting place and the Battalion 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 57 

passes in review as before except that Eyes Right is 
omitted and Major salutes only when he leaves Review- 
ing Officer. 

Major and Staff may be dismounted at discretion of 
Commanding Officer. 



l & 



Battalion Parade. 

When band sounds off, the Reviewing Officer and his 
.Staff stands, if dismounted, with arms folded: if 
mounted they remain at attention at a convenient dis- 
tance in front of the center and facing the Battalion. 

The Battalion is not presented for Battalion Parade. 

The Lieutenants take posts in front of center of their 
Platoons at Captain's command for dressing his Com- 
pany on the line. 

After Guides Posts, the Adjutant commands : 

(To Battalion) Parade Rest. 

(To Band) Sound Off. 

Battalion, Attention. Present Arms. 

At conclusion of National Anthem Adjutant reports : 

Sir : The parade is formed. 

The Major directs : Take your post, sir. 

Major then commands : Order Arms. 

At conclusion of Manual of Arms, Major directs: 
Receive the reports, sir. 

Captains report " * C ' Company present or accounted 
for," or " ' C ? Company, 1 officer, 7 enlisted men are 
absent." 

Publish the orders, sir : 

After publishing them, Adjutant commands : Offi- 
cers, Center, March. At command Center, Officers 
face center: at command March, march to center and 
halt, facing front. 

Commands Forward and Halt are given by Senior 
Officer. Left Officer of center Company is guide and 
marches on the Major. Halt at 6 paces from Major, 
•salute and come down with the Major. 



58 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

At command Officers Posts, March, Officers face 
about at command " posts " and are conducted by 
Senior Officer who halts them 3 paces from line. Offi- 
cers, Halt. Posts, March. Face outward at com- 
mand, Posts, step off with I pace intervals. Lieuten- 
ants go to their posts by shortest route, in rear of 
Company. 

Regimental Parade. 

Lieutenants remain in file closers. 
At command, Officers Center, Captains remain at 
their posts with their Companies. 

Regimental Review. 

Regiment formed in line or line of masses. 

Colonel commands: Pass in Review. 

Each Major commands: 1, Squads Right; 2, 
March. 

If in line of masses, Colonel commands : " Pass in 
Review." Major of Right Battalion commands: Col- 
umn of Squads, First Company Squads, Right, 
March. 

Fire Direction is the Function of the Captain 
and Higher Commanders. Above the Grade of 
Captain and Direction is Principally Tactical. 
With a Captain it Implies the Ability to Issue 
Correct Fire Orders to Meet Given Situations in 
Order That the Fire oe the Company May be as 
Eeeective as Possible. 

Fire Control is the Combined Product oe the 
Fire Unit Commanders and the Firers. The Fire 
Unit is the Platoon. 

Fire Discipline Means Strict Attention to the 
Signals and Orders of the Commander, and is the 
Faculty Developed in the Men by Instruction 
and Training, of Commencing, Ceasing, or Dimin- 
ishing Fire, or of Concentrating it Upon a De- 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 59 

fixed Object in Obedience to the Deliberate 
Will of the Commander, 

Note. — It is to be remembered that all grades of 
commanders are supposed to be familiar with the 
duties of all below them. 

In issuing orders all Officers, in addition to announc- 
ing where they will be found will give the location of 
the next higher Commander. 

The authorities for statements under the Platoon 
Leader and below are not given after each statement 
but the paragraphs from which they are deduced are 
given under the heading for each grade. This course 
was thought necessary to avoid repetition. 

I. The Colonel. 
Position — (369, 380, 528 — i.d.r.) 
1. Advancing to the battlefield: as 

(a) Independent commander ordinarily with 

the advance guard in order that 
he may: 

1. Receive information promptly. 

2. Personally see the situation (recon- 

noiter). 

3. Order the deployment. 

4. Begin the action strictly in accord- 

ance with his own wishes. 

(b) Subordinate commander (427, i.d.r.). 

After receiving his order for the action, 
precedes his command as far 
as possible in order to : 

1. Personally reconnoiter the 

ground. 

2. Be prepared to issue his orders 

promptly. 

Note — For a discussion of the position of leaders see 
Subject V. 



60 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

Position — (Continued) : 

2. During the action ; such as will enable him to : 

(a) Observe the progress' of events. 

(b) Receive and transmit messages and 

orders. 

(c) Be in constant, direct, and easy commu- 

nication with the reserve. (369, 
i.d.r.) 
Duties : 

a. After having received his orders, the regimental 

commander leads his regiment forward in a 
column, or in line of columns, until the time 
arrives for issuing the regimental order, he 
then: (426, i.d.r.) 

b. Assigns targets and sectors or tasks to battalions 

and special units. (342, 381 and 426, i.d.r.) 

c. Provides for necessarv reconnoissance to front and 

flank. (428, i.d.r.') 

d. Announces his position and also that of the next 

higher commander. 

e. Controls the reserve as the tactical situation de- 

mands. (441, i.d.r.) 

f. Regulates ammunition supply. (316, f.s.r. and 

552, i.d.r.) See also full discussion of the am- 
munition supply in Subject VIII. 

Xote — The colonel is assisted in the performance of 
his duties by the regimental staff. 

II. The Major. 

The battalion is the attack unit whether acting alone 
or as part of a larger force. (305, i.d.r.) 

Position : 

(The general rules for a colonel apply) 
1 . Where he can best : 

a. Direct the reinforcing of the firing line 
from the support. (315, i.d.r.) 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 61 

Position — (Continued) : 

1. Where lie can best — (Continued) : 

b. Observe the progress of events. (369, 
i.d.r.) 

■c. Maintain contact with regimental headquar- 
ters. (369, i.d.r.) 

2. On the firing line when all the supports have 

joined. (315, i.d.r.) (See .Subject V.) 

General. 
Duties : 

1. Conducts nis battalion according to sector and 

mission assigned him. 
2.' Directs first disposition of battalion by tactical 
orders, giving subordinates — 

a. Information of the enemy. 

b. Position of supporting and neighboring 

troops. 

c. The general object to be attained. 

d. The special problem for each company 

(291, i.d.r.) 
(This includes making the primary appor- 
tionment of the target.) (303, i.d.r.) 

e. If practicable, the point or time at which 

the fire fight is to open. (304, i.d.r.) 

f. Orders for flank protection and reconnais- 

sance, unless specifically provided for by 
higher author itv. (293, 397 and 398, 
i.d.r.) 

g. His position and that of the next higher 

commander. 

3. Controls supports, dispatches reinforcements 

from support to firing line. (226 and 297, 
i.d.r.) 

4. Controls subsequent movements by suitable orders 

or commands. (291, i.d.r.) 

5. Regulates ammunition supply — (See Subject 

VIII, also Pars. 316-317, f.s.r.) (The 



62 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

Duties — (Continued) : 

5. Regulates ammunition supply — (Continued): 

combat train is the immediate reserve 
supply of the battalion.) 

a. Is responsible for the proper use of the 

combat train. 

b. Insures maintenance of the prescribed 

allowance at all times. 

c. Causes combat trains to march immediately 

in rear of the battalion unless directed 
otherwise. ('548, i.d.r.) 

d. When battalion deployed on his own 

initiative, indicates whether extra am- 
munition shall be issued. (294, i.d.r.) 

e. When battalion deployed pursuant to orders 

from higher authority, causes issue of 
extra ammunition unless specifically 
ordered not to do so. (294, 548, i.d.r.) 

f. When combat wagons are emptied, directs 

them to proper rendezvous to be refilled. 
(548, i.d.r.) 

g. Sees that combat wagons and belts of men 

are refilled as soon as possible after an 
engagement. (553, i.d.r.) 

6. Maintains contact with adjoining troops. (399 

i.d.r.) 

7. May harmonize ranges used by the companies on 

the firing line. 

8. Determines when bayonets shall be fixed. (318, 

i.d.r.) 

9. Subject to orders from higher authority, deter- 

mines the point from which the charge to be 
made. (319, i.d.r.) 
10. Orders the charge. (318, i.d.r.) 

1. In attach: Special. 

a. May select formation in which companies 
advance. (242, i.d.r.) 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 63 

1. In attack — (Continued): 

b. Designates — 

1. The direction of the objective. 

(303, i.d.r.) 

2. The companies for the firing line. 

3. The companies for the support. 

4. The order and front of the companies 

in the firing line. 

5. The right or left company of the 

firing line as the base company. 

6. May indicate when the advance by 

rushes is to start. (311, i.d.r.) 

2. In defense: 

a. Describes front of each company. (292, 

i.d.r.) 

b. Assigns sector of fire. (244, 302, i.d.r.) 

c. Locates fire, communicating and cover 

trenches. 

d. Directs preparation of obstacles. 

e. Assigns companies to construct trenches 

and obstacles. 

f. Details troops to occupy trenches. (321, 

i.d.r.) 

g. Causes firing line and supports to fix 

bayonets when a charge by the enemy 
is imminent. (324, i.d.r.) 
h. Seeks opportunities for counter attacks. 
(326, i.d.r.) 

III. Battalion Staff. 
Positions : 

Battalion Adjutant ) . , ,. r . 

Battalion Sergeant Major J™* Ma J° r - 

•Mounted orderlies both with Major (one with 

major and one with Adjutant) until horses are 
sent to rear when both may be with the horses or 
one take the horses and the other remain with the 
he may direct. 



64 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

Duties : 

All assist the major in any way directed, by 

a. Reconnaissance. (565. i.d.r.. 25. f.s.r.) 

b. Observation of the firing line. 

c. Maintaining contact with regimental head- 

quarters. 

d. Maintaining contact with the support. 

e. Receiving, communicating, and sending visual 

signals from and to front and rear. 

f. Observing fire effect and progress of events. 

g. Keeping copies of all orders, messages, and 

other data necessary, for his war diary. 
(35. f.s.r.) 

When there is only one range finder to the battalion, 
the Battalion Sergeant Major is the Battalion Range 
Taker. When not actually engaged in taking ranges, 
he assists the Major as above or, preferably, he may be 
charged with the duty of maintaining communication 
with the companies of the firing line. 

The major designates a sergeant to take charge of the 
battalion combat train. Under the Major's direction, lie 

a. Conducts combat train as far to the front with 

the battalion as directed. 

b. Issues ammunition to the battalion. 

c. Takes combat train to rendezvous for refilling; 

under direction of the regimental com- 
mander. 

d. Rejoins battalion, if it is not in action, or, if it 

be engaged, joins or establishes communica- 
tion with the regimental reserve. (548, 549 
and 553. i.d.r.) 

(This sergeant is not provided for in the 
present organization. Recommendation 
has been made to the War Department 
that he be included in the Tables of 
Organization.) 



► (249, i.d.r. 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 65 

IV. The Captain. 

(The Fire Director.) 
Position: Where he can best: 

1. Control his four platoons. (248, i.d.r.) 

2. Observe fire effect. (249, i.d.r.) 

3. See the major and platoon chiefs. (2-34, i.d.r. j 

Duties : Before fire action: 

1. Conducts his company to place of deployment 

assigned by the major's orders (297, i.d.r.) 
in best manner. (212, i.d.r.) 

2. Designates target, and allots part to each platoon. 

(245 and 249, i.d.r.) (See Overlapping 
Method, page 15, Subject V. Fire Tactics.) 

3. Determines the range. (240 and 249, i.d.r.) 

4. Announces the sight setting 

5. Indicates class of fire and 

6. Time to open fire. 

7. Informs the subordinates as to the location of the 

battalion commander, and, when necessary, 
announces his own position. 

During the Action: 

1. Observes fire effect. (249, 414, 415, i.d.r., and 

216, s.a.f.m.) 

2. Corrects material errors in sight setting. (249, 

i.d.r.) 

3. Prevents exhaustion of ammunition supply. 

(249, 5'50, 551, i.d.r.) 

4. Distributes ammunition received from rear. 

(249, i.d.r.) 

5. Provides for the collection and distribution of 

the ammunition of the dead and wounded. 
(551, i.d.r.) 

6. Is on the alert for the Major's signals or com- 

mands. ( 2.2 6 and 234, i.d.r.) 



66 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

Duties: During the Action — (Continued) : 

7. In the absence of express directions from the 
major, if commanding a flank company, deter- 
mines when advances by rushes shall be 
attempted. (311, i.d.r.) 
$<. Indicates size of fractions to rush. (311, i.d.r.) 
9. Leads a rush by entire company. (223, i.cLr.) 

10. Leads the charge. (319, i.d.r.) 

11. When necessary, designates new platoon leaders 

and sees that new squads are organized and 
new squad leaders designated to replace those 
disabled. (104, 375, i.d.r.) 

V. Buglers. 
Position : 

Join the Captain when the company deplovs. (164. 
i.d.r.) 
Duties: (235, i.d.r.) 

1. One Bugler — 

a. Observes the enemy. 

b. Observes the target. 

c. Observes for fire effect. 

d. Watches platoon leaders for signals. 

e. Transmits signals to platoon leaders. 

2. The other — 

a. Watches the Major for signals and repeats 

them back. 

b. Transmits information to the Major.. 

3. both — 

a. Repeat bustle signals '' charge." (319, 

i.d.r.) 

b. Carry field glasses, message pads, pencils 

and signal flags, (i.u.a.e.m., 387,'i.d.r.) 

c. Act as messengers. 

Aee oe the Above Implies That They Must 
be Proficient in : 

a. Signaling — Hand, Arm and Letter Codes. 

b. Observation for fire effect. 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 67 

Duties — ■ (Continued) : 

Must be Proficient in — (Continued): 

c. Location and definition or description of 

targets. 

d. Bugle calls. 

VI. Range Estimators. 

Five or six officers or men, selected from the most 
accurate estimators in the conroany are designated 
-Range Finders,' 7 (240, i.d.r.) 

The term " Range Finder " is a misnomer as a 
range finder is an instrument. The school uses the 
term " Range Estimator " when applied to an indi- 
vidual. The attention of the War Department has been 
called to this. 

The range estimators are given special training in 
the estimation of ranges. 

When an action is pending, the Captain receives 
from the Major the primary apportionment of the 
target or sector of fire. (303, i.d.r.) 

The Captain returns to the company, and, avoiding 
dangerous grouping, assembles the platoon leaders and 
range estimators, and points out to both the target of 
the Battalion and Company. 

The Range Estimators immediately begin their esti- 
mation of the range to the company' target ; the Cap- 
tain meanwhile continues with his instructions to the 
Platoon Leaders. 

The instructions to the Platoon Leaders completed, 
the Range Estimators announce to the Captain either 
their individual estimates, or the mean of their esti- 
mates as deduced by one of the estimators. The Range 
Estimators then take their customary posts (240, i.d.r.), 
and the Captain indicates to the Platoon Leaders the 
range to be used. 

The Range Estimators act in an advisory capacity 
to the Captain. The mean of their estimates will 
usually be the most accurate deduction available in 



68 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

battle. The adoption by the Captain of the range thus 
determined, however, is not obligatory. 

Range Estimators should be ready to signal their 
estimates of the range to the platoon leaders at any 
time during the action. 

VII. The Platoon Leader. 
(The Fire Controller.) 

Position : Where he can best : 

1. Control the squads constituting his platoon. 

(268, i.d.r.) 

2. Observe the target and fire effect. (252, 414, 

415, i.d.r., and 216, s.a.f.m.) 

3. Observe the captain for signals or commands. 

(234, 2-51, i.d.r.) 
Duties : 

(6, 42, 104, 229, 231-233, 244, 245-257, 319, 375, 

5*50, i.d.r.) 
Controls the fire of his platoon and in his fire orders. 

1. 'Receives his orders from the company com- 

mander. 

2. If necessary, may indicate the fire position that 

has been ordered. 
3-. Announces; sight setting. 

4. Points out designated target to his platoon, if 

practicable, otherwise to his corporals only, or 

5. When the target cannot be seen, indicates an aim- 

ing target. (247 and 251, i.d.r., call this an 
aiming " point ", but the occasions upon which 
infantry would use an aiming " point " are so 
rare that it is believed aiming " target " is a 
more accurate term as it includes both point 
and line.) 

6. Assigns target so as to insure that the entire 

front or sector given him by the company 
commander will be covered with fire. 

7. Gives class of fire. 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 69 

Duties — (Continued) : 

8. Announces rate of fire. 

9. If commanding a flank platoon, details a man to 

watch, for signals from the combat patrols. 

10. When ihis (corporals have signaled that their 

squads are ready to fire, signals the Captain 
by looking toward him and holding up his 
hand. 

11. When Captain signals " commence firing ", re- 

peats same to the corporals. 

Thereafter : 

1. Observes for fire effect, 

2. When platoon is not firing, insures that the 

front assigned is kept under constant observa- 
tion for any appearance of the enemy or any 
change of position. 

3. Changes sight-setting of his platoon when 

necessary. 

4. Regulates rate of fire. 

5. Increases rate of fire when large and distinct 

targets appear and decreases it when the target 
becomes small and indistinct, 

6. Prevents decrease in rate of fire when — 

(1) Changing sight-setting, 

(2) Preparing for rushes, 

(3) Fixing bayonets, 

(4) Transmitting firing data to supports, 

(5) Distributing ammunition. 

7. Increases the rate of fire to cover the advance of 

adjacent units. For this purpose progress and 
movements of adjoining units are kept under 
observation. 

8. Maintains direction of advance of his platoon in 

rushing, so as not to blanket fire of adjacent 
units. 

9. Is on the alert for Captain's commands or 

signals, for this purpose he may use his 
platoon guide. 



70 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

Thereafter — (Continued) : 

10. 'May use his platoon guide to observe adjoining 

units. 

11. Must understand all signals. 

12. Leads his platoon in advancing and charging. 

13. Prevents changing fire to unauthorized targets. 

14. Insures distribution of ammunition brought up 

from the rear and the collection and distribu- 
tion of same from the dead and wounded. 
(540, i.d.r.). 

15. In coming up with re-enforcements, he takes over 

the duties of disabled platoon leaders of the 
platoon into which his men have dropped, or 
it may be some other section of the line needs 
his service in which case he goes there. . 

16. Endeavors to preserve the integrity of squads, 

designates new squad leaders to replace those 
disabled, organizes new squads when neces- 
sary, sees that every man is placed in a squad 
and takes every opportunity for restoring 
order in the firing line. (104, 37'5, i.d.r.) 

17. In " Advance by thin lines ", leads odd num- 

bered lines. (218, i.d.r.). 

VIII. The First Sergeant. 
Commands a Platoon, !Never a Guide. 

GrUlDES. 

General Rules: 

1. Guides must be resourceful, have good health, 
vigorous physique, keen eyesight, presence of mind and 
courage, with good judgment, military training and 
experience. They must be able to read maps, make 
sketches and send clear and concise messages. 

2. Equipment. — Guides are equipped with whistle, 
watch, compass, message book, knife, pencil, wire 
cutters, map, pace scale and glasses if possible. 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 71 

3. As instructors they go where needed. 

4. As file closers they insure steadiness and prompt- 
ness in the ranks. 

5. In column of subdivisions the guide of the lead- 
ing subdivision is charged with the step and direction. 

Close Order. — The guides of the right and left, or 
leading and rear, platoons, are the right and left, or 
leading and rear guides respectively of the company 
when it is in line or in column of squads. Other guides 
are in the line of file closers. 

In platoon movements the post of the platoon guide 
is at the head of the platoon, if the platoon is in column, 
and on the guiding flank if in line. When a platoon 
has two guides their original assignment to flanks of 
the platoon does not change. 

The guides of a column of squads place themselves 
on the flank opposite the file closers. To change the 
guides and file closers to the other flank, the 'Captain 
commands: 1. File closers on left {right) . flank; 
'2. March. The file closers dart through the column; 
the captain and guides change. 

In column of squads, each rank preserves the align- 
ment toward the side of the guide. 

■Men in the line of file closers do not execute the 
loadings or firings. 

'Guides and enlisted men in the line of file closers 
execute the manual of arms during the drill unless 
specially excused, when they remain at the order. Dur- 
ing ceremonies they execute all movements. 

In Taking Intervals and Distances. — Unless 
otherwise directed, the right and left guides, at the first 
command, place themselves in the line of file closers, 
and with them take a distance of 4 paces from the rear 
rank. In taking intervals, at the command " March ", 
the file closers face to the flank and each steps off with 



72 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

the file nearest him. In assembling the gnid.es and file 
closers resume their places in line. 

To Foem the Company. — At the sounding of the 
assembly the first sergeant takes position 6 paces in 
front of where the center of the company is to be, faces 
it, draws saber, and commands " Fall in ". 

The right guide of the company places himself, fac- 
ing to the front, where the right of the company is to 
rest, and at such point that the center of the company 
will be 6 paces from and opposite the first sergeant ; 
the squads form in their proper places on the left of 
the right guide, superintended by the other sergeants, 
who then take their posts. 

For the instruction of platoon leaders and guides, the 
company, when small, may be formed in single rank. 
In this formation close order movements only are ex- 
ecuted. The single rank executes all movements as ex- 
plained for the front rank of the company. 

Alignments. — The alignments are executed as pre- 
scribed in the School of the Squad, the guide being 
established instead of the flank file. The rear-rank man 
of the flank file keeps his head and eyes to the front and 
covers his file leader. 

At each alignment the Captain places himself in 
prolongation of the line, 2 paces from and facing the 
flank toward which the dress is made, verifies the align- 
ment and commands : " Front ". 

Platoon leaders take a like position when required to 
verify the alignments. 

In " Company right " the right guide steps back on 
the command " March ", aligning the first two men next 
to him as he does so, to establish the correct line. 

In iC Platoon right " the Captain announces the guide 
and the guides cover promptly. 

In " Eight turn " the right guide is the pivot of the 
front rank. 

In " Column right " the right flank man of the lead- 
ing squad is the pivot, not the guide. 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 73 

Iii " Eight by squads " the right guide (when he has 
posted himself in front of the right squad) takes four 
short steps and then resumes the full step. The right 
squad conforms. 

" Squads right about." If the company or platoons 
are in column of squads, file closers turn about toward 
the column and take posts. If in line, each darts 
through the nearest interval between squads. The right 
and left guides place themselves in the new front rank. 
File closers on facing about maintain their relative 
positions. 

When the company executes "About face", guides 
place themselves in the new front rank. 

In " Eight front into line, double time " halting and 
aligning commands are omitted. Guide is toward side 
of the first unit. 

In " Take interval " or " Take distance " guides drop 
back at the first command. 

In " Squads right " or " Platoons, column right " in- 
terior guides of platoons cross the company. A good 
rule for beginners is always to cross over (except in 
" column right "). 

Guide of a company in line is right (unless otherwise 
announced) . 

Guide of a platoon in line is right. 

Guide of a battalion in line is center. 

Guide of a line of subdivisions is center. 

Guide of a deployed line is center. 

Guide of a squad is toward the side of the guide of 
the company. 

Guide of successive formations into line is toward 
the point of rest. 

File closers remain on the same side of the company 
except when in so doing they would be left in front of 
the company. 

If the battalion is in line, the guide away from the 
point of rest (in each company) comes to the " Eight 
shoulder arms " at the command to dress. 



74 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

At the command " Eyes right ", guides who are 
charged with the direction do not execute " Eyes 
right ", but simply salute. 

At " Retreat " guides unarmed stand at ''Attention ". 
Only officers salute. 

In " Stack arms " the right guide should align the 
stacks. 

In squads (acting alone) the corporal is the guide; 
number 2 of the front rank, if the corporal is not in 
line. 

The guides of rear units are charged with the step, 
trace and distance. 

'Exercise for Guides. — Lay out a course of 
arbitrary distance; 200 yards will answer the purpose. 
Instruct the guides to march the course as they would 
if they were guiding a company, but being sure to 
count their steps (a pebble transferred to the left hand 
at 100 steps is often found useful). 

Result. — The number of steps will range from 205 
to 225. After getting the number of steps taken by each 
man, show them that they should have taken 240 steps 
and that each man took too long a step. Have them 
march back guiding on two points in line as before, 
cautioning theni to cut down the length of the step to 30 
inches from the start, and not to wait until they get half 
way down the course and find that they have less than 
1,20 steps. 

Result. — All of the men, even after the caution, will 
have taken too long a step. 

Instructor times the guides both ways, and calls at- 
tention to the fact that in AXL cases the cadence was 
under 120 steps per minute. 

After repeating above as much as desired have the 
men march in pairs, one man keeping time and the 
other counting steps and marching on two points. 

They may check up every 10 seconds if desired. 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 75 

IX. Platoox Guides. 
Position : 

1. Behind the firing line, on left of platoon leader. 

(163, i.d.r.) 

2. Advancing in line — behind center of platoon. 

(213 and 223, i.d.r.) To insure prompt and 
orderly advance. 

3. "Advance by thin lines" — lead even numbered 

lines. (218, i.d.r.) 

4. Advancing in squad or platoon column — in 

rear. 

Duties : 

(104, 213, 223, 229, 25-2, 3*67, 375, and 376, 
i.d.r.) 

1. The platoon leader's assistant and may be 

assigned any duty the platoon leader sees fit. 

2. Keeps adjoining units under observation. 

3. Wjatehes firing line. 

4. Ohecks every breach of fire discipline. 

5. Prevents skulking, men leaving the ranks at any 

time to care for wounded, etc. 

6. Designates new squad leaders and organizes new 

squads when necessary. 

7. Attaches men that have become separated from 

squads to other squads. 
'8. Insures prompt and orderly advance. 
9. On joining firing line from the support takes 

over duties of sergeants disabled. 

10. May receive and transmit signals to the Captain. 

11. If the platoon leader is disabled, he takes over 

his duties. Hence he should know what the 
platoon leader is doing and how. 

12. When taking over the duties of the platoon 

leader he calls the senior corporal of his 
platoon out to act as guide. 



76 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

X. Corporal. 
Position : 

1. 'Marching in line, as center skirmisher of squad 
(124, i.d.r.) or 

2. When skirmish line is halted, immediately behind 

his squad. 
Note. — The School has recommended to the Wiar 
Department that the Infantry Drill Regula- 
tions be changed to provide that the 'Corporal's 
position be as prescribed above and in para- 
graph 20, page 10. 

Duties : 

Paragraphs 42, 222, .2.52, j254, 255, 411, and 5-51, 
i.d.r., cover in general the corporal's duties. 

The squad leader (Corporal) controls the fire of his 
•squad, he must understand the duties of the 
private and in issuing his fire orders : 

1. Receives his instructions from the platoon leader. 

2. Points out indicated objective to his squad. 

3. Takes as the squad target that portion of the 

platoon target which corresponds to the posi- 
tion of the squad in the platoon. 

4. Announces sight setting. 

5. Announces class and rate of fire. 

6. When his squad is ready to fire, looks toward the 

platoon leader and holds up his hand. At the 
platoon leader's signal to commence firing he 
sees that the squad opens fire. 

Thereafter : 

1. Makes all fire from the shoulder. 

2. Makes all use ordered rate of fire. 

3. Insures that all fire at designated objective. 

4. Prevents slighting of invisible portions of the tar- 

get for more visible parts. 

5. Prevents men from changing fire to unauthorized 

targets not in the assigned front or sector. 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 77 

Thereafter — (Continued) : 

6. Maintains constant observation to the front; when 

squad is firing, for effect of fire — when squad 
is not firing, for appearance of enemy. 

7. Insures prompt obedience to orders to suspend and 

cease firing. 

8. Makes men utilize ground to fullest extent for con- 

cealment in firing and advancing. 
9 ; . In sight-setting, changing sights and fixing 
bayonets, has front rank perform operation first 
(rear-rank men increasing rate of fire) and then 
the rear-rank follow while the front-rank men 
make up for loss of fire for the rear rank, thus 
insuring that the rate of fire for the squad does 
not fall off. 

10. Prevents increasing vulnerability of squad while 

preparing for a rush, and rushes as soon after 
cease firing as possible. 

11. When other squads of his platoon are rushing, or 

the platoon which is covering the same target as 
is his platoon, is rushing he has 1 his squad increase 
its rate of fire to make up for lost fire effect of 
the rushing element. 

12. In rushing causes men to spring to feet running 

at full speed, all men to drop to the ground at 
the same time, and those who are in rear to crawl 
up to the line. 

13. When re-enforcing the firing line, takes over the 

duties of disabled squad leaders. For this pur- 
pose his squad may drop into line at one place 
and he may move to the next squad on the right 
or left where there is a squad leader needed. If 
there are no vacancies caused by disabled squad 
leaders, he drops into line and assists the squad 
leaders who are there. 

14. Prevents decreasing rate of fire when men are trans- 

mitting data to arriving supports. 

15. Prevents, wasting of ammunition. 



78 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

Thereafter — (Continued) : 

16. Prevents use of 30 rounds in right pocket section 

of belts except on order of an officer. 

17. Distributes ammunition of dead and wounded and 

ammunition brought up from the rear. 

18. Prevents decreasing the rate of fire while ammuni- 

tion is being distributed. 

19. Looks to the rear only at his platoon leader's whistle 

" Attention." Pays no attention to any other 
except suspend firing. 

20. Takes his position in rear of his squad when it is 

firing and remains there, where he can control 
its fire, and only crawls into line and adds his 
rifle when all control is lost. (Short ranges.) 

21. To control his squad he does not walk up and down 

behind his squad but rolls along behind his line 
and keeps down. 

22. Leads his squad in moving to the front or rear. 

23 . Must know thoroughly the drill regulation signals 

and have a good practical knowledge of the theory 
of fire. 

24. In rushing, maintains the direction of advance of 

his squad so as not to blanket the fire of squads 
in his rear. 

25. Takes advantage of every lull in the action and 

every favorable opportunity to reorganize his 
squad and get it more under control. 

26. Checks every breach of fire discipline, abates excite- 

ment, and prevents any man from leaving the 
squad to go to the rear for any purpose whatso- 
ever. 

27. If called out of line to act as guide, notifies des- 

ignated private (103, i.d.r.) to take command 
of squad. 

Position: XL The P*™™- 

Deployed in line: One man per yard (125, i.d.r.), 
unless a greater extension is directed in the order 
for deployment. (126, i.d.r.) 



infantry drill regulations. 79 

Duties : 

(6, 42, 104, 133, 134, 138, 139, 149, 152-156, 203, 
209, 233, 247, 251, 254, 2»&5, 319, 354, 3-67, 
i.d.r., and 209, s.a.f.m.) 

The individual soldier must be trained : 

1. To recognize targets from description quickly. 

2. To describe and define targets. 

3. To use rear sight in describing targets. 

4. To use horizontal and vertical clock systems, 

singly or in combination in describing target. 

5. To set sights quickly and accurately as ordered. 

6. To bring piece to shoulder, aim carefully and 

deliberately from habit, and to reload quickly. 

7. To fire at the ordered rate. (Par. 18, .Standard 

for Field Firing.) 

8. To fire at the part of the designated objective 

which corresponds to his position in the firing 
line. 

9. To continue firing in the designated sector and 

not to change therefrom unless ordered. 

10. Not to slight invisible parts of the target for 

more visible ones. 

11. To maintain constant observation to the front. 

12. To utilize folds of ground for concealment in 

advancing and firing. 

13. To select firing positions. 

14. To understand effects of visibility and the se- 

lection of backgrounds. 

15. To fire from all positions, from behind hillocks, 

trees, heaps of earth and rocks, depressions, 
gullies, ditches, doorways and windows. 

16. To obey promptly orders to suspend and cease 

firing. 

17. To ignore whistle signals, except suspend firing. 

18. To watch closely for the expected target after 

having suspended firing. 



80 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

Duties — (Continued) : 

19. To obey promptly all orders from his squad 

leader. 

20. To drop into the nearest interval when reinforc- 

ing the firing line and obey the orders of the 
nearest squad leader. 

21. To transmit firing data to men of the supports 

coming into the line rapidly and accurately, 
without decreasing his rate of fire. 

22. To call for range and target when reinforcing 

the firing line. 

23. To have confidence in his own ability to hit. 

24. To a system of sight setting and fixing bayonets 

in order that there may be no cessation of 

fire in the unit during this operation. 
2 ( 5. To prepare for rushes without decreasing fire of 

the unit unduly. 
2'6'. To avoid unnecessary movement in preparing 

for rushes. 

27. To spring forward at command u Rush " or 

" Follow .Me " without preliminary rising. 

28. To avoid bunching in rushing. 

29. Not to swerve to the right or left in search of 

cover but to advance in a straight line, in 
order not to blanket the fire of men in his rear. 
•30. To drop quickly at end of rush and crawl up to 
line if in rear of it. 

31. To remain with his own company, but if he acci- 

dentally becomes detached from his company 
or squad to join the nearest one. 

32. To maintain silence except when transmitting or 

receiving firing data and charging. 

33. To retain presence of mind. 

34. To be careful not to waste ammunition. 

35. To use the thirty rounds of ammunition in the 

right pocket section of the belt only upon the 
order of an officer. 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 81 

Duties — (Continued) : 

36i To remain with the firing line after bringing up 

ammunition. 
37. To utilize ammunition of dead and wounded. 
3'8. Never to attempt to care for dead or wounded 

during the action. 

39. To have confidence in his ability to use the 

bayonet. 

40. To a firm determination to close with the enemy. 

41. To preserve the line in charging. 

42. To understand that a charge should be slow 

and steady (the faster men must not run away 
from the slower ones). 

43. To form up immediately after the charge and fol- 

low the enemy with fire, not attempting a dis- 
organized pursuit. 

44. To understand that it is suicidal to turn his back 

to an enemy and that, if he cannot advance, he 
must intrench and hold on until dark. 

45. To count distant groups of object or beings. 

46. To recognize service targets, x 

47. Never to Fire Until He Understands What 

the Target is, at What Part He is to 
Fire, and With What Sight Setting. 

Packs. 

Instructions for Assembling the Infantry 
Equipment, Model of 1910. 

1. The Cartridge Belt. — (a) To assemble the belt. 

Place the adjusting strap on the ground, eyeleted 
edge to the front; place the pocket sections on the 
ground in prolongation of the adjusting strap, pockets 
down, tops of pockets to the front; insert end of ad- 
justing strap in outer loop of metal guide, from the 
upper side, carry it under the middle bar and up 
through the inner loop ; engage the wire hook on the end 
of adjusting strap in the eyelets provided, on the inner 
surface of the belt. 

6 



82 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

(b) To adjust the belt. 

Adjust the belt to fit loosely about the waist — i. e., 
so that when buckled it may rest well down over the hip 
bones on the sides of the body and below the pit of the 
abdomen in front. Care should be taken that the ad- 
justment be made equally from both ends of the adjust- 
ing strap, so that the center eyelet will be in the middle 
of the belt. 

(c) To fill the belt. 

Unsnap the flap of the pocket and the interior retain- 
ing strap ; lay the retaining strap out flat in prolonga- 
tion of the pocket, insert a clip of cartridges, points of 
bullets up, in front of the retaining strap ; press down 
until the base of the clip rests on the bottom of the 
pocket ; pass the retaining strap over the bullet points 
and fasten it to the outside of the pocket by means of 
the fastener provided ; insert a second clip of cartridges^ 
points of bullets down, in rear of the first clip; press 
down until the points of the bullets rest on the bottom 
of the pocket ; close the flap of the pocket and fasten by 
means of the fastener provided. 

The remaining nine pockets are filled in like manner. 

2. To Attach the First-Aid Pouch. — Attach the 
pouch under the second pocket of the right section of 
the belt by inserting one hook of the double-hook at- 
tachment in the eyelet from the inside of the belt ; 
pinch the base of the pocket, bringing eyelets close to- 
gether, and insert the other hook in the same manner in 
the adjoining eyelet. 

Place the first-aid packet in the pouch and secure the 
cover. 

3. To Attach the Canteen Cover. — Attach the 
canteen cover to the belt under the rear pocket of the 
right section in the same manner as the first-aid pouch. 

Place the canteen and cup (assembled) in the cover 
and secure the flaps. 

4. To Attach the Pack Carrier to the Haver- 
sack. — Spread the haversack on the ground, inner side 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 83 

down, outer flap to the front (Fig. 4) ; place the button- 
holed edge of the pack carrier on the buttonholed edge 
of the haversack, lettered side of carrier up; button- 
holes of carrier superimposed upon the corresponding 
ones of the haversack ; lace the carrier to the haversack 
by passing the ends of the coupling strap down through 
the corresponding buttonholes of the carrier and haver- 
sack nearest the center of the carrier, bringing the ends 
up through the next buttonhole's and continuing to the 
right and left, respectively, to the sides. 

5. To Attach tJhe Cartridge Belt to the Haver- 
sack. — -Place the haversack and pack carrier (as- 
sembled) on the ground, inner side down (Fig. 5) ; place 
the cartridge belt, pockets down, tops to the front, along 
the junction of the haversack and carrier; insert hook 
on rear of belt suspender in the center eyelet of the 
adjusting strap, so that the end of the hook will be on 
the outside of the belt ; insert hooks on ends of front 
belt suspenders in the eyelets between the second and 
third pockets from the outer ends of the belt, so that 
the end of the hooks will be on the outside of the belt. 

6. To Attach the Bayonet Scabbard to the 
Haversack. — Attach the scabbard by passing its lower 
end through the loop provided on the side of the haver- 
sack body, then engage the double-hook attachment in 
the eyelets on the outer flap on the haversack, inserting 
the hooks from the inside. 

Place the bayonet in the scabbard. 

7. To Attach the Intrencihing Tool Carrier to 
the Haversack. — Fold the outer flap of the haversack 
over so that the meat-can pouch is uppermost; pass the 
intrenching tool carrier underneath the meat-can pouch 
and engage the double-hook attachment in the eyelets 
in the flap provided, inserting the hooks from the 
underside. 

Place the intrenching tool in the carrier and secure. 
Place the meat-can, knife, fork, and spoon in the 
meat-can pouoh. 



84 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

The equipment is now assembled and is never dis- 
assembled except to detach the pack carrier and its con- 
tents as hereinafter provided for. 

To Assemble the T\jll Equipment. 
(With Rations.) 

Place the assembled equipment on the ground, sus- 
pender sdde of haversack down, pockets of cartridge belt 
up, haversack spread out, inside flap and pack carrier 
extended their lull length to the rear (Fig. 6). 

Place three cartons of hard bread in the center of 
the haversack body, the lower one on the line of attach- 
ment of the inside flap; lay the remaining carton of 
hard bread, the condiment can and the bacon can on 
the top of these, the condiment can and the bacon can 
at the bottom, top of the bacon can to the front; the 
socks and toilet articles are rolled, towel on the outside, 
into a bundle of the same approximate dimensions as a 
carton of hard bread, and are placed in front of the two 
rows thus formed. 

The inside flap of the haversack is folded over" these 
articles, the end of the flap being turned in so that the 
flap, thus shortened, extends about 2 inches beyond the 
top of the upper row; the sides of the haversack are 
folded over the sides of the rows; the upper binding 
straps are passed through the loopis on the outside oi 
the inside flap, each strap through the loop opposite the 
point of its attachment to the haversack body, and 
fastened by means of the buckle on the opposite side, 
the strap being passed through the opening in the buckle 
next to its attachment, over the center bar, and back 
through the opening of the buckle away from its at- 
tachment ; the strap is pulled tight to make the fasten- 
ing secure ; the outer flap of the haversack is folded over 
and fastened by means of the lower haversack binding 
strap and the buckle on the inside of the outer flap ; the 
strap is pulled tig'ht, drawing the outer flap snugly over 
the filled haversack. 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 85 

The haversack is now packed and the carrier is ready 
for the reception of the pack (\Fig. 7). 

If one haversack ration and one emergency ration 
are carried in lien of two haversack rations, the haver- 
sack is packed in the manner described above, except 
that two cartons of hard bread and the bacon can form 
the bottom layer, the bacon can on the bottom ; the con- 
diment can, the emergency ration, and the toilet articles 
form the top layer. 

If one emergency ration is carried in addition to the 
two haversack rations, it is packed on top of the top 
layer. 

To Make the Pack (Fig. 8') . — Spread the shelter 
half on the ground and fold in the triangular ends, 
forming an approximate square from the half, the guy 
on the inside ; fold the poncho once across its shortest 
dimension, then twice across its longest dimension, and 
lay it in the center of the shelter half; fold the blanket 
as described for the poncho and place it on the latter; 
place the shelter tent pins in the folds of the blanket, 
in the center and across the shortest dimension ; fold the 
edges of the shelter half snugly over the blanket and 
poncho and, beginning on either of the short sides, roll 
tightly and compactly. This forms the pack. 

To Assemble the Pack (Mg. 9). — Place the pack 
in the pack carrier and grasp the lower suspension rings, 
one in each hand; place the right knee against the 
bottom of the roll ; pull the carrier down and force the 
pack up close against the bottom of the packed haver- 
sack ; without removing the knee, pass the lower carrier 
binding strap over the pack and secure it by means of 
the opposite buckle; in a similar manner secure the 
lower haversack binding strap and then the upper 
carrier binding strap. 

Engage the snap hook on the pack suspenders in the 
lower suspension rings. 

The equipment is now assembled and packed as pre- 
scribed for the full equipment. 



86 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

To Assemble the Full Equipment. 

(Without Rations.) 

Place the assembled equipment on the ground as here- 
tofore described; fold up the inside flap of the haver- 
sack so that its end will be on a line with the top of the 
haversack body; fold up the lower haversack strap in 
the same manner. 

To Make up the Pack. — Flold the poncho, blanket 
and shelter half, and make up the pack as heretofore 
prescribed, except that the condiment and bacon can 
(the former inside the latter) and the toilet articles 
and socks are rolled in the pack. In this case the pack 
is rolled, beginning on either of the long sides instead 
of the short sides, as heretofore described. 

To Assemble the Pack. — Place the pack on the 
haversack and pack carrier, its upper end on a line 
with the upper edge of the haversack body; bind it to 
the haversack and carrier by means of the haversack 
and pack binding straps ; fold down the outer flap on the 
haversack and secure it by means of the free end of the 
middle haversack binding strap and the buckle pro- 
vided on the underside of the flap ; engage the snap 
hooks of the pack suspenders in the lower suspension 
rings. 

The equipment is now packed and assembled 
(Fig. 10). 

To Adjust the Equipment to the SoldiEe. — Put 
on the equipment, slipping the arms one at a time 
through the pack suspenders as through the sleeves of a 
coat; by means of the adjusting buckles on the belt 
suspenders, raise or lower the belt until it rests well 
down over the hip bones on the sides and below the pit 
of the abdomen in front; raise or lower it in rear until 
the adjusting strap lies smoothly across the small of the 
back; by means of the adjusting buckles on the pack 
suspenders, raise or lower the load on the back until 
the top of the haversack is on a level with the top of the 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 87 

shoulders, the pack suspenders, from their point of at- 
tachment to the havers'ack to the line of tangency with 
the shoulder, being horizontal. The latter is absolutely 
essential to the proper adjustment of the load. 

The position of the belt is the same whether filled or 
empty. 

To Assemble the Full Equipment Less the Pack. 

(With Rations.) 

(Fig. 11.) 

Detach the carrier from the haversack ; place the rest 
of the equipment on the ground as heretofore described ; 
place the four cartons of hard bread, the bacon can, the 
condiment can, and the toilet articles in one row in the 
middle of the haversack body, the toilet articles at the 
top, the bacon can at the bottom, top to the front, the 
row extending from top to bottom of the haversack ; fold 
the inside flap over the row thus formed ; fold the sides 
of the haversack up and over ; pass the three haversack 
binding straps through the loops on the inside flap and 
secure by means of the buckles on the opposite side of 
the haversack; pas© the lower haversack binding strap 
through the small buttonhole in the lower edge of the 
haversack, fold the outer flap of the haversack over the 
whole and secure by means of the buckle on its under- 
side and the lower haversack binding strap. 

Pass the haversack suspension rings through the con- 
tiguous buttonholes in the lower edge of the haversack 
and engage the snap hooks on the ends of the pack 
suspenders. 

If one haversack ration and one emergency ration 
are carried in lieu of two haversack rations, the haver- 
sack is packed in the manner described above, except 
that one emergency ration is substituted for two of the 
cartons of hard bread. 

If one emergency ration is carried in addition to the 
two haversack rations, it is packed on top of the layer. 



88 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

To Assemble t-he Fuel Equipment Less the Pack. 
(Without Rations.) 

Detach the carrier from the haversack ; place the rest 
of the equipment on the ground as heretofore described : 
fold up the inside flap of the haversack until its upper 
end is on a line with the top of the haversack body ; 
fold the sides of the haversack over, pass the three 
haversack binding straps through the loops on the inside 
flap and secure by means of the buckles on the opposite 
side of the haversack; pass the lower haversack binding 
strap through the small buttonhole in the lower edge of 
the haversack; place the condiment and bacon can (the 
former inside the latter) and the toilet articles and socks 
in the bottom of the pouch thus formed ; fold the outer 
flap of the haversack over the whole and secure by means 
of the buckle on its underside and the lower haversack 
binding strap. 

Pass the haversack suspension rings through the con- 
tiguous buttonholes in the lower edge of the haversack 
and engage the snap hooks on the ends of the pack 
suspenders. 

To Adjust the Equipment to the Soldier. — Put 
on the equipment as prescribed for the full equipment. 
Adjust the cartridge belt as prescribed for the full 
equipment. Adjust the pack suspenders so that the top 
of the haversack is on a level with the top of the 
shoulders. 

To Discard the Pack Without Removing the 

Equipment From the Body. 

Unsnap the pack suspenders from the suspension 
rings and snap them into the eyelets on top of the belt 
and in rear of the rear pockets of the right and left 
pocket sections ; support the bottom of the pack with the 
left hand and with the right hand grasp the coupling 
strap at its middle and Avithdraw first one end, then the 
other; press down gently on the pack with both hands 



INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 89 

and remove it. Wthen the pack has been removed, lace 
the coupling strap into the buttonholes along the upper 
edge of the carrier. Adjust the pack suspenders. 

For illustration of how packs are made up and 
carried, see Privates' Manual, Chapter 2. 

■Care of Equipment. 

Leather. — 1. Keep leather clean. ITse material 
furnished by Ordnance Department, or castile soap and 
water. 

2. Oil leather frequently to keep it pliable. Use 
Neatsfoot oil, Viscol or Harness soap. 

3. Dry in the shade; never in the sun or in artificial 
heat. Always store in a cool, dry place without arti- 
ficial heat. Shoe polishes are almost always injurious. 

Woolen Clothes. — Wash in tepid or cold water 
with a non-alkaline soap; do not wring it out; dry in 
the shade. 

Mending. — Always keep equipment ready for use. 

Cloth Equipment. — Dry 'Cleaning. — Scrub with 
a stiff brush frequently. 

WJashing. — Only under the direction of an officer. 

Dissolve 1 piece of Q. M. soap (not yellow), in 9 
cups of water. One cup will clean the equipment of 
one man. Apply with a brush and lather well. Rub 
soap directly on persistent spots. Wash off in cold 
water and dry in the shade. 

Instructions on Making Packs. 

Four Methods : 

Full equipment with rations. 

Full equipment without rations. 

Full equipment less pack, with rations. 

Full equipment less pack, without rations. 



90 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 

Haversack, Weight 9% 

Carrier Cartridge belt canteen, Weight 11% 

Suspenders Mess Rations Weight 10% 

Mess pouch Gun 9 

Clothing 7 



40 

Adjusting Cartridge Belt.— 1. Fits loosely 
around waist. 2. Resting on hips. 3. Hole between 
buckles. Insert ammunition: First clip in front, 
points up, fastened with retaining strap. Second clip 
points down. First aid pouch under 4th pocket, left. 
Canteen under rear pocket, right. Bayonet between 
3rd and 4th pocket, left. (New bayonet scabbard 
fastens on haversack.) 

Distribution of Intrenching Tooes in the Squads. 

No. 3 rear of each odd-numbered squad Bolo 

No. 3 rear of each even-numbered squad. .Hand Axe. 

No. 1 rear of each squad Pick Mattock. 

Xos. 1, 2 and 3 front of each squad Shovels 

No. 2 rear of each squad Wire Cutter. 



CHAPTER 3. 
Physical Training. 

Only the carefully trained and conditioned man can 
make victory possible. For this reason the first and 
most important concern of a nation at war is the 
physical training of its soldiers. 

The setting-up exercises are the basis for all other 
activities and their disciplinary value is almost as 
great as their physical value. 

Physical Training. — Each period should include 
exercises for all parts of the body. Following the set- 
ting-up exercises the following should be given in the 
order named: marching, jumping, double timing, 
gymnastic contests, and concluding or restorative 
exercises. 

Rifle exercises have for their purpose the develop- 
ment of " handiness " with the piece. They should be 
used moderately and with frequent rests, for they de- 
velop big muscles at the expense of agility — a muscle 
bound man cannot use his strength. 

Bayonet Training in addition to its military value 
calls into play every muscle of the body and makes for 
alertness, agility, quick perception, decision, aggressive- 
ness and confidence. 

Time Schedule. 

A. M. (Begins z / 2 hour P. M. (End J / 2 hour 

after breakfast) : before retreat) : 

1. Disciplinary exercises, 1. Bayonet training, 30 

2 minutes. minutes. 

2. Starting positions, 1 2. Games and contests, 

minute. 30 minutes. 

3. Setting up exercises, Alternating daily with: 

20 minutes. 1. Bombing practice, 20 

4. Marching and march- minutes. 

ing exercises, 5 to 8 2. Conditioning exercises, 
minutes. 15 minutes. 



92 PHYSICAL TRAINING. 

A. M. — (Continued): P. M. — (Continued): 

5. Jumping, 5 to 8 min- Double timing. 

utes. Vaulting and overcom- 

6. Double timing, 5 min- ing obstacles. 

utes. 3. Rifle practice, 10 

minutes. 

Instructions must be: 

1. An inspiration to the men. 

2. Well prepared themselves. 

3. Stripped for action. 

4. An example to the men. 

5. Must make drill attractive. 

6. ISTever have men overdo. Temper the exercises 

to the endurance of the weakest man. 

7. Accompany every exercise with the proper 

breathing. 

8. See that the men are clothed according to the 

season. 

9. Have the drills short and snappy. 

10. Have frequent rests at the beginning — less 
frequent as work progresses. 

The platoon is the best unit for physical drills. 

Formations. — When exercising in small squads, the 
men " fall in " in a single rank and, after having 
" counted off " by fours, threes or twos, as the instruc- 
tor may direct, distance is taken at the command: 
Take distance, March, Squad Halt. At "" March " 
No. 1 moves forward, being followed by the other 
numbers at intervals of four paces. Halt is com- 
manded when all have taken their distances. 

At the discretion of the instructor the distance may 
be any number of paces, the men being first cautioned 
to that effect. 

When distance is taken from the double rank, No. 1 
of the rear rank follows No. 4 of the front rank, and 
he is in turn followed by the other numbers of the 
rear rank. 



PHYSICAL TRAINING. 93 

If the instructor desires the files to cover, he com- 
mands : In file Cover. Nos. 1 stand fast, the others 
moving to the right with the side step, until the Nos. 1 
are covered. 

To return to the original formation, the instructor 
commands: Assemble March. No. 1 of the front 
rank stands fast and the other members move forward 
to their original places. 

Second Formation. To the right and left. Take 
interval, March. 

Front Rank: Rear Rank: 

No. 1, 6 steps right step. No. 1, 3 steps right step. 

No. 2, 3 steps right step. No. 2, Stands fast. 

No. 3, Stands fast. No. 3, 3 steps left step. 

No. 4, 3 steps left step. No. 4, 6 steps left step. 

Commands. 

Kinds of Commands, and How Given. — There are 
two kinds, preparatory and executive. 

The preparatory command describes and specifies 
what is desired and the executive command calls what 
has been described into action. 

The tone of the command should always be animated, 
distinct, and of a loudness proportioned to the number 
of men for whom it is intended. 

Instructors should cultivate a proper command, as its 
value as a tributary to the success of any military drill 
cannot be overestimated. 

After an exercise has been described, its various move- 
ments or parts should be performed at executive ivords, 
which indicate not only the movement that is de- 
sired but the manner of the execution. Thus: 1. 
Trunk forward, 2. Bend, 3. Eecover (or Kaise), here 
the word bend is drawn to indicate moderately slow 
execution; the recovery being a little faster, the word 
recover should be spoken to indicate it. 



94 PHYSICAL TRAINING. 

The word Recover should always be used to bring 
the men back to the original position. 

If it is desired to continue an exercise, the command 
Exercise should be used and the cadence or rythm 
should be indicated by words or numerals. If numerals 
are used, they should equal the number of movements 
composing the exercise. Thus an exercise of two move- 
ments will be repeated at one, two; one of four move- 
ments will require four counts, etc. 

The numeral or word preceding the command Halt 
should always be given with a rising inflection in order 
to prepare the men for the command Halt. 

Thus: 1. Thrust arms forward, 2. Exercise one. two, 
one. two, one, Halt. 

If any movement of any exercise is to be performed 
with more energy than the others, the word or numeral 
corresponding to that movement should be emphasized. 

First Lessox. — A. Disciplinary Exercises. 1. At- 
tention; 2. At Ease ; 3. Rest; 4. Facings. 

B. Starting Positions, (m.p.t.. pp. 25 to 29.) 

C. Setting-up Exercises (every exercise has two 

motions) : 

1. Arms forward, 2. Raise. Swing arms 

downward and forward. 

2. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on toes. 

(33.) 

3. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend head 

backward; same, forward. (3*8.) 

4. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Turn trunk 

right; same, left. (40.) 

5. Arms to thrust, 2. Raise. Half bend 

knees slowly. (35.) 

6. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk 

forward. (36.) 

Note. — Jumping and double -timing exercises and contests 
should not be included in the first week's work. 

Bracketed numbers refer to pages in " Manual of Physical 
Training," where similar exercises are illustrated and described 



PHYSICAL TRAINING. 95 

First Lesson — (Continued) : 

C. Setting-up Exercises — (Contimoed): 

7. Arms to thrust, 2. Raise. Raise and 

lower shoulders. (32.) 

8. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk 

sideward, right; same, left. (3'7.) 

9. Arms forward, 2. Raise. Stretch arms 

sideward. (-±3.) 

10. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk 

backward. (34.) 

11. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Raise knees 

forward alternatingly. (41,.) 

12. Breathing Exercise: Inhale, raising arms 

sideward; exhale, lowering arms. 

D. Marching Exercises: 

1. Marching in column in quick time and 

halting. 

2. Same, marking time, marching forward 

and halting. 

3. Same, marching on toes. 

Second Lesson. — A. Disciplinary Exercises. Same 
as in first lesson. 

B. Starting positions. 

C. Setting-up Exercises (every exercise has two 

motions) : 

1. Arms forward, 2'. Raise. Swing arms 

sideward. 

2. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on toes. 

(33.) 

3. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Turn head 

right; same, left. (41.) 

4. Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Turn 

trunk sideward, right; same, left. (40.) 

5. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Full bend 

knees, slowly. (3'9.) 

6. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk 

forward. (36.) 



96 PHYSICAL TRAINING. 

Second Lessor — (Continued) : 

C. Setting-up Exercises — (Continued) : 

7. Arms to thrust, 2. Raise. Move shoul- 

ders forward and backward. (35.) 

8. Arms sideward, 2. Raise. Bend trunk 

sideward, right; same, left. (31.) 

9. From Attention. Stretch arms forward 

and sideward. 

10. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk 

backward. (34.) 

11. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Extend right 

and left leg forward. (44.) 

12. Breathing Exercise: Inhale, raising arms 

sideward and upward; exhale, lowering 
arms sideward. 

D. Marching Exercises: 

1. Marching in column in quick time, mark 

time, marching in quick time and halt- 
ing. (-8.8,) 

2. Marching on toes. (89.) 

3. Marching on toes and rocking. 

E. Jumping Exercises: 

1. Rise on toes and arms forward, 2< Raise. 

Swing arms downward and bend knees; 
swing arms forward and extend knees, 
and recover Attention. 

2. Jumping in place. (193.) 

F. Double Timing: 

1. Double timing, change to quick time and 
halting. (92.) 

G. Concluding Exercises: 

1. Breathing exercise, raising and lowering 
arms sideward. 

Thikd Lessor. — A disciplinary Exercises, as in first 
lesson. 

B. Starting Positions. 



PHYSICAL TRAINING. 97 

Third Lesson — (Continued) : ■ 
•0. Setting-up Exercises : 

1. Arms forward, 2. Raise. Swing arms 

downward and sideward. (4 motions.) 

2. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on right 

and left toes, alter natingly. (4 mo- 
tions.) (46.) 

3. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend head 

forward and backward. (4 motions.) 

(880 _ 

4. Arms sideward, 2. Raise. Turn trunk 

right and left. (4 motions.) (53.) 

5. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on toes 

and full 'bend knees slowly. (4 mo- 
tions.) (39.) 

6. Fingers in rear of head, 2. Place. Bend 

trunk forward. (2 motions.) (42.) 

7. Arms to thrust, 2. Raise. Move shoulders 

forward, upward, backward, and recover. 
(4 motions.) 

8. Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Bend 

trunk sideward, right, and left. (4 mo- 
tions.) (37.) 

9. From Attention. Stretch arms sideward, 

upward, sideward, and recover. (4 
motions.) 

10. Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Bend trunk 

backward. (2 motions.) (34.) 

11. Hands on hips, 2 Place. Eixtend right 

and left leg backward. (2 motions.) 

12. Breathing Exercise: Inhale, raising arms 

forward, upward; and exhale, lowering 
arms sideward, down. 
I). Marching Exercises: 

1. Marching in quick time, raising knees. 

(89.) " 

2. Thrusting arms sideward. 



98 PHYSICAL TRAINING. 

Third Lessor — ( Continued) : 
Ei. Jumping Exercises: 

1. .Standing broad jump. 

2. Three successive broad jumps. 
P. Double Timing: 

1. Double timing. (92.) 

2. Double timing, marking time in the 

double and forward. 

3. Double timing and halting from the 

double. 

Gr. Gymnastic 'Contests. Two of these games should 
be included in each lesson. See pp. 39-40. 

H. Concluding (Exercises: 

1. Breathing exercise, as in 12. 

Fourt.h Lesson. — A. Disciplinary Exercises, as in 
first lesson. 

B. Starting Positions. 

C. Setting-up Exercises: 

1. Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Extend 

arms forward ; swing sideward, forward, 
and recover. (4 motions.) 

2. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on toes 

quickly. ('2 motions.) (33.) 

3. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Turn head 

right and left. (4 motions.) (41.) 

4. Arms upward, >2. Raise. Turn trunk 

right and left. (4 motions.) 

5. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Half bend 

knees, quickly. (2 motions.) (35.) 

6. Arms sideward, 2. Raise. Bend trunk 

forward. (2 motions.) 

7. Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Move 

elbows forward, and stretch backward. 
(2 motions.) (45.) 

8. Arms upward, 2. Raise. Bend trunk 

sideward, right and left. (4 motions.) 



PHYSICAL TRAINING. 99 

Fourth Lesson — (Continued): 

O. Setting-up Exercises — (Continued): 

9. From Attention. Stretch arms forward, 
sideward^, upward, sideward, forward, 
and recover. (6 motions.) 

10. Arms sideward, 2. Raise. Bend trunk 

backward. (2 motions.) 

11. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Extend legs 

sideward. (2 motions.) 

12. Breathing Exercise: 1. Inhale, raising 

arms forward, upward; exhale, lower- 
ing arms sideward. 

D. Marching Exercises: 

1. iMarching in quick time, raising knees, 

and rising on toes of other foot. 

2. Raising heels. 

3. Thrusting arms sideward. 

E. Jumping Exercises: 

1. Three successive standing broad jumps. 
'2. Jumping in place, raising knees. 

F. Double Timing: 

1. Double timing. 

2. liaising heels. 

3. Double timing, sideward, crossing legs. 

G. Gymnastic Contests. 
H. 'Concluding Exercises: 

1. Swing arms forward, upward, relaxed. 

2. Breathing exercise, as in 12. 

Fifth Lesson. — A. Disciplinary Exercises. 

B. .Starting Positions. 

C. .Setting-up Exercises: 

1. Arms to thrust. Thrust arms upward; 

swing downward ; forward ; upward, and 
recover. (4 motions.) (5'5.) 

2. Hands in rear of head. Rise on toes and 

rock. (2 motions.) (39.) 



100 PHYSICAL TRAINING. 

Fifth Lesson — (Continued) : 

C. Setting up Exercises — (Continued) : 

3. Hands on hips. Bend head forward and 

backward. (4 motions.) 

4. Hands on shoulders. Turn trunk right and 

left, stretching arms sideward. (4 mo- 
tions.) (5:2.) 

5. Full hend knees. Hands on ground be- 

tween knees, squatting position, extend 
right and left leg backward, alternat- 
ingly. (4 motions.) (65.) 

6. Hands on shoulders. Bend trunk forward 

and stretch arms sideward. (2 mo- 
tions.) (51.) 

7. From Attention. " Curl " shoulders for- 

ward and stretch backward. (2 mo- 
tions.) (38.) 

8. Hands on shoulders. Bend trunk sideward. 

right and left, extending arms sideward. 
(4 motions.) (65.) 

9. From Attention. Flex forearms verti- 

cally; extend upward; flex and recover. 
(4 motions.) (54.) 

10. Hands on shoulders. Bend trunk back- 

ward, stretching arms sideward. (2 mo- 
tions.) (56.) 

11. From Attention. Raise arms forward and 

extend leg forward; stretch arms side- 
ward, extending leg backward; move 
arms and leg to first position and recover 
Attention. (4 motions.) (53.) 

12. Breathing Exercise : Raise arms sideward ; 

upward; and lower laterally quickly. (4 
motions.) 

D. Marching Exercises : 

1. March in quick time and swing extended 
leg forward, ankle high. 



PHYSICAL TRAINING. 101 

Fifth Lesson — (Continued) : 

D. Marching Exercises — (Continued) : 

2. Raising knee and hopping on other foot. 

3. From arms forward. Swing arms upward. 

E. Jumping Exercises: 

1. Standing hop, step and jumr). 

2. Preliminary running broad jumps. 

3. Broad jump from a walking start of four 

paces. (197.) 

F. Double timing. 

1. Double timing. 

2. Double timing sideward, crossing leg in 

front. 

3. Double timing;, raising knees. 

G. Gymnastic Contests. 
H. Concluding Exercises: 

1. Bend trunk forward and backward, re- 

laxed. 

2. Breathing exercise, as in 12. 

For further work for recruits and work to be given 
trained soldiers, see Special Regulation ISTo. 23, " Field 
Physical Training of the Soldier." 

To prevent grumbling, keep men at work. Idle men 
are the ones who growl. The French consider periods 
spent in the trenches as periods of resit; instead of 
letting the men go on pass when relieved, they restore 
discipline by close order drill. 

The physical benefit is less than half of physical ex- 
ercises. There should be mental exertion in every 
exercise. But the most important part is the dis- 
ciplinary benefit. The exercises must teach men to 
jump at commands, and by this means must make the 
organization a homogeneous mass. 

The principal thing in the position of attention is 
" chest lifted and arched." There should be a stretch 
upward at the waist. The position should give the im- 
pression of a man as proud of himself as he can be. 
This is a bluff which works, not onlv bv making a good 



102 PHYSICAL TRAINING. 

first impression on others, but by causing the man 
himself to live up to it. 

Insist on precision. Especially when men are losing 
interest, don't let the work sag, but make it interesting 
by requiring concentration. At the beginning of each 
exercise, wake the men up bj calling them to attention 
until they do it well, giving the facings, etc. 

Commands. — ■ There is a tone at which each voice 
carries best. Each man must find it for himself. To 
make commands understood, enunciate carefully with 
lips and teeth. Sound especially first and last letters 
of words. Officer's posture adds to effect of command. 
His personality is impressed on his men largely by his 
voice. Preparatory command should be vibrant and 
cheerful — not a harsh tone that grates on the men 
and antagonizes them. The command of execution 
must be short and sharp ; drill can be made or marred 
by it, 

(Maeching. — A cadence faster than 120 a minute 
adds snap to marching, but snap can not be gained in 
proportion as the cadence is run up. Snap is attained 
chiefly by the proper gait. Soldiers should march, not 
with knees always slightly bent, but should straighten 
them smartly at the end of each step. This adds drive 
to the step, and gives the men confidence and a mob 
spirit of courage. After long drill at attention, this 
spirit can be carried into extended order work. 

Marching exercises are useful and can be greatly 
varied. The command " Exercise " should always be 
given as the left foot strikes the ground. " Exercise " 
is a command of execution, and the first movement 
should be executed at once when it is* given. The 
count " One " is given when this first position is 
reached. The command to stop all marching exercises 
is " Quick time — March." 

In all exercises the instructor should cultivate the 
ability to pick mistakes. He can develop this until he 
can watch much larger groups than at first. 



VOICE CULTURE. 103 

Voice Culture. 

Mastery of the voice is a necessity for every officer; 
for without it the giving of commands will soon make 
his throat look and feel like a piece of raw Hamburg 
steak. Quality of voice is more effective than quantity. 
Brute force may produce a roar that has tremendous 
volume at a short distance; but the sound will not 
carry unless it is so placed that it gets the benefit of 
the resonance spaces in the head. If the tone is pro- 
duced properly, so that it has the singing quality neces- 
sary in all right commands, quantity of tone will come 
of itself. 

This singing quality has nothing to do with music; 
it may be attained by a man who can hardly distin- 
guish a bar of music from a bar of soap. It depends 
upon three principles, which are very simple in them- 
selves but can not be applied without careful practise. 
The first covers proper use of the breath. Air must be 
drawn into the lungs by expanding the diaphragm and 
abdomen, a process best seen in the natural breathing 
of a man who is lying on his back with all muscles re- 
laxed. Filling the upper part of the lungs by raising 
the chest puts the work on the comparatively small 
muscles between the ribs; but filling the base of the 
lungs by pulling downward brings into play the dia- 
phragm, the largest muscle in the body. The sensa- 
tion which accompanies proper deep control of the 
breath is as if the tone were not pushed out of the 
mouth, but drawn in and upwards. It is partly de- 
scribed by the phrases of singing teachers, " drawn 
tone " and " singing on the breath." 

The diaphragm must not only relieve the muscles 
between the ribs, but, still more important, the small 
muscles of the throat. The second great principle 
of voice production is that the throat must be 
perfectly relaxed. Any tension there interferes 
with the free vibration which is essential for 
strong and resonant tone. This relaxation is 



104 VOICE CULTURE. 

most easily gained by drawing the chin in 
slightly, loosening the muscles under it. The base of 
the tongue can be relaxed by rolling the letter " R." 
even to the extent of making two syllables of such 
words as " gr-rand." Talking with the teeth 
closed loosely will also help to ease incorrect, tension 
about the throat. If the throat is properly relaxed, 
there will be no sensation in it during the production 
of the voice. Any sensation between the diaphragm 
and the resonance chambers of the head is a sign of 
wrong and harmful tension. 

The use of these resonance chambers is required oy 
the third principle — that the tone must be reinforced 
by resonance in all the hollow spaces of the head. 
These are found in the nose, above the palate and even 
above the eyes. They have the same effect as the 
sounding board of a musical instrument, in giving 
quality to the tone. The best way to put this principle 
into practice is to learn the sensation of the clear and 
ringing tone which is produced by proper placing of the 
voice. Exercises containing the letters " M " and 
" K" " will give this effect. This does not mean that 
the sound should be nasal ; it should be made in the 
nose, but not through it. Another way to increase 
resonance is to think of crying the words rather than 
talking them. A slightly whining intonation or a 
sound like that of a laugh ha? more ring to it than an 
ordinary flat talking tone. 

These principles should not be neglected because they 
are simple. They can not be mastered without work, 
and unless they are mastered the voice will not be heard 
at a distance and will not last under the work of giving 
commands. Further suggestion? on the manner of giv- 
ing commands will be found under Physical Training. 



CHAPTER 4. 
Use of Modern Arms. 



Plate # 3 



US. Ka S «i««Kifk Model 1903 



Wetl- 




^ReftT-Si^kt Le^f 



2^otm«ll Difikfc : IfooJ^ throw^i the reivr-siglvt notck nt the Mlb-eyeor (w^rk, c\itdL krin£ the 
U|» of the front sight on* lme with the tojo of c#v&. m the center of Hie Teqr-Stjjkt notiK «\i-\d 
Aligned u\>on tke jsoiMt «rf ai'i*.. 



106 USE OF MODERN ARMS. 

Small Arms Firing. 

Under this heading we have many phases of the 
training and exercises given to our armed forces. It 
has been found best to use simple every day methods 
to get the best results. 

There are two principal factors — the rifle and the 
pistol. The former only will be taken up now. The 
scheme is to make the soldier a good shot singly and 
collectively, in time of peace and in time of war. 

The course of instruction at this camp was arranged 
as follows : 

(a) Nomenclature and care of the rifle. 

(b) Sighting drills. 

(c) Position and aiming drills. 

(d) Deflection and aiming drills. 

(e) Range practice. 

(f) Estimating distance drill. 

(g) Combat firing. 

(a) Every man should be taught the names of the 
principal parts (see cut) of the rifle and how to clean 
and keep it clean. 

(b) If time permits, the sighting bar described on 
page 26, s.a.f.m. should be used. To illustrate the 
normal and peep sight make a drawing on a blackboard 
of page 30, s.a.f.m. 

Using a sand bag or some convenient rest for the 
rifle. The instructor sights it on some object showing 
the normal and peep sight. Using the above rests have 
a marker hold a disk against a large piece of paper 
towards which the rifle is pointed. There is a pin 
hole in the center of the bull's eye on the disk. The 
range should be about 50 feet, and the bull's eye about 
1 inch in diameter. The marker moves it about until 
the man sighting tells him to " hold," at which time 
he marks the center with the point of a pencil. This 
is done three times, the three points are then con- 
nected. The triangle thus formed is then used by the 



USE OF MODERN ARMS. 107 

instructor to show the man whether he took too much 
or too little front sight or whether he leaned to one 
side or the other while aiming. 

Use for this exercise both the normal and peep 
sight. 

To show the effect of canting the piece use a sight 
setting of 1,000 yards, take out the holt, aim the rifle 
while lying on a sand hag at a 1-inch bull's eye 50 
feet away. Then look through the bore of the rifle 
and have the place where the target would be approxi- 
mately hit by a bullet marked. Cant the piece to the 
right and aim at the same bull's eye. Then look 
through the bore of the rifle and mark the place where 
the bullet would approximately strike the target. The 
last mark would be lower and to the right of the first 
mark. It should be readily seen that in canting the 
piece to the right your sight is to the right of its 
original position — that is right windage. Also by 
canting it to the right your elevation is lowered, that 
is lessened. Canting the piece to the left would make 
the bullet strike low and to the left. 

(c) Preliminary command " Position and aiming 
drill," command of execution " .Squad (platoon, or 
company) Ready." At the command " Ready " each 
man faces half right and carries the right foot about 1 
foot to the right, in such a position that will insure the 
greatest firmness and steadiness, raises the piece and 
drops it into the left hand at the balance, left thumb 
along the stock, muzzle at the height of the breast. If 
kneeling or sitting the position of the piece is 
similar — if kneeling the left forearm rests on the left 
thigh — if sitting the elbows are supported by the knees. 
If lying down the left hand steadies and supports the 
piece at the balance, the toe of the butt resting on the 
ground, the muzzle off the ground. From the position 
of ready the four exercises — position, aiming, trigger 
squeeze, and rapid fire — are given. These exercises 
given on pages 38-42, s.a.f.m. should be carefully 



108 USE OF MODERN ARMS. 

studied. Do not leave it to the sergeant, etc., to do — 
give your company your own instruction when prac- 
ticable, and in time of battle they will know you and 
you will know them, and there will grow up between 
you that mutual understanding which is necessary for 
the real success of any undertaking. Do not forget to 
give these exercises in all positions of firing, namely, 
standing, sitting, kneeling, and prone. 

(d) A change of one point of windage at the 100 
yard range will change the point struck by the bullet 
of the next shot 4 inches. If right windage is taken 
the bullet will strike to the right, if left windage is 
taken it will strike to the left : 

number of 



ange 


windage 


direction inch 


es change 


100 


1 point 


right or left 


4 


200 


1 point 


right or left 


8 


300 


1 point 


right or left 


12 


500 


1 point 


right or left 


20 


600 


1 point 


right or left 


24 



Remember to take windage in the direction you 
want the bullet to strike. 

A change of 25 yards in your sight setting raises 
or lowers the point struck by the bullet of the next 
shot at the 100 yards range 1 inch: 









Number inches 


Range. 




Change in sight. 


change on target. 


100 




25 yards 


1 


200 




25 yards 


2 


300 




25 yards 


3 


500 




25 yards 


5 


600 




25 yards 


6 


300 




75 yards 


9 


500 




150 yards 


30 


(e) Range 


practice. 




Target details 


must be thorou 


arhly familiar with 


paragraphs 106-110, s.a.f.m. Scorers must be familiar 



USE OF MODERN ARMS. 



109 



with the method of recording scores. The following 
schedule is the one that was followed at this camp: 



Slow Fire. 



Range 


Time 


Shots 


Target 


Position 


Sights 


Ammunition 


100 

100.... 
100 


No limit . . 
No limit . . 
No limit. . 
No limit . . 
No limit . . 
No limit . . 
No limit . . 


15 
15 
15 
15 
15 
15 
15 


A 

A 
A 
A 
A 
A 
A 


Prone. . . . 
Kneeling . 
Standing. 
Prone. . . . 
Kneeling . 
Prone .... 
Sitting. . . 


Leaf 

Leaf 


Guard 
Guard 
Guard 


200.... 
200.... 
300.... 
300.... 


10 leaf, 5 battles. 
10 leaf, 5 battles. 
10 leaf, 5 battles. 
10 leaf, 5 battles. 


Service 
Service 
Service 
Service 



Rapid Fire. 



Range 


Time 


Shots 


Target 


100.... 


1 min . . . 


10 


D 


100.... 


1 min . . . 


10 


H 


200.... 


1 min. . . 


10 


D 


200.... 


1 min . . . 


10 


H 


300.... 


1*-10»... 


10 


D 


300.... 


l'-10*... 


10 


H 



Position 



Prone 

Prone 

Kneeling from standing 
Prone from standing. . 
Prone from standing . . 
Prone from standing . . 



Sights 



Leaf. 
Leaf. 
Leaf. 
Leaf. 
Leaf 
Leaf. 



Ammunition 



Service 
Service 
Service 
Service 
Service 
Service 



At each range with the rapid fire 5 additional shots 
should be fired with the battle sight and with half the 
allotted time. 

(f) A course should be laid off in an open field. 
The base should be marked. At least 6 natural ob- 
jects whose distances are to be estimated should be 
placed so that they are clearly visible from the base. 
The objects should be men standing, kneeling or prone, 
and should be placed from 5;50 to 1,200 yards from the 
base. Each company should be conducted to the base 
and extended along it, backs towards the objects, in 
single rank. Each man should have a pencil and 
paper. The objects whose distances are to be estimated 
are pointed out by the company commander and the 
men told to estimate and record their estimates. At 
the conclusion of the exercise, the company commander 



110 USE OF MODERN ARMS. 

should read off the correct distances, and have each 
man figure his per cent of error. It is important that 
the men know the correct distances while the objects 
are still in view. 

For record, paragraph 85, s.a.f.m. should be 
followed. 

Remember that there are four principal ways to 
estimate distances by : 1, it cannot be more than a cer- 
tain distance, and it cannot be less than a certain 
distance — take the mean ; 2, divide the distance into 
a certain number of familiar lengths ; select a halfway 
point, estimate this and multiply by 2 ; 3, estimate the 
distance along a parallel line, as a road having well 
defined objects; 4, take the mean of several estimates. 

(g) In combat the platoon is the fire unit. The 
fire of the company, battalion or regiment is nothing 
more than the combined fire of all the fire units. The 
enemy can be imiginary, outlined or represented. The 
exercise must be conducted under an assumed tactical 
situation. The commander must lead his men accord- 
ing to the assumptions made by the umpire. Signals 
are used to indicate the enemy's actions, strength, etc. 
The situation should be simple, and after the exercise 
a critique should be held on the ground. Combat 
practice with ball ammunition against disappearing 
targets, and at estimated ranges, gets excellent results. 
The officer conducting the exercise will prohibit the 
advance. if it would be impossible were the enemy real. 

Have every man play the game. 

A point to be remembered is that for battle sight the 
sight slide must be as far to the rear as it will go. If 
it Is part way up the leaf, the drift correction cut in 
the slot upon which it moves will throw it to the left, 
and left windage will be taken. 

Point blank range is i530 yards. Battle sight is set 
for this distance because this is the extreme range at 
which a bullet would strike a man kneeling between the 
rifle and the target. 



USE OF MODERN ARMS. 



Ill 



vS$sie^:fc&f^§ v A a >N<*^<fc< J »f\» 



V ^ t * $ * 
ft 



11 r 













Mr 



r 



is 




Ji- 
ll 

]■ 



112 USE OF MODERN ARMS. 

Pistol. 

Nomenclature and Care. — The soldier is first 
taught the nomenclature of the parts of the pistol. 
Ordinance Pamphlet No. 186>6 gives this information. 
(See cut of pistol.) 

'Manual for the Pistol. 

1. The pistol being in the holster: 1. Raise, 2. 
Pistol. 

Ait the command Raise, unbutton the flap of the 
holster with the right hand and grasp the stock, back 
of hand outward. 

At the command Pistol, draw the pistol from the 
holster, reverse it, muzzle up, the hand holding the 
stock with the thumb and last three fingers ; forefinger 
outside of the guard; barrel to the rear, and inclined 
to the front at an angle of about thirty degrees; hand 
as high as 1 the neck and six inches" in front of the point 
of the right shoulder. This is the position of Raise 
Pistol, and it may be similarly taken from any position. 

2. To withdraw magazine, pistol in any position: 1. 

Withdraw. 2. (Magazine. 

At the command Magazine, place pistol, barrel down, 
in left hand and clasp barrel in full grip of left hand, 
thumb clasped over barrel in front of trigger guard, 
butt of pistol up, barrel pointing to the left front and 
slightly downward. With tip of right forefinger press 
stud releasing magazine and then place tip of same 
finger under projection at front of magazine base. 
Raise magazine about an inch then close thumb and 
second finger on sides of magazine, giving a secure 
grasp with which it can be withdrawn from socket, 
placed inside belt (in pocket of shirt or otherwise dis- 
posed of without throwing it away) . Right hand then 
grasps stock, back of hand to the left. 

3. To open chamber, the pistol in any position : 1 . 
Open. 2. Chamber. 



USE OF MODERN ARMS. 113 

Garry the pistol to the left hand (if not already 
there) barrel to the left, front end of slide grasped 
between the thumb and forefinger of left hand; right 
hand grasping stock, back of hand up; right thumb 
under slide stop. Hold left hand steady and push 
forward with right hand till slide reaches end of stroke ; 
engage slide stop, and come to Raise Pistol. Should 
the pistol be cocked and locked, it will be unlocked so 
that the slide can move. 

4. To close chamber, being at Raise Pistol, chamber 
open: 1. Oose. i2. 'Chamber. 

At the command 'Chamber, release slide top with 
right thumb and let hammer down gently. To let 
hammer down, pull downward with point of right 
thumb till hammer presses against grip safety and 
forces it home ; then while continuing this pressure on 
hammer, pull trigger; and while continuing pull on 
trigger, let the hammer down. While letting hammer 
down, grasp stock firmly between the palm and last 
three fingers to prevent pistol rotating in hand. 

3. To insert magazine, pistol being in any position, 
no magazine in socket: 1. Insert. 2. Magazine. 

Lower pistol into left hand as in Withdrawn 
Magazine, grasp magazine with tip of right fore- 
finger on projection at base of magazine, withdraw 
from pocket and insert in pistol. To make sure that 
magazine is home, strike base of magazine with palm 
of right hand. Bring the pistol to the position of 
Raise Pistol. 

6. To return pistol, being at Raise Pistol: 1. Re- 
turn. 2. Pistol. 

Lower the pistol and raise the flap of the holster with 
the right thumb; insert the pistol in the holster and 
push it down ; button the flap with the right hand. If 
the pistol he loaded and cocked the command. 1. Lock, 

2. Pistol must precede the command "'Return." 
8 



114 USE OF MODERN ARMS. 

7. To load, having loaded magazine in pistol, pistol 
in any position, chamber empty: 1, Load. '2. Pistol. 

Place pistol in left hand, barrel down, butt of pistol 
up, barrel pointing to left front and downward, slide 
grasped between thumb and forefinger. Push forward 
with right hand until the slide is fully open, then re- 
lease slide allowing it to move forward and load cart- 
ridge into chamber. Come to Raise Pistol. If the last 
shot in the magazine has been fired, to reload ; same 
command, but execute Withdrawn Magazine, Insert 
Magazine, Close 'Chamber. As soon as the pistol is 
loaded, it will be immediately locked by the commands, 
1. Lock. 2. Pistol. Should the command for locking 
pistol be inadvertently omitted it will be locked without 
command. 

8 1 . To unload pistol, being in any position, loaded: 

Execute by the commands, Withdraw Magazine, 
Open Chamber, 'Close Chamber, Insert Magazine. 

9. To inspect pistol, it being in the holster: 1. In- 
spection. 2. Pistol. 

Execute, Haise Pistol. 

To inspect the pistol more minutely, add 3. With- 
draw. 4. Magazine. 6. 'Open. 6. Chamber. 

To avoid accidents, individual men out of ranks, in 
barracks or camp will first (Withdraw Magazine then 
Open Chamber whenever the pistol is removed from the 
holster for cleaning, for examination, or for any other 
purpose. Accidental discharges will not occur if the 
above rule is always observed, and failure to observe it 
must be considered a military offense, whether or not 
accident results. 

10. Whenever men fall in ranks with the automatic 
pistol the officer or non-commissioned officer in charge 
will command: 

1. Raise, 2. Pistol; 

1. Withdraw, 2. Magazine; 

1. Open, 2. Chamber; 

1. Close, 2. Chamber. 



USE OF MODERN ARMS. 115 

1. Insert, 2. Magazine. 

I. Return, 2. Pistol. 

When falling in the above commands are given after 
chamber of rifles have been opened and closed, and the 
order resumed — the rifle being held against the left 
wrist. The commander of any company or detach- 
ment thereof is responsible for giving the necessary 
commands to put the pistols in a safe condition. 

II. The pistol with cartridge in chamber is 
habitually carried cocked and locked, whether in the 
hand or in the holster. The hammer will not be lowered 
while a cartridge is in the chamber. 

12. In campaign, the pistol should habitually be 
carried with a magazine in the socket, loaded with seven 
ball cartridges, chamber empty, hammer down. The 
extra magazines should also be loaded with seven ball 
cartridges each. 

When action seems imminent, the pistol should be 
loaded by command. It may then be returned by com- 
mand to the holster till the time for its use arrives. 

13. Recruits are first taught the motions of loading 
and firing without using cartridges. However, the 
automatic action and the effect of ball cartridges in 
operating the slide cannot be taught without firing ball 
cartridges. Practice without cartridges is very necesr- 
sary to acquire facility in the exact movements of the 
manual and in aiming, holding and trigger squeeze. 

To execute the movements without cartridges, first 
Withdraw Magazine, Open Chamber, and Examine 
both Pistols and magazines to assure that none contain 
ball cartridges. 

14. All the movements in loading pistol should be 
practiced without looking at it. In order to do this 
successfully it is necessary to know exactly where the 
magazines are carried so the hand may find them with- 
out fumbling. Also, since the projection at the front 
of the magazine base is on the same side as the bullets, 



116 USE OF MODERN ARMS. 

and the magazine must be inserted in the socket with 
these to the front, the magazine should be carried in 
the pocket with the projection to the left and should he 
withdrawn from the pocket with the same grasp as is 
prescribed for Withdrawn Magazine. 

15. This manual must be practiced with all the pre- 
cision and exactness required for the manual for the 
rifle. Accidents will be reduced to a. minimum and 
faniilarity with the pistol gained. 

Position 

Stand firmly on both feet, body perfectly balanced 
and erect and turned at such an angle as is most com- 
fortable when the arm is extended toward the target; 
the feet far enough apart (about 8 to 10 inches) as to 
insure steadiness; weight of body borne equally upon 
both feet; right arm fully extended but not locked; 
left arm hanging naturally. 

'The Gteip. — Grasp the stock as high as possible with 
the thumb and last three fingers, the forefinger along- 
side the trigger guard, the thumb extended along the 
stock. The barrel hand and fore-arm should be as 
nearly in one line as possible when the weapon is pointed 
toward the target. The grasp should not be .so tight 
as to cause tremors but should be firm enough to avoid 
losing grip. The lower the stock is grasped the greater 
will be the movement or jump of the muzzle caused by 
recoil. If the hand be placed so that the grasp is on 
one side of the stock, the recoil will cause a rotary move- 
ment of the weapon toward the opposite side. 

The releasing of the sear causes a slight movement 
of the muzzle, generally to the left. The position and 
pressure of the thumb along the stock overcomes much 
of this movement. 

To do uniform shooting the weapon must be held with 
exactly the same grip for each shot, not only must the 
hand grasp the stock at the same point for each shot, 
but the tension of the grip must be uniform. 



USE OF MODERN ARMS. 117 

The Trigger Squeeze. — The trigger must be 
squeezed in the same manner as in rifle firing. The 
pressure of the forefinger on the trigger should be 
steadily increased and should be straight back, not side- 
ways. The pressure should continue to that point be- 
yond which the slightest movement will release the sear. 
Then when the aim is true, the additional pressure is 
applied and the pistol fired. When the pistol is fired 
the greatest effort should be taken to hold the pistol to 
the mark as nearly as possible. This will be of great 
benefit in automatic firing. 

Position and Aiming Drills. — The Squad is 
formed with an interval of one pace between files. 
Slack pasters are used as aiming points. The pasters 
are ten paces distant from the squad. The instructor 
command, 1. Raise, 2. Pistol and cautions " Position 
and Aiming Drill." The men take the position pre- 
scribed in paragraph 3. At the command, 1. Squad, 
2. Fire, slowly extend the arm till it is nearly hori- 
zontal, the pistol directed at a point about six inches 
below the bullVeye. At the same time put the fore- 
finger inside the trigger guard and gradually feel the 
trigger. Inhale enough air to comfortably fill the lungs 
and gradually raise the piece until the line of sight is 
directed at the point of aim, i. e., just below the bull's- 
eye at six o'clock. While the sights are directed upon 
the mark, gradually increase the pressure on the trigger 
until it reaches that point where the slightest additional 
pressure will release the sear. Then, when the aim is 
true, the additional pressure necessary to fire the piece 
is given so smoothly as not to derange the alignment 
of the sights. The weapon will be held on the mark for 
an instant after the hammer falls and the soldier will 
observe what effect, if any, the squeezing of the trigger 
has had on his aim. 

When the soldier has become proficient in taking the 
proper position the exercise is conducted "At Will." 



118 USE OF MODERN ARMS. 

Quick Fire. — Being at th-e Raise Pistol, chamber 
and magazine empty, 1. Quick Fire Exercise, 2. One. 
Lower the forearm until it is nearly horizontal, pistol 
pointing at the target, 3. Two. Thrust the pistol for- 
ward to the position of aim, snapping the pistol just 
before the arm reaches its full extension. Then look 
through sights to verify the pointing. 4. Three. Re- 
turn to Raise Pistol and cock the pistol. 

In this exercise the soldier must keep his eyes fixed 
upon the mark. He should constantly practice pointing 
the pistol until he acquires the ability to direct it on 
the mark in the briefest interval of time and practically 
without the aid of the sights. In other words, the pistol 
in this exercise is accurately pointed instead of accu- 
rately aimed. In night firing pointing the pistol is the 
only method that can be used. After careful practice 
in this exercise it is surprising what good results can be 
obtained at night. 

'This exercise should then be practiced from the posi- 
tion of the pistol in the holster instead of Raise Pistol. 

Classes of Fire: 1. .Slow Fire. — As described 
above. Target L or A or improvised target. 

2. Quick Fire. — Being at Raise Pistol, pistols 
locked, at the command " Commence Firing " fire and 
return to Raise Pistol after each shot following the prin- 
ciples of Quick Fire Exercise. Target E, Hve yards 
apart, one for each man firing. This firing should be 
done by the numbers as described in Quick Fire 
Exercise. 

3. Automatic Fire (Target E). — Being at Raise 
Pistol, pistols locked. At the command " Commence 
Firing " empty the magazine in seven seconds, keeping 
the arm extended. Target E, 5 yards apart, one for 
each man firing. 

4. Trench Fire (Target E). — Two lines of targets. 
The first line is composed of F targets, 5 yards apart, 



USE OF MODERN ARMS. 



119 



one figure for each man firing. The second line is com- 
posed of two E figures, one yard apart, for each man 
firing, placed in a trench immediately in rear of the 
figures of the first line. This gives for each firer a 
group of three figures, one placed on top at the near 
ed°;e of the trench and the other two in the trench imme- 



\]s, ' FOR THE 

AUTOMATIC PISTOL 



0.««B«* TAtatTS I 



200- ^ ///ty- 

TARGET CHAMBER. ' | '/////// 




/I'l I 1 1 I III / ' I 1 I /l\l / f I / III , ■ , / ////// //, , / 7 y > 




^ 



diately in rear. In case a trench is not available the 
rifle pit can be used. A gutter, sunken road, embank- 
ment, or hedge can be used for this purpose so long as 
trench fire is simulated. 

The firing line advances at a walk from 100 yards 
takes up a double time 50' yards from trench, fires one 
shot at the double time when within ten yards of the 
first target continues to the trench and fires the remain- 
ing six shots, automatic fire, at the two targets in the 
trench in rear of the first line target. 

Score (Target E, Bobbing). — A score will be seven 
shots. Targets will be marked after the men in the fir- 
ing line have completed their scores. All loading and 
firing should be done by command. 



120 USE OF MODERN ARMS. 

Couese: 1. Slow Fire. — 10 yards. Minimum of 
one maximum of five scores. 

2. Quick Fire. — 10 yards. Minimum of one maxi- 
mum of three scores. 

3. Automatic Fire. — 10 yards. Minimum of one 
maximum of three scores. 

4. Trench Fire. — Minimum of one maximum of 
three scores. 

Bayonet Training. 

A. The Functions of Bayonet Training are : 

1. To teach the correct use of the bayonet until 

it becomes instinctive. 

2. To develop the fighting spirit. 

3. To develop speed, accuracy, and coordination. 

B. General Principles: 

1. Fencing, in modern combat, is out of the 

question. Almost every fight will consist 
of but one or two motions. Hence the 
class must be taught that the best defence 
is the quickest offensive. 

2. Every available means of offence, with hands 

and feet as well as with rifle and bayonet, 
is a part of bayonet training. 

3. Teamwork is essential. Men must be taught, 

especially in the combat, to exercise, to 
seize every opportunity to act together. 

4. Personal control during combat, especially at 

night, will be nearly impossible. Control 
should be practiced, therefore, in the form 
of clear instructions delivered to the men 
before assault, and fulfilled individually. 

5. In every assault and combat exercise, the 

men must be taught never to leave an 
enemy alive, or who may be alive, behind 
them. 



USE OF MODERN ARMS. 121 

C. Technique of Bayonet Combat: 

1. The point is the main reliance. Its use 

should be practiced in every possible situa- 
tion, until a correct choice or combination 
of long point, short point, and jab, and the 
execution thereof, becomes a matter of 
instinct. 

2. The point must always be directed at a 

definite target. The most vulnerable points 
of the body are: Lower abdomen, base of 
the neck, small of the back (on either side 
of the spine), chest, and thighs. Bony 
parts of the trunk must be avoided by ac- 
curate aim. 

3. The use of the rifle as a club, swinging or 

striking, is valuable only: 

a. When the point is not available. 

b. In sudden encounters at close quarters, 

when a sharp butt swing to the 
crotch may catch an opponent 
unguarded. 

c. After parrying a swinging butt blow, 

when a butt strike to the jaw is 
often the quickest possible riposte. 
The use of butt swings overhead or sidewise 
to the head or neck, is to be avoided; they 
are slow, inaccurate, easily parried or side- 
stepped, and leave the whole .body un- 
guarded. After every butt blow a thrust 
must immediately follow, since no butt 
blow, of itself, is apt to be fatal. 

4. The parries must be regarded and practiced 

chiefly as means of opening the opponent's 
guard; hence, a thrust must immediately 
follow each parry. 

5. The foot movements shown in the old manual 

are useful only to promote quickness and 
steadiness. They should, therefore, be 



122 USE OF MODERN ARMS. 

C. Technique oe Bayonet Combat — (Continued) : 

practiced in combination with the points 
and butt blows, and so combined can be exe- 
cuted in the oblique directions as well as at 
right angles. The left foot moves in the 
direction of the thrust. 

D. Manual of the Bayonet : There are only 7 ex- 

ercises to learn in the new bayonet drill: 

1. Guard. — Point of the bayonet directed at the 

opponent's throat, the rifle held easily and 
naturally with both hands, barrel inclined 
slightly to the left, right hand at the height 
of the navel and grasping the small of the 
stock, left hand holding the rifle at a con- 
venient position above the lower band, so 
that the left arm is slightly bent, making 
an angle of about 150 degrees. The legs 
should be well separated and in an easy 
position. Lean forward, on your toes, left 
knee slightly bent, right foot flat on the 
ground and turned to the right front. Be- 
member in this position to have your eye 
on your opponent, do not restrain your 
muscles, keep them taut, but flexible. 

2. " High Port"— The hands hold the rifle as 

in guard; the left wrist level with, and 
directly in front of the left shoulder; the. 
right hand above the right groin and on 
level with the navel. 
Remember that the barrel in this position is 
to the rear. This position is assumed on 
the advance without command. 

3. " Long Point." — Being in the position of 

" guard," grasp the rifle firmly, vigorously 
deliver the point to the full extent of the 
left arm, butt along side and close to the 
right forearm; body inclined forward; left 



USE OF MODERN ARMS. 123 

D. Manual of the Bayonet — (Continued): 

knee well bent, right leg braced, and weight 
of the body pressed well forward with the 
fore part of the right foot, heel raised. The 
right hand gives the power to the point, 
while the left guides it. If a point is made 
in the oblique direction the left foot should 
move in that direction. This exercise is 
done in 3 counts. At 1 the point is made ; 
at 2, the withdrawal; at 3, resume the 
guard. The withdrawal must be straight 
back, and not with the downward motion, 
until the right hand is well behind the hip. 

4. Right (Left) Parry. — 1. Straighten the left 

arm, without bending the wrist or twisting 
the rifle in the hand, and force the rifle 
forward far enough to the right (left) 
to ward off the opponent's weapon, 2. 
Resume " guard." 
Remember to keep your eyes on the weapon 
to be parried. 

5. Short Point. — 1. Shift the left hand quickly 

toward the muzzle and draw the rifle back 
to the full extent of the right arm, butt 
either high or low as a low or high point 
is to be made. 2. Deliver the point vigor- 
ously to the full extent of the left arm. 
3. Withdrawial. 4. Resume the " guard." 
G. Jab Point. — 1. Shift the left hand quickly 
toward the muzzle, draw the rifle back, and 
shift the right hand up the rifle and grasp 
it above the rear sight, at the same time 
bringing the rifle to an almost vertical 
position close to the body. Bend the knees. 
2. Straighten the knees, jab the point of 
the bayonet upward into the throat or 
under the chin of the opponent — chiefly 
by a body movement. 3. Withdrawal. 4. 



124 USE OF MODERN ARMS. 

1). Manual of the Bayonet — (Continued): 

Carry the rifle forward with the left hand, 
grasping the small of the stock with the 
right. 5. Kesume guard. Kemember in 
the first motion to have the hands at least 4 
inches apart. 

7. Butt swing — butt strike — out. — 1. Swing 
the butt up at the opponent's ribs, forearms, 
etc., using a full arm blow, bringing the 
rifle to a horizontal position over the left 
shoulder, butt to the front. 2. Advance 
the rear foot, and dash the butt into the 
opponent's face. 3. Advance the rear foot 
and at the same time slash the bayonet 
down on the opponent's head or neck. 4. 
Resume the " guard." 
(The easiest guard to a swing at the crotch is 
simply to get the left knee in the opponent's 
right.) 

E. Progressive Exercises: 

1. The class works in pairs with scabbards on 
bayonets. One man alternately in each 
pair signals ; the other promptly executes 
the movement, at the target, designated by 
the signal. The following signals are 
suggested : 

The hand, placed against the body, indi- 
cates the target. 
Long point — Back of hand outward. 
Short point — Palm of hand outward. 
Jab point — ■ Hand horizontal against 

chin, palm down. 
High port — Fist against left breast. 
Parry right (left) — Hand waved to 

right (left). 
Butt swing — Fist against crotch. 
Butt strike — Fist against jaw. 



USE OF MODERN ARMS. 125 

E. Progressive Exercises — ■ (Continued) : 

Instead of signals, thrusting sticks are then 
used. These are strong wands having a 
padding of paper and burlap over one end 
and a rope ring tied to the other. Points 
and butt swings are executed at the padding 
and rings, respectively, as these are pre- 
sented. The man holding the stick must re- 
member to stand to one side of the man with 
the bayonet. 

2. As in First Exercise. — One man thrusts 

with a stick ; the other parries. 

3. Thrusts are Practiced at Dummies, first 

from a distance of five feet, then by advanc- 
ing two paces or more. To simulate fighting 
conditions, a frame is then arranged in 
which dummies are slung on ropes passed 
over pullies, and so manipulated that as the 
man withdraws his bayonet from one dummy 
another swings at him from a different direc- 
tion. 

4. As Soon as Proficiency Has Been Gained 

in the above exercises, the assault prac- 
tice is taken up. 
a. A course is laid out as follows: 

(1) A fire trench about 60 yards long, 

well revetted. 

(2) 20 yards in front of the trench, 

smooth wire entanglements. 

(3) 15 yards further, another trench, 

parallel to the first, 60 yards 
long, 4 feet deep and 4 feet 
wide. In this trench prone 
dummies are placed, one per 
yard. 

(4) 15 yards further, 60 dummies, 

hung on frames, parallel to the 
trenches. 



126 USE OF MODERN ARMS. 

E. Progressive Exercises — {Continued): 

(5) 15 yards further, a hurdle 4 feet 

high aud 60 yards long, paral- 
lel to the trenches. 

(6) 10 yards further, a low trip 

wire, stretched parallel to the 
trenches. 

(7) 10 yards further, 60 dummies, 

hung on frames, parallel to the 
trenches. 

(8) 15 yards further, a large trench, 

60 yards long, 6 feet deep, 10 
feet wide, containing '60 prone 
dummies, 1 per yard. 
b. Procedure: 

Each platoon, in turn, enters the first 
trench at skirmish intervals, bay- 
onets fixed. On signal, all move 
out at a walk, guiding carefully in 
line on a leader previously desig- 
nated. After passing each obstacle, 
the line is again carefully formed. 
On each of the swinging dummies 
one of the seven movements of the 
manual is used ; a long or short point 
is used on each prone dummy. All 
go down into the last trench together, 
with a good loud yell, point of the 
bayonet level with the toe, and land 
on the dummies in the bottom, stab- 
bing as they land. This course 
should be repeated several times at 
quick time, then at double time, and 
finally at a run. Remember that in 
the advance the rifle is carried at 
high port. 



USE OF MODERN ARMS. 127 

Progressive Exercises — ■ (Continued): 

5. Combat Exercises (to be used in conjunction 
with the assault practice) : 

a. Equipment for each man: 

Thrusting stick or other wooden rod 
with wooden hall or thick padding 
covering one end. (Old rifles with 
spring-bayonets are even better.) 

Plastron. 

Baseball mask. 

Pair of broadsword or single stick 
gloves. 

b. Procedure: 

The class is formed in two lines of 
about equal numbers, facing each 
other, about fifty paces apart, with 
intervals in each line of about two 
paces. A leader is designated for 
each line. The instructor stands at 
one end of the space between; an 
assistant at the other end. On the 
instructor's whistle, the lines ad- 
vance, guiding carefully on their 
leaders. When about ten paces 
apart, they charge, each seeking to 
break and roll up the opposing line. 
Sticks are carried and used as rifles 
with bayonets fixed. Any other use 
disqualifies. Use of the butt is 
harred. One thrust on the plastron 
or mask, or two hits on the extremi- 
ties, disables the recipient, who must 
promptly retire — or be retired. 
The combat continues until the sec- 
ond whistle, blown not more than 3'0 
seconds after contact; when they 
cease fighting promptly, separate, 
and form as before. 



128 USE OF MODERN ARMS. 

E. Progressive Exercises — (Continued) : 
c. Criticism: 

After each combat, the instructor will 
criticize the manner of advance and 
of fighting, especially the alignment 
kept in the advance and the team 
work in combat, and the advantage 
taken of opponents' mistakes. He 
counts the casualties and awards the 
decision. He must continually urge 
the men never to lag behind nor ad- 
vance ahead of the line, never to 
allow large gaps to occur in the line, 
and always to seize the advantage 
given by opponents who disregard 
these principles. 
d. The terrain for this exercise should 
be frequently varied. It may also 
be conducted at night, the opposing 
sides being clearly distinguished." 

Machine Guns. 

1. Properties of the machine guns are divided into 
three general classes: Mode of action, 
fire, and inconspicuousness. 

(a) The Mode of Action. — The machine gun 
acting only by its fire can prepare an attack 
or repulse an offensive movement, but it does 
not conquer ground. The latter role is almost 
exclusively that of infantry which is fitted 
for crossing all obstacles. When it will 
suffice to act by fire, employ the machine gun 
in preference to infantry, preserving the lat- 
ter for the combined action of movement and 



* The last exercise was devised and perfected by M. Jules 
Leslabav. Master of Fencing, Harvard R. 0. T. C, 1917. It is 
more completelv described in his " Manual of Bayonet Training." 



USE OF MODERN ARMS. 129 

Machine Guns — (Continued): 

fire. By the employment of the machine gun 
economize infantry, reserving a more con- 
siderable portion of it for manoeuvre 
purposes. 

(b) Fire. — Machine gun fire produces a sheath, 

dense, deep but narrow. The increase of the 
width of the sweeping fire gives to the sheath 
a greater breadth, but when the density be- 
comes insufficient, the effect produced is very 
weak. Machine gun fire will have its max- 
imum power upon an objective of narrow 
front and great depth. With the infantry 
fighting normally in thin lines the preceding 
conditions will generally only be realized 
when these lines are taken in the flank. " The 
fire of the machine gun parallel -to the prob- 
able front of the enemy — a flanking fire — 
must therefore be the rule." The fire per- 
pendicular to the front will be employed gen- 
erally on certain necessary points of passage 
as, bridges, roads, defiles, cuts, roadways, com- 
municating trenches, etc., where the enemy is 
generally forced to take a deep formation with 
a narrow front, or where he is in massed 
formation. 

(c) Inconsficuousness. — By reason of its small 

strength the machine gun section can utilize 
the smallest cover, and can consequently hide 
from the enemy, the machine gun therefore, 
more than the infantry, has the chance to act 
by surprise. The opening of the fire by sur- 
prise will be the rule, the machine gun will 
avoid revealing itself upon objectives not 
worth the trouble. Flank action and surprise 
are the two conditions to try for under all 
circumstances. 



130 USE OF MODERN ARMS. 

2. Offensive Reinforcement of a Front Momen- 
tarily Stationary. — The machine guns assisted by 
small elements of infantry cover thoroughly the getting 
in hand of the main body, the machine guns present- 
ing to the enemy a line of little vulnerability. The 
machine guns assist in securing the possession of the 
ground previously taken, and will permit time to pre- 
pare for the resumption of the forward movement. 
Preparation of the attack — machine gun fire com- 
pletes the preparation done by the artillery, either by 
acting on the personnel or by opening breaches in the 
accessary defenses. At times the machine guns alone 
may be charged with the preparation of the attack 
where it is necessary to act very quickly a,s in pursuit, 
exploitation of a success. Whatever the situation, con- 
centrate the machine gun fire on one or several points. 
Machine guns cover the flanks of attacking troops. 
They follow the advance of these troops remaining on 
the flanks, so as to be able to fire instantly on all points 
from which an attack might come. Machine guns will 
likewise be employed in intervals created intentionally 
or accidentally between units. It is here a powerful 
weapon which can rapidly be put into action by the 
Commander. The personnel and material must be pro- 
tected as far as possible from the effects of fire. 

3. Defensive. — It is here that the flanking fire is 
especially necessary. In the defensive preparation of a 
position the machine guns must be so placed that they 
will provide along the front several successive fire 
barriers. The machine guns must be ready at all times 
to stop by instantaneous fire all hostile attack. In order 
to have machine gun protection at all, it is absolutely 
necessary that they be protected from bombardment. 
This is best done by the following: Place the machine 
guns under solid cover; make their emplacement in- 
visible ; echelon the machine guns in depth. The cover 
must be placed where it can be hidden from the sight 
of the enemy, such as a counter slope, a position where 



USE OF MODERN ARMS. 131 

it is impossible to blend it, relief with an accentuated 
slope of the ground, woods, brush, etc. It is essential 
that the principal parts of the machine gun casemate 
be prepared in the rear. Only in this manner will the 
work be done solidly and rapidly. While the machine 
gunners and helpers do the excavating, specialists in 
rear prepare the parts for assembling. The latter are 
then transported to the position and the casemate is 
established, hiding the work with the greatest care from 
enemy observation. Remember that it is of the utmost 
importance that the machine gun be invisible, so the 
firing emplacements must be made outside of the 
shelter, but near enough for the gun to be brought out 
instantly and put into action. All communicating 
trenches leading to the firing emplacement must be con- 
cealed. Enough emplacements should be built to avoid 
firing daily from the emplacements especially reserved 
for cases of attack. Do not place too many machine 
guns in the first line, in case of a violent bombardment 
they are sure to be destroyed. The object to be at- 
tained is to install the machine guns in conditions, such 
that if the enemy penetrates our first line, by aid of 
his bombardment or asphyxiating gas, his infantry as 
it advances, comes under the fire of machine guns 
echeloned previously in depth, under whose fire it must 
stop. It is not a matter of sweeping a wide sector, but 
of giving over certain strips of ground flanking fire 
which will cut down surely the enemy's waves when 
they push forward. The commander should, therefore, 
divide between the first line and the terrain in rear, the 
machine guns which he controls, organizing for each 
particular case a firing emplacement in accord with the 
surrounding ground and the purpose in view. 

General Rules foe Installation". 

Machine gunners must under no circumstances aban- 
don their positions. They must, when necessary, allow 
themselves to be surrounded and defend themselves in 



132 USE OF MODERN ARMS. 

their place to the end. In many cases the heroism and 
tenacity of a few machine gunners have permitted the 
rapid retaking of a lost position. To provide for this 
resistance to a finish, the machine gun emplacements 
must fulfil the following conditions: 

1. Be surrounded by a wire entanglement of irregu- 
lar trace and as invisible as possible. 

2. In the enclosure thus created having several firing 
emplacements, in case one or more becomes useless. 

3. The personnel must have all the means for pro- 
tection against gas and have in addition rations, water 
and abundant ammunition. 

Employment of Fiee and Instruction. 

The more grazing the fire of a machine gun the more 
effective it is. This causes the principal employment 
of the machine gun to be at distances where the tra- 
jectory is flattest, that is under .800 or 1,000 yards. 
However, the effort to obtain a grazing fire must not 
exclude long distance fire. This latter will always be 
justified when directed upon important objectives, or 
necessary points of passage. For this fire to have some 
efficacy, it is necessary to calculate the range with the 
greatest precision. On the defensive indirect fire will 
be employed sometimes to annoy the supply, reliefs, 
etc. To give results, great quantities of ammunition 
will have to be expended. All of the officers and non- 
commissioned officers and as many men as possible must 
be capable of firing the machine 'gun, so that at the time 
of an attack no gun will remain idle for want of per- 
sonnel. It is, moreover, essential to keep up the train- 
ing of the personnel by having them fire at least twice 
a month, and, if possible, once a Week. 

Resume. 

Machine guns must be utilized in the greatest 
measure in order to economize the infantry. 



USE OF MODERN ARMS. 133 

Seek to employ them always in a flank fire. 
Conceal them so as to get surprise fire. 
Echelon them and shelter them so as to avoid their 
premature destruction. 

Points Before Firing. 

1. Thoroughly overhaul the gun to see that no part 
is deficient, and that the mechanism works freely. 

2. See that the barrel is clean and dry. 

3. See that the barrel mouthpiece is tight. 

4. See that small hole in gas regulator is to the rear. 

5. Thoroughly oil all working parts, especially the 
cam slot and exterior of the bolt, and the striker post 
and piston. 

6. Weigh and adjust the mainspring. 

7. See that the mounting is firm. 

8. Examine the magazines and ammunition. 

9. See that the spare parts and oil reserve are 
handy. 

Points During Firing. 

1. During a temporary cessation of fire, re-oil all 
working parts. 

2. Replace a partly emptied magazine with a full 
one. 

3. Examine the mounting to see that it is firm. 

4. See that empty magazines are refilled without 
delay. 

Points After Firing. 

1. Unload. 

2. Oil the bore and chamber, piston rod and gas 
cylinder. 

3. Sort out live rounds from empty cases. 

4. See that mainspring is eased. 

5. Thoroughly clean and oil the gun on returning 
to quarters. 

Clean the bore daily for several days. 



134 USE OF MODERN ARMS. 

It is of the greatest importance that the points 
before, during, and after firing, should be carefully 
attended to as otherwise the number of stoppages will 
be unnecessarily increased. 

Nine out of ten stoppages are due to want of care. 

Immediate action must become instinctive and 
automatic. 

Grenade Instruction. 

Introduction. — War, as it is being fought on the 
western front, has brought to light many new weapons ; 
but no other weapon that this struggle has brought 
forth exceeds the grenade in importance. It is not a 
new weapon, but its present importance is entirely new. 
Its extensive use has grown out of conditions on the 
western front ; conditions which have never been seen 
previous to this war. The fact that armies have taken 
to " digging themselves in " has necessitated the use 
of some other weapon than the rifle. The rifle with its 
flat trajectory is of little use against an enemy who is 
completely hidden from view and who can go on exist- 
ing under ground. Hence the reversion to the ancient 
grenade — but with all its modern improvements. 
The grenade has shown itself to be the weapon that can 
solve the problem of seeking out an enemy who is under 
ground; its trajectory is high and its fire is plunging, 
so that it can be thrown from a place of concealment 
and protection and into a place equally well concealed 
from ordinary view. 

The importance of the grenade may be judged from 
its extensive use by both the Allies and the Germans; 
and also by the formations now adopted by both British 
and Trench armies for the purpose of exploiting its use. 
In a British Battalion the normal percentage of expert 
bombers is 25. In the French Company 36 per cent 
of the men are devoted to grenade work. 

A grenade has been defined as a slow moving, high 
trajectory missile containing high explosive and explod- 
ing by contact or time fuse. Grenades may be divided 



USE OF MODERN ARMS. 135 

roughly into two classes — 1, hand grenades, and 2, 
rifle grenades, and each of these classes may be sub- 
divided as regards means of explosion, into 1, time fuse, 
or 2, percussion grenades. 

Among the time-fuse hand grenades may be men- 
tioned the Mills No. 5, Stokes bomb, smoke bombs, 
fumite bombs, etc. The Mills is easily the most import- 
ant and has come to be the standard adopted by the 
Allies. The percussion grenade is little used — the 
most important among those of this type is the so-called 
" mushroom," named from its shape. 

Chief among the rifle grenades may be mentioned 
the Mills No. 23, the Hale No. 3- and the Newton No. 
24. Just as the Mills hand grenade has become the 
standard, so has the Mills rifle grenade attained that 
pre-eminence. A more detailed description of the vari- 
ous sorts of grenades cannot be attempted in this brief 
space; but one or two diagrams at the close of the 
chapter may serve to clarify the subject to some extent. 

Any course in grenade training should have a three- 
fold purpose : 

1st. To give the individual a practical knowledge of 
the working of the grenades in use. 

2nd. To teach him how to throw them. 

■3rd. To make him acquainted with the general prin- 
ciples of organization and the execution of a grenade 
attack, either as a separate operation or as a part of a 
general attack. The time spent on any such course of 
training is a matter to be settled in the light of local 
considerations; but for purposes of preliminary train- 
ing of a great number of men a period of two weeks is 
usually sufficient, with time allotted according to some 
such plan as this : ( 1 ) 10 separate half -hour sessions 
of practice in throwing from various positions and at 
the various targets; (2) 2 hours of study and a like 
amount of time spent in a conference for the purpose of 
clearing up matters that are hazy. In this brief time 
(only 9 hours) the foundation may be laid for a more 



136 USE OF MODERN ARMS. 

thorough training of the specialists later on. In any 
such course the use of dunimy grenades should always 
precede the use of any live ones ; and men should he 
taught caution above all other things. This is a point 
easily lost sight of when men are using only dummies ; 
but it is well worth remembering, for obvious reasons. 

First: Giving the Individual a Practical 
Knowledge of the Working of the Grenades in 
Use. — The differences in the construction and the uses 
of hand and rifle grenades should be brought out clearly. 
The various sorts of grenades should be explained and 
men should not forget the importance of knowing the 
grenades of the enemy as well as our own. This knowl- 
edge may one day prove of no little importance. As 
has already been stated, the Mills No. 5 is the standard 
among hand grenades of the Allies. It conforms to 
the general description of hand grenades ; i. e., it is an 
egg-shaped projectile, more or less hollow, and loaded 
with a charge of explosive. Besides this it has an ap- 
paratus for setting off the bursting charge. It weighs 
1 pound 5 ounces approximately, and 4 ounces of 
this is high explosive. The shell being of serrated 
cast-iron, an explosion will scatter a sort of shrapnel 
over an area equal to three times the height. Xo more 
need be said of the effectiveness of such a weapon. 
Among rifle grenades the Mills is also the standard 
more or less, although the French make great use of a 
rifle grenade that fits over the muzzle of the rifle, fired 
by ball cartridge, in contrast to the Mills No. 23, 
which has a rod running down the barrel of the rifle 
and which is propelled by the explosion of a blank car- 
tridge. The maximum range of this grenade with a 
5'%-inch stem is 12'0 yards, the gun being fired at an 
angle of 45 degrees. The Newton Improved (a rifle 
grenade which explodes on contact) has a range of 250 
yards ; the Hale No. 3 also explodes on contact and has 
a range of 200-225 yards. 



USE OF MODERN ARMS. 



137 



v^-cr/o/y - Mills Haw Grenade *S 




DeTac/ia-bta. 6ox J*fij ~ permtfinjlKe. 
Milk -fe Uusej cs o nf/e. areriaJe. 



XX 







Grenade about to be 1k { 



rown. 




138 USE OF MODERN ARMS. 

Second : Instruction in Theowixg.- — - As pre- 
viously stated the use of dummy grenades should pre- 
cede the use of any live ones. Due precautions should 
be taken at all times, even when working with dummy 
grenades, for a habit of carelessness is not to be toler- 
ated with this sort of weapon. Men should be instructed 
to throw from standing, kneeling and prone positions; 
although this last-named position is little used. Dis- 
tance is important but Accuracy is Essential. Men 
should always be taught to throw at a definite target, 
even when throwing in the open during preliminary 
work. The men may work in groups, one group 
throwing and the other returning. This method keeps 
all hands occupied and furnishes a medium for a little 
competition, which is a very helpful thing in training 
of this sort. A manual of the following sort may be 
of use in acquiring the proper sort of throw. 

1. Pick up the grenade with the left hand. 

2. Prepare to throw — face to the right and transfer 

the grenade to the right hand. 

3. Take aim — left hand and arm extended up and 

straight toward the target, right hand and arm 
behind the thrower in the same plane as the 
left. 

4. Withdraw pin with left hand. 

5. Throw — use a straight overhead motion and do 

not bend the arm at the elbow. It is not a 
baseball throw. The tendency for most of us 
Americans is to follow a perfectly natural 
habit - — try to use the baseball throw. This 
is to be discouraged for several reasons, the 
chief one being that the grenade weighs about 
a pound and a half, whereas our baseball 
weighs only a third of this amount. Then, 
too, it often happens in the trenches that a 
grenade duel will last for hours. Under such 
circumstances the last grenade may decide the 



USE OF MODERN ARMS. 139 

issue and endurance will be a mighty telling- 
factor. Hence, the insistence upon the over- 
head throw. 

The preliminary throwing should take place in the 
open but always with a definite target, an outline of a 
section of trench being the best sort of target. Another 
excellent idea is to have a target arranged according 
to the diagram shown herewith and to keep score. This 
procedure will also add incentive for competition and 
will produce results. After men have thrown in the 
open for a sufficient period, they should proceed to the 
next stage: This is the stage of throwing in a cage or 
from behind and over obstacles. There are three dis- 
tinct phases of this feature of the training: (1.) 
The thrower sees the target but must throw over an 
obstacle. (2.) The target is invisible; the thrower is 
aided by an observer and a periscope; the observer 
notes the fall of the grenades and gives directions as 
follows — " So many yards right or left' 7 or " Shorten 
or lengthen so many yards." (3.) Actual throwing 
in trenches. This stage immediately precedes that of 
" working up a trench." 

Third: Instruction in Grenade Organiza- 
tion. — Men should be given a certain amount of 
theoretical instruction as to the composition of the 
armies now on the western front ; this in order that 
they may see the part that grenadiers and bombers are 
playing in the struggle. They should be shown the 
organization of the British Infantry and how the first 
section of each platoon is composed exclusively of 
bombers and — rifle grenadiers ; they should also be 
taught how the bombers and grenadiers are concentra- 
ted in the French organization. The typical bombing 
squad consists of 7 or 8 men and a leader who take 
positions as follows: 1 and 2, bayonet men; 3, first 
thrower; 4, first carrier; -5, leader; 6, rifle bomber; 7, 
second thrower ; 8, second carrier ; 9, rifle bomber. One 



140 



USE OF MODERN ARMS. 



j| 






T)ig£e7->o/v of AT1>c* 






/ / / / / 



^8 




L = U«.cUir 
13 = /3.mb«r 



> pmecTioix of »tt/>c* 



12% 



0G® ® 



^ 



CcifuNiCaTioiv t*e~ch 



^2 



<£> 






ALom 6 A. 



GOerSADE RANGE. 



n 3 .m 




USE OF MODERN ARMS. 141 

of these bayonet men may be reserved to act as a sniper. 
The leader acts as an observer and directs the work of 
the bombers. The rifle bombers outrange the hostile 
bombers and also afford protection on the flanks. Every 
man must be taught his job and must be thoroughly 
instructed in the work of the squad as a whole in order 
that each man may be able to fill any position and 
that there may be perfect teamwork. 

Points to Remember. 

1. Men should always have a definite target for 
their throwing — an outline of a trench is usually to be 
preferred. 

2. Caution in handling grenades should be made a 
habit. 

3. Accuracy is essential. 

4. Training should be progressive, both for men and 
organizations. 

5. Keep up competition among the men; rivalry will 
increase practice and men will throw grenades for 
recreation. This will get results. Let two men throw 
at each other. A good shot will make the other man 
move. 

6. Insist upon the straight overhead throw. It is 
less tiresome and when developed properly will give 
equal accuracy with any other method. 

7. Teamwork in a bombing squad is essential. 

8. Under new methods of warfare every infantry- 
man is a bomber; but specialists must be trained. 

9. Officer must be a real leader and the best fighter 
in his platoon. 

10. Qualification tests should be arranged and the 
better qualified men taken for special training in this 
art. 



CHAPTER 5. 
Map Sketching. 

'Map sketching is an important factor in trench war- 
fare to-day as it is in a war of movement. A fairly ac- 
curate map will- indicate more than many words and in 
much less time. Time is the great factor in war. In- 
struction must also be rapid. Here are ten lessons which 
would occupy a week if taken morning and afternoon. 
The aim of the instruction as in company rifle shooting 
is to train many men to do a satisfactory job, not to 
make a few finished topographers. Neatness, accuracy 
and initiative are cardinal points. 

For the instructor, reference should be made to 
Grieves' " Military Sketching and Map Reading/' 2nd 
edition, if he desires to supplement any points given 
here. 

Lesson 1. (Class Room — Four Hours.) 
Problem — ■ Map Reading. 

Study the conventional signs found in the " Manual 
for Non-commissioned Officers- and Privates of In- 
fantry of the Army of the IT. S.," 1917, page 273, or in 
Grieves, pages 28^35. These conventional signs are not 
universal and must be used only as indications of the 
general practice. 

In map sketching in the field few conventional signs 
are used, and the items of importance are written on 
the map, such as Woods, 'Cultivated, Hedge, SNvamp, 
etc. 

Taking Up Map Scales. — There are three ways of 
indicating the relation between the actual distance on 
the ground and the space the same distance occupies on 
the map : 

1. The graphic scale is a straight line divided into 
units, as miles, yards, feet or meters, which represents 
the actual ground distance. Thus if 6" = 1 mile the line 



144 MAP SKETCHING. 

would be six inches long and marked at one end and 
1 mile at the other, three inches being marked % mile, 
etc. It is important to always have this graphic scale 
on a map so that if the paper gets wet or is stretched 
from its original size the scale will change in the same 
proportion. 

2. A statement in words or figures, e. g., 3 inches 
equal one mile, meaning that 3 inches measured any- 
where on the map represent 1 mile on the actual ground. 

3. The Representative Fraction (generally known 
abbreviated as R. F.) having a number above the line 
that shows the unit length on the map and below the 
line the number of units which are in the correspond- 
ing actual ground distance. For example, if 1" = 1 
mile, then the R. F. is : 

1" (map distance) 
63360'' (1 mile — ground distance) 

if 3" = 1 mile the R. F. is : 

3" (map distance) 1 



63360" (1 mile — ground distance) 21120 

if 6" = 1 mile : 



or 



63360" 
if 12" = 1 mile: 

12' 



or 



633*60" 5280 

In reading a map one must know the scale and also 
where the North is. This is always indicated by an 
arrow pointing either to the magnetic North or the true 
North. If to the magnetic North the needle will have 
but one barb away from the true North. The angle be- 
tween the magnetic and the true North is the 
declination. 

Placing the map in proper relation to the ground so 
that points of the compass coincide on map and ground 
is called orienting the map. 



MAP SKETCHING. 145 

In map work there is one vital point to remember; 
practically all the ground surface is in its present form 
as a result of water action 

1. Look for the water courses, that is the drainage 
system. It will give the general slope of the land. 

2. 'Look' for the high points between the water 
courses, remembering that there is always a valley then 
a hill then a valley again continued in succession. 

3. Finally locate towns, railroads, main highways 
and work down to the minor details. 

In measuring a map to get the actual distances on the 
ground, copy the graphic scale on any piece of paper 
and apply this directly or if your distances exceed your 
scale use the edge of a piece of paper and then apply it 
to the graphical scale on the map. 

Lesson 2. (Field Work — Five Hours.) 
Problem — Stride Scale Map Making. 

Producing a map from the actual ground requires 
certain instruments. The second lesson takes up the 
preparation of the stride scale on the alidade and the 
different kinds of maps made in military sketching. 

The alidade is a triangular ruler with one or more 
working scales on it beside other measurements. The 
working scale is, for infantry, the stride or the space of 
ground covered from left foot to left foot again in walk- 
ing, reduced to the proper map distance. This varies 
with individuals of course. Any scale of units, how- 
ever, can be used as, horse trot, telegraph' poles, etc. 

The working scale for each man is made by having 
him step off a measured course, say 440 yards. The 
ground should not be too even as a general average is 
needed, moreover the pace must be the natural gait 
of the individual under ordinary circumstances. Let 
him count the course three times then average the three 
results for the final estimate. 
10 



146 MAP SKETCHING. 

Now to convert this into a working scale for the 
alidade made on a scale of six inches to the_mile; take 
the case of a man who takes 220 strides in 440 yards: 
440 yards = 15,840 inches 
15,840 -f- 220 = 7>2, or his stride in inches 
then 8''8'0 strides — 1 mile or 6" on the scale. 
It is better to have a scale of 1,000 strides which is 
easily done by the proportion: 

1,000 sts. : -8-80 sts. : : x : 6 
x = 6.8 
now draw a line 6.8' inches long and a diagonal line 
from it; divide this diagonal line into 10' equal parts 
for each 100 paces at any convenient scale and draw 
a line from the end of the tenth part to the end of the 
6.8 inches line, draw lines parallel to this line from 
each of the divisions. The 6v8" line is then divided into 
10 equal parts ; each of these parts may be divided in 
the same manner into tenths. 

Your scale is ready to be pasted or transferred to the 
alidade and each 6 ..8. inches on the map will equal 
1,000 of your strides on the ground, or about 1 1-12' 
miles (2,000 yards). 

There are two general classes of sketches : 

1. Road Sketch. — A traverse (passing over) made 
along a definite rout showing all features of military 
importance for a distance of 200 or 300 yards on each 
side of the road. A road sketch is always made on a 
scale of 3 inches to 1 mile. 

2. Aeea Sketch. — A map of a definite locality. 
There are 3 kinds of area sketches according to oppor- 
tunity for observation: 

(a) Position Sketch — when access may be 

had to the whole area. 

(b) Outpost Sketch — where part of the 

ground must be mapped without passing- 
over it. This form is applicable par- 
ticularly to trench warfare. Intersec- 



MAP SKETCHING. 



147 



filafi* 



At Caiy 




wnr<v <cs 

iNTeRJECTiortS 

Vc Ken ti e v p 
"BiSfO" f\n/GLES 
To OCT 
APPRoxWKTF 

Point 



KEEP PZnciu "Point 

SHf\f$P AT /H-L TlflES 




AkibA-bE 



s&iQ 




--^i>^ 


•1 

' i 







Sketch Bomd 

VY.Th COMPflSi *ND PflPfR 
PfiteTECTING woRjc 





57" 



3KETCH |1 QoARO 

Foj^ USE op 3K»P« BOARD 



148 MAP SKETCHING. 

2. Area Sketch — (Continued): 

section and resection are nsed to locate 
points within the enemy's lines. 
(c) Place Sketch — when sketch must be made 
from one point, as when the proximity 
of the enemy would prevent any move- 
ment; as from trench observation sta- 
tions, etc. ; also an elaboration of the 
landscape or horizon sketch which is 
used everywhere in the trenches today. 
From one point an actual outline of the 
opposite trench and background is made 
in perspective, reference points on the 
horizon being marked on the edge of 
a pad at arm's length. These marks 
are then prolonged on the paper and the 
horizon is sketched. In 'like manner 
the middle distance and the foreground 
come under observation and are put on 
in one below the other. 

Time must be allowed the men to make their stride 
scales and to paste or transfer them to their alidades. 

Lessor 3. (Fieed Work — Five Hours.) 
The problem is to make a Position Sketch about one 
mile square closing the traverse. First considering the 
sketch board, compass, pencils, etc. ; next the orienting, 
sighting and pacing; finally the uses of intersection 
and resection and in making allowance for error. 

The sketch board should be about 12 to 18 inches 
square, being used with or without a tripod. A cheap 
camera tripod is excellent. The board should have a 
compass attached so that it will remain in the same 
relative position on the board. If iron thumb tacks 
are used avoid getting them too near the compass. A 
hard pencil must be used to obtain good results. The 
paper must be smooth and w T here possible covered with 
another sheet fastened on but one side which will 



MAP SKETCHING. 149 

readily fold back when one desires to work on the 
sketch. 

By always placing the board so that the compass 
reads North it will be oriented correctly. Care must 
be used when near electric wires or masses of metal as 
automobiles, railroad tracks, etc., which will attract 
the needle from its true azimuth (X. and S. direction) 
and thus throw off the whole map. In such cases it is 
far better to back sight and use the compass only at 
intervals to verify the sights. 

This brings up the matter of sighting. It is im- 
portant to make long shots thus reducing the amount 
of individual error. In taking a sighting point make 
sure it can be recognized when reached and make sure 
to look at the reverse side in order to recognize it in 
case of back sighting if necessary. Always carry 
several large-headed pins using one at your present 
station and resting the side of the alidade against it, 
swinging the other end for sighting. 

After sighting and lining the sight on your sketch, 
step off evenly to pace the distance. Time is always 
a factor in military mapping and where possible make 
mental notes as you go along as to where roads or other 
important features are located, so that you can place 
them in their proper place on the map when you have 
reached the next station. It is well always to set a 
good pace for here time can be readily saved. 

Making an intersection is very simple. For as the 
sketcher moves along he ties his matp together by 
sighting at any prominent object near his area, run- 
ning these lines very lightly and only where he assumes 
the points to lie on his map. An abbreviation on the 
line or a number referring to a list off to one side will 
answer to recall the object. At any other station where 
the same point can be seen a similar line is drawn and 
where the two lines cross will be the location of the 
object. In the case of three lines not crossing at the 
same point take the middle of the triangle so formed. 



150 MAP SKETCHING. 

Resection is just the reverse of this process. The 
mapper wants to know where he is located on the map. 
If he is properly oriented and can aim at two points 
on the ground which he has located on the map, he 
places a pin at one of these locations on the map and 
aims with the alidade at the object on the ground 
drawing a line towards himself; this is repeated with 
the other known point and where the two lines cross 
on the map will be the point he is standing at. 

In intersection the greatest accuracy is obtained by 
running the rays so as to meet as nearly as possible 
at right angles. 

In running a traverse the sketcher must expect to 
find some error at his closing point. This error must 
be distributed over the whole traverse so as not to have 
all the error concentrated at one point. 

Lesson 4. (Field Work — Four Hours.) 

Problem. — Make a simple sketch, containing topo- 
graphical details using the traverse made during the 
preceding lesson. Use of conventional signs should be 
emphasized and the appreciation of features of military 
importance impressed. A tendency is to put in details 
to a point of confusion. Judgment must be developed 
to choose telling points. 

A sharp pencil is always needed in sketching; in 
putting in the topographical details special attention 
must be given to the pencil. Keep the point sharp and 
make clear, distinct signs. 

Lesson 5. (Class Room — Four Hours.) 

Problem. — Contours, the Vertical Interval, Use of 
the Slope Board, Map Distance, Visibility and 
Profiles. 

A contour is an imaginary line on the surface of the 
earth all points of which have the same elevation from 
a base or datum level, sea level usually being this base. 



MAP SKETCHING. 151 

Slice an apple into pieces %-inch thick ; where the cuts 
come may represent the contour lines. Take these 
individual slices, beginning at the bottom and outline 
them on a sheet of paper with a pencil (having run a 
nail through the apple first to keep each piece in 
place). The resulting circles will represent the apple's 
outline at 3/2 -inch intervals. 

Contours are always at equal elevations from each 
other, and the Vertical Interval (known by the abbre- 
viation V. I.) is the measure between successive con- 
tour lines. In military maps the V. I. is always the 
same for each map scale : 

1 inch to the mile, the V. I. is 60 feet. 

3 inch to the mile, the V. I. is 20 feet. 

6 inch to the mile, the Y. I. is 10 feet. 

12 inch to the mile, the Y. I. is 5 feet. 

IXote that the Y. I. changes in proportion to the 
scale, a map on a 3 inch to the mile scale is 3 times as 
large as one on a scale of 1 inch to the mile, while the 
Y. I. is 1/3 as great, hence the former shows 3 times 
as many contours as the latter. 

Map Distance means the horizontal distance between 
two contour lines on a map and indicates a certain 
degree of slope. As the scale increases the Y. I. de- 
creases in proportion and the M. D. therefore remains 
the same for the same degree of slope whatever the 
scale of the map. By computation we find that a one 
degree slope rises one foot for every 57.3 feet hori- 
zontal distance, so a one degree slope would have a 20 
foot rise in 1,146 feet horizontal distance, this dis- 
tance equals .65 of an inch on the map if the scale is 
3" to 1 mile. 

The term " Map Distance " is also loosely used to 
denote distance between points as measured on the map. 
Care should be taken to distinguish between these two 
meanings. 

Distances between contours, scale 3" to 1 mile : 
y 2 ° slope = 1.3", 1° slope =.65", 2° slope = .32", 



152 MAP SKETCHING. 

3° slope — .22". These distances are already on the 
alidade and if yon get a slope of 2° with the slope 
board and have the distance from your station on the 
map to the point of aim either by pacing, intersection 
or resection, apply the M. D. scale as many times as 
it will go. This will give the number of contour lines 
crossing the traverse and the difference in elevation. 
The spacing of the contours may not be even between 
your station and the point of aim in which case the 
position of the contours must be estimated by eye. 

If your elevation above the datum or sea level is 
unknown at the start assume any elevation which is 
great enough to put the datum lower than the lowest 
spot of the area to be sketched. 

The sketching board is easily made to serve as a 
slope board in this manner. Hang a plumb bob 
about an inch below the center of a straight edge of 
the board while pointing at the horizon, using the back 
of the board. Mark a point 5.7" directly below and 
draw a semicircle through it with the same radius. 
K"ow mark the point below the center zero and from 
it divide the arc using chords one tenth of an inch long. 
This will give a scale reading in degrees. By sighting 
along the top of the board at some object at the height 
of the eye from the ground the degree of slope is 
shown by the plumb bob on the scale below. Care 
must be exercised to prevent the wind from disturbing 
the reading. A protractor may be used in the same 
manner by sighting along the top and using a plumb 
bob to record the angle. 

In reading maps it is important to know whether 
points are visible from each other due to intervening 
ridges or other topographical features. This can be 
told by laying off 1 accurately the distance on the map 
between the points in question and using as datum the 
lowest of the 3 points, then draw vertical lines from 
the 2' higher points, making them in proportion to their 
elevation with any convenient scale. Draw a line be- 



MAP SKETCHING. 



153 



tween the first and last points and, if the intervening 
vertical cuts this line the second point is not visible 
from the first. Take for example, two points A and B, 
1,760 yards apart, by the map, A 500 feet and B 450 
feet above sea level, the intervening point is 476 feet 
above sea level and 500 yards from B. As B is the 
lowest we will call its elevation zero or at datum, then 
elevation of A is 50 feet and C 25 feet. 

Plate 

rf IO 



VISIBILITY Solution 

Similar tkianglcs 




Coor d, n a tf. P*PER 



d, ir-ri^? 1 f^ a J 




Another method of deciding visibility is by propor- 
tion. Measure the distance between the three points A, 
Bi and C and obtain their elevations above the datum 



154 MAP SKETCHING. 

(lowest of the 3) and using similar triangles. Take 
the same case as above, letting X represent the point 
above which the view is clear at 1,2 60 yards from point 
A, the line of sight passes through this point. 
17,60 (A — B) : 500 (B — C) : : 50 (elev. A) : X 
solving, X =14.2 

Xow, since the ground at point is 25 feet above 
the base and the line of sight passes within 14.2 feet 
of the base at this place, an observer at A is unable to 
see B. 

The matter of profiling is very simple. Merely mark 
where the contours cut the edge of a piece of co-ordinate 
paper and extend the proper elevations, then pass a line 
through these points, remembering that the surface of 
the ground has a natural curve. 

Lesson 6. (Field Work — Five Hours.) 

Problem. — By use of the .slope scale on the sketch 
board and the contour interval scale on the alidade, each 
man will secure vertical data on the flat sketch made in 
the fourth lesson. Certain critical elevations will be 
determined and marked with red flags before hand. 
The elevations of two points on the ground will be fur- 
nished, one as the datum and the other as a check. 
Draw in contours of this sketch with the help of drain- 
age lines and elevations already secured. 

The chief points to be considered are to take slopes 
from points established on the sketch ; to take several 
sights and average the angle of slope; to properly lay 
off the elevation by using the slope scale on the alidade ; 
and finally to put in the contours along these lines of 
sight on the spot thus allowing for difference in topogra- 
phy between the point of sight and the station from 
which the elevation is taken. Careful note must be 
made of the drainage systems as these are the keynotes 
to the sketch and finally the contours are connected to- 
gether, keeping in mind always that no contour stops 
unless it makes a closed curve or goes off the map. Re- 



MAP SKETCHING. 155 

member also that contours make fingers pointing up 
stream and are blunt around hill sides. Contours cross 
streams to opposite points and break at roads, continu- 
ing on the other side. Uniform slopes have equally- 
spaced contours. Do not try to measure every slope, 
two intersecting elevation sights on a hill will check the 
height. Put the intervening contours in by eye. 
Lesson 7. (Classroom — Foue Houes.) 

Problem. — Completing the map sketch previously 
made and making a landscape sketch. 

It is important to complete a map and no matter how 
good it is, if certain points are omitted, the value of 
the work is very much decreased. The sketcher must 
clear the sketch of all unnecessary lines and notes and 
make his lettering clear on the map. Be sure that the 
following items are on the sketch before it is turned in. 

1. Location of the ground shown. 

2. Line of magnetic north shown by an arrow, and 
if declination is known, the true north also. 

3. Graphic scale and representative fraction — R.F. 

4. Vertical interval — V.I. 

5. Sketcher's name and organization to which he be- 
longs. 

6. Date. 

A landscape sketch is a place sketched with details 
shown in perspective. The horizon is always of mili- 
tary importance and should be shown as well as inter- 
vening crests, woods, houses, etc. Landscape sketching 
in trench warfare is a necessary accomplishment of the 
observer. The beginner will at first be confused by a 
mass of details, but he must note only the outline of 
the features sketched. First draw the sky line and 
crests, then fill in the other details with fewest lines 
possible. Unnecessary shading tends to detract from 
the clearness of the sketch. There will be great diffi- 
culty in getting the perspective, note the size of objects, 
the further away they are the smaller they seem. Make 
them so. In making the sketch, hold the pad in front 



156 



MAP SKETCHING. 



Pldte 




\ 



J\ 






3— +.„ J*oj<te 



S0T60 



MAP SKETCHING. 157 

with one eye closed, the upper edge of the pad hori- 
zontal; a string 20 inches long is tied to the pad and 
held between the teeth to insure the same distance from 
the eye each time. Moreover, if it is desired to locate 
objects by deflection of an angle from a reference point, 
this can be done by using mils. One mil is 1-6400 of 
a circle. At 20 inches a half-inch interval subtends 25 
mils. 

The paper is oriented by bringing the sector desired 
along the upper edge of the pad. The points desired 
are then in proper positions, both horizontally and 
vertically. 

Place a mark at the upper edge for points desired. 
The sky line should be located first. Now carry these 
lines down, having drawn three horizontal lines about 
% inch apart, beginning with the highest point on the 
top line. Marks locating the other features_are likewise 
transposed in vertical and horizontal portions. 

Now draw sky line connecting transposed marks, 
then such other points as crests, trenches, houses, etc. 
After practice most other features can be drawn in 
without reorienting, the sky line having been drawn. 
The vertical elevation should be slightly exaggerated. 
Objects in the background should be drawn in lightly 
while nearby features are indicated by heavy lines. 
Avoid details, draw only silhouette, shade only in show- 
ing woods. 

Lesson 8. (Field Work — Five Hours.) 
Problem. — Make complete area sketch including 
contours, with no data furnished other than the initial 
elevation. 

Before commencing the work summarize the import- 
ant points involved. 

1. If possible select a base line. 

2. Locate as many points by intersection as possible. 

3. Make traverse by road, check locations by re- 
section. 



158 MAP SKETCHING. 

4. At good observation points observe and complete 
the sketch as far as possible. 

At each station keep the following points in view : 

1. Back sight on previous station. 

2. Select new sighting point ahead. 

3. Determine elevation by slope board. 

4. Put in contours where possible noting the drain- 
age and critical points of the general slope and the 
terrain. 

5. Put in details along traverse just made of all 
topographical features of military importance. 

6. Determine your present elevation. 

7. Make as many shots for intersection as you can 
and mark them. 

8. Look for possible resection shots. 

Lessors 9 and 10. (Field Work — Nine Hours.) 

Problem. — Make a road sketch of about 12 miles 
with scale of 3 inches to the mile, V. I. 20 feet. This 
should include details of military importance to a dis- 
tance of 300 yards on either side of the road. 

Keep in mind these points : 

1. Start carefully and give attention to every part 
of the map. 

2. Keep the board properly oriented. 

3. Watch the water drainage systems. 

4. Put down all necessary details at each setup. 

5. ISTote high hills and towns not on immediate 
route, condition of roads, fences, cultivation, hedges, 
cuts and fills, bridges (kind and length) , railroads, tele- 
graph and telephone lines, schools, churches, etc., notice 
particularly woods and points of concealment for hostile 
troops. 

Do the work at each station for elevation, contours 
and the noting of necessary details so that the sketch 
will be complete as you go along. Make certain that 
the title of the sketch, scale, orientation, etc., are all 



MAP SKETCHING. 159 

clearly indicated, for a road map may have to be com- 
pleted by another or may be called for suddenly when 
it will be useless without these details. 

Remember there are but two things absolutely essen- 
tial to a good road sketch ; a good traverse and the loca- 
tion of the drainage system in its relation to this 
traverse. With this control approximate contours can 
be drawn by anyone having a knowledge of the prin- 
ciples of topography. Never plot unimportant details. 
Prominent buildings and farm houses are of value for 
locating oneself. Woods and orchards are shown for 
tactical reasons but no one can expect to show every 
fence, ditch or bit of cover that might hide a patrol. 

Map Reading. 

(Gettysburg 3" Map — Htotekstown Sheet.) 
Plattsburg Barracks, N". Y., Sept. 17, 1917: 

1. What is the shortest distance by road from 
Biglersville to Texas ? 

2. Describe the road between Texas and Table Rock. 

3. Is it a cut or a fill along the railroad about % 
mile east of Granite Hill Station ? 

4. What is meant by 931 on Chestnut Hill? 

5. 'Can a man on the summit of hill 712 (about one 
mile southwest of Plainview) be seen from the town of 
Plainview ? 

6. Point out two fords on the Oonewago River. 

7. Where is the highest point on the road from Plain- 
view to Heidlesburg ? 

8. Describe the fences along the road from Texas to 
Table Rock Station. 

9. Is Hill 5'66 S, W. from D. Wert visible from 
Henderson (Meeting House? 

10. Of what material is the bridge at Bridge School 
House constructed ? 

Harvard College: 

1. Can a sentinel standing at 707 see road fork 535 
(about 1,500' yards south) ? 



160 MAP SKETCHING. 

2. An enemy patrol is marching north on the 544- 
6'1<6 road, and has crossed the stream (750 yards north 
of 544.) Oan this patrol see the Red outguard at 707 
from any point between stream and cross roads 64'6 ? 

3. Can the sentinel at 712 see the road fork '51'8 
. (1,S50 yards southwest from 712). 

4. Can the sentinel at 712 see the cross roads 561 
(about 1,200 yards southeast). 

Assuming the height of a man as 5' {/' above the 
ground and trees and buildings as 30' 0". 

1. Is the ground at road fork 552 near D. Wirt 
visible to a patrol on Hill 712 ? If not what is the 
obstructing point ? Turn in profile, using cross section 
paper. 

2. Disregarding trees, is a man standing on Bridge 
523 near Bridge S. H.' visible from Hill 712? 

Solve by any method desired indicating the method. 

1. Make a profile from location of the letter k ' ; U " 
of Chestnut Hill near Center Mills to Hill 712, 2% 
miles to the south. 

2. Is the location of the letter " B " of Beatrich 
visible from " U " of Chestnut Hill ? If not what 
obstructs ? 

1. Can a man on Hill 712 see a man at cross roads 
554 in Hunterstown (disregard trees) ? 

2. To a man standing at the point where contour 6'80 
crosses the road just south of 707, where does the road- 
bed first become invisible ? 

1. When the point arrives at Hill 647 can it see the 
road fork 610 to the northwest? 

2. Wlhen the flank patrol reaches Benders Church 
cross roads can it see an enemy patrol at the house mid- 
way on the road 534 — 5i54 one mile to the northeast? 

3. Looking north along the Center Mills road from 
Hill 647, where does the road first become invisible ? 

1. What does 1/21120 mean ? 

2. What direction is the general drainage system on 
this sheet ? 



CHAPTER 6. 

Helpful References to the Articles of War. 

(Extracted from M. C. M. and Guide to the Articles of 
War — Waumbaugh's Lectures.) 

Military Law is the body of rules that governs mem- 
bers of the army. Military Law is based upon the 
'Articles of Wiar approved by Congress, August 2»7, 
1916, effective March 1, 1917. This body of rules 
defines : 

(1) Punishable offenses of members of the army. 

(2) The Method of determining guilt. 

(3) Punishment. 

The present Articles of War are revisions of those 
from the Revolution. 

Article 1. 
Definitions : 

(1) The word ' ; officer" shall be construed to refer 

to a commissioned officer (and no one else). 

(2) The word " soldier " to include non-commis- 

sioned officer or any other enlisted man. 

Article 2. 

Persons Subject to Military Law: 

(1) All officers and soldiers of the Regular Army. 

(2) All volunteers in the service of the U. S. 

(3) All other persons lawfully called, drafted or 

ordered into such service. 

(4) West Point cadets. 

(5) Officers and soldiers of the Marine Corps when 

detached for service with the army, by order 
of the President. 

(6) All retainers to the camp, or accompanying or 

serving with the army in time of war, both 
11 



162 HELPFUL REFERENCES TO THE ARTICLES OF WAR. 

Peesoxs Subject to Mieitaey Law — (Continued) : 
within and without territorial jurisdiction 
of IT. S. 
(7) All persons nnder sentence bj court-martial. 

Articles 3-18. 

GOTJETS MaETIAL CLASSIFIED : 

(A) General Courts Martial. 

Appointed by 

(1) President, 

(2) Commanding officer of department or 

territorial division. 

(3) Commanding officer of separate army 

division brigade. 

(4) Commanding officer of district or force 

empowered by President. 
Jurisdiction. 

Over all persons subject to Military Law 
as regards all offenses punishable by 
Military Law. 
Sentence. 
Everything. 

(B) Special Courts Martials (3 to 5 officers in- 

clusive) . 
Appointed by 

(1) Commanding officer of district, garri- 

son, fort or camp. 

(2) Commanding officer of brigade, de- 

tached battalion. 

Jurisdiction. 

Over any person subject to military law 
(except an officer), and for any 
crime not capital. (Only soldiers 
excluding those having certificate of 
eligibility for promotion.) 

Sentence. 

(1) Xo power to adjudge dishonorable 
discharge. 



HELPFUL REFERENCES TO THE ARTICLES OF WAR. 163 

Courts Martial Classified — (Continued) : 

(B) Special Courts Martial — (Continued) : 

Sentence — (Continued) : 

(2) ~No confinement in excess of six (6) 

months. 

(3) No forfeiture of pay in excess of six 

(6) months. 

(C) Summary Courts Martial (one (1) officer). 

Appointed by 

(1) 'Commanding officer of garrison, fort, 

camp, etc. 

(2) ^Commanding officer of regiment, de- 

tached battalion, etc. 
(N. B.) When but one (1) officer is pres- 
ent with command he shall be the 
summary court martial. 
Jurisdiction. 

(1) Only privates holding no certificate 
of eligibility for promotion — and 

(2) For crimes not capital. 
Sentence. 

(1) 'Confinement not over 3 months. 

(2) ISTo dishonorable discharge. 

(3) No punishment over one (1) month 

without higher authority. 

Method oe Entering a Charge Against a Man : 

Example : 

Charge: Violation of the Article of War. 

Specification : In that (rank, name, organization) 
did at (place) on or about (date) 
etc. (brief description of offence 
committed). 

Signed (Name) 
(Rank and Branch of Service) 
In cases where there are more than one charge the 
number of each A, W. is put down in the charge. A 



164 HELPFUL REFERENCES TO THE ARTICLES OF WAR. 

description of each offence is put down separately under 
Specific ation. 

^s"ote that double lines are drawn under Charge, 
single line under Specification. 

General Remarks: 

The three (3) Courts Martial are alike in the follow- 
ing: 

(a) Composed only of officers of Army or Marine 

Corps on detached service with the Army 
by order of the President. 

(b) Pass upon both law and fact. 

(c) Criminal Courts only. 

(d) Unable to promulgate any finding that does 

not require approval of appointing author- 
ity. 
The three (3) Courts Martial differ in the following: 

(a) dumber of members. 

(b) Appointing authority. 

(c) Punishments. 

Article 31. 
Order of Voting: 

Members in General or Special Courts Martial shall 
vote from junior to senior. 

Article 39. 
Limitations Upon Prosecutions: 

Military offences fall into three (3) groups: 

(1) War desertion, mutiny, murder. Have no 

limitations. 

(2) Burglary, etc. (A. W. 93) and frauds against 

Government (A. W. 94). Prosecution lim- 
ited to 3 years. 

(3) All other offences. 2 years. 



HELPFUL REFERENCES TO THE ARTICLES OF WAR. 165 

In some cases the Statute of Limitations is suspended 
(A. W. 39), especially in cases of absence from the 
United States. 



The following Articles of War are the important 
ones for officers to be acquainted with in the ordinary 
course of his duties: 

Article 54. 

Fraudulent Enlistment : 
Punishment: Court Martial. 

"Any person procuring himself to be enlisted 
by means of willful misrepresentation or conceal- 
ment as to his qualifications for enlistment and 
shall receive pay or allowance," * * * 
This offense requires two (2) steps: 

(1) Misrepresentation or concealment. 

(2) Receiving pay or allowances. 

Article 58. 
Desertion : 

Punishment: (Wartime) Death or Court Martial. 
(Peacetime) Court Martial. 

a Any person — who deserts or attempts to 
desert in time of War * * * death or such 
other punishment as the court martial may direct 
* . * ■* anv other time any punishment except 
death." 

Essential features are: 

(1) An intent not to return. 

(2) An overt act of separation from duty. 

Drunkenness tends to show absence of 
the intent. 

Minority is no defense. 

Enlistment while in desertion does 
not remove the charge of desertion. 



166 HELPFUL REFERENCES TO THE ARTICLES OF WAR. 

Article 61. 
Absence Without Leave : 
Punishment: Court Martial. 

"Any person who fails to repair at the fixed time 
to duty, or goes from same without leave of absence, 
or absents himself from his command, guard, quar- 
ters, station or camp without proper leave * * * " 
Does not require to prove intent, yet persons 
ignorant of military law, drunk or victims of mis- 
take are dealt with gently. 

Article 62. 
Disrespect Toward President, Vice-President, 
Congress, Secretary of War, Governors, Leg- 
islatures : 
Punishment: (Officer) Dismissal from the service, 
(Soldier) Court martial. 
"Any officer who uses contemptuous or dis- 
respectful words against the President, etc. * * * 
any other person subject to militarv law who so 
offends." 

Contemptuous language is objectionable and 
liable to court martial whether 

(1) Used in public or private. 

(2) In official or private capacity. 

(3) Written or spoken. 

(4) True or untrue. 

Article 63. 
Disrespect Toward a Superior Officer: 
Punishment : Court-martial. 

"Any person subject to military law who be- 
haves himself with disrespect toward his superior 
officer * * *." 

Unlike Article 62, disrespect toward a superior 
officer requires no words — acting or neglecting to 
act (such as rudeness or failure to salute) are 
enough. 



HELPFUL REFERENCES TO THE ARTICLES OF WAR. 167 

Article 64. 

Assaulting or Willfully Disobeying Superior 
Officer: 
Punishment : Death or court-martial. 

(1) "Any person subject to military law who 
ou any pretense whatsoever, strikes his superior 
officer — lifts a weapon, or offers violence against 
him, being in the execution of his office. 

(2) Or willfully disobeys any lawful command 
of his superior officer." 

Drunkenness here tends to show absence of the 
essential willfullness. 

Self defense is not forbidden nor violence to 
suppress mutiny. 

Article 65. 

Insubordinate Conduct Toward a ^on-Commis- 
sioned Officer: 

Punishment : Court-martial. 

(1) "Any soldier who assaults or attempts or 
threatens to strike or assault. 

(2) Or willfully disobeys the lawful order of 
a non-commissioned officer while in the execution 
of his office. 

(3) Or uses threatening or insulting language. 

(4) Or behaves in an insubordinate or disre- 
spectful manner." 

Drunkenness will not have the effect here of 
showing an absence of willfullness. 

Article 68. 
Disorders : 

Punishment: Court-martial. 

"All officers and non-commissioned officers have 
power to quell disorders and to order officers who 
take part in the same into arrest, and other persons 
into arrest or confinement. 



168 HELPFUL REFERENCES TO THE ARTICLES OF WAR. 

Disorders — (Continued) : 

Whosoever, being so ordered : 

(1) Refuses to obey. 

(2) Draws a weapon. 

(3) Otherwise threatens or does violence shall 

be punished.'' 
This is one instance (except a.w., 67, mutiny) 
where even a corporal might order a general into 
arrest. 

This is the only instance: 

( 1 ) Where anyone other than a commissioned 

officer can put an officer under arrest. 

(2) Where anyone other than an officer can 

order, arrest or confinement of a sol- 
dier except on power given by C. O. 

Article 69. 
Breaking Arrest : 

Punishment: (Officer) Dismissal, (Soldier) Court- 
martial. 

''Any officer charged with crime shall be placed 
in arrest by C. 0. * * * in exceptional cases 
* * * confined." 

"A soldier charged with crime * * * shall 
be placed in confinement * * * when charged 
with minor offense placed in arrest." 

" Any person placed in arrest * * * shall be 
restricted to barracks, quarters, tent, unless limits 
are enlarged by proper authority." 

"An officer or any other person breaking his ar- 
rest or who escapes from confinement before being 
set at libertv bv proper authority shall be punished 
by * * *" 

To 'break arrest is punishable even though a per- 
son is innocent of the charge or ought to have been 
released. 



HELPFUL REFERENCES TO THE ARTICLES OF WAR. 169 

Article 75. 
Misbehavior Before the Enemy: 
Punishment : Death or court-martial. 
"Any officer or soldier who : 

(1) Misbehaves before the enemy — runs 

away, or shamefully abandons post. 

(2) Or speaks words inducing others to do 

so. 

(3) Or quits his post or colors to plunder or 

pillage. 

(4) Occasions false alarms in camp or quar- 

ters shall suffer * * *." 
The word " enemy " implies " any hostile body " 
such as a mob or riot crowd. 

Article S3. 

Neglect of Military Property: 

Punishment : Make good the loss and court-martial. 
"Any person subject to military law who will- 
fully or through neglect suffers to be lost, damaged, 
or wrongfully disposed of, any military property 
belonging to United States of America — shall 
make good the loss and * * *." 

Article 84. 
Waste or Unlawful Disposal of Property Issued 
to Soldiers: 
Punishment : Court-martial. 

"Any soldier who sells or wrongfully disposes 
of any property issued for military service shall be 
punished * * *." 

Article 8'5. 
Drunk on Duty: 

Punishment: (War time) dismissal and court- 
martial, (Peace time) court-martial. 
"Any officer * * * drunk on duty shall 
* * * in time of war be dismissed * * * and 



170 HELPFUL REFERENCES TO THE ARTICLES OF WAR. 

Drujn-k ox Duty — (Continued) : 

Any other person subject to military law, drunk 
on duty * * * shall be punished * * *." 

Article 86. 
Misbehavior oe a Sextinel: 

Punishment: (War time) death or court-martial, 
(Peace time) court-martial. 
"'Any sentinel found: 

(1) Drunk. 

(2) Asleep. 

(3) Or who leaves before being regularly re- 

lieved shall be punished * * *." 

Article 92. 
Murder or Rape : 

Punishment: Death or life imprisonment. 

'•Any person who commits murder or rape shall 
suffer death or life imprisonment as the court- 
martial may direct." 

No person shall be tried for murder or rape com- 
mitted in the limits of the U. S. A. in time of peace. 
This is left to civil courts. 

Article 93. 
Various Crimes: 

Punishment: Court-martial. 
"Any person who commits 

(1) Manslaughter, 

(2) Mayhem (cutting), 
(.3) Arson, 

(4) Burglary, 

(5) Larceny, 

( fi "I Embezzlement, 

(7 J Perjury, 

(8) Assault with intent to commit any felony, 

(9) Assault with intent to do bodily harm. 

shall be punished * * *." 
Definition of these crimes is left to local law. 



HELPFUL REFERENCES TO THE ARTICLES OF WAR. 171 

Article 94. 
Frauds Against the Government: 

Punishment : Court-martial. 

Article of War No. 94 is equivalent to prohibit- 
ing any person subject to military law from de- 
frauding or attempting, or conspiring to defraud 
the Government of the U. S. A. — also from steal- 
ing, embezzling any Government property. 

Article 95. 
Conduct Unbecoming an Officer and a Gentleman : 
Punishment: Dismissal. 

''Any officer or cadet convicted of unbecoming 
conduct shall be dismissed * * *." 
Misconduct may be official or unofficial. 

Article 96. 

General Article, the Catch All : 

Punishment : Court-martial. 

u * -* * a -Q (ji sor( i ers anc [ neglects to the 

prejudice of good military discipline. 

All conduct of a nature to bring discredit upon 
the military service. 

All crimes and offences not capital shall be 
taken cognizance of by 
(1) General, 
('2) Special, 

(3) Summary court-martials according to the 
nature and degree of the offense and 
punished * * *. 

Article of War 96 covers all crimes and is handy 
when no other Article of War fits. It is wise, 
however, to use this Article sparingly on charges, 
finding if possible the exact Article necessary to 
cover the case at hand. 



172 HELPFUL REFERENCES TO THE ARTICLES OF WAR. 

Examples. 
Problem 1 : 

Charge. — Violation of — Article of War. 

Specification. — In that Private John Doe, 'Company 
C. 301st Regiment Infantry, did at Albany, New York, 
on or abont September 15th, 1917, dress . himself in the 
uniform of a 1st Lieutenant and attend a dance at Odd 
Fellows Hall. 

(Signed) Johis t Haxcock, 

Captain, 301st Infantry. 

Under what article of war, if any, does this belong? 

Problem 2 : 

Charge. — Violation of and Articles of 

War. 

Specification. — In that Sergeant James Hopkins, 
Company H, 205th Infantry, did at Franconia, 1$. H., 
on or about July 4th return to barracks intoxicated. 

In that Sergeant James Hopkins, moreover, refused 
to appear at reveille July 5th. 

(Signed) William Hitchcock, 

C'aptain, 205th Infantry. 

Under what articles of war do these offenses belong ? 

What kind of court-martial required? 
Problem 3 : 

Charge. — Violation of Article of War. 

Specification. — In that Captain George Jones, 125th 
Infantry did at Laconia, Maine, on or about August 
20, 1917, make a speech in which he stated that the 
Reichstag of Germany was a more efficient and demo- 
cratic 'body than the United States Congress. 

(Signed) Albert Smith, 

Major, 125th Infantry. 

Under what article of war does this offense belong ? 



Officer : Dismissal 
Soldier: Court martial 



HELPFUL REFERENCES TO THE ARTICLES OF WAR. 173 
NO. ARTICLES OF WAR. PUNISHMENT. 

54. Fraudulent enlistment Court martial 

, n ,. | War: Death or court martial 

08. Desertion { Peace: Except death 

61. Absence without leave Court martial 

62. Disrespect to President, 

Vice-President, Sec- 
retary of War, Con- 
gress, etc. 

63. Disrespect to superior officer Court martial 

64. Assaulting or disobey- 

ing superior officer Death or court martial 

65. Insubordination to a non-commis- 

sioned officer Court martial 

69. Arrest or confinement ) Officer: Dismissal 

of accused persons j Soldier: Court martial 
75. Misbehavior before the 

enemy Death or court martial 

83. Loss, etc., military Make good the loss and 

property court martial 

84. Loss of military property issued 

to soldiers Court martial 

r Officers — 
■n t t , War: Dismissal 

85. Drunk on duty j Peace: Court martial 

Soldiers: Court martial 

86. Misbehavior of (War: Death or 

sentinel "i Peace: Court martial (except 

^ death 

93. Various crimes Court martial 

94. Frauds against the Government Court martial 

95. Conduct unbecoming an officer Dismissal 

j Court martial 

96. General article j (General or special) 



CHAPTER 7. 
Notes on Army Regulations 

1. Obedience required in the military service — 
strict and prompt. 

2. Authority Exercised with firmness, kindness 
and justice — prompt and lawful punishment. 

3. Abusive Language or conduct by superiors for- 
bidden. 

4. Respect to Superiors will be extended upon all 
occasions, whether on duty or not. 

5. Remarks by Officers or soldiers upon others in 
the military service, whether praise or censure, public 
or private, written or spoken, is prohibited. Any effort 
to affect legislation for a personal favor will be entered 
against a man's military record. 

106. Furloughs not granted to men about to be dis- 
charged. Not more than five per cent of a company 
shall be absent at one time. 

109. Men on Furlough may not leave the United 
States. 

111. For Men in Foreign Countries furlough can 
begin on date of reaching United States. 

113. ~No Payments made to men while on furlough. 
Arms not to be taken on furlough or while reporting 
sick. 

(1ST. B. — There will unquestionably be a modification 
of this ruling, as the custom abroad is to have every man 
keep his complete equipment with him whenever pos- 
sible.) 

116. Desertion. Property lost or destroyed will be 
charged against deserter. 

117. Abandoned Clothes turned over to Quarter- 
master. Personal effects sold and credited to United 
States. 

121. Reward of $50 for apprehension and delivery 
of deserter or military prisoner. 



176 NOTES ON ARMY REGULATIONS. 

127. Costs of Apprehension will be charged 
against deserter. 

129. ^o Pay or Ceothes drawn by soldier awaiting 
trial on charge of desertion. 

131. Wiee'be Restored to dnty only by court mar- 
tial or authority competent to order trial. 

132. Absent Without Leave. Enlisted man for- 
feits all pay and allowances while away. 

Soldier will not be charged with desertion until com- 
manding officer has reason to believe he intended to 
desert. Absence of less than 24 hours will not be noted 
upon the muster roll. 

139. Discharge of enlisted man only 

1. By order of President or Secretary of War. 

2. By order of General Court Martial. 

3. By order of United States court or justice or 

judge, on writ of habeas corpus. 

4. By command of territorial department. 

5. By disability in line of duty. 

6. By sentence of civil court. 

7. By purchase. 

(N. B. — In time of war it is probable that the last 
two methods would not be effective for discharge from 
the service.) 

140. Final Statements. The company commander 
will furnish each enlisted man a final statement (or 
duplicate) or a full statement in writing explaining why 
such final statement is not furnished. ~No final state- 
ment will be furnished a soldier who has forfeited all 
pay and allowances or who has no deposits due him. 

147. Certificate will give 

1. Character certified by company commander. 

2. Whether recommended for re-enlistment. 

In case of negative opinion, the soldier should 
be notified at least 30 days prior to discharge. In 
that case the company commander shall convene a 
board of three officers (if possible) to determine 



NOTES ON ARMY REGULATIONS. 177 

what kind of discharge shall be given. The soldier 
will be given a hearing. 

151. Loss of Discharge Certificate. Discharge 
certificates will not be made in duplicate. Upon proper 
proof of loss or destruction without fault of person en- 
titled to it, the War Department will issue a certificate 
of service, showing date of enlistment and discharge 
from the army and character given in original certifi- 
cate. 

Discharge certificates should never be forwarded to 
the War Department in correspondence unless called 
for. 

159. Physical Disability Certificate issued when 
an enlisted man is permanently unfitted for service, in 
iine of duty. Certificates of disability not made in 
duplicate. 

162. Death of Soldier. 

1. Effects are secured. 

2. Nearest relatives notified. 

3. Adjutant General of army notified. 

In active service the War Department requires the 
following reports : 

1. Report of company commander to Adjutant Gen- 

eral, covering death and disposal of remains. 

2. Report of surgeon or company commander em- 

bodying 

a. Cause of death. 

b. Whether in line of duty. 

c. Whether due to another soldier's misconduct. 

3. Inventory of effects in duplicate. 

163. Effects, when not claimed within reasonable 
time, sold and credited to United States. 

No authority for officers to pay debts of dead soldiers. 

Trinkets will not be sold but sent to the Adjutant 
General's office. 

165. Effects will be delivered, if called for, to legal 
representative of deceased after arrears are paid. 
12 



178 NOTES ON ARMY REGULATIONS. 

167. Medal of Honor. Authorized by Congress to 
be awarded to officers and men for extreme acts of gal- 
lantry in action, beyond line of duty. Recommenda- 
tions will be considered by standard of extraordinary 
merit, and must have incontestible proof. 

184. Certificate oe Merit. Gt anted by President 
to any enlisted man in the service for distinguished 
acts in line of duty, on recommendation of company 
commander, based upon statement of eye witness, pre- 
ferably the immediate company commander. $200 per- 
manent additional pay is allowed. 

285. Quarters. ls T ame of each soldier on bunk. 
Arms on rack. Accoutrements hung up by the belts. 

287. Saturday Inspection preceded by thorough 
policing. Leaders of squads will see that everything is 
clean. 

1011. Neglect of Rooms or furniture by officer or 
soldier a military offense. All necessary costs shall be 
paid by him. 

1178. Destruction of Tableware or kitchen uten- 
sils by soldiers will be charged against their pay. 

28 | 8. Chiefs of Squads are responsible. 

1. For cleanliness of men. 

2. For their proper equipment for duty. 

3. For their proper dress when going " on 

pass." 

374. Premises shall be policed daily after breakfast. 

290. Company Commander will see that public 
property held by men is kept in good order, and miss- 
ing or spoiled articles paid for. 

292«. Arms shall not be taken down without proper 
supervision and by order of commissioned officer. 

~No changing of parts or finish. 

Tompions (muzzle plugs) in small arms forbidden. 

G57. Accountability and Responsibility.- — Both 
devolve upon persons entrusted with public property. 

Responsibility without accountability devolves upon 
one to whom property is entrusted, but who does not 



NOTES ON ARMY REGULATIONS. 179 

have to make returns therefor. Responsibility does not 
end until property has been given back to accountable 
officer and a receipt taken, or he has been relieved by 
regulations or by orders. 

Accountability without responsibility occurs when an 
officer holds proper memorandum receipts for property 
delivered to others. 

Example. — The Company Commander is account- 
able and responsible for the rifles turned over to his 
company. He is accountable without responsibility 
when each enlisted man has been issued a rifle and has 
signed a receipt for it. Eiach enlisted man is then 
responsible for his rifle, without accountability, until 
he returns it in proper condition. In general, there- 
fore: Accountability requires evidence of the disposi- 
tion that has been made of property. Responsibility 
implies possession, and requires return of the property 
or payment for it. 

6i&5. Loss of Public Property by neglect of any 
officer or soldier shall be paid by him, at such rates as 
a survey of the property may determine. 

Charges will be made only after conclusive proof, and 
not without a survey if the soldier demands one. 

Signing the payroll will be regarded as an acknowl- 
edgment of the justice of the charge. 

1202. Ration is the allowance of food for one per- 
son or animal for one day. 

1229. /Forfeiture of ration is made when a soldier 
overstays furlough. 

1339. Pay for continuous service is credited a 
soldier if he enlists within three months after honorable 
discharge. 

For privates an increase of $3 per month is allowed 
up to and including the third enlistment, beyond this 
$1 per month increase given up to and including the 
seventh enlistment. 

For non-commissioned officers the increase of $3 per 
month continues to and includes the seventh enlistment. 



180 NOTES ON ARMY REGULATIONS. 

~No increased pay is given after the seventh enlist- 
ment to private or non-commissioned officer. 

1347. Allotments (revised by Act of Congress. 
October, 1917). 

The new law does away with future pensions. Allot- 
ments may be made to : 

1. Family. 

2. Bank. 

For married men or those with dependents, such as 
children, parents divorced wives whose support is re- 
quired by court order, allotments are compulsory, and 
must not be less than $15 a month and not more than 
one^half of his pay. The Company Commander is re- 
sponsible for finding who comes under this rule. By 
this arrangement soldiers cannot shirk the support of 
dependents. 

The government will double the amount allotted by 
each soldier, to a limit of $37.50 a month. In cases 
where the soldier allots half of his pay the government 
will add to the allotment according to the following 
scale, even though it more than doubles the amount 
paid by the soldier: 
'Class A. 

Wife, no child, $15. 

Wlife, one child, $25. 

Wife, two children, $32.50. 

For each additional child, $5 more. 

~No wife living, one child, $5. 

Two children, $12.50. 

Three children, $20. 

Four children, $30. 

For each additional child, $5. 
Class B. 

One parent, $10. 

Two parents, $20. 

Each grandchild, brother, sister or additional de- 
pendent, $5. 
Nurses can make allotment. 



NOTES ON ARMY REGULATIONS. 181 

When both. A and B classes are in need of allotment 
from a soldier's pay, and he has allotted half of his 
pay to Class A, he may allot an additional one-seventh 
of his pay for the support of Class B dependents, and 
the government will pay the sums listed above to the 
Class B< dependents, to the limit of $20 a month. Pay- 
ments under this act were begun November 1, 1917. In 
case less than one-half of a soldier's pay is allotted, the 
■Secretary of War may require the allotment to be in- 
creased up to one-half of the pay. 

Compensation foe Death ok Disability in line of 
duty. In all cases must be applied for. In case of 
death, monthly compensation snail be as follows per 
month : 

Widow, $25. 

Wddow and 1 child, $36. 

Widow and 2 children, $47.50. 

Each additional child, $5. 

One child alone, $20. 

Two children, $30. 

Three children, $40. 

Each additional child, $5. 

Widowed mother, $20. 

For transportation of body, $10O. 
No women can receive compensation from two 
sources. The government will continue to pay compen- 
sation to a dependent wife until her death or re- 
marriage, and to children until they are 18 years old, 
unless they are insane or helpless, in which case it will 
continue to pay the compensation during such inca- 
pacity. 

In case of total disability, compensation will be as 
follows per month: 

Soldier alone, $30. 

'Wlith wife, no child, $45. 

With wife, one child, $55. 

With wife, two children, $65. 

Three children or more, $75. 



182 NOTES ON ARMY REGULATIONS. 

Xo wife living, one child, $40. 

Xo wife living, each additional child, $10. 

Soldier and widowed mother, $40. 

In case of total disability where attendance is needed. 
$20 per month will be added to the compensation, un- 
less the soldier is blind, bedridden, or has lost both 
feet or hands, in which case the compensation will be 
$100 per month, with no extra allowance for attend- 
ance. In case of partial disability, compensation will 
be a percentage of the amount paid in case of total 
disability. These annuities continue only during the 
life of the person for whom they are first paid. 

Additional Insttka^ce. — Uniform compensation 
for all ranks can go only to blood relations. In case 
of death or disability in line of duty, it is paid in 
monthly instalments for 20 years. Insurance is from 
$1,000 to $10,000 in multiples of $500. The rate is 
exceedingly low. Insurance must be applied for within 
120 days after entering the service. Premiums are 
paid monthly, quarterly or yearly from the pay of the 
insured man. After the war this insurance must be 
converted within five years into a policy either of 
straight life insurance, 20-year payment or endowment, 
maturing at the age of 62. In case of death when there 
is no blood relationship, the reserve value, according 
to the American insurance mortality tables, is paid to 
the estate. Xone of these payments can be attached 
for debt, nor legal action started against them except 
in a United States 'Court. The maximum lawyer's fee 
in any such case is $500. 

1361. -Deposits of not less than $5 may be made by 
an enlisted man (not retired) to any quartermaster. 
Deposit book, signed by quartermaster and company 
commander, given to man who makes the deposit. This 
book is not transferable. 

136'3. A Lost Deposit Book is not replaced with- 
out an affidavit of the soldier, testifying that he has not 
sold nor assigned it. 



NOTES ON ARMY REGULATIONS. 183 

1364. Payment made only on final statement. The 
soldier should be informed of the importance of keep- 
ing the deposit book. 

13'6'5. Withdrawal of Deposit when discharged or 
furloughed to reserve. 

136<6 : . Interest on sum greater than $5 is 4 per cent. 

136-8. Forfeiture due to desertion, but not by 
sentence of court martial. Deposits not exempt from 
liabilities due the United States. 

1371. Officers and Men lose pay while confined 
by civil authorities. 

1375. Furloughed to Reserve or discharged, a 
soldier is given a final statement in duplicate. This 
must be presented to be valid. 

1378. Transportation and subsistence is allowed to 
the point of enlistment, or for the same distance. Not 
subject to deduction for debts due the United States. 

1380. Discharged Soldier under charge of fraudu- 
lent enlistment is not entitled to transportation and 
subsistence. 

13S3. Transfer of Claims on the government made 
by an enlisted man are only recognized after discharge 
or furlough to the reserve. They must be in writing 
and must be endorsed by a commissioned officer or other 
responsible person known to the quartermaster. 

1437, No one is allowed to accompany sick or 
wounded from the battle line to the rear except those 
specifically authorized. 

1530. Ammunition lost or used without orders or not 
in line of duty shall be charged to the soldier using it. 

Notes on the Laws of War. 

(From Manual for Commanders of Infantry Platoons, 

translated from the French at the Army War 

College, 1917. War Department Document 

No. 626.) 

The laws of war were instituted under the generous 

error that certain well-organized peoples had entirely 



184 NOTES ON ARMY REGULATIONS. 

emerged from barbarism and that they considered them- 
selves bound by the placing of their signatures to inter- 
national conventions, freely agreed to. 

An infinite number of acts minutely and officially in- 
vestigated have established that our troops and our 
Nation should never count on the observance of these 
laws and that the atrocities committed prove to be not 
only individual violations dishonoring merely the perpe- 
trator, but violations premeditated and ordered in cold 
blood by the commanders with the moral support of the 
heads of the enemy nation. 

These laws are nevertheless repeated here in order 
that : 

1. The knowledge of how the war should have been 
conducted may develop in the heart of each man the 
sentiment of hate (applicable only to foes such as we 
actually have), that in no case should a chief of platoon 
tolerate any intercourse between his men and the enemy 
other than that of the rifle ; this duty is explicit and not 
to be departed from except in the case of the_ wounded 
and prisoners incapable of doing harm. 

2. That every violator of these laws, taken in the 
act, shall be the subject of an immediate report with 
witnesses, then sent to the division headquarters to be 
tried as to the facts of the case. 

The laws of war resulted from the Geneva con- 
vention, from the declaration of St. Petersburg 
(Petrograd), and from the different Hague conventions. 
All these diplomatic papers were signed by Germany, 
Austria-Hungary, Turkey and Bulgaria. 
The following are the principal articles: 
Protect the wounded on the field of battle from pil- 
lage and from bad treatment ; respect ambulances and 
evacuation convoys; respect the personnel exclusively 
concerned with the transportation, treatment and guard- 
ing of wounded ; do not treat this personnel as prisoners 
of war if it falls into the hands of the enemy; but re- 
turn such personnel, as well as material, when its reten- 



NOTES ON ARMY REGULATIONS. 185 

tion shall be no longer necessary for the care of the 
wounded prisoners. 

Kef rain from employing any projectile which weighs 
less than 400 grams that is either explosive or loaded 
with incendiary or inflammable material, from all pro- 
jectiles having for their sole object the spreading of 
asphyxiating or harmful gases, all expanding bullets or 
those which will easily flatten out inside the human 
body, such as jacketed bullets whose jacket does not 
entirely cover the core or is nickel. 

Forbid the use of poisons or of poisoned arms, killing 
or wounding an enemy who has thrown down his arms 
and surrendered ; declarations that there will be no quar- 
ter; refrain from bombarding towns and cities which 
are not defended, from firing on churches, historical 
monuments, edifices devoted to the arts, to science, to 
charity, to sick and wounded and which are marked by 
a conspicuous signal known to the enemy. 

Prisoners should be treated as to rations, housing and 
clothing the same as troops of the country which has 
captured them. All their personal belongings, except 
their arms and military papers, should be left in their 
possession. 

The following should be inviolate : The emissary — 
that is to say, an individual authorized bv a belligerent 
to enter into talks with the authorities of the other side 
and coming under a white flag ; also his trumpeter, his 
standard bearer, and his interpreter. He loses his in- 
violability if it is proven that he has profited by his 
privilege to provoke or commit treachery. 

An undisguised military man can never be treated 
as a spy. 



CHAPTER 8. 

Practice Marches. 

" Special attention should he paid to the fitting of 
shoes and the care of the feet." (i.d.r., 627.) 

Short marches from 2 to 1 miles should be made 
daily and at a uniform rate until the troops become 
hardened. Particular attention must always be paid 
to the rate of march — it is imperative for the leading 
element to keep a uniform rate per hour. 

Be careful and see to it that your troops march on 
the right-hand side of the road, and during halts, no 
one, not even officers, must be permitted on the left. 
Keep closed up, and during the last mile of your march 
have your company sing some real snappy song, and 
they will come in in jubilant spirits. Keep the 
muzzles of your rifles always elevated on the march 
so that men marching in rear wont be bothered. 

On the march the first halt is for 15 minutes taken 
after 45 minutes of marching, The men should be 
taught to use this time to adjust their clothing and 
equipment, and answer the calls of nature. Do not 
halt where there are houses, etc., on this first halt, as a 
great many men want to relieve themselves. 

The succeeding halts are for 10 minutes after 50 
minutes of marching — except of course during a 
forced march — when you would march for a longer 
period. During rainy or very hot weather the halts 
should be made oftener. 

Do not have any straggling, remember if a man 
falls out he must have a certificate signed by an officer 
stating the cause. Have one officer march in rear of 
the company. Be careful about the use of water. 
Have your men take a good drink early in the morning 
just after reveille, and on the march use their canteen 
sparingly. One canteen of water must last one man 
one day. Do not allow men to drink until after the 
second halt. 



188 PRACTICE MARCHES. 

On reaching camp the kitchens are put up, latrines 
are dug, and tents are pitched. When everything has 
been tended to each man should give his feet a good 
salt water bath. Put them in the water and let them 
remain there for 2 minutes. Do not dry them by rub- 
bing, but sponge them — this will harden the feet. 
This should be done for the first three days, after which 
it can be dispensed with. A change of socks daily 
should be made, take one pair of socks from the pack, 
and wash out the dirty pair. 

Try to avoid night marching. 

The leading company in each regiment regulates the 
rate of march. 

" The marching efficiency of an organization is 
judged by the amount of straggling and elongation 
and the condition of the men at the end of the march." 
(i.d.r., 632.) 

Remember a sanitary squad should be detailed 
daily to police the immediate vicinity after each halt. 

Field Work. 

Field work will be classified under the following 
heads: Orders, Deployment, Tire, Attack, Defense, 
Leadership, Communications, !N"ight Operations, 
Patrols, Advance Guards, Rear Guards, Flank Guards, 
Camp, March Outpost, and Outpost. 

(a) An Order is the will of the commander ex- 
]3ressed verbally or in writing to his subordinates. It 
should be clear, concise and to the point. A field order 
should be given as follows : 

1. Information of the enemy and supporting 

troops. 

2. General plan of the commander. 

3. Dispositions of the troops. 

4. Instructions for the trains. 

5. Place where messages are to be sent. 

(b) Do Xot Deploy too early. It is very fatiguing, 
and has a tendency to disorganize the skirmish line. 



FIELD WORK. 189 

The major designates the companies to be on the 
firing line, and those to remain in support. The dis- 
tance between the firing line and support is from 50 
to 500 yards. The support should be as close as 
possible under cover. 

(c) Fire Direction is the function of the company 
commander. He gives each platoon its sector or ob- 
jective, determines the range, target, indicates the class 
of fire, and the time to open fire. Fire control is given 
to platoon commanders. The platoon is the fire unit. 
" Fire control implies the ability to stop firing, change 
the sight setting and target, and resume a well directed 
fire. The best troops are those that submit longest to 
fire control." Fire discipline is the function of the 
individual soldier. " It implies that in a firing line 
without leaders, each man retains his presence of mind 
and directs effective fire upon the target." 

(d) The Troops march in column of squads until 
under the observation of the enemy. Platoon columns 
are used in crossing ground where there is cover. 
Squad columns are used across the artillery zone. At 
approximately 800 yards a skirmish line is formed. 
Thin lines may then be used to advance to the attack. 
Remember the Major has assigned each company in 
the firing line an objective. Be sure to watch out for 
flank protection. If the Major has forgotten to have 
combat patrols on the exposed flank or flanks, it is up to 
the flank company to send out a combat patrol. This 
patrol should be slightly in advance of the front line, 
and off to the right or left. The advance is made by a 
fraction rushing forward. These rushes are from 20 
to 80 yards. When a rush is made the remaining 
troops fire faster. The firing line should not be rein- 
forced by less than a platoon. The Major determines 
when to fix bayonets. The front rank men fix bayonets 
first, the rear rank men fire faster, then the rear rank 
men fix bayonets while the front rank fire faster. A 
battalion is the smallest unit in the firing line to 



190 FIELD WORK. 

inaugurate a charge. Kemember the battalion is the 
attack unit. 

In changing sight setting follow same plan as fixing 
bayonet^ i. e., each front rank first, the rear rank man 
firing faster, etc. 

(e) Defense. — In defense the line is usually 
stronger and the support weaker than in the attack. 
Do not give up your ground unless you have written 
orders from the High Command. Watch out for flank 
protection by combat patrols. 

(f ) Leadership. — A good leader should possess self 
reliance, initiative, aggressiveness, superior knowledge, 
and have a conception of teamwork. Make your work 
a game in which each man has a part to play. Reward 
merit and give the disagreeable things to be done to the 
" knockers." A leader must know his men. Never 
give them a job to do that you couldn't do yourself. 
Train yourself to estimate the situation quickly and 
calmly. Have your men well disciplined, well drilled, 
well equipped, and well dressed. It might be called 
unmilitary by some of the sterner characters in our 
service, but we believe by occasionally drawing com- 
parisons to something real amusing — a good joke — 
you show your men that the " old Man " is really made 
of human stuff. Be sympathetic, and it has been shown 
by experience that, for some slight breach of discipline 
a " little talk " in the orderly room does the most good. 
and is the best form of punishment. Do your 
work cheerfully, and your men will do likewise. Keep 
yourself abreast of the times in all matters military — 
remember your men look to you in time of action and 
excitement and you must be ready to deliver the 
goods. Work out and plan your orders, etc., simply. 
Morale is the greatest asset an organization can have. 
Keep all your troubles and have the men keep theirs 
within the company. Have esprit de corps. The real 
successful leader knows and plays the game. 



FIELD WORK. 191 

(g) Communications. — Communication is main- 
tained by wireless, telegraph, telephone, signals, 
runners, carrier pigeons, aeroplanes, motor cars, patrols, 
and connecting files. Each unit usually maintains 
communication with the next higher command, and 
with similar commands on the flanks. 

(h) Night Operations. — They are used to mini- 
mize losses from hostile fire, to escape observation, and 
to gain time. The ground to be traversed at night 
should be carefully looked over in daylight. Some 
distinctive badge should be worn by our troops. The 
bayonet is chiefly used at night. Avoid firing. The 
enemy should be surprised. Place obstacles in front 
of your own lines at night. IJlsually 50 yards is the 
maximum range to fire at night. 

(i) Patrols. — " A commander may be excused for 
being defeated, but never for being surprised." 

Patrols. 

Commander selects leader, strength, gives it a mis- 
sion, when to report back, and where to send messages. 
He gives it a number if more than one patrol is sent out, 
information of the enemy, and location of any friendly 
patrols that may be or have been sent out. Patrol leader 
is then allowed to ask questions. 

Patrol Leader. — He should have a compass, watch, 
pencil, note-book, knife, and a map of the country. He 
should then do the following: 

1. Assemble his men. 

2. Inspect them. 

a. To see if they are fit for this duty. 

b. That they have no valuable maps or papers, 

that their equipment does not rattle or 
shine, 
c. Rations and water. 

3. He repeats the instruction that he has received. 

4. He explains any signals that are to be used. 



192 FIELD WORK. 

5. Designates a rallying point in case they are scat- 
tered. 

6. Details a second in command. 

7. Takes a formation that will favor the escape of at 
least one man. 

Conduct of the Patrol. — 1. Move cautiously but not 
timidly. 

2. Do not "flinch or show consciousness of it in case 
you become suddenly aware that you are under the ob- 
servation of the enemy. Not knowing that you are 
aware of his presence he will let you come on, and sud- 
denly, when you see cover, make a dash for it and escape. 

3. Do not get lost. 

4. Do not allow yourself to think of the enemy as 
being in one direction only. 

5. In entering or passing through woods take an ex- 
tended skirmish line formation. 

6. In passing any short defile bridge or ford, send 
one man ahead. 

7. If you suspect the presence of the enemy under 
certain cover, a good way to find out is to let one man 
approach within a reasonable distance and then, acting 
as though he had been discovered, turn and run. This 
will generally draw his fire. 

8. Keep quiet. Forbid unnecessary talking. 

9. From time to time select suitable rallying points 
in case you become separated. 

10. Remember that you do not fight unless in self 
defense. 

Report. — 1. Do not report the presence of small 
patrols unless you have been ordered to do so. Locate 
the main body or a large command. 

2. Determine his strength, kind of troops and move- 
ments. 

3. Remember the indispensable qualities of a report 
are : accuracy as to facts', simplicity, clearness, legibility 
and correct spelling. Surmises must not be given as 
facts. Separate what you know and what has been told 



FIELD WORK. 193 

you. A report should not be expressed carelessly in 
ten words when it could be clearly stated in twenty. 
Send a .sketch if practicable. 

4. Do not send a verbal message. 

5. Address it to C. 0. Support or C. O. Advance 
Guard, etc., not to the commander of a certain body of 
troops. Give date, place and time. 

■6. Remember to state what you intend to do. 

7. In hostile country send two messages by different 
routes. In friendly country one will suffice. 

8. When the capture of your message is likely, give 
messenger a false one that will be easily found and con- 
ceal the true message carefully. 

Return. — 1. Do not return over the same route as 
you avoid ambuscade and widen your field of recon- 
naissance. 

2. Report any special features of military value that 
you have seen to your C O. 

3. Compliment your men. 

(j) Advance Guard. — " An advance guard is a de- 
tachment of the main body which precedes it and covers 
it on the march " (i.d.r. 639). The commander of troops 
designates the advance guard, the distance between it 
and the main body, and also designates a commander. 
The advance guard commander if he has more than a 
battalion designates the reserve, support, distance be- 
tween them. If the advance guard is a battalion or 
less it would have no reserve, and in that case the ad- 
vance guard commander would designate the support, 
advance party, and the distance between them. In the 
former case the support commander would designate the 
advance party, and the distance between the support 
and the advance party. In both cases the advance party 
commander designates the point, and the distance be- 
tween the point and the advance party. Uisually it is 
the duty of the advance party to send out flank patrols. 
The strength varies from 1/20 to 1/3 of the main body. 
13 



194 FIELD WORK. 

Remember " the formation of the advance guard must 
be such that the enemy will first be met by a patrol, 
then in turn by one or more larger detachments, each 
capable of holding the enemy until the next in rear has 
time to deploy before coming under effective fire." 
The advance guard must be aggressive. Do not put up 
with a cautious point. Have a double connecting file, 
and if possible every 100 yards. " Each element of the 
column sends the necessary connecting files to its front." 
On the road in order are : point — advance party — 
support — reserve (if there is one) — main body. Have 
the point precede the advance party, all the remaining 
elements follow the one ahead. This has been found 
by experience to be the best method of getting " there." 

(k) Rear Guards. — "A rear guard is a detachment 
detached to protect the main body from attack in the 
rear." " The general formation is that of the advance 
guard reversed." i. e. rear point, rear party, support, 
and main body. " In retreat a column is preceded by a 
body of troops designated ' leading troops,' whose prin- 
ciple duty is to clear the road of obstacles and to facili- 
tate the withdrawal of the command." 

(1) Flank Guards. — As their name imply protect the 
flanks. They should be in constant communication with 
the column. Their formation usually conforms to that 
of patrols. 

(m) Camps. — The four principal factors to be con- 
sidered in the selection of the camp site are: near a 
good road or roads, have good drainage, plenty of room 
to accommodate your troops, and have a good water 
supply. Immediately after camp is made sinks are dug 
for the disposal of excreta. One should be dug for 
each company on the opposite flank from the kitchen 
for the disposal of human excreta, and one near the 
kitchen for the disposal of wastes, etc., that cannot be 
burned around the kitchen. 

(n) March Outpost. — A march outpost is usually an 
advance guard halted, with observers in each unit on 



FIELD WORK. 195 

the alert. A cossack post might be established on a 
good near by observation point. The march outpost is 
the protection furnished the main body at short halts, 
or on making camp before the outpost is established. 

(o) Outpost. — The outpost may be best illustrated 
by circles: 

Each support is numbered from right to left. Each 
outguard in each support is numbered from right to 
left. Each sentinel post in each outguard is numbered 
from right to left. Outguards are divided into three 
classes, cossack posts, sentry squads and pickets. A cos- 
sack post consists of 4 men, 1 posted in observation 
near the posts of the remaining three. 

A sentry squad consists of one squad, posts a double 
sentinel post in observation near the post of the squad. 
A picket consists of two or more squads not exceeding 
half a company. It furnishes cossack posts, sentry 
squads, sentinel posts, and patrols. It is usually placed 
at the more important points of the outguard line, as a 
road fork, etc. The post furnished by pickets may be 
as far as 100 yards away. There should be also a 
sentinel post near the packet in observation. If the 
outguard consists of two or more companies there is a 
reserve. The reserve is held at some suitable point 
where it can readily support the line. The reserve 
maintains connection with the main body and the sup- 
port. The support occupies the line to be held. This 
line should be entrenched. The support maintains com- 
munication with its outguards and with each support on 
its flanks. It also sends out the necessary reconnoiter- 
ing patrols. The outguards furnish sentinel posts and 
maintain communication with them, and with the out- 
guards on each flank. It is the duty of the support 
commander to inspect his line and make such changes 
in the outguards as he deems necessary, then to report 
to the outpost commander with a sketch if practicable 
of his line when his dispositions are completed. The 
outpost commander should inspect the line, order such 



196 



FIELD WORK. 



#■ J2 







FIELD WORK. 197 

changes as lie deems necessary, and report with a sketch 
of the outpost line to the commander of troops when 
his outpost has taken up its position. " The support 
commander must practice the greatest economy on men 
consistent with the requirements of practical security." 
Instead of using outguards along the whole front, part 
of it may be covered by patrols. 

Outline of Field Service Regulations. 

Land Forces of U. S. 

Regular Army. 
Organized Land Militia. 
Volunteer forces. 

How Grouped : 
Mobile Army. 
Coast Artillery. 

Mobile Army: 

For offensive operations against enemy and so re- 
quires maximum degree of mobility. 

Basis of organization the division, a self-contained 
unit composed of all necessary arms and services. 

Coast Artillery: 

(1) Permanent fortifications for defense against 
naval attack. 

("2) .Semi-permanent fortifications for protection of 
permanent from raiders. 

(3) Organization of mobile troops to prevent landing 
of enemy. 

Military Information. 

Essential : 

(1) To enable War Department to estimate equip- 
ment and size of force necessary. 

(2) To enable commander properly to estimate the 
situation in tbe field of operations. 



198 FIELD WORK. 

Transmission of Information. 

Wire, Signaling, Radio and Messenger: 

Message. — Concise, written information sent by mes- 
senger or wire. 

Source always given. — " Heard " separated from 
" seen." 

Report. — Formal account of some enterprise. 

War Diary. — Record of events kept in campaigns. 

Maps, 

Reconnaissance : 

The work of individuals or units in gathering in- 
formation. 

To keep contact with the enemy — to be acquainted 
with the terrain; to protect flanks and rear and guard 
against surprise. 

Reconnaissance begins on entering theater of opera- 
tions and lasts through campaign. 

Effected by patrols and air craft. 

Indications of enemy : 
Tracks on road. 

Abandoned camps and clothing. 
Infantry, thick, low cloud of dust. 
'Cavalry, high, thin cloud of dust. 
Artillery and wagons, broken cloud. 

Determination of Enemy Forces : 
Timing past a given point. 
Cavalry (walk), 110 per minute. 
Cavalry (trot), 200 per minute. 
Infantry, 175 per minute. 
Artillery and wagons, 5 per minute. 

Security : 

Those measures taken to protect a command from 
enemy observation, annoyance and surprise. 

Obtained by covering the front with detachments. 

March. — Advance, flank and rear guards. 

Camp. — Outposts. 



FIELD WORK. 199 

March and camp detachments. — To give warning and 
resist attack until snch time as detachment in rear can 
deploy. 

Advance Guard: 

Detachment from main body to cover its advance. 

Against surprise for information. 

Push back small bodies. 

Check enemy's advance until deployment in rear. 

Seize good position and locate enemy lines. 

Remove obstacles. 

Strength 1-20 to 1-3 of entire command. 

Divisions of Advance Guard : 

Cavalry point. 

Infantry point. 

Advance party. 

Support. 

Reserve. 
Leading Troops : 

A detachment protecting the head of a column in 
retreat. 
Rear Guard: 

Detachments protecting the rear of a retreating col- 
umn. 

Formation like that of advance guard. 
Flank Patrols : 

Detachments for protecting the flanks of marching 
column. 
March Outpost: 

Detachments for protection of column halted on 
march. 

Formation, that of the marching protection. 
Outpost : 

The detachments forming the protection for a force 
in camp or bivouac. 
Divisions of Outpost: 

Reserve. 

Line of supports. 



200 FIELD WORK. 

Line of outguards. 
Pickets. 

.Sentinel Posts: 

Sentry squads. Cossack posts. Sentinels. 
Detached posts (from support). 

Hours of Special Danger: 

Evening and dawn; thus good times to relieve out- 
posts. 

Examining Post : 

Intelligence and a place where prisoners, etc., are 
brought in. 

Orders : 

The expression of the will of a commander, either 
written or verbal. 

Letters of instruction — plans of the superior leaders. 

Field Orders: 

Regulate tactical and strategical actions of troops. 

General Orders Include: 

(1) All necessary detailed instructions. 

(2') All standing instructions (avoid repetition). 

(3) Proceedings of general and special courts- 
martial. 

Special Orders: 

Relate to assignment and movement of individuals, 
not necessary to be communicated to the whole com- 
mand. 

Bearers of verbal orders must repeat. 

Field Orders: 

(1) Heading. — Title, place, date, hour and number. 

(2) Distribution of troops. — Division of command. 

(3) Body: 

(a) Information of enemy and supporting 

troops. 

(b) General plan of commander. 

(c) Detailed tactical dispositions to carry out 

general plan. 



FIELD WORK. 201 

Field Orders — (Continued) : 

(3) Body — (Continued): 

(d) Instructions for trains — also the posi- 
tions of ammunition and dressing 
stations. 

(4) Ending. — Authentication and method of send- 

ing. 

Marches and Convoys : 

Successful march. — That which places troops at des- 
tination on time, and in best possible condition. 

Rates of March : 

Infantry. — 2 to 2% miles per hour. 

Cavalry. — 4 miles (walk), '8 miles (trot), 12 miles 
(gallop). 

Artillery. — (Same.) 
Average Marches : 

Infantry. — 15-20 miles per day. 

Cavalry. — 25 miles per day. 

Artillery. — 15-20 miles per day. 

Load of pack mules equals 250 pounds. 
March Orders, State: 

(1) Object of march. 

(2) Distribution of troops. 

(3) Order of march of main body. 

(4) Manner of forming the column. 
Halts: 

First hour, 15 minutes' rest. Each successive hour, a 
10-minute rest. 

Weather conditions create exceptions to above rule. 
Marches in Peace: 

(1) Changing station. 

(2) Practice. 
In War : 

(1) Concentration. 

(2) In presence of enemy. 

(3) Forced marches. 

(4) Night marches. 



202 FIELD WORK. 

Convoys (on Land) : 

Those trains by which supplies are forwarded to an 
army from depots, etc., in the rear — also trains bring- 
ing supplies collected by requisition. 

Security Furnished by an Escort: 

(1) Advance guard. 

(2) Main body. 

(3) Flank guard when necessary. 

(4) Rear guard. 

Favorable places for attacking convoys: 

Through woods defile. 

Over hedges. 

Sharp bends. 

Ascending or descending slopes. 

Farming corral, watering. 

Whenever conditions are such that escort cannot 
quickly prepare for defense. 

Conducting Prisoners : 

10 foot soldiers to every 100 prisoners. 

Infantry : 

The principal arm, charged with the main field work. 
Its role is the role of the entire force and its success is 
the success of the whole force. 

Artillery : 

The close supporting arm of the infantry. 

Its targets are those most dangerous in the eyes of 
the infantry. 

Cavalry: 

Reconnaissance — supports the other arms and is 
valuable in pursuit. 

Combat : 

Offensive. 
, Defensive. 

(a) Temporary. 

(b) Passive defense. 



FIELD WORK. 203 

Oombat Principles: 

Fire superiority. 

Unity of command. 

Simple and direct plans and methods. 

All troops necessary to mission must be assigned at 
beginning. 

Detachments justifiable only when they can con- 
tribute directly to success of main battle. 

Some reserves must be kept. 

Flank protection and reconnaissance. 

Fire Superiority: 

Must be gained early and maintained. 

Frontage of Units: 

Depth in formation for combat rather than extension 
of line. 

Reserves : 

Fresh troops must be on hand to 
(1) Give fire line impetus. 
('2) To penetrate enemy lines. 

(3) To fill gap® and help reorganization. 

(4) To meet counter attacks. 

Plan of Action: 

'Mission of army is to win battle. 

Offensive action must be the rule. 

When enemy is near every available means must be 
taken to gain information, in order to prepare for de- 
ployment. 

Offensive Combat: 

The attack develops into 2 parts. 

(1) Assaulting hostile position at selected points. 
(i2) Threaten or assault all other parts of enemy 
line in order to hold enemy from rein- 
forcing operations. 

Enveloping Attack: 

Advantage of converging fire upon position. 



204 FIELD WORK. 

Holding Attack: 

An attack for holding enemy in one place, while 
assaults made at another point. 

Assaults : 

The local concentrated offensive. 

Pursuit : 

Only by energetic pursuit can the full fruit of victory 
be gleaned. Its purpose is to cause the greatest loss in 
personnel and morale possible cavalry and artillery 
active. 

Defensive Combat: 

Passive defense — to gain time, or to hold certain 
points pending results in other parts of the line. 

Defense seeking a favorable decision — a parrying of 
blows while seeking a favorable opening. 

Counter attack the crisis of this form. 

Counter attack — made by launching reserves at the 
flank, while the enemy is fully committed to the attack. 

Defensive Positions : 
Requisites : 

Clear field of fire. 

Flanks naturally secure. 

Extent of ground suitable to strength of force. 

Effective corps for reserves. 

Grood lines of retreat. 

Good communication. 

Position in Readiness: 

A position intended to resist the advance of an enemy 
in the immediate vicinity information of whose move- 
ments is not full enough to warrant definite action. 
Withdrawal From Action: 

Troops most readily disengaged from the enemy 
should be withdrawn first. 

Demands highest order of skill in troop leadership. 
Covering Positions — those positions chosen to cover 

the retreating force. 



FIELD WORK. 205 

Ketreat — a step by step opposition to the enemy's ad- 
vance on a prearranged plan. 
Delaying actions: 

1. Advance delayed as long as possible, consistent 

with safe withdrawal. 

2. Delayers must hold position. 
Night 'Combat : 

Offensive advisable. 

1. Where fire superiority is impossible by day. 

2. To avoid heavy losses by advance to assaulting 

position by day. 

3. To capture posts or patrols. 

4. To surprise for moral effect. 
Defensive : 

Obstacles in front of position. 

Trenches heavily manned and supports drawn close. 
Shelter: 

Troops under canvas — in camp. 

Troops on ground without canvas — bivouac. 

Troops in huts or villages — cantonment. 

Tactical considerations are paramount in the selection 
of camp sites in the theater of operations. 
Selection of Camp Site: 

1. Suitably large to accommodate command. 

2. W(ater supply sufficient and accessible. 

3. Good roads to and in camp. 

4. Wood and grass forage near at hand. 

5. Sandy subsoil for drainage. 

6. Hot weather shade — cold protection. 

To maintain the efficiency of a command, troops must 
have adequate shelter. 
Sanitary 'Considerations Around Oamp: 

Latrines on opposite side of camp from kitchens. 

Short camps, straddle trenches. 

Long camps, trenches 2 by 6 by 12 with seats. 

Have latrines screened. 

Burn the trenches out daily and keep covered. 

Wash boxes and paint with tar. 



206 FIELD WORK. 

Questions and Answers on f.s.r. 

1. How are the land forces of the U. S. organized ? 
Ans. — The Mobile Army consisting of Regular 

Army, organized land militia when called to Federal 
service, drafted army, volunteers . and the field artillery 
and the Coast Artillery. 

Basis of organization is the Division composed of 
all arms and self-sufficient. Several divisions may be 
grouped into a field army, to which are attached field 
army troops. These are organized into a brigade for 
purpose of supply and administration when necessary 
through numbers. 

Coast Artillery is charged with the care and use of 
land and coast fortifications, including submarine 
mines and torpedo defenses. 

2. What is the object of collecting military in- 

formation % 

Ans. — To enable the War Department to decide 
upon the size of army or expedition, the proportions 
of different arms, the character of clothing, equipment, 
etc., needed for any operation. 

Information collected by the Gen. Staff in time of 
peace should include geography, physical resources, and 
military strength of the various nations. 

3. Define reconnaisance. 

Ans. — Eeconnaisance is used to designate the work 
of troops or individuals when gathering information in 
the field. 

It is necessary during combat for the tactical use 
of troops. 

It is carried on by: (a) aero squadron; (b) inde- 
pendent cavalry; (c) divisional cavalry; (d) by in- 
fantry as reconnoitering patrols. 

4. What are some indications of the presence of the 

enemy ? 
Ans,- — Clothing or material on roads or in aban- 
doned camps. 



FIELD WORK. 207 

A thick, low cloud *of dust indicates inf antry. 

A high, thin cloud cavalry. 

A broken cloud artillery or wagon trains. 

How would you determine from these indications 
what the number and organization of the enemy 
might be? 

A ns. — Estimate strength by length of time it takes 
to pass a given point. Assuming that infantry in 
column of squads occupies half a yard per man, 
cavalry in column of fours 1 yard per trooper, and 
artillery in single column 20 yards per gun or caisson, 
a given point would be passed in one minute by about : 
175 infantry, 110 cavalry at walk, 200 cavalry at trot, 
5 guns or caissons. 

5. Suppose on patrol and safely concealed for sight- 

ing the enemy at no great distance, by what 
rough method would you ascertain the approxi- 
mate strength of the force assuming it to be 
composed of infantry, cavalry and artillery? 
See answer No. 4. 

6. What is the composition and arrangement of the 

advance guard ? 

Ans. — « All arms of the service. In open country 
much cavalry and field artillery, the latter seldom 
assigned to command smaller than a brigade. Also 
machine guns, ambulance company if the force is large 
and engineers for purpose of removing obstacles to the 
march. 

Large command; advance cavalry, support, reserve. 

Small command ; point, advance party, support, 
reserve. 

Strength should be 1/20 to 1/3, depending on size 
of command and character of terrain. 

Advance guard increases in size proportionately with 
size of command. Why? 

7. Define: (a) Outguard; they constitute small de- 

tachments farthest to the front and nearest to 
the enemy. 



208 FIELD WORK. 

(b) Cossack post; observation group at indicated 
point consisting of four men, post single sentinel. 

(c) Picket; small command np to platoon placed in 
line of outguards at more important points sucb as 
road forks. 

8. What is an order? 

Ans. — Orders are used by commanders of divisions 
and separate brigades for regulating the movement 
and supply of field trains, fixing position of distribu- 
ting points for rations and forage, in short, have to do 
with supplies of all kinds, especially food. 
Form: 

The heading. 

The distribution of troops (in certain orders). 
The body. 
The ending. 
The Body contains: 

1. Information about the enemy and our sup- 

porting troops. 

2. General plan of the commander. 

3. Disposition of the troops. 

4. Instructions for the trains. 

5. Where the commander may be found or 

messages are to be sent. 

9. During an advance what is the general order of 

advance of a column? 
Ans. — Cavalry and horse artillery. 
Infantry and light artillery. 
Engineering and signal troops. 
Trains. 
10. What is the average march per day of various 
arms ? 
Ans. — Infantry, 15 miles per day. 

Infantry in large bodies, 12 miles per day. 
Cavalry, 25 miles per day. 
Field artillery, 15 to 20 miles per day. 
Horse artillery, same as cavalry, to which it 
may be attached. 



FIELD WORK. 209 

Forced marches are from 28 to 30 miles for 
infantry. 

11. How is the escort distributed in guarded convoys? 
Ans. — Advance guard, with advance cavalry 3 to 5 

miles ahead. 

Main body may be opposite most important point 
of the train, usually opposite its center. 

Section of infantry at head and tail of train. 

Flank guard — if necessary. 

Rear guard — 1/6 of escort. 

What places are most favorable for attacking convoy ? 

When passing through woods, defile, or over bridge, 
when going around sharp bends in the road; when 
convoy is forming corral. 

12. Discuss uses of the various arms in combat. 
Ans. — Infantry : The most important arm, charged 

with the main work of the battle. 

Artillery: Supporting arm of infantry. Its target 
is the opposing arm most dangerous to the infantry. 

Cavalry: Eeconnaisance before combat, support of 
other arms during combat. 

13. What is the difference between the attack and the 

assault ? 

Ans. — In combat where the force is as large or 
larger than a division, a simultaneous advance against 
the entire hostile front is out of the question. Attack 
is made up of a number of local combats. Some where 
enemy is engaged with view to driving him out. This 
is called the assault. Other parts of attack with fewer 
troops simply to keep the enemy from coming to the 
support of those troops of the assaulted lines. The 
entire advance against the enemy is the attack. 

After the jiring lines have advanced some distance 
the weak and the strong points of the enemy's lines 
are disclosed. The weak points of course are selected. 

14. Discuss the manner in which a pursuit should be 

carried out? 
14 



210 FIELD WORK. 

Ans. — If enemy commences withdrawal before front 
lines have given way. troops in action push forward 
until enemy in their front are driven away. Cavalry 
and horse artillery are thrown against flanks of re- 
treating enemy, or on their front. Purpose to further 
disorganize the enemy, heat him to bridges, defiles, 
etc. In meantime reserve is sent into the pnrsnit, while 
troops engaged are assembling to constitute a new 
reserve. General scheme is to keep in continuous con- 
tact with enemy, giving him no chance to reorganize. 
Boldness necessary. 

15. What are the different kinds of defense, and what 

is the purpose of each? 

Ans. — (a) Passive; to retain position for specified 
time with or without combat, or to prevent enemy 
from carrying position. 

(b) Defense seeking favorable decision; troops 
forced temporarily to assume the defensive, with inten- 
tion of assuming the offensive at first favorable 
opportunity. 

16. What is the purpose of the counter attack? 

Ans. — To win victory, stave off defeat or prevent 
lines from being entered. It may be launched either 
at the enemy's strong or weak points depending on 
conditions. If enemy are beaten off and disorgan- 
ized at some point, it may be good opportunity to 
follow up the advantage by counter attack. Also at 
other points where weakness develops. Counter attack 
is made at strength of enemy to prevent him from 
penetrating the defensive position. 

17. How should advance position be organized and 

held ? 

Ans. — Force should not be so weak that it can be 
driven back to main body before it accomplishes its 
purpose, nor so strong that it will hold out too long, 
thereby committing the entire force to action in ad- 
vance line instead of the line selected. 

Trenches. What is position in readiness ? 



FIELD WORK. 21 1 

Troops placed in readiness for action where it is 
intended to resist the advance of enemy in immediate 
vicinity, but knowledge of his movements not yet suf- 
ficiently definite to decide upon plan of action. Pre- 
liminary to taking up offensive, or more usually to 
taking up and occupying defensive position. Hasten 
deployment when time comes. 

18. If it becomes necessary to withdraw troops from 
action state steps necessary to insure the safety 
of troops during the withdrawal and retreat. 

Ans. — Last reserves should be used. If none, troops 
least pressed used to cover withdrawal. Cavalry and 
artillery used unsparingly. Depends on the terrain. 
First covering position well to the rear so as not to 
suffer demoralization. On flanks of line of retreat. 
There should also be facilities to withdraw the occupy- 
ing force. Firing line made as strong as possible, 
minimum of reserves held. Use M. G. Perhaps suc- 
cessive covering points necessary further to rear before 
advance of enemy can be checked. When a few miles 
to the rear, or far enough to free troops from all con- 
tact with the enemy, reorganize. Step-by-step opposi- 
tion useless. Number of covering positions should be 
reduced to the minimum. 

Retreat ; trains at once put into march. Other forces 
at once put into order of march. All roads used, 
separate roads for divisions. 

Effective rear guard from troops whose strength and 
morale is least impaired. 

Divisional cavalry and as much artillery as can 
effectively be used. Use artillery at long range to keep 
the enemy deployed, destroy bridges, etc. 



CHAPTER 9. 

Feeding Men. 

In Camp. — You will usually have plenty of food 
but continual inspecting is necessary to have it prop- 
erly cared for, prepared and served. The kitchen must 
be kept clean; company commanders inspect daily and 
insist on the following: 

1. Have cooks and enlisted men come to attention 
at the command of the first man who sees you approach. 

2. Have all refrigerators opened, and put your head 
in far enough to detect any bad odors. 

3. Check the bill of fare and see that food not con- 
sumed one day is utilized later — waste bread for 
bread pudding, for example. 

4. See that doors close properly, that windows are 
screened and roof is tight — allow no flies. 

5. Have floors, tables and refrigerators scrubbed 
daily. 

6. Have the ground around the mess shack raked and 
thoroughly policed. Towels hung out to dry must be so 
hung as not to fall to the ground. Raked ground does 
not allow flies to build undisturbed. 

7. Taste the coffee and look in the coffee bins. 

8. Inspect pans, knives, meat grinder (have latter 
taken apart for you occasionally) . 

9. See that the mess sergeant looks after the incin- 
erator properly; that he makes the cooks use what he 
tells them to. Cooks should not be allowed to help 
themselves to things ; the mess sergeant should weigh 
out or set out just what is to be used each day. 

10. Have the food served hot and in individual por- 
tions as far as possible ; see that the food is not put on 
the table too soon. 

11. During each month talk with an old soldier, a 
raw recruit and a non-commissioned officer about the 
mess to see what the men think of it. 



214 FEEDING MEN. 

On the Maiich. — (1. i.d.r., 669-673. ) 

If portable kitchens accompany troops, the men should 
fall in in single file and be helped to food as they pass 
by in companies. 

Foe Individual Cookixg. — Rations issued might 
be: 1 carton of hard-tack, 1 ration of bacon, 1 potato, 
2 tablespoons of rice. 1 heaping tablespoon of coffee, 
sugar. 

Fires for individual cooking are best made out of 
small dried twigs to produce a hot fire large enough for 
a group of four men. 

There are two methods of cooking with the issue 
mess-kit. 

First 'Method: Each man cooking for himself. As 
there are but two cooking utensils, the tin cup and the 
frying pan, the cooking must be systematized in order 
to cook four articles on the two utensils. To do this, 
the rice is first cooked in the tin cup filling the tin cup 
one-third full of water throwing in the rice. The water 
is brought to a boil and boiled until the individual 
grains of rice are soft through. The tin cup is then re- 
moved from the fire, the water poured off, and the cup 
covered with the lid of the mess tin, the rice being 
allowed to steam. In the meantime, the bacon should be 
fried in the frying pan, the grease being saved. When 
the rice is well steamed, it is turned out in the lid of 
the meat can, then the bacon placed on top of it. The 
tin cup is washed out and the man is then ready to fry 
his potato and boil his coffee. The cup is filled two- 
thirds full of water and the coffee placed in it and 
boiled until the desired strength is attained. To pre- 
vent the coffee from boiling over, a canteen of water 
should be handy and water thrown in whenever the 
coffee begins to boil over. When the coffee is strong 
enough, the addition of cold water will settle the 
grounds. In the meantime, cut the potatoes very thin 
and fry them in the bacon grease and the meal is ready : 
hard-tack, potatoes, rice, bacon and coffee. 



FEEDING MEN. 215 

Second Method : Squads of four may specialize ; one 
man to collect the frying pans and fry all the bacon, 
another the potatoes, another the rice and coffee, and 
the other for collection of wood. Either method may be 
followed. 

Mess-kits should be cleaned immediately after using, 
sand being used for scouring. Mess-kits must be 
cleaned thoroughly. 

In the Tbenches. — Usually rations and stores will 
be carried up to the trenches by the supports and the 
reserves. If this is not possible and it becomes neces- 
sary that men from the front line trenches be employed, 
not more than 10 per cent of the men in the firing line 
are to be away from the trenches at the same time. 
Rations and Cooking: 

(a) Ration parties from the support and reserve 
trenches will be made up in complete units, i. e., pla- 
toons or companies. 

(b) The company mess sergeant will accompany the 
ration parties for his company and will report his 
arrival to the company commander. 

(c) Great care is to be taken that ration and carry- 
ing parties make as little noise as possible. 

(d) Cooking if possible will be done behind the front 
line trenches, and should be concentrated by sections or 
companies. Steps must be taken to insure that as little 
smoke as possible is made by the cook's fires. 

(e) Waste in any form will be discouraged. 

(f ) Arrangements should be made to insure that soup 
or some hot drink be available for the men between 
midnight and 7 a. m. 

Each company commander must see that timely 
requisitions for rations are made and to have no delays 
at meal times. Eood should be brought up in tin boilers 
about the size of wash boilers so that two men can 
handle one of them easily without a relief. In front 
line, men send mess kit relayed from hand to hand to 
these boilers at stations in each platoon or section and 



216 FEEDING MEN. 

they are relayed back. Sometimes men in the front 
]ine are relieved for a few minutes. Always carry 24 
hours rations. 

Camping and Camp Sanitation. 

GENERAL PRINCIPLES! 

Great care must be exercised in selecting a camp site, 
but it must never be forgotten that the tactical situation 
is of paramount importance. 

The following principles govern the selection : 

(1) Sufficient supply of pure water. 

(2) Good roads, but not too near a main highway on 
account of dust and noise. 

(3) Wood and forage must be obtainable. 
The ground should : 

(1) Give ample room without crowding. 

(2) Have porous soil. 

(3) Have high elevation to make site dry. 

Avoid : 

(1) Marshy ground and mosquitoes. 

(2) Woods or dense vegetation. 

(3) Ravines or depressions in terrain or dry stream 
beds subject to sudden freshets. 

Water must be obtainable: 

(1) Arrange immediately where to obtain 

(a) Drinking and cooking water. 

(b) Water for animals. 

(c) Water for bathing and washing. 

In the case of running water, the point furthest up- 
stream shall be guarded for drinking and cooking water. 
Bathing shall be done at a point furthest down-stream. 

Successful military camping depends upon three (3) 
things : 

(1) Discipline. 

(2) Cooking. 

(3) Sanitation. 



CAMPING AND CAMP SANITATION. 217 

Discipline means control ; it means order. Nowhere 
are these more essential. Confusion is loss of control, 
loss of time, and loss of respect by the men. 

Upon arrival at a favorable camp site get the men off 
their feet. Do not wait around. As C. 0. have your 
decisions made and the work organized, so that each 
squad will be under a leader. Keep squads together, 
allowing none to stray off until the work is done, then 
let everyone rest except the sentinels. 

Do not omit to post sentinels over the water supply 
and at important points, even though you have not de- 
cided upon the exact location of camp. 

Organize the work by platoons or squads and rotate, 
if camp is to be made every few days. 

Discipline in camp means more than order and dis- 
patch, however, men must understand that they are un- 
der discipline when off' duty — that they cannot disre- 
gard sanitary measures, eat promiscuously, destroy 
property, vegetation, or timber and must police the 
grounds at all times. Papers, cigarette butts, and news- 
papers, should never be allowed on the ground near 
camp. Eatables should never be kept in tents to draw 
vermin. Where possible, in dry weather, the company 
street should be wet down to keep the dust out of the 
tents. Have men ditch around tents immediately upon 
making camp. Though it may seem somewhat of a 
hardship, a sudden down pour of rain, will recompense 
them for this labor many times over. In ditching the 
tents, completely circle them, for if this is not done a 
great deal of rain will come in the front of the tent. 

Food means everything to a soldier. The camp cook- 
ing is a barometer of the organized efficiency and of the 
enlisted men's attitude. Nothing else can do so much 
to help or hinder. 

The Company Commander should realize the con- 
trolling power exercised by the company cook and keep 
the matter in his own hands. He should accept no ex- 
cuse for burnt or dirty food. 



218 CAMPING AND CAMP SANITATION. 

If officers mess with their companies they will appre- 
ciate the attitude of the men and be able to judge the 
real situation. .Officers will be well repaid for doing 
this, as it gives them an idea of the food that is being 
served their men. 

In the mechanical details of preparing food, the fire 
is of first importance. A quick method of cooking is by 
laying a pair of large green logs on the surface of the 
ground just wide enough to place the pots between them, 
so that the bottom of the pots will be resting upon them. 
Build a fire between these logs, making sure to place 
the logs parallel to the direction of the wind. 

A pit may be dug, with a sloping bottom, and across 
this may be placed the pots, and if iron rails are avail- 
able, the utensils may be placed on these. For longer 
stays this pit may be lined with stone. Stones retain 
the heat and less wood is required. Four trenches radi- 
ating from a central chimney will give one flue what- 
ever may be the direction of the wind. (For more spe- 
cific data on the subject of fires and camp cooking, see 
Manual for Army Cooks — U.S.A. — also notes in i.d.r., 
pp. 154-155.) 

Make a rule never to allow food to remain in tin cans 
after opening them. Remember to place kitchen near 
available water supply and furthest from latrines, horse 
picket lines, or dumps of any kind. 

Sanitation comes last in the thoughts of the enlisted 
man, but it is no less important for that. 

The first requisite is cleanliness. Food receptacles 
must be scoured and covers and cracks in tin ware 
scraped as well as scalding the tins themselves. Have 
boiling hot water in tanks (galvanized iron ash cans are 
good) for men to wash mess kits in after meals. One 
can should contain soapy water so as to cut the grease 
from the dishes, and the second tank should contain 
clean, boiling water for scalding the kits. Scraps of 
food should be scraped from the mess tins before im- 
mersing them in water, otherwise washing water be- 



CAMPING AND CAMP SANITATION. 219 

comes filled with small particles of food. Wiping cloths 
will greatly add to the convenience of the men and takes 
but a short time to make them clean and fit for use 
again. 

Care must be exercised over three kinds of waste : 

(1) Garbage. 

(2) Kitchen slops. 

(3) Excreta. 

Garbage can be burned in the kitchen fires. It should 
never stand exposed to the air, but should be tightly 
covered in iron cans, and should be disposed of every 
twenty-four hours. Kitchen help have an aversion to 
prompt disposal of garbage and need watching. Fly 
traps should be made of muslin and used freely about 
the kitchen. 

Kitchen slops, fats, greasy water, etc., must be 
drained into covered pits, never allowing them to be 
tossed on the ground around the cook tent. A hole dug 
and partially filled with stones with a barrel placed 
upside down on them, makes a very good receptacle for 
kitchen slops. The barrel should be placed so that the 
inverted top will be a little way beneath the surface 
of the ground. A hole should be bored in the bottom 
of the barrel and a funnel inserted, through which the 
slops may be poured. If the soil is porous, a trough 
may be dug and covered with mosquito netting or cheese 
cloth, and the water poured through this and allowed 
to drain off. 

Excreta is the most deadly form of waste, and too 
much care cannot be exercised in disposing of it. Im- 
press upon every man that he must cover completely 
with dirt all excreta so that flies may not have a chance 
to approach it. 

Eor short stops and while working in the field 
" straddle," latrines are the best. These are shallow 
trenches the width of a shovel, about 12' inches wide, 
and several feet in length. For long stops a deep 



220 CAMPING AND CAMP SANITATION. 

latrine is dug of the following dimensions : 2 feet wide, 
6 feet deep by 15 feet long. Two posts with crotches, 
driven at the ends of this trench, supporting a substan- 
tial pole to make a seat * * * for convenience a 
hand rail placed in front of this improvised seat will 
add to the comfort of the men. 

A more permanent latrine is made by covering the 
pit with a wooden box, in the top of which are cut holes 
of the necessary diameter. To these holes should be 
fitted spring covers which will shut down tightly. A 
wooden frame boarded around this arrangement makes 
a satisfactory enclosure. 

A urinal made of two long boards joined together 
to form a Y-shaped trough and drained by a pipe into 
the pit completes the whole. A pitch sufficient for rapid 
drainage should be given the urinal trough. 

When necessary to utilize separate urinals, a hole 
filled with stone and sprinkled daily with quicklime is 
sufficient for short periods. At night there should be 
a galvanized iron can placed in each company street 
and emptied before reveille each morning. This can 
must be disinfected by burning out, as must be the 
latrines when earth or sand is not used as a covering 
each time. 

Pits must be covered daily with quicklime, ashes, 
earth and filled when within two (2) feet of the sur- 
face. Their position should be distinctly marked so as 
to prevent reopening. 

It is a safe rule never to use an old camp ground, 
but select a new one, even if less conveniently located. 
Camp sites should be changed if it is found that the 
soil is becoming polluted, or if the ground is cut up and 
dusty from constant use. 

The condition in which a camp site is left by an 
organization will clearly indicate the efficiency and dis- 
cipline in a command. 



CHAPTER 10. 

Personal Hygiene and First Aid. 

This is a purely arbitrary grouping -of topics for the 
purpose of saving space. Either of the topics men- 
tioned could be treated at length ; detailed information 
will be found in any of the reference books mentioned 
in the bibliography. 

Personal Hygiene means " the preservation of 
health by attention to the care of the body;" it is 
determined by the formation of correct habits. Clean- 
liness of person, clothing and bedding should become a 
habit of life with the soldier ; but some men will always 
require watching and admonition. These habits are: 
personal cleanliness; regulation of diet; avoidance of 
excesses (eating, drinking and sexual matters) ; wearing 
suitable clothing; keeping the bodily processes at work 
(kidneys, bowels and skin) ; taking sufficient exercise, 
preferably in the open air ; rest of body and mind, with 
recreation for the latter; maintaining the surroundings 
in which one lives in a cleanly state. 

Bathing is easily the most important requirement in 
matters of personal hygiene ; men should bathe as often 
as conditions of life in barracks and camp will permit. 
On the march a vigorous " dry rub " with a coarse 
towel will often prove an excellent substitute when 
water is not available. Teeth should be cleaned at least 
twice daily. Clothing should be kept clean, particularly 
underclothing. Diet is not a matter which a soldier can 
determine to any extent for himself ; but he can follow 
a certain few precautions : 

1. Don't eat hurriedly; chew the food properly. 

2. Don't overload the stomach. 

3. Don't eat green or overripe fruit. 

4. Don't eat anything while away from camp or bar- 
racks, whose materials or manner of preparation seem 
questionable. 



222 PERSONAL HYGIENE AND FIRST AID. 

'5. Don't bring a " grouch " to the table with you. 

6. Don't eat on the march; don't drink too much 
water on the march. 

Sexual Indulgence is a matter to be handled tact- 
fully, but with absolute frankness. Men should be 
taught that it is not a matter of necessity; that their 
health will not suffer by any lack of it ; that they them- 
selves will be the sufferers for any violations of rules of 
health. The procedure directed by the War Department 
for purposes of combatting infection is as follows: 

1. That physical inspections of enlisted men be made 
twice each month for the detection of venereal disease. 

2. That any soldier who exposes himself to infection 
shall report for cleansing and preventive treatment im- 
mediately upon return to camp or garrison. 

3. That any soldier who fails so to report, if found 
to be suffering from a venereal infection, shall be 
brought to trial by court martial for neglect of duty. 

4. That men so infected shall be confined strictly to 
the limits of the post during the infectious stages of the 
disease. 

5. That all officers serving with troops shall do their 
utmost to encourage healthful exercises and physical 
recreation and to supply opportunities for cleanly social 
and interesting mental occupations for the men under 
their command. 

6. That company and medical officers shall take ad- 
vantage of favorable opportunities to point out the 
misery and disaster that follow upon moral unclean- 
liness; and the fact that venereal disease is never a 
trivial affair. 

With a great many men these precautions and 
measures will not be necessary but for the sake of those 
who are ignorant or neglectful, proper steps should at 
all times be taken. 

Exekcise. — A sufficient amount of exercise to main- 
tain health is ordinarily provided by military drills and 
other duties requiring active movement. But this should 



PERSONAL HYGIENE AND FIRST AID. 223 

•be regarded only as the minimum of exercise ; athletic 
work should be encouraged (and this will be done by 
the present activities of those " higher up ") ; bayonet 
training will be found an excellent medium of accom- 
plishing a double purpose ; calisthenics should be short 
but snappy and vigorous. A vigorous policy of an 
officer as regards things of this sort will ward off a 
great many minor ills and particularly k; colds," which 
are often the result of poor ventilation. 

Cleanliness or Surroundings. — Men should be 
taught that cleanliness of surroundings is not merely 
for purposes of inspection ; but that it is absolutely 
necessary where a great number of men are living to- 
gether in close quarters. Quarters should be well 
policed ; the company street should be kept clean ; 
refuse of all sorts should be kept in receptacles provided 
for that purpose and frequently removed. A police 
squad appointed daily should be charged with this work, 
and the corporal of the same made responsible for the 
condition of quarters and the company street. 

Preventable Diseases. — Men should be given a cer- 
tain amount of theoretical knowledge of preventable 
diseases. These matters' will be taken care of to a large 
extent by the Medical Corps ; but men should be taught 
just what precautions are necessary to avoid recourse 
to the hospital. 

Venereal diseases have already been touched upon. 

Typhoid Fever is a germ disease and communi- 
cable. Vaccination is the first preventive; protection 
of water supply is the second ; thorough disposal of 
wastes is a third; and sharp punishment for violation 
of sanitary regulations is a fourth. Habits of personal 
cleanliness will do much to prevent any such disease. 

Dysentery is very common in field service, but may 
be prevented by same methods as for typhoid fever, save 
for vaccination ; men suffering from this malady should 
be isolated, if possible, and utmost precaution taken to 
prevent spread of the disease. 



224 PERSONAL HYGIENE AND FIRST AID. 

Malaria is a mosquito disease ; get rid of mosquitoes 
and then you will get rid of the carrier of the germs. 
Quinine may act as a preventive. Cases should be 
isolated, if possible. 

Tonsilitis and Coeds may be combatted very 
effectively by proper precautions as to ventilation. 

•Measles. — Very important but little known ; isola- 
tion recommended. 

There are many other diseases concerning which the 
men should be instructed, but lack of space prevents 
further treatment of them. They should be taught the 
proper treatment of blistered feet, for they incapacitate 
a great many men ; the chief causes are ill-fitting shoes 
and our old friend " uncleanliness." Shoes are the 
most important article of clothing of the infantryman; 
each man should have one pair well broken in for march- 
ing, and two other pairs. Socks should be soft, smooth 
and without holes — also clean. Further steps for the 
prevention of blisters are ; hardening of the skin by 
appropriate baths for the feet; soaping the feet; or 
adopting some other means of reducing the friction of 
the foot against the sock. Treatment — "Wash the feet ; 
open the blister at the lowest point, with a clean needle ; 
dress with vaseline or other ointment and protect with 
adhesive plaster, care being taken not to shut out the 
air. Zinc oxide plaster is excellent. Sterilize a needle ; 
thread it with a woolly thread and run it through blister, 
leaving ends projecting about one-half inch; this will 
act as a wick and dry up blister in short time. 

First Aid. — ■ Explain to the men the uses of the first 
aid packet and of the pouch carried by the Medical 
'Corps. (This pouch is being replaced by web-belts 
with pockets.) 

'Wounds may be classed as ordinary cuts, inside 
wounds, lacerated, punctured and poisoned wounds. 
For ordinary minor wounds — iodine and exposure to 
the air are usually sufficient. War wounds are usually 
caused by something having an explosive effect and may 



PERSONAL HYGIENE AND FIRST AID. 225 

be accompanied by hemorrhage, shock and even loss of 
function; they may be arterial or venous. 

Poisoned Wounds are of two sorts ; external and 
internal. 

Diagnosis Tag. — This tag placed on a soldier shows 
wound, name, rank, regiment, treatment received, etc. 
This tag should be carefully read before further treat- 
ment is accorded. 

Treatment of Wounds. — The compress of the first 
aid packet will always prove of help. 

Bleeding Wounds. — The bandage of the first aid 
packet will stop all ordinary bleeding ; but in aggravated 
cases the bleeding may be stopped by pressure on the 
artery, between the wound and the heart. This may be 
done by hand or by means of the' forceps in the medical 
pouch. The points of compression should be learned 
and located; in front of the ear just above the socket 
of the jaw; in the neck in front of the strongly marked 
muscle reaching from behind the ear to the upper part 
of the breast bone ; in the hollow behind the collar 
bone ; just behind the inner border of the larger muscle 
of the arm ; the femoral artery at the middle of the 
groin where the artery passes over the bone. Bleeding 
may also be stopped to some extent by elevating the 
wounded part, A tourniquet may be improvised by 
using the compress, running a stick or the bayonet 
through the band, and taking up the slack by twisting. 

Poisoned Wounds. — Tor a snakebite make a tight 
constriction just above the wound; make an incision at 
the bite and suck out the poison. Do it quickly. If 
this is impossible, follow the same plan but give a stim- 
ulant ; repeatedly loosen the constriction and let a little 
of the poison into the system at a. time to be neutralized. 
In cases of chemical poisoning do not follow the usual 
method of treating poisoning. Do not make the patient 
vomit, but give him something fat or albuminous such 
as raw eggs or milk. This forms mercurial albuminate. 
15 



226 PERSONAL HYGIENE AND FIRST AID. 

Ptomaine poisoning (symptoms are headache, cramps, 
nausea, high fever and chills, etc.). Drink salt water, 
vomit and repeat the procedure to clean out the stomach. 
A purgative should also be taken. Ice cream and milk 
kept too long are frequent causes of this sort of poison- 
ing, as are dishes kept in the icebox over night. 

Fjainting, Heat Eixhatjstiox and Shock are all of 
the same class ; symptoms are the same — weak pulse, 
paleness and low temperature, tendency to fall to 
ground. Often follows taking too much w^ater on the 
march. Treatment should be in nature of stimulant ; 
make patient lie down, get blood to his head, wrap him 
in blankets, give him hot drinks, etc. 

Sunstroke. — Symptoms and treatment are different. 
Patient has a high temperature. Keep his head high 
and feet low ; disrobe him and pour cold water on him ; 
keep him in a cool place until temperature lowers to 101 ; 
then remove cold water and temperature will go down 
itself. Do not apply cold water too long as the temper- 
ature may go to sub-normal which is just as dangerous 
as a temperature abnormally high. 

B'URxs and Scalds. — Air should be shut out ; other- 
wise treat like blister, care being taken not to remove 
skin. Do not put on anything that will stick and do 
not try to remove anything that has a tendency to stick; 
put on linseed oil and water, cotton and a loose bandage. 

Freezing and Frostbites. — Use ice water and snow 
to start with. Keep the patient cool until he is thawed 
out. Massage and gradually work up to a warmer 
temperature. 

Fractures are of three kinds ; simple, compound and 
comminuted. 

Simple: Bones do not penetrate the skin (may be 
single or double). 

'Compound: Bones penetrate the skin and cause in- 
fection. 

'Comminuted : Bone is shattered. 



PERSONAL HYGIENE AND FIRST AID. 227 

Indications of a fracture are: Pain, redness, swell- 
ing and mobility where it ought not to be. 

Treatment. — Find out the kind of fracture. Paint 
the wound and put on first aid packet ; replace the 
clothes and splint the break. Splints should not be too 
long so as to cause any friction or annoyance to the 
patient. They may be made out of any available ma- 
teria], such as rifle, bayonet, shingle, piece of board, 
scabbard, etc. Bind them firmly but not too tightly. 

Artificial Pespiratiox. — This subject is worthy 
of more treatment than it can be accorded here. Any 
text on first aid will explain thoroughly the Schaefer 
method, which is now the standard method in the armyi 
Points to be remembered in this method are ; remove 
foreign articles from the mouth ; curl the little finger 
over the 12th rib ; avoid the pelvic bones ; hold the arms 
straight and apply the pressure by means of the whole 
body brought forward ; take care not to break a rib ; do 
not give up too soon. 

Trench Foot.— This is due to long standing with 
legs and feet in wet clothes. There are three types : 

Mild : Symptoms are numbness and a slight swelling. 

Medium: Additional symptom of a bluing of the 
leg; also large blisters. 

Severe: Gangrene sets in. 

Tight clothes help to bring on these things. Keep 
the shoes, socks and breeches loose; keep the clothes 
dry ; furnish the men with hot food in the trenches and 
so keep up the circulation. Bo not vse grease. Trench 
foot can be avoided by proper treatment, and punish- 
ment should follow upon its contraction. 



CHAPTER 11. 
Signaling. 

This chapter proposes to cover a large amount of 
ground in a small compass; hence treatment must be 
brief. A more liberal treatment will be found at differ- 
ent sources; here a few suggestions and hints will be 
given. 

■Semaphore. — Time spent, 6' hours : 6 sessions % 
hours, 1 session 1 hour, 1 conference 2 hours. It is easy 
to say u just learn the semaphore," but to learn it 
quickly and well is another matter. A few suggestions 
as to the methods followed by others will usually prove 
helpful. Learn the semaphore by what may be called 
the " cycle " method, i. e., teach and illustrate how the 
successive letters are formed by moving the arm or arms 
around the body in a clockwise direction through suc- 
cessive stages. There are a few exceptions to the rule 
as will be pointed out ; but they only serve as a few land- 
marks and help to fix the whole matter more firmly 
in mind. 

First Cycle. — 1 arm. A to G. One arm always 
at the interval. Be .sure to make the " D " with right 
arm straight overhead — then it is more distinct at a 
distance. (Plate.) 

Second Cycle. — 2 arms. H to E", inclusive, with 
exception of J. One arm always in the A position. In 
making I always be sure that the left hand, is at the 
A position. Some men insist in making this letter 
wrong by crossing the body with the left hand upper- 
most. This is very awkward and also very indistinct at 
a distance. P changes arms but retains same relative 
position of flags. 

Third Cycle. — 2 arms. T and II. Right arm in 
position of C. Letter U actually resembles that letter. 

Third Cycle. — 2 arms. to S. One arm always 
in B position. In letter 0, left arm is in B position ; 
in all others, right arm. 



230 SIGNALING. 

Fourth Cycle. — 2 arms. T and U. Right arm in 
position of C. Letter U actually resembles that letter. 

Doubles. — L, U, R, X. These letters are keys to 
many others and should be promptly learned. 

Opposites..— V and K, O and W, Q and Y, S and M, 
Z and H, X and I, H follows L in cycle and is opposite 
of -S, S follows R in cycle and is opposite of M, K pre- 
cedes L in cycle and is opposite of V. Figures are first 
10 letters of alphabet, preceded by crossing flags over- 
head. 

Instructing. — This plan of teaching the semaphore 
will be found very helpful, for it helps to reason out 
the alphabet for the student. By fixing firmly in mind 
a few things the student can soon reason out the alpha- 
bet for himself by a very logical plan. 

Secoxd Step. — After the men have been taught the 
alphabet they should either pair off and one man send 
to the other, or one man should be selected to send for 
the entire class. At first only letters should be sent un- 
til the men have learned the alphabet thoroughly. In 
this way the key characters of the alphabet can be fixed 
in mind, as well as their relation to the other letters. 

Thled Step. — The men should next be paired off and 
instructed to send simple messages to each other. You 
should insist that there be no other communication be- 
tween the men than by means of their flags. 

Foueth Step. — Proceed to simple qualification 
tests, four men working in two pairs and the pairs al- 
ternating in sending and receiving. One man of first 
pair should read for his companion to send. On the 
other end. one man should read and the other copy. 
The distances should be such as to preclude the possi- 
bility of conversation. Forty letters per minute is a 
fair test ; or this system may be followed : Have a good 
signalman send 10 combinations of 5 letters each to the 
whole class. The men should read these and write 



SIGNALING. 



231 



Plate 
-#=/3 



A « L 



B ^ 2 



£ « 2. 



£ * 6 



a a s 



E * 5 J ^ O 



PREPARATORY 







ij^oi|l 



tt-g ISfc^cle, h-n 2»>eycfe, o_ 3 3^ o^cfe, T-u ^-cyei* 







SPACE 

OR 

END OF MESSAGE 



232 SIGNALING. 

thorn clown, one combination at a time. Time limit 
should be 3 minutes. 

Wig Wag. — Time spent : Same as semaphore course. 
The alphabet can be found in any standard signal book, 
or in the " Manual for N on-Commissioned Officers and 
Privates." The dots are made to the right of the body, 
the dashes to the left ; interval at the end of a word by 
dipping the flag once to the front, at the end of a sen- 
tence by dipping it twice, and at the end of a message 
by dipping it three times. The alphabet should be 
learned first according to the same general plan as in 
the semaphore ; i.e., the key letters to certain combina- 
tions should first be learned. The following grouping 
of letters may be found helpful: 

E I S H; T M ,0; A U V; 1ST D B; K F L; K C Y; 
WPJ;GZQ. 

The instructor can find many other groupings that 
will aid him. It should also be pointed out that each 
number from one to ten consists of five characters, and 
that each succeeding number follows the previous one 
according to a regular method. 

After the men have studied the alphabet sufficiently, 
have them send to each other, limiting the work at first 
to letters only. Then gradually work up to the point 
where they may send simple messages. Make them 
rely upon the flags for communicating during the prac- 
tice. Do not permit conversation — separate the men 
by a considerable distance. In both wig wag and sema- 
phore instruction the same plan should be followed as 
in teaching a foreign language; i. e., confine all com- 
munication to the medium under study. Qualification 
tests are similar to those for the semaphore, except that 
less speed can be exacted; 15 characters per minute or 
10 combinations of 5 letters each to be received and 
written down in 5 minutes. 

In both the semaphore and the wig wag men should 
be taught the conventional signals used in field work. 
These can be found in any manual on the subject. 



SIGNALING. 



233 



Points to Remember. 

The semaphore is a quicker means of communication 
than the wig wag; but the wig wag can be used in a 
prone position under shelter. 

Lanterns can be used at night for semaphoring. 

Acetylene lamps can be used at night in place of the 
wig wag. In this case a short flash represents a dot, 
a long flash a dash. 

A few men in each company should be developed into 
expert signalers ; some men always show aptitude for 
this sort of thing. 

Frequent use should be made of signaling in field 
work. 



Letter Codes. 

Infantry. 
For use with General Service Code or semaphore hand flags. 



Letter of alphabet 



AM 

CCC 

CF 

DT 

F 

FB 

FL 

G 

HHH 

K 

LT 

O 

(Ardois and sema- 
phore only.) 

(All methods but 
(Ardois and sem 
phore.) 

P 

RN 

RT 

sss 

SUF 

T 



If signaled from the rear 
to the firing line 



Ammunition going for- 
ward. 

Charge (mandatory at 
all times). 

Cease firing. 

Double time or " rush." 

Commence firing. 

Fix bayonets. 

Artillery fire is causing 

us losses. 
Move forward. 

Halt. 
Negative. 
Left. 

What is the (R.N., etc.)? 
Interrogatory. 

What is the (R.N., etc.)? 
Interrogatory. 



Affirmative. 

Range. 

Right. 

Support going forward. 

Suspend firing. 

Target. 



If signaled from the firing 
line to the rear 



Ammunition required. 

Am about to charge if 
no instructions to the 
contrary. 

Cease firing. 

Double time or " rush." 



Preparing to move for- 
ward. 

Negative. 
Left. 

What is the (R.N., etc.)? 
Interrogatory. 

What is the (R.N., etc.) ? 
Interrogatory. 



Affirmative. 

Range. 

Right. 

Support needed. 

Suspend firing. 

Target. 



234 SIGNALING. 

Arm Signals. 

The following arm signals are prescribed. In 
making signals either arm may be used. Officers who 
receive signals on the firing line " retreat back " at 
once to prevent misunderstandings. 

Foewaed March. — Carry the hand to the shoulder ; 
straighten and hold the arm horizontally, thrusting it 
in direction of march. This signal is also used to 
execute quick time from double time. 

Halt. — Carry the hand to the shoulder ; thrust the 
hand upward and hold the arm vertically. 

Double Time, March. — Carry the hand to the 
shoulder; rapidly thrust the hand upward the full 
extent of the arm several times. 

Squads Right, March. — Raise the arm laterally 
until horizontal; carry it to a vertical position above 
the head and swing it several times between the ver- 
tical and horizontal positions. 

Squads Left, March. — Raise the arm laterally 
until horizontal; carry it downward to the side and 
swing it several times between the downward and hori- 
zontal positions. 

Squads Right About, March (if in close order) 
or, To the Rear, March (if in skirmish line). — 
Extend the arm vertically above the head ; carry it 
laterally downward to the side and swing it several 
times between the vertical and downward positions. 

Chaxge Direction or Column Right (Left), 
March. — The hand on the side toward which the 
change of direction is to be made is carried across the 
body to the opposite shoulder, forearm horizontal ; then 
swing in a horizontal plane, arm extended, pointing in 
the new direction. 

As Skirmishers, March. — Raise both arms later- 
ally until horizontal. 



SIGNALING. 235 

As Skirmishers, Guide Center, March. — Raise 
both arms laterally until horizontal; swing both simul- 
taneously upward until vertical and return to the hori- 
zontal ; repeat several times. 

As Skirmishers, Guide Right (Left"), March. — 
Raise both arms laterally until horizontal; hold the 
arm on the side of the guide steadily in the horizontal 
position; swing the other upward until vertical and 
return it to the horizontal; repeat several times. 

Assemble, March. — Raise the arm vertically to its 
full extent and describe horizontal circles. 

Range, or Change Elevation. — To announce the 
Range, extend the arm toward the leaders or men for 
whom the signal is intended, fist closed ; by keeping 
the fist closed battle sight is indicated ; by opening and 
closing the fist, expose thumb and fingers to a number 
equal to the hundreds of yards; to add 50 yards de- 
scribe a short horizontal line with forefinger. To 
change elevation, indicate the amount of increase or 
decrease by fingers as above ; point upward to indicate 
increase and downward to indicate decrease. 

What Range are You Using? or What is the 
Range ? — Extend the arms toward the person ad- 
dressed, one hand open, palm to the front, resting on 
the other hand, fist closed. 

Are You Ready ? or I am Ready. — Raise the hand, 
fingers extended and joined, palm toward the person 
addressed. 

Commence Eiring. — Move the arm extended in 
full length, hand palm down, several times through a 
horizontal arc in front of the body. 

Fire Easter. — Execute rapidly the signal " Com- 
mence Firing/' 

Fire Slower. — Execute slowly the signal " Com- 
mence Firing." 

To Swing the Cone of Fire to the Right, or 
Left. — Extend the arm in full length to the front, 



236 SIGNALING. 

palm to the right (left) ; swing the arm to right (left), 
and point in the direction of the new target. 

Fix Bayonet. — Simulate the movement of the right 
hand in " Fix Bayonet." 

Suspend Firing. — Raise and hold the forearm 
steadily in a horizontal position in front of the fore- 
head, palm of the hand to the front. 

Cease Firing. — Raise the forearm as in suspend 
firing and swing it up and down several times in front 
of the face. 

Platoon. — Extend the arm horizontally toward the 
platoon leader; describe small circles with the hand. 

Squad. — Extend the arm horizontally toward the 
platoon leader ; swing the hand np and down from the 
wrist. 

Rush. — Same as double time. 

The signals Platoon and Squad are intended 
primarily for communication between the captain and 
his platoon leaders. The signal Platoon or Squad 
indicates that the platoon commander is to cause the 
signal which follows to be executed by platoon or squad. 



CHAPTER 12. 

Guard Duty. 

Time spent: Study, 2 'hours. 

Conference, 2 hours. 
Formal guard mounting. 
Guards are divided roughly into four classes : 

1. Exterior — (Which come more properly under 
head of field service). 

2. Interior — Their purpose is to preserve order, pro- 
tect property and enforce police regulations. 

3. Military Police — Also treated of in field service. 

4. Provost Guards — Used in the absence of military 
police to aid civil authorities in preserving order among 
soldiers beyond the interior guard. 

Here we are concerned chiefly with interior 
guards. We shall make up a brief summary of what 
an officer must know and what he ought to teach his non- 
coms, and men. Also we shall touch upon the subject of 
guard duty as it has been changed by trench warfare. 

An officer ought to have a, good grasp of the following 
subjects relative to guard duty : 

1. Guard mounting (both formal and informal). 

2. Posting reliefs. 

3. Preparation and running of rosters. 

4. General orders — also special orders at post ~No. 1. 

5. Duties of the following in reference to guard duty : 

1. Commanding officer. 

2. Officer of the day. 

3. Adjutant. 

4. Sergeant Major. 

5. Commander of the guard. 

6. Sergeant of the guard. 

7. Corporal of the guard. 
8«. Musicians. 

9. Orderlies and color sentinels. 
10. Privates of the guard. 



238 GUARD DUTY. 

6. Compliments of the guard. 

7. Prisoners: General. 

Garrison. 
Awaiting trial. 
Awaiting result of trial. 
How is an officer arrested £ Can an enlisted man 

arrest him \ 
How is a non-com. arrested ? 
How is a soldier arrested ? 
How is a civilian arrested ? 
(See a.w. Xo. 68.) 
An officer ought to teach to his non-coms, as much of 
the above as is consistent with time and other demands ; 
he ought to teach to his privates all that is necessary to 
the proper discharge of their duties in this connection. 

Formal Guard Mounting. — Here follow a few re- 
minders that may help the reader to keep the ceremony 
in mind: 

1. Weather conditions permitting, guard mounting 
takes place every day at the discretion of the 0. O. 

2. Tour of duty is 24 hours; there are 3 reliefs, 2 
hours on and 4 hours off. Xo organization is detailed 
for guard duty more than once in 5 days if this can be 
prevented. 

Ceremony. — 1. The band takes post, its left 12 
paces to the right of where the right of the guard is 
to be. 

2. Adjutant's Call. — The Adjutant marches to the 
parade ground (Sergeant Major on his left) and takes 
post 12 paces in front of and facing the center of where 
the guard is to rest. The Sergeant Major continues on, 
marches by the left flank and takes post 12 paces to the 
left of the band and facing in the direction the line is to 
extend. 

3. The details are marched to the parade ground by 
the senior non-commissioned officers, halted and dressed 
as follows: 



GUARD DUTY. 239 

Fikst Detail. — Non-commissioned officer. — 1. De- 
tail ; 2. Halt. The detail is halted against the left arm 
of the Sergeant Major; the non-commissioned officer 
steps out, faces the Sergeant Major at a distance slightly 
greater than the front of the detail and commands: 
1. Eight; 2. Dress. The detail dresses on the line 
formed by the Sergeant Major and the Commander of 
the detail. 3. Front, The Commander of the detail 
salutes and reports : " The detail is correct " (or other- 
wise). AVhen the report is made the Sergeant Major 
returns the salute. The Commander of the detail passes 
by the right of the guard and takes post in rear of the 
right file of his detail. 

Other Details. — Non-commissioned officers. — 1. 
Detail; 2. Halt; 3. Eight; 4. Dress; 5. Front. Each 
commander of a detail halts his detail, dresses it on the 
general line, salutes and reports as does the first ; then 
takes his post in a similar manner. Should the com- 
mander of a detail not be a non-commissioned officer he 
passes by the right of the guard and retires. 

4. Sergeant Major. — He takes one step to the 
right, draws sword and verifies the detail, and then 
commands : " Count off." He completes the last squad 
if necessary and indicates the division into platoons : 
then takes his post and commands: 1. Open ranks; 
2. March. This is executed as laid down in the Infantry 
Drill Regulations. 3. Front. He then moves parallel 
to the front rank until opposite the center, turns to the 
right, halts half-way to the Adjutant, salutes and re- 
ports : " Sir, the details are correct " (or otherwise). 

5. Adjutant: " Take your post." (Adjutant draws 
saber.) 

6. Sergeant Major. — Faces about, approaches to 
within two paces of the center of the guard, turns to the 
right and moves three paces beyond the left of the guard, 
turns to the left, halts on the line of the front rank, 
faces about and brings his sword to the order. (When 



240 GUARD DUTY. 

the Sergeant Major has reported the Officer of the 
Guard takes his post, as shown in the diagram, and 
draws saber.) 

7. Adjutant. — 1. Officer (officers) and non-com- 
missioned officers; 2. Front and center; 3. March. At 
" Center " the officer carries saber ; at " March " the 
officer advances and halts 3 paces from the Adjutant, 
remaining at the carry; non-commissioned officers pass 
by the flank, move along the front and form in order of 
rank from right to left, 3 paces behind the officer, re- 
maining at the right shoulder. If there is no officer of 
the guard the non-commissioned officers halt 3 paces 
from the Adjutant. The Adjutant assigns them to 
their positions in order of rank — commander of the 
guard; leader of the first platoon; leader of the second 
platoon, etc., and commands: 1. Officer (officers) and 
non-commissioned officers; 2. Posts; 3. March. At the 
command " March " they take their posts as prescribed 
in the School of the Company with open ranks (Platoon 
leaders 3 paces in front of center of their platoons). 

8. Adjutant : " Inspect your guard, sir." 

9. Officer of the Guard. — Paces about and com- 
mands : " Prepare for inspection." 

10. Adjutant (after the inspection is ended, and 
after posting himself 30 paces in front of and facing 
center of the guard — at the same time the new Officer 
of the Day takes position about 30 paces behind the 
Adjutant, facing the guard, and with the old officer of 
the day 1 pace in rear and 3 paces to the right) : 1. Pa- 
rade : 2. Rest; 3. Sound off. (The band, playing 
passes in front of the Officer of the Guard to the left of 
the line, returns to its post and ceases to play.) 
1. Guard ; 2. Attention ; 3. Close ranks ; 4. March. (As 
in the School of the Company.) 1. Present; 2. Arms. 
He then faces the new officer of the day, salutes, and 
reports : " Sir, the guard is formed." 

11. New Officer of the Day (returning salute) : 
" March the guard in review, sir." 



GUARD DUTY. 241 

12. Adjutant. — He carries saber, faces about, 
brings the guard to the order and commands: " 1. At 
trail, platoons right; 2. March; 3. Guard; 4. Halt." 
The band takes post 12 paces in front of the first pla- 
toon, the xldjutant 6 paces from the flank and abreast 
of the Commander of the Guard, and the Sergeant 
Major 6 paces from the flank of the second platoon. 
Adjutant commands: " 1. Pass in review; 2. For- 
ward; 3. March." 

13. Commander of the Guard (as the guard reaches 
a position 6 paces from the Officer of the Day) : 1. Eyes ; 

2. Right; (at 6 paces beyond the Officer of the Hay) 

3. Front. 

At 12 paces beyond the Officer of the Day the Adju- 
tant and the Serge ant-Major halt, salute and retire. 

14. Commander of the Guard (as the Adjutant and 
the Sergeant Major retire) : 1. Platoons, right by 
squads; 2. March. The guard is then marched to its 
post ; the old guard is then relieved and sentinels posted 
according to the principles laid down in the Manual of 
Interior Guard Duty. (See diagrams at the end of 
this chapter.) 

Guard Duty in the Trenches. — It differs from 
guard duty as we are accustomed to it. The challenge 
is not ci Who is there?" but rather a sudden and im- 
perative " Hands up." The party challenged throws 
up his hands and gives the countersign in a low voice. 
Sentinels are posted in the front line and in the line of 
dugouts, one at each entrance to a dugout to give imme- 
diate warning. Watchers are posted at places having 
a good range of view ; at night they keep watch over the 
parapets rather than through the loopholes since the 
latter afford only a narrow range of view. Auto rifle- 
men (6 or 7 to a post) are used as watchers, one being 
on duty at a time. They should have a favorable back- 
ground to provide concealment. 
16 



242 



GUARD DUTY. 



J***.** STJS- S4 




/ r b/-n7a/ &</&/-</ S7o(ss7?- 



X 



X:* 



S=7S/ / 



*Sovs?</ 0/~f 



r/ s .<? 



/3fP£»f. 2~S' 






S*o&S 'S? /?G>V'erY 



?&■<?, 



GUARD DUTY. 



243 







Pv=.-\:e 


^K rt. 






Si TBn&P&naB 










IIOMIDDIIJIDD. 

/5W . 


\ 


4 _ 






P 

n 


pan 

a p 


a 
-P 


•*-*w <St**r//n<?t 


p 
a 





CHAPTER 13. 
Company Administration. 

Company administration is a very broad subject and 
can be really learned only by experience. However, 
this chapter will attempt to point out a. few suggestions 
and practices that may prove of some assistance, partic- 
ularly to the new officer. We shall treat briefly of the 
first organization of the company; then we shall try to 
reproduce in some slight measure the actual work of a 
day in camp (more particularly of a training camp such 
as Plattsburg) ; then finally we shall treat of the orderly 
room and some of the problems that come up in army 
paper work. 

Notes on Organization. 

(By Major W. H. Waldron, Twenty-Ninth Infantry.) 

1. Prepare in Advance to Receive Men Assigned to 
Company. 

(a) Detail one of the Lieutenants in charge of the 
company mess. 

Duties. — Secure the necessary kitchen and dining 
room equipment and prepare everything to start the 
mess; make up a bill-of-fare for a week based on the 
ration components and supplies available ; secure the 
rations and issue them to the cooks daily. Train a 
mess Sergeant in the duties that fall to him. In fine, 
this Lieutenant will have complete charge of the com- 
pany mess, the cooking, and serving of the meals, train- 
ing of cooks and men detailed for duty in connection 
with the mess. 

(b) Detail the other Lieutenant in charge of prop- 
erty. 

Duties. — Procure all the articles of individual and 
company equipment from the Regimental Supply 
Officer, Get it into the company storeroom and prepare 



246 COMPANY ADMINISTRATION. 

it for issue. Train the Company Supply Sergeant in 
the duties that will fall to him. 

(c) This leaves the Company Commander free to 
organize the orderly room and make the necessary prep- 
arations to receive the men as they report. 

If in Cantonment. — Lay out the quarters into pla- 
toon -sections and subdivide these into squads, allowing 
space for platoon leaders and guides. Starting at the 
end of the quarters plainly mark each squad section, 8 
beds, four on each side of the aisle with the number of 
the squad — first squad, second squad, etc. 

If in Tents. — ^Number the tents, one for each squad, 
leaving two tents in the center for platoon leaders, 
guides, etc. Prepare a sheet having a space for each 
squad, large enough to enter eight names in it. Prepare 
a measuring post where the men can be measured for 
height as they report. 

2. Men Reporting : 

(a) When the men arrive they will be sent to Regi- 
mental Headquarters direct. There they will receive 
their assignment to a company. When so assigned they 
will be directed to join the company. 

(b) A table on which is spread the squad assigument 
sheet is located at the head of the company street. 
Xearby is located the measuring post. When a man re- 
ports, look him over, receive him in the company, make 
him feel at home. Make him feel that he is welcome. 
This little act will pay you large dividends in content- 
ment and company esprit de corps later on. Turn him 
over to the man in charge of the measuring post to get 
his height. Assign him to a squad corresponding to his 
height. Enter his name in the squad space to which 
he is assigned and send him. to the section of the can- 
tonment designated for that particular squad. Detail a 
few of the first men who report for duty to assist in 
this work. 



COMPANY ADMINISTRATION. 247 

Say you have 16 squads. They will run in height 
about as follows: 

1st squad ; over 6 feet ; 2nd, 6 feet ; 3rd, '6 feet ; 4th, 
5 feet 11 inches; 5th, 5 feet 11 inches; 6th, 5 feet 10 
inches; 7th, 5 feet 10 inches; 8th, 5 feet 9 inches; 9th, 
5 feet 9 inches; 10th, 5 feet S 1 inches; 11th, 5 feet 8 
inches; 12th, 5 feet T inches; 13th, 5 feet 7 inches; 
14th, 5 feet 6 inches; 15th, 5 feet 6 inches; 16th, 5 feet 
5 inches. If there are more squads put them in the 
5 feet 7 to >5 feet 9 inches class. 

(c) As soon as practicable place one member of the 
squad in charge for the ensuing 24 hours, change this 
detail every day until every man of the squad has had 
an opportunity to demonstrate his ability. This will 
assist you greatly in the selection of your non-commis- 
sioned officers. 

(d) Should the entire company be assigned in a body, 
line them up in a row according to height and assign 
them to squads. Place the most likely looking man in 
each squad in charge for the time being. 

3. Issue of Equipment: 

(a) The articles of camp equipment, bedding and 
poncho should be issued as soon as practicable. These 
are necessary for the immediate comfort of the men. 

(b) Hold the articles of personal equipment for issue 
later on. Do not dump the entire equipment on a man 
all at once. There is nine-tenths of it that he knows 
nothing about. He does not know what it is for. As 
the training progresses you can issue it to him, an 
article or two at a time until he has finally gotten all 
of it. Before issuing an article, explain at a company 
formation, what it is for, the purpose it serves and where 
it is carried. 

(c) Uniforms and clothing should be procured as 
soon as practicable. The commanding officer will indi- 
cate whether or not the clothing will be requisitioned 
for in bulk or on individual clothing slips. The supply 
officer will provide a quartermaster publication which 



248 COMPANY ADMINISTRATION. 

shows the sizes of clothing by the numbers. Seek out 
a couple of tailors in the company, have them measure 
the men and make a record of the sizes of clothing that 
they require. Shoes will have to be fitted to each man. 
Make them large enough. The average recruit will 
want to wear a shoe at least one size too small for him. 
When he gets the pack on and drags it around all day 
his feet will swell and fill his small shoes to the burst- 
ing point. Do not let the men decide what size shoes 
they will wear ; you decide it for them and make them 
plenty big. This work of measuring the men can be 
started right out the first day. The captain that gets 
in his requisition first, properly made out. will be the 
first to get his clothing. 

4. Organization : 

(a) As soon as practicable get the company organ- 
ized into permanent squads. Try out squad leaders for 
a few days. You will soon be able to select the men 
that you will want for non-commissioned officers. Be 
careful in their selection so that you will not have to 
make many changes. Don't be in too much of a hurry 
about making sergeants ; try them out as corporals first. 
Try to get a good man and start him in as mess sergeant. 
A man with hotel experience, especially the kitchen 
and dining room end of the business, give him a trial. 
Your lieutenant in charge of the mess can tell in a day 
or two how he stacks up. 'Make it plain that the men 
detailed from day to day are merely acting non-com- 
missioned officers and that you are merely placing them 
in charge to give them an opportunity to demonstrate 
their, ability. It's better to work this proposition out in 
a systematic manner than it is to jump in and make a 
lot of non-commissioned officers that you will have to 
break later on to make way for better men. 

Give your acting non-commissioned officers all the 
responsibility you can. Assign tasks with their squads 
and see how they get away with it. 



COMPANY ADMINISTRATION. 249 

(b) At one of the first formations explain the rules 
of camp sanitation and personal cleanliness and the 
necessity for their strict observance. 

(c) Start right out with a system of rigid inspections 
so that the men will acquire habits of cleanliness and 
tidiness of their surroundings. Once this is acquired 
it is easily maintained. The reverse of this statement 
is equally true. Let a company get started in a slovenly, 
untidy manner and it is difficult to get it back on the 
right track again. 

(d) As soon as uniforms are issued have every man 
dispose of his civilian clothing, dress suit cases, trunks, 
etc. There is no place for them in the cantonments or 
tents. Strip right down to uniforms and allow no 
civilian clothing around. 

(e) Before issuing rifles provide places for their safe 
keeping in cantonments. If wooden trunks are used, a 
wire staple driven into the upright of the bed at the 
height of the slacking swivel forms an excellent sup- 
port ; simply hook the slacking swivel into the staple. 

(f) Get every man interested in the company. Be 
personally interested in every man yourself. Do not 
permit any swearing at the men or around the barracks. 
Explain the idea of military courtesy and the salute and 
insist on its being carried out at all times. ' By doing 
all of these things and systematizing your work of train- 
ing and instruction right from the start you lay the 
foundation for a " good company." Fifteen good com- 
panies make a " good regiment " and so on up to the 
division, and that's what we want " good divisions " — 
the basis of which lies in the ; ' good company " which 
you are going to command. 

Day's Routine. — The day's routine will soon de- 
velop and cannot be a stereotyped thing. It will be de- 
termined to a large extent by local conditions. But in 



250 COMPANY ADMINISTRATION. 

all training camps some such model as the following 
will no doubt be followed : 
Reveille : 

First call; 5.30 a. m. 
March, 5.40 a. m. 
Assembly, 5.45 a. m. 
At first call the non-commissioned officer in charge of 
quarters, or some other charged with that duty, will go 
through the barracks and awaken the men. After a 
short time this may be dispensed with. 

Mess : 

First call (followed by mess call), 5.55 a. m. 
Assembly, 6.00 a. m. 
Allow the men approximately 20 minutes for break- 
fast and the privilege of returning individually — this 
for purposes of attending to the calls of nature. 

Sick 'Call, 6.30 a. m. — Have the non-commissioned 
officer in charge of quarters put through this call; the 
sick will report to the orderly room, be entered on the 
sick report and marched to the hospital by the same 
non-commissioned officer. All men answering sick call 
should be questioned as to the nature of their trouble 
and its cause ; men who are trying to dodge work should 
be caught up with. Care should be exercised in mak- 
ing out the sick report; be careful what you put on it 
and where you put it. The sick report will be treated 
further under " Paper Work." 

Morning Instruction : 

First call, 6.50 a. m. 

Assembly, 7.00 a. m. 

Recall, 12.00 m. 
Utilize this time according to the schedule laid down 
by higher authorities. It will no doubt be insisted that 
the schedule be closely adhered to ; but this can be done 
without completely destroying individual initiative. 



COMPANY ADMINISTRATION. 251 

Mess : 

First call (followed by mess call), 12.10 p. m. 
Assembly, 12.15 p. m. 
Allow 30 minutes for noon mess. The men may not 
consume it all ; but judgment must be used in this mat- 
ter. After mess have the company formed and marched 
back to barracks. This plan should be followed for a 
time, at least, particularly with " green " men purely 
for disciplinary purposes. 
Afternoon Instruction : 
First call, 1.20 p. m. 
Assembly, 1.30 p. m. 
Kecall, 4.30 p. m. 
Same general procedure as for morning work. 
Sick Call, 4.45 p. m. — When the sick report is sent 
to the hospital in the afternoon, it is customary to make 
a new entry for all men who are in the hospital. In 
this way a running account is kept and quickly referred 
to without running all through the book." 

The time from recall to retreat at 5.30 or thereabouts 
can usually be used to advantage in cleaning up and 
getting ready for this ceremony. 

Retreat. — (Formal — on the parade grounds). 
First call, 5.30 p. m. 
Assembly, 5.35 p. m. 
Retreat, 5.50 p. m. 
Mess: 

First call, followed by mess call, 6.00 p. m. 
Assembly, 6.05 p. m. 
School Call (except Saturdays), 7.00 p. m. 
Tattoo, 9.00 p. m. 
Call to Quarters, 9.30 p. m. 
Taps, 9.45 p. m. 

At taps lights should be out and absolute quiet 
should prevail. This rule should be insisted upon 
from the very beginning of the training period. A check 
roll call is often taken at taps and the company reported 



252 COMPANY ADMINISTRATION. 

to the Officer of the Day. Likewise, the company is 
reported to the Officer of the Day at reveille, retreat 
and mess formations ; however, these things are deter- 
mined entirely by local conditions. 

■Sundays and Holidays. — Calls are % hour later, 
except retreat, tattoo, call to quarters and taps. In 
case an entertainment is given on the post, taps usually 
follow its close by a half hour. 

Details for any day should be published at retreat 
formation the day previous ; bulletins and notices should 
also be published to the company at this formation. 

Paper Work. — Paper work in the Army is generally 
viewed askance. A certain amount of it is absolutely 
necessary, but the amount can be reduced by careful 
attention to the way in which the work is done. A 
good first sergeant and a good company clerk will take 
a load of trouble off the shoulders of the company com- 
mander in this respect ; but usually these men must be 
trained. Instructions on the blank forms should be 
carefully read the first time a certain paper is made 
out. Attend to all paper work promptly and make a 
note of anything that cannot be handled immediately. 
Do not let anything get into the company files until it 
has been 0. K'd. by the company commander or in- 
itialed by the officers. Have a basket for the company 
commander and one for the other officers where they 
may expect to find matters that are of interest to them. 
Get reports, requisitions and other papers in on time. 
Do not wait until they are called for. Establish a daily, 
as well as a monthly, system of doing things in the 
orderly room and then stick to it as nearly as possible. 
Have a file for: 

1. General orders, post and W. D. 

2. Special orders. 

3. Memorandums, bulletins and notices may be in- 

cluded under this head. 

4. Company orders. 

5. Document file (copies of letters, etc.). 



COMPANY ADMINISTRATION. 253 

The needs for files will be determined largely by local 
conditions. The point is to have things where they can 
be found readily under an appropriate heading; and to 
have them accessible to others besides the company clerk. 
Keep a copy of everything, as nearly as possible, but do 
not clutter up your company files with unimportant 
items. Keep your orderly room looking as neat as pos- 
sible. 

Military Correspondence. — A very important fea- 
ture of Army Paper Work. Neatness, brevity and 
clarity are to be sought — ceremonial forms are avoided. 

References to Army Regulations: Paragraphs 225, 
512, 776, 778', 779, 780, 7'86, 789, 790, 822 (g.o. 23 
w.d.). 

A letter consists of three parts ; heading, body and 
signature. The heading consists of designation of the 
command, place and date, all placed in the upper right- 
hand corner. At the left, and with a margin of about 
an inch, should be : 

From : 

To: 

Subject: 

A double space should be left between these lines. 

The body should be divided into numbered para- 
graphs, each paragraph treating of but one topic. The 
lines should be single-spaced, but a double space should 
be left between the paragraphs. The signature should 
be made without any unnecessary forms. 

Any good treatise on this subject will show the proper 
forms for a military letter. 

Indorsements follow the signature in succession on 
the same page or on added pages. They are very brief, 
follow a prescribed form and, if necessary, are para- 
graphed in the same way as the letter. Letters should 



254 COMPANY ADMINISTRATION. 

be made in three, four, five or six copies, according to 
destination. They should always be handled through 
military channels; time will be lost if you try to 
dodge it. 

Morning Report. — This is a complete record of 
daily events and should be kept with great care. It 
is submitted daily to the proper authority, checked and 
returned. Any standard work on this subject will show 
the proper method of making entries. Be sure to make 
entry of all events affecting your company, its numbers 
or condition. If there is no change, say so. 

Ration Return. — This form is made out in dupli- 
cate for periods of from 10 days to a month. In case 
men join the company after the ration return has been 
submitted for a given period, one ration for each man 
for each day from date of joining to date of submitting 
next return, may be drawn on the next return. The 
same plan is followed in making deductions for men in 
the hospital or absent from the company. For ration 
allowances see a.r. 1202-1252. 

■Sick? Report. — A commissioned officer of the com- 
pany and the medical officer sign on one line following 
the last entry for the occasion. ^Neither may encroach 
on the territory of the other and both enter their opin- 
ions as to whether the sickness is in line of duty. ~No 
erasures are allowed. 

Duty Roster. — For any roster the key word should 
be " equality of all duties." It means the difference be- 
tween contentment and dissatisfaction among your men. 
Keep an exact list of men available for every duty and 
detail them in exact rotation; adjust to complete satis- 
faction any little differences that arise. Let the men 
know that you want to give them a square deal and they 
will respond. The longest man off duty is the first man 
to be called. In the regular service the roster covers 
guard duty and other duties, notably kitchen, police 
and other fatigue work. 



COMPANY ADMINISTRATION. 255 

Monthly Return. — The form is self explanatory. 
Read the instructions on the blanks before filling them 
in. By keeping in the company a record of events you 
can easily fill out the return properly when the time 
comes. 

Service Record. — References in Army Regula- 
tions: Paragraphs 115, 118, 124, 135, 138, 938, 1337, 
13-61, 145-1, 1535. Article 16. 

The service record is a complete personal history of 
the soldier and follows him wherever he goes. It con- 
tains : a descriptive list, report of assignment, record of 
prior service, current enlistment, military record, rec- 
ord of allotments, clothing account and settlement, de- 
posits, indorsements (this latter to give reasons for 
change of status or station of the soldier). 

Discharge. — Discharges are of three kinds : honor- 
able, dishonorable and plain discharge. The first is on 
a white sheet and entitles the soldier to re-enlist; the 
second is on a yellow sheet and is given following sen- 
tence of a general court-martial ; the third is on a blue 
sheet and is given on account of physical disability — 
it does not entitle the soldier to re-enlist. 

Final Statement, a.r., Art. 21. — The final state- 
ment is issued to every enlisted man upon his discharge 
unless he has forfeited all pay and allowances and has 
no deposits due him. 

The final statement is not to be prepared on the type- 
writer. Money amounts shall be written in both fig- 
ures and words. The final statement should show the 
amount due the soldier for: .additional' pay; clothing; 
deposits; pay detained; miscellaneous causes. It also 
should show the amounts due the United States by the 
soldier for various reasons. In addition it should also 
state the period covered by the last pay of the soldier. 

Officers signing and certifying to the various entries 
are responsible. 

Muster Roll. a.r. Article 42. — The muster 
roll is made bi-monthly and great care should be taken 



256 COMPANY ADMINISTRATION. 

in its preparation to make it both correct and complete. 
All officers and enlisted men are taken np on the 
muster roll from the date of receipt of notice of assign- 
ment. The following are entered on the roils: 

1. Commissioned officers belonging to the organiza- 
tion, in order of rank. 

2. Commissioned officers attached to the organiza- 
tion, in order of rank. 

3. Non-commissioned officers in order of grade. 

4. All others except musicians and privates, alpha- 
betically arranged in order of grade. 

5. Musicians. 

6. Privates. 

All names, except those entered by rank, are 
entered in alphabetical order with the last name first. 

The names of enlisted men attached to the company 
are borne on a detachment roll. This is not true of 
officers attached to an organization, however. 

Remarks should be entered according to the model 
which can be obtained from the Adjutant General's 
Office. 

All changes should be noted which affect the status 
of the soldier. An excellent idea for retaining this 
data is to keep a separate card for each man and to 
enter thereon anything that affects his status. 

Pay Roll. a.r. "1315 — 1383.-^- The pay roll is 
made out monthly in triplicate, one copy being re- 
tained and two copies being sent to the Quartermaster. 
On the pay roll there are four certificates to be signed : 

1. The commander of the organization examines the 
roll carefully and certifies that all entries are correct. 

2. The inspecting and mustering officer signs certi- 
fying that all are present or accounted for — or notes 
exceptions. 

3. The commanding officer witnesses the payment of 
each man and certifies to that effect. 

4. The commanding officer certifies that the dupli- 
cate and triplicate are exact copies of the original. 



COMPANY ADMINISTRATION. 257 

Names. — The last name is entered first ; e. g„ 
Smith, John A. But the soldier signs as follows: 
John A. Smith. 

Losses. — The losses should follow immediately on 
the next line after the last entry. They include those 
by reason of: Discharge, transfer, retirement, deser- 
tion and the fact that the man has been dropped. 

Each officer should check his knowledge and be sure 
that he knows the purpose of, and is familiar with the 
following papers : (References are to Army Regula- 
tions and to Adjutant and Quartermaster forms.) 

(1) Morning Report (a.r. 280)/ 

(2) Daily Sick Report (a.r. 280), (339 a.g.o.). 

(3) Duty Roster (a.r. 282), (339- a.g.o.). 

(4) Company Fund Book (a.r. 280'), (452 q.m.c.). 

(5) Delinquency Record (a.r. 280), (509 q.m.c). 

(6) Property Responsibility: 

Quartermaster (a.r. 280), (501co q.m.c.). 
Ordnance (a.r. 280), (501c q.m.c). 

(7) Descriptive List, Military Record and Clothing 

Account (a,r. 2.80), (29 a.g.o.). 

(8) Memorandum Receipts (a.r. 281), (448 a.g.o.). 

(9) Abstract Record of Memorandum Receipts (par. 

1, g.o. 6, 1916), (448b;a.g.o0. 

(10) Summary Court Records (a.r. 9570), (594 

a.g.o.). 

(11) Statement of Clothing charged to Enlisted 

man (165b q.m.c). 

(12) Abstract of Clothing (180 q.m.c). 

(13) Company Target Records (307 a.g.o.). 

(14) Individual Clothing Slips (165 q.m.c). 

(15) Files of Orders (a.r. 280). 

(16) Correspondence Book with Index (a.r. 280). 

(17) Document File. 

(18) Record of Rifles (p. 14, Ordnance Pamphlet 

No. 1965). 

(19) Record of Sizes of Clothing (g.o. 48, 1911). 

17 



258 COMPANY ADMINISTRATION. 

(20) Company Keturn (a.r. 811), (30 a.g.o.). 

(21) Muster Eoll (a.g. 807). 

(22) Returns (a.g. 811). 

(23) Return of Casualties. 

(24) Pay Roll (366 q.m.c.). 

As well as numerous other forms for special occa- 
sions which are not here listed. 

Except for the morning report, sick report, duty 
roster, correspondence book and various files, prac- 
tically all the afore-mentioned records are now kept at 
regimental headquarters instead of in the company 
orderly room. 



CHAPTER 14. 
Conferences. 

(Time — 2 hours each day in afternoon.) 

1. Know jour subject and be thoroughly prepared. 

2. Have an outline to refer to, showing main points 
you wish to cover. 

3. Do not allow a man to give an entire chapter in 
reply to a question. Make your questions short and 
specific — and require answers to be the same. 

4. Get every man on his feet at least once every 
day. 

5. Have a laugh every little while — keep the men 
awake. 

6. Vary your system of calling on men so that no 
one will know when he is likely to be called on. 

7. Avoid reading to the men. 

8. Eequire men to put things on the blackboard 
when possible. 

9. In case of a conference for which no time has 
been given for preparation, use all possible schemes to 
get the points home without having either a lecture or 
a study period. Allot — a definite time and require 
definite results — e. g., allow 10 minutes for a rough 
map showing the placing of a picket — 15 minutes for 
an outline of a certain chapter, etc. 

10. Never forget that there are 2 sides to every con- 
ference — what you plan to give and what you plan to 
get You must test the men to see how well they know 
the work but you must also make sure that every man 
knows it when he goes out even if he didn't when he 
came in. 

Study. 

The study period usually comes after a full day in 
the open, and the warm air and artificial light soon 



260 CONFERENCES. 

make the most ardent soldier doze oft' into cat-naps. 
Something must be done to counteract these influences 
and keep the men on the job. The terror of the next 
day's conference will not do it, as that time seems 
safely distant, with all night ahead. 

Assign the men three to five questions on the work 
to be studied, which will be asked in conference and 
which require a pretty general knowledge of the sub- 
ject. Every man will then have a definite objective 
and a certain minimum of attainment for the evening. 
Or reverse the process and let each of the class write 
several questions about what they have studied. The 
following day let these questions, with the names of 
the men who asked them, be read before the class and 
answered. The effect of reading the name of the 
writer is to insure careful preparation of the question 
and study of the subject. A good question can hardly 
be asked without a basis of knowledge, and a foolish 
question condemns its author. 

Another plan is to let the men, whenever possible, 
instruct the class. Announce that any man may be 
called upon to take charge, and the uncertainty will 
keep everyone studying. This plan will also give the 
men valuable practice in teaching others. Their periods 
of instruction, of course, must be limited, and unsatis- 
factory parts of their work reviewed before the con- 
ference is dismissed. 

Another way to stimulate study is to have a short 
discussion, talk or quiz just before the close of the 
study hour, when the men, if left to themselves, will 
incline to look at their watches more often than at 
their books. A brief explanation of the work assigned, 
with emphasis upon a few especially important points, 
makes good use of this closing time, especially when 
the men are required to write down the points 
emphasized. 



CONFERENCES. 261 

Syllabus: Small Problems for Infantry. 

(References, f.s.r., p. 2-6-30, 33-39.) 
First Problem: Advance Guard and Point: 

A. Definition and Function. — Small patrol sent 
ahead from advance party for disclosing enemy's posi- 
tion and strength, in time for larger bodies to make 
suitable defensive and offensive dispositions. Function 
primarily warning; but to give specific information, it 
may have to fight and thus feel enemy out. 

B. Principles: 

1. Formed zig-zag; distance from advance 

party = ? 

2. Controlled by leader of advance party. 

3. Speed must be great enough not to impede 

the main column. Must not halt at first 
sign of enemy, nor go off on a flank. 

4. Interest and co-operation of inferiors, by 

adequate explanation of situation and of 
individual duties ("repeats"). 

5. Rules for estimating numerical strength of 

the moving body of troops (cf., f.s.r., 
sec. 27). 

6. Point as a " march outpost " (= ?) when 

the column is halted. Only then may the 
A. G. point make any lateral arrangement 
of its members (cf. 3 above). 
Second Problem : Advance Guard Connecting File, cf ., 
f.s.r., reference above: 

A. Definition and Function. — Two men (usually) 
for liaison en route where elements too widely separated 
or roads too curved and wooded. Distance 200 to 5 
yards apart. 

B. Principles: 

1. Constant touch with elements before and 
behind. 



262 CONFERENCES. 

Second Problem — (Continued) : 
B. Principles — (Continued) : 

2. Relay both ways messages sent to or from 

remoter parts of the column. Speed and 
accuracy of signaling. 

3. Guide to be forward in daytime, at night 

on the main body. 

Third Problem: Advance Guard Flank Patrol, pp. 
31-32: 

A. Definition and Function. — For protecting a 
marching column from attack, by warning it on the 
basis of information gained in reconnaissance. Interval 
between men depends on circumstances. 

B. Principles: 

1. Start from near head of the column, i. e., 

from smallest element in the advance 
guard that can afford to cut down its 
numbers. 

2. Speed rather than safety, to keep abreast 

of own column and to force the enemy 
to disclose himself by firing on F. P. 
rather than on main body. 

3. Sent to investigate suspicious areas, e. g., 

in woods, behind houses. 

4. Action in case of firing on main body ; ad- 

vance and counterfire, deployed. 

5. Get-away man in rear of column. 

6. Stick to the job: no wandering or chas- 

ing of enemy beyond range of column. 
Job is to warn and protect against flank 
attack. 

Fourth Problem : Platoon as Advance Party : 
A. Definition and Function: 

Body of infantry, amounting to % to % the 
Support (depending on the number of 
cavalry ahead) cf., f.s.r., p. 2'8. 



CONFERENCES. 263 

Fourth Problem — (Continued) : 

A. Definition and Function — (Continued): 

Duty. — To back up the point and the advance 
cavalry (if any) if fired upon; remove 
enemy bodies and other obstacles. 

B. Principles: 

1. Describe general mission to inferiors. 

2. Explain individual duties to inferiors, 

3. Send out point and connecting files. 

4. Form in platoon ; zig-zag. 

5. Keep going; prosecute engagements 

briskly, not to delay main column. 

6. Procedure under fire: deploys and drops, 

when fired upon ; looks for enemy's direc- 
tion and assigns target and range. Ad- 
vance under cover if any, when fire light ; 
when heavy seek to divert fire to you 
away from main body of advance guard 
to facilitate latter's disuosition for ad- 
vance to your support. 
Seek to drive off a weaker enemy, and to 
hold off a stronger. 

7. Speedy decisions. Value of imaginary sit- 

uations, while on the march; and plan- 
ning your commands. 

Fifth Problem: Combat Patrol : 

A. Definition and Function. — Contrasted with cov- 
ering detachment, which is large enough to offer consid- 
erable resistance, the combat patrol is primarily to 
Warn, especially against flank attacks. 'Size varies 
widely because of looseness in definition, e. g., 1O0 men 
might be covering detachment for a regiment, but a com- 
bat patrol for a brigade. 

B. Principles: 

1. Comparison of thin line versus thin col- 
umn, regarding: (a) vulnerability, (b) 
fatigue, (c) tactical advantage, when en- 



264 CONFERENCES. 

Fifth Problem — (Continued) : 
B. Principles — (Continued): 

gagement materializes, (e) control of 
movement and of fire. 

2. Agent between advance and main body. 

3. Attack any enemy of reasonable size that 

attacks main body. 

4. Corn as concealment versus corn as obstruc- 

tion to sight. 

5. Vulnerability of charging cavalry. 

6. Lieutenant as tactical chief, sergeant as 

disciplinarian, in a platoon; except 
when ? 

7. Messages concise, not ambiguous, written 

versus oral ? Repeats. 

8. Limitations of use of map. Vegetation 

changes; errors in contouring. 
Sixth Problem and Seventh Problem : Two Pickets : 

A. Definition and Function. — Outpost contrasted 
with advance guard in that former is stationed around 
a camp or bivouac, while latter precedes a marching col- 
umn. To check enemy attempting to attack main body, 
and hold him till larger force is able to deploy. Consists 
of outpost reserve, outpost line of supports, line of out- 
guards (pickets, sentry squads, and cossack posts), plus 
sentinels, patrols, etc. 

Picket ordinarily merely warns of an attack, but may 
offer resistance. 

B. Principles: 

1. Smooth posting of outpost very desirable; 

influence of delay on spirits of men, after 
day's march. 

2. Outpost support sends out pickets. 

3. Picket sends out sentry squads, cossack 

posts, sentinels, etc. 

4. Provisional dispositions by leaders of out- 

guard elements ; importance of good 
sketch ; intrenchments ? 



CONFERENCES. 265 

Sixth and Seventh Problems — {Continued) : 
B. Principles — {Continued) : 

5. Confirmation and alteration by higher offi- 

cers ; especially changes at night regard- 
ing layout and manning. Fire ineffective 
at night except at short ranges. 

6. Roster = ? 

7. Instructions- regarding enemy's position 

and strength, and the friendly outguards 
to right and left. 

8. Mode of numbering elements (from right 

to right) . Arrangement for smooth with- 
drawal of each element upon stronger one. 

9. Disposition of strangers; use for informa- 

tion. 

10. Need of explicit arrangements in case of 

attack in day or night. 

11. Sleep near arms. 

Eighth Problem — Cossack Post and Sentry Squad : 

A. Definition and Function: 

1. Cossack Post: 4 men in charge of a cor- 

poral (usually) primarily to observe and 
warn ; secondarily to keep concealed, and 
intercept strangers who might be useful 
to enemy or to us. 

2. Sentry Squad : 8 men in charge of a cor- 

poral. Duties similar but strength is 
greater. Posts double sentinel. 

3. Post important enough for a cossack post 

is often doubled into a sentry squad at 
night. 

B. Principles: 

1. Opportunity to " pick off " enemies ought 
to be ignored until position of c. p. or 
s. s. or of its supporting body has unques- 
tionably been learned by enemy. Then 
fire away. 



266 CONFERENCES. 

Eighth Problem — (Continued) : 
B. Principles — (Continued) : 

2. Stop enemy's patrolling. Is as important as 

to force your own observation. 

3. Advantages of s. s. over e. p. for night 

work: (a) strength, (b) surenes®, (c) 
adequacy of observation before firing 
alarm. 

4. Use of prisoners, and papers on dead 

bodies. 

5. Value of imagining yourself in position of 

enemy commander in deciding what 
enemy dispositions you will combat him 
with. 

I^inth Problem: Reconnoitering Patrol: 

A. Definition and Function. — Gather information in 
the field, ^o resistance unless compelled. Conceal- 
ment and flight rather than resistance by fire : opposite 
of " covering detachment." 

B. Principles. 

1. Judgment in deciding what equipment is 

appropriate to the particular patrol. 

2. Sketch copies : contours as guides for con- 

cealed route. 

3. Fight only in self defence. 

4. How to question hidden sentinel without 

disclosing his position to enemy. 

5. Judicious choice of cover in approaching 

destination. 

6. Dating and placing of messages. 

7. Rate of passage of troops : " Rule of 

2-2-2." 

Tenth Problem — Visiting Patrol : 
A. Definition and Function : 

Two men or more sent from supports and 
pickets liaison between adjoining out- 



CONFERENCES. 267 

Tenth Problem — (Continued) : 

A. Definition and Function — (Continued) : 

guards. More useful at night, because 
of reduced visibility of terrain between 
outguards. 

1. Inform the sending body of conditions at 

sentinel posts. 

2. Prevent enemy from penetrating lines be- 

tween posts. 

3. Exchange information between adjoining 

posts. 

4. Take back captured strangers to com- 

mander. 

5. Reenforce feeling of mutual support among 

the isolated sentinels. 

B. Principles. 

1. Keen sight and hearing; silence. 
2'. Need of signals. Both countersign and 
check ■ — countersign. 

3. Equipment ; nothing that rattles or glistens. 

4. Disposition: leader in front, because of 

need for quick decision. 

5. Distance not over two miles even in most 

open country. 

6. Danger of startling a friend sentinel by 

unwarned approach. 

Eleventh. Problem — Detached Post : 

A. Definition and Function. — Posted where connec- 
tion cannot be easily maintained with other elements of 
outpost. Sent usually by outpost reserve or by main 
body, and retires to them, rather than to the line of 
supports. Function same as element of outpost proper, 
— observation, resistance, reconnaissance; but less re- 
sistance than warning. May be as small as 2 men, or 
as large as a support, depending on location and im- 
portance of detached position. 



268 CONFERENCES. 

Eleventh Problem — (Continued) : 
B. Principles. 

1. Established under precautions, because of 

danger of enemy breaking between the 
main body and the detched post. 

2. Entrenchment: what time of day'? 'What 

other circumstances? Treatment of 
bridges ? Night ? 

3. Requisitioning order: Need of payment; 

for justice, for military advantage later 
(reassure farmers through whose terri- 
tory you will need to pass and keep sup- 
plied) . 
Twelfth Problem — Requisitioning Detachment or 
Patrol: 
A.' Definition and Function. — A patrol may have any 
mission: here it is sent to take (on payment) the pro- 
vender designated. A.r.d. sent by commander with 
specific instructions is legal; a raid for booty illegal. 
(See f.s,r., sec. 290.) 
B. Principles. 

1. Preparation essential. 

2. .Sending of men singly or in pairs across 

open spaces. 

3. Deliberate start on wrong road to deceive 

enemy scouts. 

4. Not to fire unless obliged, — until return 

trip. 
Thirteenth Problem — A 'Contact Patrol : 

A. Definition and Function. — A small patrol sent out 
from a stationary body of troops, usually at night, to 
find out whether enemy is starting a retreat. (Compact. 
formation in column.) 

B. Principles. 

1. Travel light, but prepare to spend some 

time lying still. 

2. Route rear and parallel to a road, but not 

on it. 



CONFERENCES. 269 

Thirteenth. Problem — {Continued) : 
B. Principles — {Continued) : 

3. Do not attack enemy patrols unless 

necessary. 

4. Get through enemy line of observation and 

watch support or larger body. 

5. Return together when you have definite in- 

formation. Do not send single mes- 
sengers. 
Fourteenth Problem — A Small Outguard : 

The principles used in 14 are same as those listed 
under 1-13 ; and should be clinched by assigning your- 
self the problem of completely arranging an outpost for 
a brigade to be encamped or bivouacked at some as- 
signed position on the Hunter's Town sheet, Exchange 
solutions, for mutual criticism. 

Examinations. 

The following examinations, given at the second 
Plattsburg Training Camp, will enable students of 
military matters to form some idea as to where they 
stand in their grasp of the subject : 
Plattsburg Training Camp: 

1. Explain the " Position of the Soldier." (Par. 

51, i.d.r.) 

2. Being at parade rest, explain position of right 

foot. (Par. 53, i.d.r.) 

3. Explain the " Hand Salute." (Par. 58, i.d.r.) 

4. (1) Give length of full step (a) in quick time, 

(b) in double time. 
(2) How is the full step measured ? (Par. 
60, i.d.r.) 

5. Explain " Halt " from quick time. (Par. 70, 

i.d.r.) 

6. Explain position of butt of rifle at " Order 

Arms " standing. (Par. 77, i.d.r.) 

7. Explain position of left forearm at present arms. 

(Par. 78, i.d.r.) 



270 CONFERENCES. 

8. At parade rest under arms (rifle), explain posi- 

tion of left hand. (Par. 90, i.d.r.) 

9. The squad being in line explain " Squad Eight." 

(Par. 119, i.d.r.) 
10. The company in line, give commands and ex- 
plain " To dismiss the company." (Par. 174, 
i.d.r.) • 



1. Being in any formation assembled, give com- 

mands and explain movements for deploying 
the squad as skirmishers. (Par. 124, i.d.r.) 

2. When deployed as skirmishers (a) How do the 

men march ? (b) How are the pieces carried % 
(c) Who is the guide? (d) What is the 
normal interval between skirmishers ? (e) 
What is the length of the front of the squad 
when deployed at normal intervals ? (Par. 
124, i.d.r.) 

3. In what formations) are the loadings executed ? 

(Par. 133, i.d.r.) 

4. At the preparatory command for forming skir- 

mish line, what does each squad leader do? 
(Par. 200, i.d.r.) 

5. In what direction does a deployed line face on 

halting? (Par. 203.) 

6. Being in skirmish line, explain the movement 

" Platoon columns." March. (Par. 213, i.d.r.) 

7. What is the purpose of the advance in a suc- 

cession of thin lines? (Par. 219, i.d.r.) 

8. !N"ame three classes of fire. Which class is 

normally employed in action? (Par. 241-2-3, 
i.d.r.) 

9. Why is it necessary to have proper distribution 

of fire? (Par. 246, i.d.r.) 
10. Explain briefly the functions of platoon leaders, 
platoon guides and squad leaders in the fire 
fight. (Par. 252, i.d.r.) 



CONFERENCES. 271 

1. Explain the position of parade rest (without 

arms). (Par. 53, i.d.r.) 

2. Being in the position of the soldier, explain the 

position of the heels, feet and knees. (Par. 
51, i.d.r.) 

3. Give the commands for and explain the execu- 

tion of " Eight Pace." 

4. Being at a halt, give the commands for moving 

forward in quick time and explain the execu- 
tion thereof. (Par. 62, i.d.r.) 

5. (a) Being in march in quick time, give the 

commands necessary to march in double 
time and explain the execution thereof. 
(Par. 63, i.d.r.) 
(b) What is the length of step and the rate of 
steps per minute in double time ? (Par. 
60, i.d.r.) 

6. At " Eight Shoulder Arms " : 

(a) Explain the position of the trigger guard. 

(Par. 83, i.d.r.) 

(b) What is the position of the barrel ? (Par. 

88, i.d.r.) 

7. In the rifle salute (right shoulder arms), de- 

scribe the position of the : 

(a) Left forearm on first count. (Par. 93, 

Ld.r0 

(b) Left hand on first count. (Par. 93, 

i.d.r.) 

8. Explain the position of the left forearm on the 

second count of right shoulder arms from 
order arms. (Par. 83, i.d.r.) 

9. The squad being in line explain " Squad right 

about." (Par. 121, i.d.r.) 
10. Explain the execution of " Eight by Squads," 
2 March. (Par. 183, i.d.r.) 



272 CONFERENCES. 

1. What are the two general classes of military in- 

formation? (Par. 9, f.s.r.) 

2. What do you understand by the term " recon- 

naissance?" (Par. 11, f.s.r.) 

3. (a) Xame the various kinds of patrols. (Xote 

to Par. 23, f.s.r.) 
(b) What are the advantages of small patrols 
over strong patrols? (Par. 24, f.s.r.) 
1. What governs the formation adopted by the 
patrol? (Par. 26, f.s.r.) 

5. What is a field message? (Par. 32, f.s.r.) 

6. (a) What is the function of an advance guard? 

(Par. 40, f.s.r.) 
(b) What of a flank guard? (Par. 53, f.s.r.) 

7. (a) What is an outpost? (Par. 60, f.s.r.) 

(b) How are the outguards classified? (Par. 
64, f.s.r.) 

8. Define a successful march. (Par. 96, f.s.r.) 

9. What rules govern the halts of a column of 

troops on the march? (Par. 102. f.s.r.) 
10. (a) From a certain point off the road you 
observe a column of troops marching on 
the road. You can distinguish that these 
troops are infantry in column of squads. 
It requires 20 minutes for them to pass 
a given point. How much infantry is in 
the column? (Par. 27, f.s.r.) 
(b) The day is still, no wind blowing, further 
to the rear you can see a broken cloud 
of dust extending in prolongation of the 
road but cannot see the cause. What 
does this indicate? (Par. 27, f.s.r.) 



Harvard College. School of the Soldier: 

1. Define depth, distance, interval, front, base. 
point of rest, deployment, pace. (i.d.r. 
definitions.) 



CONFERENCES. 273 

2. (a) What is the guide of the leading subdi- 

division, in column of subdivisions, 
charged with 2 (Par. 20, i.d.r.) 
(b) What is the guide of the subdivisions in 
rear charged with? (Par. 20, i.d.r.) 

3. What are orders, commands and signals. (Par. 

31, 37, i.d.r.) 

4. Describe position of the soldier or attention 

(without arms.) (i.d.r. 51.) 

5. What are the rests? Describe each. (Par. 52, 

i.d.r.) 

6. Describe about face. (Par. 57, i.d.r.) 

7. (a) Being at a halt, or marching in quick time, 

to march in double time. Describe com- 
mands and how executed. (Par. 63, 
i.d.r.) 
(b) Marching in double time, to resume quick 
time. Describe commands and how exe- 
cuted. (Par. 64, i.d.r.) 

8. What are the rules that govern the carrying of 

the piece? (Par. 75, i.d.r.) 

9. What general rules govern the execution of the 

manual of arms? (Par. 76, i.d.r.) 

10. Give the rate per minute and length of the half 

step and full step in quick and double time. 
(Par. 60, i.d.r.) 

11. What are the arm signals for: Column left, 

march; halt; as skirmishers, march; assemble, 
march: suspend firing; range, 250 yards; 
fix bayonets. (Par. 43, i.d.r.) 

12. Explain the execution of the command " Right 

Dress.'' (Par. 107, i.d.r.) 



School of the Squad : 

1. To suspend firing: Give the commands and de- 
scribe execution. Same, to cease firing. 
(Par. 149-150, i.d.r.) 



is 



274 CONFERENCES. 

2. Describe in detail the execution of " Squads 

Right." (Par. 119, i.d.r.) 

3. Give the commands- and explain execution for 

taking intervals. How does it differ from 

taking distances ? (Pars. 109, 110, 111, 112, 
i.d.r.) 

4. Describe in detail " Right oblique. March.'" 

(Par.^ 116, i.d.r.) 

5. Explain the use of " In place, Halt." (Par. 11, 

i.d.r.) 

6. When can the following commands be used : 

Resume March. (Par. 14. i.d.r.) Oblique 
March. (Par. 117, i.d.r.) By the right flank, 
March. (Par. 71, i.d.r.) Take Arms. (Par. 
114, i.d.r.) 

7. Describe by what commands and in what manner 

a squad is formed. 

8. (a) Being in line, give the commands and de- 

scribe the movements for turning on a 
moving pivot. 
(b) Being in line, give the commands and de- 
scribe the movements for turning on a 
fixed pivot. 

9. Being in any formation, assembled, give the 

commands and describe the movements for 
deploying as skirmishers. 



School of the Company: 

1. Give the proper commands for the following 
movements : 

(a) Company being in line, to march to the 

front in column of squads. (Par. 183, 
i.d.r.) 

(b) Company being in line, to form column of 

squads to the flank. (Par. 178, i.d.r.) 

(c) Company being in line, to form skirmish 

line. ° (Par. 206, 200, 202, i.d.r.) 



CONFERENCES. 275 

(d) Company being in column of squads, to 
form line to the right so the leading squad 
shall be on the right of the line. (Par. 
188, i.d.r.) 

2. Being in line, to align the company. Give the 

commands and explain the movement. (Pars. 
175, 107, i.d.r.) 

3. The company having gone from line into column 

of squads by the command : " Squads right, 
March," state the position of the captain, 
two lieutenants and right and left guides. 
(Pars. 163, 168 and Plate II, i.d.r.) 

4. Show by diagram: (a) A company of two 

platoons in column of platoons, (b) A com- 
pany of three platoons in line of platoons. 
(Plate II, i.d.r.) 

5. What commands are given to form the company ? 

6. (a) Who is the pivot in executing " Company 

Left ? " 
(b) Who is the pivot in executing " Left 
Turn ? " 

Military Science and Tactics. 

Minor Tactics. 

Map: Gettysburg Antietam (Hunterstowx 

Sheet). 

First Problem: An Advance Party — Situation I: 

Your battalion and the machine gun company occupy 
Center Mills, in enemy's country. The remainder of 
the Harvard Regiment is encamped two miles north of 
Center Mills. The Battalion has an outguard at J. 
Fohl, 1150 yards southeast of Center Mills. It is mid- 
winter; there is no snow, but the streams are frozen. 

At 6.45 a. m., 1 Feb., 17, your battalion and the 
machine gun company are hurriedly assembled, pieces 
are loaded, and the column, your company in the lead, 



276 CONFERENCES. 

is marched out of town, over the southeast road. Your 
captain calls the officers and non-commissioned officers 
to the head of the company and gives the following 
verbal order : 

A Blue force, estimated at one battalion with machine 
guns, is marching north from Granite Hill Sta. Blue 
patrols have been reported in vicinity of Henderson 
meeting house (700 yards north of Hunterstown) . 
There are no Red troops south of here. Our battalion 
apid the machine gun company are going to take up a 
position on the 712-707 hills, which flank this road, 
about 3 miles south of here. This company will be the 
advance guard. The main body, which is the rest of 
our column, follows at 600 yards. Lieutenant Allen, 
your platoon (1st) and the second platoon will consti- 
tute the advance party. The third and fourth pla r 
toons will form the support, and will follow the ad- 
vance party at 300 yards. Here is a map for you. Fol- 
low this road {pointing and indicating on map) through 
J. Fohl — 554-534 — Bridge 8. H., to crossroads 666, 
where you will halt and establish a march outpost. 
/ will be with the support. When we reach the outguard 
at J. Fohl the column will halt and the advance guard 
will move out. Posts. 

The column halts at the outguard. You are Lieuten- 
ant Allen. 

Required : 

Your instructions, and dispositions in detail. 

Situation II : 

The advance party has just cleared roadfork 534 when 
is is fired upon from the woods along the stream about 
500 yards southeast. There are probably 20 rifles firing 
upon you. The enemy's fire is well-directed. The point 
has crossed the first bridge, 300 yards south of 534. 
The support has halted; but is not under fire. 

Required : 

Your instructions and dispositions. 



CONFERENCES. 277 

Second Problem : An Advance Guard Point — Situ- 
ation I : 

The situation is the same as in the First Problem. 

You are the commander of the point. 

Required : 

Your instructions and dispositions as the point clears 
the outguard. 

Required : 

The point has just crossed the first bridge 300 yards 
southeast of 534, when you hear firing and observe that 
the advance pa^rty is being fired upon from the woods 
directly east of- you. A few moments later you note 
a few dismounted men crossing the island about 400 
yards to the east. The firing has ceased. 

Required : 

Your instructions and dispositions. 
Situation III: 

The advance guard has resumed its march. When 
the point reaches Bridge S. H., it is fired upon from the 
woods 400 yards to the east. About ten cavalrymen are 
hurriedly mounting, others are already riding into the 
woods. 

Required : 

Your instructions and dispositions. 

Third Problem : An Advance Guard Flank Patrol — 
Situation : 

The situation is the same as in the First Problem, 
and follows Situation III, Second Problem. 

When the advance party is two hundred yards from 
the roadfork where unimproved road leads northeast, 
about 600 yards southeast of Bridge S. PL, Lieutenant 
Allen gives the following instructions to Corporal 
Adams, 3d iSquad : 

Corporal, about fifteen Blue cavalry have been driven 
bach through those woods (pointing out woods to 
east). When we reach the roadfork in front of us take 
your squafil and comb the woods until you reach southern 



278 CONFERENCES. 

edge. From there go east until you observe the cross- 
roads (616) which are about 1200 yards beyond. Re- 
turn over first improved road running southwest to the 
crossroads (666) about 1% miles south of here and just 
under the hilltop, where you will rejoin advance party. 

You are Corporal Adams. 

Required : 

Your instructions, dispositions, and route of the 
patrol. 

Map Reading. Visibility Problems. 

Map: Gettysburg — Antietam (Htjnterstown 

Sheet). 

Note. — Observation points YOY and Y12 are the hills 
referred to in the First Problem under Minor Tactics. 

Where one point is invisible from another, state points 
of interference. 

Problem 1. Can a sentinel standing at YOY see the 
roadfork 535 (about 1500 yards south) ? 

Problem 2. An enemy patrol is marching north on 
the 544-616 road, and has crossed the stream (Y50 yards 
north of 544). Can this patrol see the Red outguard at 
TOY from any point between stream and cross-roads 616 \ 

Problem 3. Can the sentinel at Y12 see the roadfork 
581 (1850 yards southwest from Y12) ? 

Problem 4. Can the sentinel at T12 see the cross- 
roads 561 (about 1200 yards southeast) ? 



General Situation — Hunterstown Sheet. 

The Harvard Regiment camps the night of May 31- 
June 1 on Opossum Creek just west of Friends Grove 
S. H. (A-Y) in hostile territory. The regiment is part 
of a brigade, the remainder of the brigade being in camp 
one day's march north of Center Mills. 



CONFERENCES. 279 

Problem I : An Advance Guard Point : 

At daylight of June 1st the regimental commander 
receives the following message from brigade headquar- 
ters: "Our aeroplanes report a large force of the 
enemy near Hunterstown. Move at once on Hunters- 
town. Develop the strength of this enemy and locate his 
exact position. I will send reinforcements to you by 
motor-train if necessary." 

Officers call is sounded;, and this information trans- 
mitted to all the officers of the regiment. The First 
Battalion is designated as advance guafd and ordered to 
move out at once by crossroads 554 and 561, and road 
forks 53*5 and 552 towards Hunterstown. Major A, 
commanding the First Battalion, designates the first two 
platoons of " D " company as advance party and com- 
pany and the remainder of D company as support. 

Lieut. X, commanding the advance party, calls up all 
his non-commissioned officers and explains the situation 
to them. He then says: "Sergeant Mason, take 4 men 
and move out on that road (pointing) as the point. At 
crossroads and road forks semaphore W.W. and I will 
indicate the direction. The remainder of these two pla- 
toons will be the advance party. I will be with it. Move 
out.' 7 

You are Sergeant Mason. 

(a) What instructions and information do you give 
the point before you reach crossroads 554 ? 

After passing crossroads 561 about 300 yards one of 
your men reports about a squad of hostile cavalry on the 
road south of road fork 544, 1500 yards east of you. 

(b) What do you do ? 

Problem II : An Advance Guard Connecting Pile : 

Situation as in preceding problem. 

After the advance party has moved out about 100 
yards, Captain Y, commanding the support, says: 
" Smith, you take Jones and move out as connecting 
file." After Smith and Jones have moved about 100 



280 CONFERENCES. 

yards, lie says : " Donnelly, you take Burke and move 
out as connecting file." You are Donnelly. 

(a) What instructions do • you give Burke before 
reaching crossroads 554? 

After passing crossroads 561 you go about 150 yards 
without seeing the connecting file in rear of you. 

(&) What do you do? 

Problem III : An Advance Guard Flank Patrol : 

Situation as in preceding problem. 

On arriving at crossroads 5i61 Lieut. X commanding 
the advance party calls up Serge ant Clifford and says : 
" Sergeant, the point has just reported a squad of hostile 
cavalry about a mile down this road (pointing toward 
road fork 544). Take your squad and scout down this 
road. I will take the next road to the left leading to 
Hunterstown. Rejoin me on that road. 

You are Sergeant Clifford. 

(a) What formation do you adopt for your patrol \ 
Nothing happens until you arrive near road fork 544, 

when you hear firing from the woods southwest of you. 
This fire is not directed toward you. There is evidently 
about a squad firing. You can see no enemy in any 
direction. 

(b) What do you do? 

Problem IY : Platoon as an Advance Party : 

General situation same as before. 

You are Lieut. X commanding the advance party. 
You have arrived near the small orchard southeast of 
road fork 535. A sharp fire is suddenly opened from 
the woods to the southeast, apparently from a squad or 
small platoon. 

(a) Give your orders and dispositions. 

After firing about a minute the fire of the enemy 
stops. You move out into the road and can see no sign 
of your point or connecting files. The support is clos- 
ing up on you. 

(b) What do you do ? 



CONFERENCES. 281 

Visibility Problems : 

(a) Can a man on bill 712 see a man at crossroads 
554 in Hunterstown ? (Disregard trees.) 

(b) A man stands at the point where contour 680 
crosses the road followed in above problem, just south 
of hill 707. Where does the roadbed first become 
invisible ? 



Map: Gettysburg — Antietam (Hunterstown 

Sheet). 

First Problem: A 'Connecting File — Situation I: 

The Harvard Regiment is in camp in hostile country 
the night May 1-2 in the corn field 1000 yards east of 
Boyd S. H., just northeast of cross roads 488. The line 
of outguards extends approximately through Boyd S. 
H., Hill 527, McElheny. 

At l.OO a. m., May 1st, the regimental commander 
receives the following telephone message from brigade 
headquarters at Gettysburg (just off the map to the 
south) — An enemy force estimated strength one regi- 
ment is in camp 6 miles north of Center Mills. His 
patrols were seen yesterday by our advance cavalry near 
Guernsey and Center Mills. It is reliably reported that 
this force will march by 'Center Mills and Guernsey on 
Biglersville to-morrow morning to destroy a large 
amount of rolling stock at that point. Move at once to- 
ward 'Center Mills to stop and drive back this force. 

Officers call is sounded. The situation is explained 
to the officers and they are told to have their companies 
ready to move at 2.00 a. m. The 1st battalion is desig- 
nated as advance guard. 

The advance guard is directed to move across the field 
to road fork 511 thence north by the main road. The 
first platoon of "A" company is designated as advance 
party. " B " company and the remainder of "A" com- 
pany form the support. As the advance party moves 
out Captain Smith commanding the support, says to 



282 CONFERENCES. 

Private Long, " Long, yon and Williams move out as 
connecting files. This is a dark night so be careful to 
keep connection both front and rear." Before Long is 
out of sight, he says, " Scott, you and Hunt move out 
as connecting files following Long." You are Scott. 
Required : 

(a) Wlhat instructions do you give Hunt ? 

(b) What do you do up to the time you reach the 
main road at 511 ? 

Situation II: 

After you have passed road fork in Table Bock about 
100 yards you notice that Hunt who has been watching 
to the rear does not seem to be alert. You look back and 
can see no sign of the connecting file in rear of you. It 
is still dark. 

Required : 

What do you do ? 

Second Problem : An Advance Guard Point — General 
Situation same as in Problem I : 

Sergeant Hill and four men constitute the point. The 
situation has been explained to Sergeant Hill by the 
advance party commander. 

About daylight the point arrives at crossroads 600 . 
A sharp fire evidently from about a squad is received 
from the house on the rise 500' yards north along the 
road. You are Sergeant Hill. 

Required : 

What do you do % 
Third Problem : An Advance Guard Flank Patrol — 
Situation I — General Situation same as Prob- 
lem I : 

Uip to daylight no flank patrols have been sent out. 
When the support reaches Table Rock the support com- 
mander calls Corporal Bell and says to him " Corporal 
take your squad as a flank patrol up this road to the 
right. Take the left hand road at the first two road 
forks and follow the road past the church and school- 



CONFERENCES. 283 

house until you reach this road again about 1% miles 
north of here. Report every thing you have seen when 
you rejoin. Your squad consists of seven men besides 
yourself. 
Required : 

(a) The disposition of your squad on the march. 

(b) 'What do you do when you hear the firing near 
crossroads 600? 

Fourth Problem : Platoon as Advance Party — Situa- 
tion — General Situation same as in the First 
Problem : 

W'hen you arrive at a point about 2O0 yards south 
of hill 646 you hear firing 1O00 yards north of you. 
You cannot see who is firing nor can you see the point. 
You are Lieutenant 01 ark commanding the advance 
party. 

Required : 

What do you do ? 
Visibility Problems : 

(a) When the point arrives at bill 647 can it see the 
crossroads 610 to the northeast ? 

(b) W(hen the flank patrol reaches Benders' Church 
crossroads can it see an enemy patrol at the house mid- 
way on the road 534-554 one mile to the northeast ? 

(c) Looking north along the Center Mills road from 
hill 647 where does the road first become invisible ? 



Map: Hunters town Sheet. 

General Situation : 

The Harvard regiment encamped on the night of July 
12-13 at Biglerville (B-8) in hostile territory. The 
remainder of the brigade of which the regiment is a 
part is in camp 5 miles west of Biglerville. 
Problem I: 

At daylight, July 13, the regimental commander re- 
ceives the following message from brigade headquarters : 



284 CONFERENCES. 

" It is reported that the enemy is in force near Heidlers- 
burg. Move on Heidlersburg at once; locate the posi- 
tion of the enemy, and develop his strength. Reinforce- 
ments will be sent you, if necessary." 

This information is transmitted to all officers of the 
regiment. The First Battalion is ordered to move out 
at once as advance guard on Biglerville— 610— 582 road 
toward Heidlersburg. Major Dunn, commanding First 
Battalion, designates the first two platoons of C Com- 
pany as advance party, and D Company and the remain- 
der of C Company as support. 

Lieut. Gibbs, commanding the advance party, explains 
the situation to his non-commissioned officers, and then 
orders : 

" .Sergeant Dow, take four men and move out on 
that road (indicating road to Heidlersburg) as 
point. The remainder of these two platoons will 
be the advance party and will follow you at 200 
yards. I shall be with it. Move out." 

You are Sergt. Dow. 

How do you place your men, and what information 
and instructions do you give the point before you pass 
the orchard east of Biglerville ? 

Situation 2': 

You are still Sergt. Dow. 

The point has reached crossroads 582. You are in- 
formed by a farmer living at crossroads 582- that about 
half an hour before there were some soldiers half a mile 
north of 5'82 on the road to Center Mills. He says he 
does not know where they went. 

What do you do ? 

Problem II: 

The advance party has arrived at crossroads 582. 
Information has come to Lieut. Gibbs, both from the 
point and from the farmer direct, that Red Soldiers have 
been seen on road to north leading to Center Mills. 
Lieut. Gibbs on arrival at 5S2 sends out a squad under 






CONFERENCES. 285 

Sergt. Jones to patrol north on the Center Mills road 
half a mile, then east by farm road to corner, then by 
fence south of house and barn to Opossum Creek and 
down creek to main road again. 

The advance party then proceeds about 300 yards 
easterly from 582, when the point signals " Enemy in 
small numbers in creek bottom due north." 

(a) What does Lieut. Gribbs and the advance party 

do? 

(b) What does he tell the point to do ? 

(c) What does the flank patrol under Sergt. Jones 

do? 

Problem III : 

Because of the action taken in Problem II the Reds 
have ceased to menace the left flank of the advance 
guard : 

(a) What does the advance party and its commander 

do? 

(b) What does he tell the point to do? 

Another Situation — Problem IV : 

Enemy is in the vicinity of Hunterstown. Your bri- 
gade has marched south through Guernsey to road fork 
610, and has turned east, and is about to camp in grass 
field north of road 61(K5'.82, 1-3 of a mile west of 5'8>2. 
Your battalion is to form the outpost. You are its 
major. 

Where do you post : 

(a) The outpost reserve? 

(b) The outpost .supports ? 

(c) The outguards ? 

(.Note : The sector up to and including the 
road Center Mills-554-534-Bridge S. H. 
is covered by another brigade to your left.) 
Problem V: 

On the same general scheme as in Problem IV. You 
are Sergt. Robinson of Support 'No. 1. You are ordered 
by its commander to move out with 3 squads to form a 



286 CONFERENCES. 

picket, outguar'd No. 1, putting out observation posts 
on the road about half a mile south of the support. 

(a) State what directions you give to your picket 

and how you move to your position. 

(b) Where do you post the picket and its observation 

posts ? 

(c) What orders and instructions do you give on ar- 

rival at the place selected ? 



CHAPTER 15. 
Trench Warfare. 

General Principles. 

1. Defense may be made in depth by all organiza- 
tions, down to and including the platoon, or it may be 
made laterally. 

2. The smallest active segment, be it only three men, 
must have a chief and a second in command, who is 
responsible for the proper upkeep and defense of the 
segment. All occupants of active segments must know 
all instructions which should be simple. 

3. Any troops in charge of a portion of trench must 
never abandon it, no matter what happens, even if 
surrounded. 

4. All ground lost must be retaken at once by imme- 
diate counter attack launched by the unit which lost the 
ground. As a matter of fact a counter attack is dif- 
ficult for a platoon or company; it is really necessary 
for it to be made by a battalion. 

5. Each company must provide for emplacements for 
mine throwers to be served by the artillery and for 
pneumatic guns to be served by their own men. 

Instructions to be Issued by Battalion Commander. 

1. Disposition of companies in sector assigned (best 
done by sketch showing sectors assigned to companies). 

2. Special orders to companies (concerns field of fire 
to be obtained not only in own sector, but also in those 
adjoining it). 

3. Improvement of defense. (Brief reports from 
company commanders to be followed by work being done 
on order of battalion commander' after inspection.) 

4. Organization of watching (not sentry duty) (by 
company commander under supervision of battalion 
commander) . 



TI.1-e.-#=IS 



/ ( o^^T f^N^^^ 


SS-X 




1 'C'CHi,. / 


I ..,.,..... , . 1^ 






MAP Of 
CCOMPAAIY SECTOR 

Oct. icr 18. IS IT 




r/j** - ^ 







288 TRENCH WARFARE. 

'5. Organization of observation (not sentry duty) (by 
company commander under supervision of battalion 
commander). 

6. Organization of supply (procuring, routing/ etc., 
of tools, ammunition, food, water, etc.), (by company 
commander under supervision of battalion commander) . 

7. Organization of liaison (communication) (run- 
ners, telephone, telegraph visual signaling, pigeons, etc., 
by company commander under the supervision of bat- 
talion commander). All telephonic communication 
must be in code. 

8. Organization of supplies to include amounts to be 
expected daily from the rear. 

9. Knowledge of enemy must be imparted to com- 
pany commanders in order to assist them in making 
their dispositions. 

10. Frequent reports to be made of existing condi- 
tions at the front for information of higher commanders. 

11. Lateral defense of boyaux must not be overlooked. 

12. Wide turning movements are not possible. 
Enveloping movements are possible only on local at- 
tacks against small portions of the hostile line after it 
has been pierced. All main attacks are confined to 
pi7rely frontal attacks. 

13. The most important obstacle is barbed wire en- 
tanglements. 

14. 'Communication (liaison) between and co- 
ordination and co-operation of, the different elements of 
a command is of the utmost importance. 

15. Artillery co-operates more closely than ever with 
infantry. Its reconnaissance officers accompany in- 
fantry lines in order to obtain information. There is 
a certain number of artillery observers attached to each 
battalion of infantry. 

The general method of attack is to smother the de- 
fense with a torrent of explosive shells, kept un inces- 
santly for one or more days, and shatter the defense so 
thev will offer but slight resistance to the infantry: 



TRENCH WARFARE. 289 

then rush forward with the infantry and seize the 
positions while the enemy is demoralized, and consoli- 
date them before reenf orcein ents can be brought up. 
The artillery bombardment is necessary to prepare 

the way for the infantry advance. It 

has for its objects : 

(1) To destroy the hostile artillery, wire entangle- 

ments and infantry trenches. 

(2) To produce curtains of fire and prevent bring- 

ing up reenforcements. 

Light guns are assigned to each battalion of in- 
fantry, subject only to orders of regimental and 
battalion commanders concerned. 

Save under exceptional circumstances the light gun 
is always attached to the Machine Gun Company for 
the attack. 

The essential role of the light gun is to destroy with 
direct fire the visible machine guns; they are em- 
ployed separately and not grouped. 

The infantry is divided into two classes: Holding 
troops — and attacking or shock troops. Holding 
troops are those doing routine or trench duty ; shock 
troops are picked organizations of young and vigorous 
men and are kept in camps well behind the battle front. 
Holding troops are two weeks in and two weeks out of 
the trenches. 

All specialist groups, i. e., Machine Gun Companies, 
etc., are officered, allowing company and battalion com- 
manders to concentrate them, if the situation requires. 

They play the novmal part in combat if they do not 
receive special instructions. 

Attack of a Defensive Position. 

Unity of command in depth must be preserved every- 
where, unless there is an imperative reason for doing 
otherwise. 

19 



290 TRENCH WARFARE. 

The front of each regiment should be divided between 
two or three battalions. 

Each battalion commander having to look after a 
front of from 500 to 60O yards, can exercise efficient 
control of his command. 

In preparing for an assault, seniors must take steps 
to organize it and make all necessary preparations them- 
selves, and not leave all the responsibility with the 
juniors. 

In the assault each unit must know its special task 
beforehand, and it should be rehearsed in rear of the 
line of trenches. Each commander must know the exact 
time he is to start and must start on time. 

The first waves of men are placed at 4 or 5 pace 
interval. Chief of section can command only a front of 
80 to 100 paces and it is necessary to form the section 
in two (2) waves. The first containing the grenadiers 
and automatic riflemen, the latter in the center. The 
second wave contains the riflemen and rifle grenadiers, 
the latter in the center. 

If the terrain is cut up by woods, villages, etc., the 
proportion of grenadiers may be increased by taking 
them from the sections in support and the automatic 
riflemen sent back to the second wave. 

If the distance to cross exceeds 30O or 400 yards, the 
number of automatic riflemen should be increased. 

Two or three sections are usually placed abreast on 
the company front, which thus covers two to three hun- 
dred yards. 

The support sections follow the leading sections of 
their company at about 50 yards, marching in two lines, 
if possible in two lines of squad columns at 20 yard 
intervals. 

The first wave of the support is usually formed of the 
one-half section of specialists. 

The echeloning of the specialists in front is also the 
most favorable formation to progress by rushes in a 
terrain cut up by shell holes. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 291 

The chief of section is between the two (2) w r aves of 
his section. 

The captain is usually in front of the support 
sections. 

The support sections are closely followed by a power- 
ful line of machine guns, which are thrown into the fight 
when needed to reenf orce the leading units. 

" Trench Cleaners " usually march immediately after 
the leading sections and may be taken from the support 
sections. They are armed with pistols, knives and hand 
grenades. 

The captain can use his section complete, or take out 
the specialists and use them for a particular purpose, , 

The specialists carry only the weapons of their 
specialty and have their loads lightened. The ordinary 
riflemen carry the usual packs and equipment. 

Officers no longer lead the assault, but direct it. They 
are equipped with the rifle and bayonet, the same as the 
enlisted man. 

Each unit of the first wave of the attack is given a 
definite objective. Different waves must not break upon 
the first wave. 

Fire is opened by the assaulting troops only at short 
ranges, the advance being protected by a curtain of 
artillery fire. The advancing line makes use of shell 
holes and all other available cover. 

When the first section reaches its objective it is joined 
by the half section of riflemen; it immediately organ- 
izes the captured ground. 

Attacking From Trenches. — The commanders of 

brigades and battalions, with the commander of the 
artillery detailed to support them, study on the ground 
the artillery plan so far as it affects them. Immedi- 
ately after the advance of the infantry begins, the artil- 
lery supporting it commences an intense bombardment 
with the object of forcing the enemy to take cover. At 
the moment laid clown in the table of artillery fire the 
barrage lifts clear of the trench and the infantry rush 



292 TRENCH WARFARE. 

in and capture it. The infantry must be taught that 
their success depends upon their getting within 75 yards 
of the barrage before it lifts, in order that they may 
reach the trenches before the enemy can man them. 
The secret of a successful assault is exact synchroniza- 
tion of the movements of the infantry with those of the 
barrage. 

The pace of a barrage depends, to a certain extent, on 
the pace of the infantry, which varies with the condi- 
tion of the ground, the length of the advance, the num- 
ber of enemy trenches to be crossed, etc. It may be from 
15 to 75 yards per minute. The pace of the barrage 
should be quicker at first, and should gradually slow 
down as the men become exhausted, in order to give 
them time to get close to the barrage and pull them- 
selves together for the final rush. 

In an attack each unit must have sufficient driving 
power in itself to carry it through to its objective and 
enable it to hold its ground when it gets there. When 
a number of trenches have to be carried, considerable 
depth will be required, and the frontage must be re- 
duced. A brigade usually has a front in attack of 250 
to 350 yards, but this may be increased to 1,000 or 
1,200 yards. 

A battalion should have a front of 250 to 350 yards. 
The battalion must be organized in depth in a series of 
waves. Two companies are usually put abreast in the 
first line and the others in the second line. Each com- 
pany in both lines attacks in column of platoons at 
about 50 yards' distance, with intervals of three to five 
paces between men, so there would be eight lines of 
waves, of two platoons each. The 8th and 16th platoons, 
the two in rear forming the eighth wave, are usually not 
employed in the attack, but are left behind as a nucleus 
to form on in case of heavy casualties. 

The front line must not be less than 20'0 yards from 
the enemy's front line. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 293 

The leading two or three waves are likely to meet 
machine gun fire, and generally move in extended order. 
Not more than two waves can be accommodated in one 
trench. Subsequent waves will move in line or in line 
of section columns in single file. Russian saps must 
be run out as far as possible across " No Man's Land " 
to be opened up immediately after the assault, as ap- 
proach trenches. Ladders or steps are necessary to assist 
the leading waves in leaving the trenches, as they must 
move in lines. Provision must be made for bridges over 
the first line trenches for the rear waves. In the orig- 
inal assault line will be more suitable for both leading 
and rear waves. In later stages it is better for the rear 
waves to move in small and handy columns. In the 
original assault the distance between waves may be 75 
to 100 yards ; in later stages they may follow each other 
at 50 yards. 

In the original assault, zero, or the time for the as- 
sault to begin, may be fixed for the moment at which our 
barrage lifts from the enemy front trench, the infantry 
timing their advance so as to be close under our barrage 
before it lifts. In the later stages zero must be the 
moment at which our barrage commences, and this com- 
mencement will be the signal for the infantry to leave 
their trenches. Each wave is assigned its own objec- 
tive. All watches must be synchronized in order that 
all units may start off at the appointed time. 

The first wave is composed of bombers and rifle gren- 
ade men, and attacks the enemy's first line of trenches. 
It must go straight through to its objective, following 
the artillery barrage as closely as possible. The second 
and third waves, composed of riflemen with bayonets 
and Lewis guns, re-enforce the first wave after the latter 
has occupied the enemy's first line trench, and attack 
the second line trench. The fourth wave takes up tools, 
ammunition and sand bags and assists in consolidating 
the line. The fifth wave is a mopping-up party to clear 
the enemy '<s dugouts. The sixth wave comprises bat- 



294 TRENCH WARFARE. 

talion headquarters and has two Lewis guns, kept for a 
special purpose. The seventh and eighth waves, if used, 
seize and consolidate the enemy's third line trench. 

Bombing squads (1 non-commissioned officer and S 
men) are on the flank of each attacking wave. Battalion 
bombers are assigned a special task. 

All movements must be over the top of the ground. 
The pace throughout should be a steady walk, except for 
the last 30 or 40 yards, when the line should break into 
a steady double time, finishing up the last 10 yards with 
a rush. 

Barrage is continued 20 or 30 minutes after the ob- 
jective has been reached. 

Mopping parties must be trained with great care 
under selected officers. They should always wear a dis- 
tinguishing mark. They must at once dispose of any 
occupants who may have emerged from their dugouts, 
and picket the dugout entrances. 

The ultimate unit in the assault is the platoon. It 
must be organized and trained as a self-contained unit, 
capable of producing the required proportion of rifle- 
men, bombers, rifle bombers, Lewis gunners, and car- 
riers, all trained to work in combination. 

Assaulting troops should have twelve hours of day- 
light in the trenches before the assault begins, to enable 
them to get acquainted with the ground and get some 
rest. All ranks must be given a hot meal, including 
hot tea or coffee, before the assault. 

Take every precaution to prevent the enemy from 
realizing that the assault is about to take place. Bay- 
onets must not be allowed to show. ~No increase in rate 
of artillery fire. Xo unusual movements must be made 
in the trenches, and there must be no indication of the 
impending assault until the barrage is dropped. 

AYhen the trench has been taken, it should be consoli- 
dated at once to prevent counterattack. To protect this 
consolidation, throw out an outpost line, the posts con- 
sistino; of one non-commissioned officer and 6 riflemen 



TRENCH WARFARE. 295 

with a Lewis gun, about 150 to 200 yards apart and 100 
to 300 yards beyond the line. These posts should be es- 
tablished in shellholes, which are to be converted into 
fire trenches, protected by wire entanglements, as soon 
as possible. 

Approach trenches toward the enemy should be 
blockaded and hand and rifle grenadiers posted to guard 
them. The main captured trench should be converted 
at once into a fire trench facing the enemy. If it is 
badly knocked to pieces, a new trench may be con- 
structed 40 or 50 yards in front of the captured line. 
The commander must reorganize in depth to provide 
supports and reserves for counterattacks. Situation re- 
ports should be sent back frequently. Eough sketches 
are better than messages. 

Tanks follow infantry as closely as possible to deal 
with strong points. They are employed in sections of 
four. 

Machine guns may be used to provide covering fire 
for attacking infantry, cover its withdrawal if the attack 
fails, fill gaps in the assaulting lines, assist in the con- 
solidation of positions and repel counterattacks. 

Lewis guns are of great value in knocking out hostile 
machine guns. They usually move on the flanks of the 
second wave of assault. Later they are used to back up 
patrols and to hold the outpost line while the garrison 
line is being consolidated. 

As soon as consolidation begins, wire entanglements 
should be constructed. Every effort should be made to 
secure the objective against recapture. Any men avail- 
able should be used to continue the offensive. 

All commanders down to and including company 
commanders must keep some portion of their command, 
as a reserve. The company commander needs his re- 
serve to work around points which are holding against 
the leading lines, to protect his flanks in case the com- 
panies on his right and left are delayed in their ad- 
vance, and to exploit his success and gain ground to the 



296 TRENCH WARFARE. 

front. He must keep it well in hand behind the 
company. 

Battalion reserves must start with the assaulting col- 
umn and get across " Eo Man's Land " as soon as pos- 
sible ; the j must not get out of hand. Such a reserve is 
usually checked in the vicinity of the enemy's front line 
trench, where it can be thrown in to assist the advance 
or extend a flank as needed. 

The brigade reserve is kept well in hand just clear 
of the friendly front line and support trenches. Re- 
serves of companies and battalions must start moving 
over the top of the ground with the rest of the assaulting 
troops. 

Defense Of Trenches.— The latest methods consist 
in constructing, supporting and strong points at the 
most favorable points to be held, such as villages, 
woods, etc. These are separated by intervals not too 
great for mutual support. They are of such resisting 
power that they must be taken before the attack can 
progress. In the intervals between them fire and com- 
municating trenches are constructed, but these are only 
held lightly. Dummy trenches may be placed in these 
intervals. Lines of the various works are so traced 
that they bring enfilading fire on troops attacking ad- 
jacent positions. The lines need not be continuously 
occupied, but the obstacles extend in an unbroken line 
along the whole front. Wire entanglements are set in 
front of important positions in belts 20' feet wide, in 
two or three rows, each 20 yards apart. 

Each supporting point usually is. occupied by a 
battalion, and consists of a series of trenches formed 
into strong points, each held by a garrison of one or 
more platoons or a company. The supporting points 
are from 600 to 800 yards in depth and have a front 
of 600 to 1,000 yards. The first line of strong points 
is occupied by one or two companies in firing and 
cover trenches, while the remainder of the battalion 



TRENCH WARFARE. 297 

occupies the support and reserve trenches. Bomb- 
proofs are built along the cover trenches and are con- 
nected with the tiring trenches. Approach trenches 
are protected on both flanks by wire entanglements. 
Strong points in support and reserve trenches are pre- 
pared for an all-around defense and divided into two 
or more separate strong points by wire entanglements. 
A body of infantry attacked is to oppose to the 
assailant its high powered weapons, machine guns, 
automatic rifles, rifle grenades and hand grenades and 
to reserve for the counter attack the grenadiers and 
riflemen. There is always one line upon which the 
resistance must be made with the greatest energy; for 
its defense the following methods have been found suc- 
cessful. Machine guns should be placed where they can 
secure the best flanking fire, and every one put out of 
action should immediately be replaced by an automatic 
rifle. If machine gun barrage fire is to play its role 
successfully at the moment of assault, the guns must 
survive the bombardment. Their protection is secured 
by placing them under shelter during the bombard- 
ment and making their emplacements as nearly in- 
visible as possible. They should be echeloned in depth 
as far as practicable. They are generally placed in 
re-entrants of the firing trenches and cover the inter- 
vals between the adjoining supporting and strong 
points. Where the ground will permit they are often 
placed in concealed positions 20 to 30 yards in front of 
the trenches, to break up attacks made by hostile in- 
fantry. Not too many should be placed in the front 
line, and they should be echeloned in depth so as to 
confuse their disposition. The value of machine guns 
depends on the possibility of using them suddenly for 
brief periods, and in using them as long as they are 
effective. Machine guns disposed for flanking fire must 
be well covered by grenadiers ; this is also true of auto- 
matic rifles. 



298 TRENCH WARFARE. 

Automatic rifles, rifle grenades and hand grenades 
are used to constitute a barrage to keep back the enemy. 
The entire front should be defended- by a barrage of 
hand grenades, while the barrage of automatic rifles 
and rifle grenades is superposed farther to the front, 
up to 400 yards. 

All riflemen and those grenadiers not employed in 
forming barrages are reserved to make a counterattack. 

Companies on the second line operate on similar prin- 
ciples ; machine guns, automatic rifles and rifle grenades 
are arranged so as to cover every portion of the first 
line that might be invaded. After a short preparation 
by fire from these, the grenadiers and riflemen make 
the counterattack. 

The captains in charge of the two lines are respon- 
sible for the arrangement of the machine guns, auto- 
matic rifles and rifle grenades, the distribution of 
barrages and the distribution of groups for the counter- 
attack. The real strength of the defense consists, not 
in holding the fire and cover trenches, nor even the 
support trenches, but in holding the supporting and 
strong points until the counterattack can be launched. 

Liaison. — The question of liaison in battle is of the 
utmost importance ; and complete coordination of the 
different arms is absolutely necessary. Each battalion 
sends an officer or non-commissioned officer and a 
cyclist to the colonel, and each colonel sends a soldier 
to the battalion commander. 

The principal means of communication are the tele- 
phone, telegraph, wireless, aeroplane, mounted mes- 
sengers, autos and motorcycles ; and at the front 
runners, visual signals, rockets and carrier pigeons. 

Each battalion commander is connected by telephone 
with each company commander, with the artillery ob- 
servers, with the artillery commander, with his own 
colonel and with the adjacent battalions on either side. 

The signallers of assaulting companies move with 
the company commander. All signallers should be 



TRENCH WARFARE. 299 

given a special training in repeating a message several 
times to a known back station which may not be able 
to reply forward. 

At the commencement of the assault the pigeons and 
pigeon carriers must be kept back at battalion head- 
quarters, and sent forward as soon as the position has 
been gained. 

Runners can be relied upon when all other means 
fail. They must be trained with their companies. 
Runners should be lightly equipped and wear a dis- 
tinctive mark. They must be familiar with all 'the 
principal routes to all the principal centers within their 
battalion sector. The quicker they go the safer they 
are. Company and platoon runners must go forward 
with their respective commanders. Messages to be 
carried long distances will be relayed. Never send a 
verbal message by a runner; ignore any received; all 
messages must be written. 

Company and battalion commanders must be pre- 
pared to assist artillery liaison officers in getting their 
messages back. Liaison officers must be exchanged by 
all the assaulting battalions with the battalion on 
either flank. 

Trench Orders.- — (Battalion) : Trenches are usually 
divided into a certain number of bays; the number of 
men to defend these bays depends upon the length of 
trench allotted to each company. Each section is de- 
tailed to guard a certain number of bays. 

Non-commissioned officers and men must always wear 
their equipment by day and night. Every company 
will " Stand To " arms daily one-half hour before dusk 
and one-half hour before dawn, and will remain until 
dismissed by the company commander. 

The enemy's trenches are so close that it is very 
important for the men to have their rifle sights always 
at battle sight, so that there will be no necessity to 
alter their sights in case of alarm. By night all 



300 TRENCH WARFARE. 

bayonets are to be fixed and half of the men on duty 
in the trenches are to be sitting on the firing platform 
with their rifles by their side. In case of attack, 
especially at night, it should be impressed upon the 
men that they fire low. 

Section commanders are responsible that the men 
under their command have sufficient standing room 
for the purpose of firing over the parapet. They must 
have a clear field of fire, and not only be able to see the 
enemy trenches but the ground in the immediate 
vicinity of their trench. When making new trenches 
parapets should' be at least five feet thick at the top in 
order to be bullet proof. 

Repairs or alterations of the parapet should be re- 
ported at once by the section commander to the platoon 
commander, who will report it to superior authority. 
Repairing of trenches, fatigue, etc., will be carried on 
either by day or night according to company arrange- 
ment. Certain hours will be allotted for these tasks 
and no man is to be employed upon any kind of work 
out of these hours. 'No man should leave his post in 
the trenches at any time without the nermission of the 
non-commissioned officer in charge of that post. At 
night there should be at least one sentry post to each 
ten yards of parapet. At night, double sentries should 
be posted if possible, and no sentry should be kept on 
duty for longer than an hour at a time. The arrange- 
ment should be such that when one sentry is doing his 
last half hour, his comrade will be doing his first half 
hour. 

Sentries at night should always have their rifles 
resting on the parapet, ready to fire at a moment's 
notice. As few sentries as possible should be posted 
by day, so as to give as much rest as possible to the 
remainder of the men. 

By day any existing loop-holes may be used by a 
sentry for observation purposes, but this must be strictly 
prohibited at night, when the sentry must look over 



TRENCH WARFARE. 301 

the parapet. If a sentry is continually fired at, the 
section commander wall post him in another position, 
but not too far from his original position. There is no 
excuse for a man going to sleep on sentry duty ; if he is 
sick he should report the fact to the non-commissioned 
officer, who will report to superior authority. 

An armed party of the enemy approaching the 
trench under a flag of truce should be halted at a dis- 
tance, ordered to lay down their arms, and the matter 
at once reported to the company commander. If the 
party fails to halt when ordered to do so, or does not 
convey a flag of truce, they should be fired upon. An 
unarmed party should be halted in the same way. It 
is not necessary to challenge at night ; open Hie at once. 
This is modified only by special instructions. 

Men especially picked for listening patrols and sharp- 
shooters will be given special privileges. All loud talk- 
ing must be checked at night by officers and 
non-commissioned officers. All working parties must 
wear their equipment and carry their rifles. All picks 
and shovels will be returned after use to the company 
store room. Ration parties and parties carrying 
materials for repairs, etc., need not wear their equip- 
ment or carry rifles; they should be accompanied by a 
fully armed non-commissioned officer as an escort. Not 
more than 20' men are to be away from the company at 
one time; one non-commissioned officer and four men 
per platoon. 

Rifles must be kept clean and in good condition while 
in the trenches. They will be cleaned every morning 
during an hour appointed by the company commander 
for the purpose. Platoon commanders will be respon- 
sible that section commanders superintend this work. 
All rifles except those used by sentries are to be kept 
in racks during the day. 

Trenches must be kept in sanitary condition. 
Platoon commanders will be responsible for the latrines 
in their sections of the trenches. All water for drink- 



302 TRENCH WARFARE. 

ing and cooking is to be taken from a water cart or 
tank provided for this purpose. 

Stretcher bearers will be stationed at a place desig- 
nated by the commanding officer. No soldier will be 
buried nearer than 300 yards from the trenches. 

In every platoon a non-commissioned officer will be 
detailed for duty by day; he will do no night duty. He 
will post the day sentries and see that they are on the 
alert and carry out their orders correctly. He will be 
responsible for the cleanliness of his lines and will 
frequently visit the latrines. He will see that all loose 
ammunition is collected. 

The platoon commander will always send a non-com- 
missioned officer to draw rations and he will be re- 
sponsible for their delivery. 

The passing along of messages by word of mouth will 
not be used. All messages should be written. 

Special instructions will be issued as to precautions 
against gas. 

Selection of Site. 

(a) Fire trench should be selected with due regard 
to tactical requirements and the economy of men. 

(b) Every fire trench should have a good field of fire, 
at least 250 yards. 

(c) The trenches should have the best possible cover. 

(d) The forward position on a slope for the first line 
has the best advantage. The support trench should be 
on the reverse slope from 100 to GOO yards in rear of the 
first line to prevent direct observation and to be practic- 
ally free from artillery fire. The reserve trench is 
usually from % to 1 mile in rear of the first line. 
Remember that the first line, the support line, and the 
reserve line are all fire trenches. Do not put them on 
a crest. 

(e) The communicating trenches (boyaux) should be 
zigzagged, wide and deep, and should follow the low 
ground. The longest straight trench should not exceed 



TRENCH WARFARE. 303 

thirty paces. The angle made by each turn should be 
less than 140 degrees. 

(f) The fire trenches should have salients and re- 
entrants so as to "flank the wire entanglements. The 
bays are usually 27 feet long with 9 feet of traverse. 

(g) There are two problems in the siting of trenches, 
one for those to be constructed under fire and another 
for those that will be constructed without any danger 
from fire. Trenches built under fire are usually made 
by connecting up individual shelters made by the front 
line when forced to halt. Trenches built under quiet 
conditions can be laid out according to the best possible 
plan. 

Trench Construction. 

Several kinds of difficulties face the trench digger: 
Sand, clay, water and bullets. In order to overcome 
them he must be familiar with the general arrangement 
of a trench, the principles which govern its construc- 
tion and the standard trench as it has been worked out 
in the present war at the cost of thousands of lives. 

General Arrangement. — A position is a combination 

of trenches, consisting of : The fire trench, or first line, 
nearest the enemy ; the cover trench, just behind the first 
line, where all but sentinels of the fire trench garrison 
are held in dugouts or shelters; the support trench, 
from 150 to 200 yards in rear of the cover trench, and 
the reserve, from 800 to 1,200 yards still further to 
the rear. 

The support trench is placed far enough from the first 
line to prevent the enemy from shelling both trenches 
at once. By a concentration of artillery fire and a de- 
termined advance of the hostile infantry the first line 
may be captured. The support trench must be so organ- 
ized that it will then act as a line of resistance upon 
which the enemy's advance will break. Lieutenant 
Colonel Azan of the French army says: "As long as 



304 



TRENCH WARFARE. 



Plate 

** n TRENCH E 5 



Seem 



TMVEK5E 




x » i 



TRof/lE of 

OF'A TRENCH PoSlTIOr 




TRENCH WARFARE. 305 

the support trenches are strongly held, the position is 
not in the hands of the enemy." 

The reserve is usually a strong 'point, so organized 
that it can maintain independent resistance for several 
days if necessary, should the enemy obtain control of 
adjacent areas. 

Where possible trenches should be on reverse slopes, 
with the exception of the first line ; but usually the out- 
line of a trench is determined in actual combat, or is a 
part of hostile trench converted. Under these circum- 
stances it cannot be arranged according to tactical ideals. 

Artillery and the automatic gun are the determining 
factors in trench warfare to-day. The effect of artillery 
fire must be limited in its area as far as possible, and 
trenches are, therefore, cut by traverses, which are 
square blocks of earth not less than nine feet square, left 
every 27 feet along the trench. They should overlap 
the width of the trench by at least one yard, thereby 
limiting the effect of shell burst to a single bay, the 27- 
foot length of firing trench between two traverses. 
Sharp angles have the same effect as traverses, but 
angles of more than 120 degrees cannot be utilized in 
this way. 

The sides of the trench are kept as nearly perpen- 
dicular as possible, to give the maximum protection 
from shell burst and the fall of high angle projectiles. 
The parados, the bank of earth to the rear of the trench, 
has been developed during the war to give protection 
from flying fragments of shells exploding to the rear, 
and to prevent the figure of a sentinel from being out- 
lined through a loop-hole against the sky. The berm, 
a ledge or shelf left between the side of the trench and 
the beginning of the parados, has come into general use 
in order to take the weight of the parados off the earth 
at the immediate edge of the trench, and so prevent the 
reverse slope from caving in easily under bombardment 
or heavy rain. 
20 



306 



TRENCH WARFARE. 



-PL-AT£ JF/6A 



OIKCTWH OF THE EI1EMY 





TRENCH WARFARE. 307 

Automatic guns have made it necessary to break the 
line of the trench at every opportunity, in order to 
secure a flanking fire for these arms. Auto-rifles and 
machine guns have tremendous effectiveness- only in 
depth, and flanking fire gives them their greatest 
opportunity. 

Trench Construction. — The methods of building 

trenches are the same whether the work is carried on 
under fire or not. In an attack, upon reaching the limit 
of advance, the men immediately dig themselves in, 
and later connect these individual holes to make a con- 
tinuous line of trench. 

.Most of the digging must be done at night, and must 
be organized to obtain the most work with the least 
confusion. There are three ways of increasing the effi- 
ciency of the men. In the first of these, squad shifts, 
the squad leader divides his men into reliefs and gives 
each man a limited period of intensive work. Reliefs 
may be made by squads or by individuals. The second 
way of increasing efficiency is to induce competition 
among the man and squads, thus making the work a 
game in which each soldier's interest will be aroused in 
the effort to do better than the others. The third method 
is to assign a fixed amount of work to each man. An 
average task, which all ought to accomplish in a given 
time, is found by experience, and those who finish before 
their time is up are relieved from further work during 
that shift, and allowed to return to their shelters. 

Continual care must be used to check up the tools 
on hand, as the men are prone to leave them where they 
were working rather than carry them back and forth to 
work. Each unit must guard its property from appro- 
priation by neighbors on its flanks. 

System of Laying Out Trenches.— The trace of the 

trench is first staked out, particularly at traverses and 
corners when the work is to he done at night. Meas- 
urements should be exact, and the men should be re- 



308 TRENCH WARFARE. 

quired to line the limits of each trench so as not to 
exceed them in digging. All sod should be taken up 
carefully, and used on the parapet for concealment or 
on the berm to make a square back wall for the dirt of 
the parapet. If possible this should be done with the 
parados wall, so as to make it as inconspicuous as pos- 
sible from the front. 

Men should begin to dig at the center of the trench 
and throw the dirt as far out on the sides as possible, 
so that as they go deeper the earth can be thrown just 
over the berm. The slope of the sides will be kept steep 
and the men prevented from widening the trench as they 
dig. In sandy soil the sides of the trench should be 
allowed to reach their angle of repose (which is wider 
at the top than required), then the trench walls sup- 
ported with revettments to the proper width, which are 
filled in behind with sand. Always dig to full depth 
before beginning to revet, as it is impossible to dig 
deeper afterwards without loosening the revetting. 

Revettm&ntS. — Every trench at points needs support, 
and this revetting may be done with any of the follow- 
ing materials: Sod; corduroy of logs laid lengthwise; 
sand bags (size 20 in. x 10 in. x 5 in.); galvanized 
iron; chicken wire and cloth made in a frame about 
six feet long; hurdles, wicker mats made by driving 
three-inch stakes into the ground, leaving uprights as 
high above the ground as the depth of the trench, then 
weaving withes and slender saplings between the up- 
rights ; expanded metal ; gabions, cylindrical baskets 
made like hurdles except that the stakes are driven in 
a circle ; fascines, bundles of faggots about 10 inches in 
diameter by 9 feet long. The faggots are laid together 
on a horse or between stakes driven in the ground, then 
" choked," or bound tightly together, by a rope 3 feet 
8 inches long with loops at each end, tightened with 
two stiff levers. The bundle is then bound with wire 
at intervals of two feet. The circumference of a fascine 
should be 25' inches. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 



309 



peseta ** \? 




VlaVatiY|4. 



310 TRENCH WARFARE. 

•Capt. Powell of the C. E. F. found during 18 months' 
service in the trenches, that a separate construction for 
the bottom and firing step from that of the parapet made 
repair much simpler when the trench was damaged by 
shell fire. The upper part of the trench usually suffers 
most, while the bottom section, if unattached, often re- 
mains intact and the drainage system needs only to be 
cleared out. If the portion above the firing step is one 
piece with that below, however, the whole trench has to 
be reconstructed. 

There is nothing more important than the supports 
used to keep revetting in place. With sods, sand bags, 
concrete and gabions, a proper arrangement in the first 
place will make other support unnecessary. 

Sod should be placed carefully, with a slope of not 
more than one inch on four, with the vegetation upper- 
most. This type is least affected by rain. 

Sand Bags should be used like brickwork, laid in 
alternate headers (binders) and stretchers. Their use 
should be confined as far as possible to emergency and 
repair work, because after a few weeks the bags rot and 
cannot be moved about. If the trench wall has been 
demolished by artillery fire, the particles of cloth make 
digging out the bottom of the trench a very difficult 
matter. 

Concrete Work has been used extensively by the G-er- 
mans, but the chips fly like bullets under shell explosion, 
and the concrete cracks and disintegrates in severe 
weather. It is used in the bottom of trenches for drain- 
age and for the firing step. 

Gabions may be set into the wall of the trench and 
filled with earth,. or used at corners to prevent the wear- 
ing down of the edge, which reduces the protective ef- 
fect of the trench. Set in at a slight angle they will 
hold the side without further re-enforcement. 

With the other forms of revetting some secondary sup- 
port is required. This is usually furnished by sinking 



TRENCH WARFARE. 311 

stakes into the bottom of the trench and securing their 
upper ends to a " dead man " — a stake or log sunk in 
the ground more than three feet away. The tendency 
is to sink the dead men too near to the trench, and to 
attach too many wires to one of them. It is important 
to sink the stakes at least one foot below the bottom 
of the trench. By digging holes for them instead of 
driving them in directly, the sides of the trench need 
not be disturbed by the concussion of driving the stakes. 
This is especially important in sandy soils. Stakes 
should be placed about two feet apart. Dead men 
should be buried deeply enough to prevent cutting by 
shell explosions. 

Trendl Armament. — A few machine guns are set in 
concealed emplacements along the trench to cover im- 
portant salients. The automatic rifle is used over the 
parapet. Besides these there is the rifle grenade and 
trench mortar. The rifle grenade has a simple emplace- 
ment. After securing the proper elevation, the butt of 
the rifle is placed between posts or blocks of wood and 
the muzzle rested against a log on the wall of the trench. 
A trench mortar emplacement is dug in the rear wall of 
the trench, or a shell hole is utilized, care being taken 
to conceal it from aerial observation. 

Loopholes. — Loopholes are still much in use for ob- 
servation, but they are employed less and less for firing, 
as they are difficult to conceal from the enemy and al- 
most useless when the enemy is close. They should cut 
the parapet diagonally, not directly to the front, and 
should be concealed by vegetation and by a curtain over 
the opening when they are not in use. Sheet steel plates 
with small peep holes are used on the parapet. They 
are set up with a slope to the rear to deflect bullets. 

Trench Bottoms. — In clay or hard soil special ar- 
rangements must be made for drainage. Where possi- 
ble the trench should have a convex surface and should 
be smooth. A rough bottom means delay in reliefs, and 



312 



TRENCH WARFARE. 



P/afe 







MetVjoi oj ^ pi 



V-ocat'vo\| +or 



TRENCH WARFARE. 313 

possible injuries. Where trenches are used for long peri- 
ods board walks should be constructed. Under these 
drains or sink holes can be placed to collect water. A 
sink hole may be constructed by digging a pit filled with 
small stones, or a barrel may be sunk into the ground 
and filled with stone. Where there is not sufficient slope 
to carry off the water, or at the lowest point of a drain- 
age system, a water hole should be dug in front of the 
trench large enough to handle the drainage water. 

Communication Trench (or Boyau.) — Kunning to 

the rear and joining the different parallel resistance 
trenches are communication trenches or boyaux. These 
are for transportation of men and material as well as for 
communication. Communication trenches should be 
made wide enough to allow travel for men with loads, 
should be at least seven feet deep and as smooth as pos- 
sible on the bottom. Rough places will delay traffic. 
They are dug with turns every 20 or 30 yards to pre- 
vent their being swept by gun fire. When boyaux are 
built by night sharp zig-zag corners should be used, or 
the angles will not be acute and protection will be lost. 
During daylight when the directions can be seen, the 
construction may be a serpentine curve, with no stretch 
of more than 30 yards visible from one point. 

Boyaux are sometimes used for lateral defence and 
often emplacements for automatic guns are arranged to 
cover stretches of them. Bombing stations are placed 
near by to protect the guns and. to clear the boyau of the 
enemy. At these points the boyau is left straight for a 
short distance in front. Where provision is made for 
lateral or frontal defence by rifle fire, firing steps are 
constructed. If this is inconvenient for movement 
along the boyau, individual emplacements, must be 
made in the side wall for firing. Sentry posts are dug 
at right angles to the boyau. 

Arrangements for passage of men moving in opposite 
directions may be made by extending short spurs at the 



314 



TRENCH WARFARE. 



Plate 



pef. o-£ E> » m a- 




TRENCH WARFARE. 315 

corners, enlarging the boyau at the bends, digging niches 
or passing points here and there, or constructing island 
traverses with the boj.au running around on each side. 

Every boyau should be marked where it meets a 
trench with a sign indicating the place and trench. 
Without this messengers, reliefs and re-enforcements 
may easilj be lost in the maze of trenches. 

Latrines should be run out about 20 feet from boyaux 
at points directly in rear of lateral trenches. If possible 
they should be placed so that men cannot enter them 
without passing near the platoon leaders. This will 
prevent men from leaving the front line, under the pre- 
tense of going to latrines, during bombardments or min- 
ing operations. The trench leading to a latrine should 
be constructed like a boyau, and the pit should be close 
to the side nearest the enemy, to give the best possible 
protection from shell fire. There are three types of 
trench latrines : Deep boxes which are covered and have 
rough seats ; short straddle trenches or trenches equipped 
with a single horizontal bar, and portable cans, used 
where the ground or the limited space make it impossi- 
ble to dig pits. Thesie cans should be emptied daily 
into holes behind the trenches, which are covered after 
the cans are emptied into them. 

Urinals should be separate from the latrines. They 
may be either holes about three feet deep filled with 
stone, troughs with a covered pit at the end, or portable 
cans. 

Shelters. For the protection of men not actually on 
duty three forms of shelters are used. The splinter- 
proof is a form of light shelter whose covering affords 
protection only against splinters. These are usually on 
the reserve line. About 12 inches to 20 inches of earth 
over a roof of logs or planks will afford protection from 
splinters and shrapnel. Curved sheets of iron may also 
be used. The deep shelter or bomb-proof is a chamber 
constructed by digging from the surface and construct- 



316 



TRENCH WARFARE. 



/=>/c7*e /Vo.^O, 




7]m7A 






£>&*/> «5>* «•/?'*•'- 







// ///////////////////////// ' ' 



I 



/ /// M rrrrff -^ 

/ //>w//////////////////y 






//A 
$ — 



i- 



//////yx 






Ovpouf. 



'/s-yssx 



h*. 



p^ 



TRENCH WARFARE. 317 

ing a roof. To protect against eight-inch shells the top 
of the chamber should be twenty feet below the surface. 
Heavy beams or sections of railroad iron are laid across 
the roof. Above them is a layer of earth several feet 
thick; then another layer of timber extending to un- 
disturbed ground on the sides with concrete, crushed 
stone, metal, etc., above to make a percussion surface 
for exploding projectiles that penetrate the upper layer 
of earth. This layer fills in the rest- of the space to the 
level of the ground. 

Shelters should not exceed six feet in width, but can 
be of any length. This will prevent the crushing in of 
the roof timber by the explosion of a projectile buried 
in the upper layer of earth. The principles of construct- 
ing shelters will be considered under " Dugouts," as 
they are similar for the two types. 

Dugouts are chambers tunnelled into the ground with 
twenty feet or more of undisturbed earth above them. 
They are used in the cover trenches and sometimes in 
the first line. Enough of them must be built to shelter 
the garrison of each sector, allowing one man per yard 
of front. They must also be built for machine gun and 
trench mortar detachments. 

SentriGS must be stationed in observation posts which 
command the ground in front of each dugout. They 
must be connected with the dugouts by telephone or 
speaking tube. 

Position. — Dugouts must always be on the side of 
the trench toward the enemy. This prevents flying shells 
from falling into the entrances. They should connect 
with lateral trenches, not with boyaux, as men at the 
entrance obstruct traffic through the boyaux. 

Entrances and exits must be well concealed, with not 
less than five feet of head cover. This should be pro- 
vided with a bursting layer. All dugouts must have at 
least two openings, one on the opposite side of the tra- 



318 TRENCH WARFARE. 

verse or angle from the other. It is well to have an exit 
behind the parados leading to a surprise position for a 
machine gun and bombers. All openings mnst have a 
sill 6 inches to '8 inches high, to prevent water from 
entering the dugout. 

Galleries leading to dugouts should be built at an 
incline of 45 degrees. Their dimensions should be 2 
feet 6 inches by 6 feet. Frames are of squared timber. 
The sill and two side posts should be not less than 6 
inches square, and the frames in the passageways 2 feet 
6 inches by 4 feet 6 inches. They must be placed at 
right angles to the slope of the gallery, with distance 
pieces between uprights. In treacherous soil the frames 
rest on sills. Steps in the passageway are 1 foot broad 
and 1 foot high. 

Bomb-traps, extensions of the gallery about 3 feet 
long, should be dug beyond the point where the entrance 
to the dugout chamber leads off from the gallery. These 
will catch bombs thrown in from the surface and protect 
the chamber from the effects of their explosion. 

Interior. The standard section is 6 feet by 8 feet, to 
allow for bunks on each side. Frames of 6 by 6 timber 
spaced 2 feet 6 inches apart 'support the sides and roof. 
Roof planking should be 2 inches thick, and the sides 
should be covered with 1% inch plank or corrugated 
iron. Two shovels and two picks for emergencies should 
always be kept in each dugout. The construction of the 
chamber should be that of a very strong box, so that it 
will stand strain, if necessary, from within as well as 
from without. 

Depots for Supplies must be near the headquarters of 
the platoon, company, battalion and regiment. Shelters 
may be made with ammunition boxes set into the side of 
the trench. Places should be provided for the follow- 
ing: Food, ammunition for rifles and auto-rifles, gren- 
ades, rockets, tools and other supplies. Places must also 



TRENCH WARFARE. 319 

be arranged in the front line for ammunition, rockets 
and hand and rifle grenades. 

Telephones. Communication is established as speed- 
ily as possible with the various units. In the forward 
trenches wires do not last long under bombardment and 
are left open along the side of the trench, where quick 
repairs can be made. All soldiers must be taught to 
respect these wires and to care for them when they are 
found under foot or hanging. Conduits are dug for 
wires to battalion and regimental headquarters, and 
these are fairly safe from shell fire. 

Departure Parallel. In preparing for an advance 
upon the enemy, a straight line trench without traverses, 
and with steps at the end for exit to the surface, is built 
in front of the first line trench. This line of departure 
is generally brought within about 200' yards of the 
hostile line by means of saps, short trenches run out 
from the front line to the new parallel. Since this: line 
of departure can be seen by the enemy, it is sometimes 
better to construct steps in the front line trench itself, 
or when possible to build a Russian sap. This is a tun- 
nel very near the ground, which can be broken through 
at a moment's notice when troops are ready to advance. 

Machine Gun Emplacements.— Shell-holes with a 

good field of fire and emplacements along boyaux are the 
best location for machine guns. Few guns are placed in 
the front line, and these only at strong points in the 
line, which command a maximum field of effectiveness. 
Shell-holes may be imitated for machine gun emplace- 
ments, but in any case they should be connected by 
underground passage with the trenches. Thus when 
trenches are destroyed by bombardment the machine 
guns remain intact. The field of fire for each machine 
gun should be carefully determined and marked by 
three stakes, one for the position of the gun, the other 
two for the limits of the field of fire. Using: these as 



320 



TRENCH WARFARE. 



;Vo2t 




METHOD OF 
EMPLACEMENT 
FOR MACHINE GUN 
IN SHELL CRATER 
BEHIND THE FIRST LINE 




ARRANGEMENT 
DEFENSE 



in rioYAU 
where a field 

Of FtfZE AND A 
Fl«lN<j STE P WOulO 
riNEL St INC0N/VEM(EM7- 

Post 



of Bor^u FOR 



BARBED WIRE ENTANGLEMENT 



K 

^ 



/»KttfllVCeMEn'r OF fACX LINE 




toMQl^Ar.O 



TRENCH WARFARE. 321 

guides, the gun can be fired correctly at night. During 
the day it is never left in place nor fired from its actual 
emplacement. 

Listening Posts. — These stations are usually carried 
out to the edge of the entanglements nearest the enemy. 
The' listening station must be large enough for half a 
squad, and often has an automatic rifle and grenade 
thrower. There should be not more than two posts for 
each battalion. They are not occupied during the day. 
They are hard to defend and easily captured by a raid- 
ing party which cuts the wire to one of the flanks and 
comes in from the rear. The boyau leading to the post 
should be zig-zagged. The post itself should be deep 
enough for good head cover. 

Wire Entanglements. — The object of the entangle- 
ment is not to stop completely the advance of the 
enemy, but to delay him at close range under machine 
gun, auto rifle and rifle fire, and within range of 
grenades and bombs. 'Entanglements should be con- 
cealed as much as possible from the enemy's trenches 
and from aerial observation. If possible, they should 
be placed on a reverse slope or in a dead angle. They 
should be from 50 to 100 yards in front of the trench, 
so that artillery fire directed upon the trench will not 
be effective on the wire. At the same time the wire 
must not be far enough advanced so that the enemy's 
raiding parties can cut the entanglements. 

Wire entanglements are classified as high entangle- 
ments, low entanglements and loose wire. 

High Entanglements are strung on metal or wood 
posts about four feet high, both wire and posts being 
painted for camouflage. The driving of posts must be 
muffled, and metal screw posts are used when near the 
enemy's line. Posts are placed in two parallel lines, 
two yards apart, spaced alternately so that the posts in 
one line are opposite the middle of the interval in the 
other. 

21 



322 TRENCH WARFARE. 

Tracing Entanglements is done by a sergeant fol- 
lowed by two stake placers, two holders and two drivers, 
who in turn are followed by men attaching wire. Two 
men carry each roll of wire, and each pair (there are 
twelve pairs in all) strings one wire. A panel between 
stakes is composed of four strands. Each wire should 
be wrapped around each post. The same arrangement of 
panels should run between the two lines of posts. The 
entanglements are in three lines about 20 yards apart, 
the nearest being 20 yards from the front line trench. 
The entanglement nearest the enemy should be con- 
structed first, so that men always work nearest their 
own trenches. All wire entanglements should be at all 
points commanded by the flanking fire of machine guns. 
High entanglements (known as abatis) may be made by 
felling trees toward the enemy, and similar entangle- 
ments made of brushwood are useful in emergency. 

LOW Entanglements are formed of pickets two feet 
high, 21/2 inches in diameter, wired in all directions. 
Vegetation renders the entanglement invisible from the 
enemy and from aerial observation. This type may 
also be placed in shallow excavations which are con- 
cealed from the enemy and partly protected from artil- 
lery fire. Sharpened stakes, with their points hardened 
by fire, driven obliquely into the ground, may also be 
used. 

Loose Wire in the form of loops of small diameter 
fastened to stakes, or wire laid along the ground and 
attached at the ends, or spirals of barbed wire in racks, 
is used for entanglements. It is reported that this 
form is coming into considerable use, but the details 
have not been published. Such entanglements are 
much harder to locate by aerial observation. 



The following are a number of criticisms made by 
Lieut. Henri Poire of the French army, detailed as in- 
structor at Plattsburg, upon the system of field works 



TRENCH WARFARE. 323 

constructed by the 17th and IStli Provisional Training 
Regiments. The ground was of loose sand, with some 
gravel at a depth of about six feet. 

1. Dimensions; of trenches as laid out were not 

followed. 

(a) Bottom of trenches behind firing steps too 

narrow. 

(b) Firing step too deep. It should never be 

more than 3 feet 4 inches below berm 
of parapet. 

(c) Parapet much too thin in most cases. It 

should be at least three feet thick. 

(d) Communication trenches (boyaux) gen- 

erally too narrow. 

(e) Islands in communication trenches 

should never be less than 10 x 12 
yards — otherwise one shell will de- 
molish the entire passageway. 

2. Revettment work not well anchored. In some 
cases too many wires from supports fastened to one 
dead man. Another fault is that dead men were not 
buried deeply enough in the ground, nor far enough 
back from the trench. In one case a dead man (a 
stake) supported all four sides of an island in a com- 
munication trench. The destruction of this post would 
have completely blocked every passage around the 
island. Furthermore, dead men rot quickly and tend 
to break off. It is necessary, therefore, to have a num- 
ber of them, each holding only a portion of the weight. 
All projecting branches and irregularities along a 
trench should be removed by occupying troops. 

3. Too many loop-holes. Except for snipers, rifle- 
men and automatic riflemen fine over the parapet. 

4. Machine gun loop-holes not wide enough. They 
should not be less than 36< inches wide. There must be 
vegetation planted in front and a curtain hung over the 



324 TRENCH WARFARE. 

loop-holes to prevent detection. The growing plants in 
front will be easily swept away at the first discharge. 

5. Remember never to imitate shell-holes until after 
a real bombardment by the enemy. 

6. The dugouts made were never deep enough and 
afforded no protection. In fact it would be far better 
to have none than to be caught inside when a shell ex- 
ploded in a shallow one, because the confinement of the 
explosion would intensify the effect. 

7. Shelters were all to wide. Six feet is the 
maximum. 

The platoon headquarters dugout should be of the 
same width as the trench, not over three feet, but as 
long as necessary. Company headquarters is six feet 
wide and of whatever depth required. 

8. In digging, not enough care was used to conceal 
the fresh earth from the enemy. Make false emplace- 
ments to utilize this dirt; also dig dummy trenches' 
about one foot deep, leaving the sides sharp so that 
they w T ill show clearly on aerial photographs. 

9. In using plants as camouflage, distinct care must 
be exercised not to put growing plants too freely nor to 
place them where they never existed. The actual 
ground conditions must be copied. 

10. Some latrines were not arranged with the stools 
close beneath the wall nearest the enemy. This caused 
the loss of protection, which it is imperative to consider, 
as many casualties occur here. 

11. Too many listening posts. They are easily cap- 
tured by hostile fighting patrols. There should never 
be more than two listening posts to a battalion. 

12. The observation stations in many instances had 
no good field of fire or were outlined against the sky 
on the crest of some rise. The site for an observation 
post should always be placed over the crest and have 
a good field of fire for use in case of attack. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 325 

Occupation. 

Relief in the Trenches. 

A. The Two Main Classes of Belief : 

1. 'General Relief. Applied to the relief of a whole 

position manned by a division or more. Exe- 
cuted when large units are going to " full 
rest " in the rear or being removed from one 
part of the front to another. Executed in the 
same way as interior relief; i. e., by successive 
relief of the battalions involved. 

2. Interior Relief. Applied to the relief of one 

sector or portion of a sector manned by a 
brigade or less. 

B. General Brinciples of Relief: 

1. Interior relief is executed about once every six 

days; more frequently when the stay in the 
trenches is particularly arduous, less fre- 
quently when it is unusually comfortable. 

2. The battalion is the relieving unit. 

3. "It is advisable to arrange the relief between 

units which have friendly relations to one 
another ; e. g., battalions of the same regiment ; 
and, so far as possible, to assign each unit to 
the same trenches on each relief. This pro- 
motes continuity of effort. 

4. Relief is executed at night; the hour must be 

varied ; secrecy is imperative. 

5. Brompt execution is essential, to prevent fatigue 

of the troops and congestion of the boyaux. 
0. The Mechanism of Relief : 

1. Reconnaissance 1 , 24 hours in advance, by the 
captain of each relieving company, accom- 
panied by his platoon leaders and non-commis- 
sioned officers. He ascertains : 
(1) The plan of occupation; i. e., the disposi- 
sitions and duties of the unit to be re- 
lieved. 



326 TRENCH WARFARE. 

1. Relief in the Trenches — (Continued) : 

C. The Mechaxism oe Relief — (Continued) : 
(2) The shelter accommodations. 
( 3 ) Work being done and proposed. 

(4) Condition of the wire and other defences. 

( 5 ) The available water supply. 

(6) Artillery support. 
( 7 ) Commune at ions. 

(8) The location, amount and condition of 

stores. 

(9) Danger points. 

(10) All available information of the enemy; his 

habits, location of his snipers, what work 
he is doing. 

(11) The ways and means of liaison, both lateral 

and from front to rear. 
To the success of this reconnaissance, the closest 
co-operation between all officers of the com- 
panies relieving and relieved, is indispensable. 
2. The march from billets to the trenches : 

(a) Transportation, by auto-trucks and wagons, 

is utilized to a point as near the lines as 
possible, to carry the packs of the men, 
the auto rifles, extra ammunition and 
other heavy equipment. When the dis- 
tance is great the men themselves should 
be carried by auto-truck; this saves time 
and fatigue. The men will carry rifles 
loaded and locked, full cartridge belts, gas 
masks, and all other lighter equipment, 
with rations for 24 hours at least. Gren- 
ades will be secured in the trenches. 
Electric torches will be carried by company 
and platoon commanders. 

(b) The strictest discipline must be maintained. 

On arrival within sight of the enemy, 
noise and smoking (or other lights) will 
be prohibited. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 327 

1. Relief in the Trendies — (Continued) : 

C. The Mechanism of Relief — (Continued) : 

(c) Guides, from the company to be relieved, 
will meet the relieving company promptly 
at a point definitely agreed upon in 
advance. 

3. The march through the boyaux (communicating 

trenches : 

(a) Distance; often as much as three or four 

miles. 

(b) Order of march : company in single file, cap- 

tain at the head; each platoon leader at 
the head of his platoon ; a non-commis- 
sioned officer at rear of each platoon. 

(c) The column must be kept closed up. Each 

man must consider himself a connecting 
file, guiding on the head, and behave ac- 
cordingly. A guide should accompany 
the commander of the last platoon. 

(d) Rate of march : roughly, about 40 yards per 

minute. It takes 2'5'0 men about 20 min- 
utes to pass a given point. 

(e) Route and right of way : 

The first line and support trenches will 
never be used as roads. Separate boyaux 
should, if possible, be assigned to the 
troops relieving and relieved. In no case 
will one company cross the path of an- 
other. In case of two columns meeting, 
one moving f orward, the other to the rear, 
the former has the right of way. 

4. No man of the unit in occupation will leave his 

post until he has actually been relieved and 
has transmitted all orders and information 
• relative to that post. 

5. Liaison must be established, immediately on 

arrival, with the units on the flanks and with 
headquarters in the rear. Captains must make 



328 TRENCH WARFARE. 

1. Relief in the Trenches — (Continued) : 

C. The Mechanism of Relief — (Continued) : 

sure that their runners are thoroughly ac- 
quainted with the routes of communication. 

6. As soon as relief is accomplished both captains 

will report that fact to their respective com- 
manders. 

7. The relieving commander then inspects his 

trenches. He ascertains that all his watchers 
are at their posts and that the balance of his 
men know their posts and duties' and are pre- 
pared to assume them quickly. 

8. The duties of the relieved commander are : 

(1) To turn over his sector thoroughly policed 

and in good condition as regards its con- 
struction and the new work, if any, in 
progress. 

(2) To turn over his supplies in good condition 

and fully accounted for. 

(3) After reporting the relief, to march his men 

back to billets as promptly and secretly 
as possible, in column of files, platoon 
leaders in the rear of their platoons, a 
non-commissioned officer and guide at the 
head of each. 

(4) On the evening preceding relief, to send his 

cooks back to billets so that his men may 
be provided with a hot meal immediately 
on arrival. 

D. If an attack occurs during the march through the 

boyaux, to or from relief, the company 
affected occupies the nearest defensive position 
and at once notifies its battalion commander. 
If an attack occurs during the actual process 
of relief, the senior officer present takes 
command. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 329 

The Stay in the Trenches. 

A. The Four Objects of a Trench Commander: 

1. Security of his sector. 

2. Protection of his troops. 

3. Constant and accurate observation. 

4. A continuous offensive. 

B. His Plais t of Defense: 

1. General principles of defense : 

(a) Arrangement in depth. The most depend- 

able defense is in prearranged counter 
attacks. The system of defense must re- 
act like a helical spring. 

(b) Tenacity of defense. 

1. Each unit must be prepared to hold its 

post to the last extremity. 

2. Orders to withdraw will never be obeyed 

unless unmistakably valid. 

3. All ground lost must be retaken at once in 

counter attack by the unit which lost it. 

(c) Apportionment of responsibility. Each 

active segment must have a commander 
responsible for its defense, upkeep and 
sanitation, and the discipline and in- 
struction of his men. 

2. Basis: 

(a) The plan of defense turned over by the pre- 

ceding commander. This will usually 
suffice for the first 24 hours after 
relief. 

(b) 'General information of the enemy's lines. 

dispositions, and intentions, based 
chiefly on aerial photographs. 
0. Organization of Defense : 

1. Allocation of front. (The front of an Ameri- 
can battalion will average about 1,000 
yards. ) 
Diagrams: A. The Regiment, B. The Bat- 
talion, C. The Company, D. The Platoon. 



330 TRENCH WARFARE. 

II. The Stay in the Trenches — (Continued) : 
C. Organization of Defease — (Continued) : 

2. Distribution of effectives. Determined chiefly 

by the terrain and by 3. 

3. Employment of the several arms : 

(a) Machine guns. 'Crew of S 1 men per gun. 
(Furnished by detachments of a machine 
gun company.) Located by the infantry 
commander, in concealed em placements 
behind the first line, to deliver successive 
barrages from flanking positions. Effec- 
tive range : up to TOO' yards. 

(bj Automatic rifles. Crew of 3 men per rifle. 
Usually posted to enfilade the. entangle- 
ments of the first line. They concentrate 
the fire effect of from 7 to 10 riflemen. 
Effective range : up to 300 yards. 

(c) Rifle Grenadiers. Located near enough to 

first line to hold the enemy trenches 
under fire and .deliver effective barrages 
near the mouths of our own communicat- 
ing trenches. Should be located near ob- 
servation posts so that their fire can be 
promptly corrected. 

(d) Trench mortars. Located similarly to (c). 

Manned by riflemen. 

(e) Bombers. One supply man to each 2 

grenadiers. Used for protection of auto- 
rifles, in counter attacks, for protection 
of communicating trenches and fighting 
in close quarters. 

(f) Riflemen. Posted to deliver frontal fire. 

Grouped according to the plan of counter 
attacks. 

(g) As many men as possible should be in- 

structed in the use of the enemy's 
weapons. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 331 

II. The Stay in the Trenches — (Continued) : 
D. Liaison: 

(a) By telephone. Quickest and most accurate. 

Maintained between each platoon and its 
company headquarters, and between ad- 
joining companies. Especially subject 
to destruction in bombardment. Wire- 
less and ground telegraphy are used only 
between brigade and division head- 
quarters. 

(b) By runners ("liaison agents"). Five de- 

tailed from each company to battalion 
headquarters ; one sent to each adjoining 
company headquarters ; one from each 
platoon to company headquarters; four 
or five on duty at each platoon head- 
quarters; five from each machine gun 
company to battalion headquarters. Mes- 
sages sent by them should, if practicable, 
be written and signed, and should be re- 
ceipted for by the addressee. 

(c) By rockets and flares. Quickest means of 

liaison with the artillery in rear. 

(d) Domestic (message carrying) grenades. 

(e) Dogs and carrier pigeons. Sent out to the 

rear from battalion headquarters. 

(f) One searchlight — with a radius of 3 miles 

— is furnished to each company. 

(g) Noise. Klaxon signals, etc., give 

warning of gas attacks. 

E. Observation : 
(a) Observers: 

1. Must be men of infinite patience, keen 

hearing and eyesight. 

2. They are located behind the first line in 

positions combining good view with con- 
cealment. 



332 TRENCH WARFARE. 

II. The Stay in the Trenches — (Continued) : 
E. Observation — (Continued): 

3. Each is provided with a panoramic map, 

made from aeroplane photographs, of the 
enemy's trenches. On this must be 
promptly noted every slightest change in 
the trace, height of parapet, etc., of the 
enemy's line. Such notes greatly assist 
in locating machine gun emplacements. 

4. Eiach observer will also record in a note 

book everything of importance, with the 
time observed. 

5. A report of changes, with an abstract of ob- 

server's notes, is forwarded daily to 
regimental headquarters. 

(b) Watchers (sentinels): 

1. Stationed, one near the door of each dug- 

out, in the first line, support and inter- 
mediate trenches. 

2. They must be carefully concealed. 

3. They must watch over the parapet (never 

through slits or loopholes) so as to have 
unrestricted view. 

4. They are furnished with signal rockets and 

flares for prompt communication with the 
artillery, and have authority to use them. 

5. Double sentinels are posted at night. 

(c) Listening Posts: 

1. Located, usually in shell holes, just inside 

the entanglements. Connected with 
front line by tunnels. Protected from 
grenades by heavy gratings, when pos- 
sible, and by concealment. 

2. Occupied by 4 men (1 in command), in 3 

reliefs. Usually occupied only at night 
unless our trenches are on a reverse slope. 

3. Chief function is protection of the entangle- 

ments. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 333 

II. The Stay in the Trenches — (Continued) : 
E. Observation — (Continued) : 

(d) Microphone Posts. — Installed usually be- 

hind the first line. Intercept the enemy's 
telephone and ground-telegraph messages 
and any loud conversation in his 
trenches. 

(e) F'ixed Patrols. — 'Generally remain in shell 

holes in front of our entanglements. 

(f) Eeconnoitering Patrols: 

1. Composed of from 3 to 5 men, commanded 

by a non-commissioned officer. Sent out 
at night only. 

2. The company commander must promptly 

notify commanders of adjoining com- 
panies of the dispatch of these patrols, 
their time of departure, route and prob- 
able time of return. 

3. Men should be assigned to this duty by 

roster. 

P. Trench Work: 

1. Constant battle with the elements, care for 

drainage, revettment, sanitation and storage. 

2. Repair of the effects of bombardment. 

3. New work, for better security, communication 

and observation. 

4. Work in the open. 

(a) Usually consists of repair or rearrangement 

of wire entanglements, digging new lis- 
tening posts, etc. 

(b) Effected by parties detailed by roster. 

(c) They are guarded by fighting patrols, com- 

posed like reconnaissance patrols. Their 
best protection is in silence and conceal- 
ment. 

(d) Adjoining companies must be notified of 

their dispatch, location and probable time 
of return. 



334 TRENCH WARFARE. 

II. The .Stay in the Trenches — (Continued) : 
F. Tkexch "Work — (Continued) : 

(e) This work, like all operations conducted 
outside the protection of the trenches, 
offers a valuable tonic to the morale. 

G-. Offensive Operations : 

1. Sniping: 

(a) Snipers constitute one of the most depend- 

able and productive agencies of attrition. 

(b) The best shots of the company are especially 

trained and assigned for this duty exclu- 
sively. 

(c) They operate in pairs and post themselves 

to cover any exposed portions of the 
enemy's trenches, especially his commu- 
nicating trenches. 

(d) They should be well supplied with all nec- 

essary special equipment ; e. g., sniper- 
scopes, telescopic sights, painted head- 
gear, etc. 

2. Mining Operations. 

3. Raiding: 

(a) Object of raids: destruction of the enemy's 

defenses, disturbance of his morale, col- 
lection of prisoners and information. 

(b) The personnel of raiding parties will usu- 

ally include : A commander and second 
in command, bayonet men, bombers, en- 
gineers, signal men, stretcher bearers. 
Their numbers and proportions are regu- 
lated by the nature and difficulty of the 
task. 

(c) Co-ordination with the artillery barrage is 

the essential of their success. The limit 
of advance, extent of operations, and time 
of return will therefore be set in advance 
and rigidly adhered to. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 335 

II. The Stay in the Trenches — (Continued) : 
H. Role of the Trench Commander: 

1. Inspections: The men will be formally in- 

spected twice daily at the general " stand to " 
by the company commander. Particular at- 
tention will be paid to the health of the men, 
condition of their feet and their clothing. 
Each man must have at least one pair of dry 
socks always available. Arms, gas masks, and 
other equipments will also be rigidly inspected. 

2. Roster: The company commander will carefully 

supervise the preparation of the duty roster. 
An obviously equal distribution of the arduous 
duties involved in trench life is essential to 
the maintenance of morale. 

3. Reports and Records: (Additional to those al- 

ready required by regulations.) Log Book, 
Report of Casualties, Wind Report (daily), 
Bombardment Report (daily), Intelligence 
Report, which will include observer's notes 
and changes (twice daily), and a daily report 
of Work completed and Undertaken. 
I. " One principle which the trench commander 
should never forget is the necessity for his fre- 
quent presence in the midst of his men. * * * 
Direct contact with the troops on as many oc- 
casions as possible is the most certain way to 
gain their confidence." 

Duties of the Company Commander. 

1. To inspect the sector his company is to occupy, 

one day in advance of occupying it. 

2. To assign segments to the platoons. 

3. To prepare a plan of defense. 

4. To connect by liaison with the companies on his 

flanks. 



336 



TRENCH WARFARE. 



Platc 







' /v 




( ( 




/=• / /?rs r z_i 


1 




1st Z»d 






3 m 




-5t/p > /= , 0/C?r ] 










l^ . ... __J j 






L ^_j 



^■t/7 



7?iTS £ ^ WET 



"PLA-roorsj 



-y-v 



//?S-7- 



VT 



^ / / £ 



77^ 



rrf: 







TRENCH WARFARE. 



337 



/=" / /=C3 T 



Z. / /VZT 



FIRST 



SECOND 



BATT'N 



HATT'M 




Plat it 



1st 

Co "//' 



Znd 

Co. -3' 



-J7~£ 



3rd 

Co C 



SUPPORT 



Co P 



338 TRENCH WARFARE. 

5. To have an agent or runner at Battalion 

Headquarters. 

6. To prepare a plan for counter attacks. 

7. To report to the Battalion Commander when his 

company has taken up its position: 

(a) Its situation. 

(b) Security. 

(c) Liaison. 

(d) State of position left by predecessor. 

(e) Defense of sector. 

(f) Plan of counter attacks. 

8. To inspect the trenches frequently to see that 

everything is in proper condition and that his 
men are in jubilant spirits. 

9. To have platoon guides report to Battalion Head- 

quarters on the date for the relief of his com- 
pany and act as guides to the company that 
relieves him. 

10. To keep a special log book in which the following 

are kept : 

(a) Work completed by his unit. 

(b) Work under way. 

(c) Work proposed. 

11. Turn over to his successor: 

(a) Measures taken for security. 

(b) Plan of attacks. 

(c) Plan of counterattacks. 

12. Have one officer on duty at all times. 

13. ''Stand to" will take place one (1) hour before 

daylight, and all available men will attend. 
There will be a thorough inspection. Rapid 
loading will be practiced. The firing position of 
e\eTj man will be tested to see if he can hit the 
bottom of our wire. Gas helmets will be 
inspected. 

14. Time table — allot hours of work, rest and meals. 

15. Supplies — make timely requisitions for them — 



TRENCH WARFARE. 339 

be especially watchful about meals and rations — 
have no delays. 

16. To have one watcher and one relief on duty near 

Company Headquarters at all times. 

17. To get a good field of fire to the front and cover 

the sectors of each company on flanks. 

18. (Subject to change) Red Rocket-Artillery Barrage 

wanted. 
White Rocket Gas Attack. 

19. To report twice daily all changes in wind direction. 

20. To report to Battalion Commander when relieved. 

Duties of Platoon Leaders as Officers on Duty with 
Company. 

1. Report with old officer at company headquarters. 

2. Make frequent inspections of all trenches occupied 

by company. 

3. Visit each Listening Post at least once during tour 

of duty. 

4. Visit all sentinels and receive their reports. 

5. See that one non-commissioned officer per platoon is 

on duty. 

6. Receive reports of non-commissioned officers after 

they have posted sentinels. 

7. At end of tour hand over to new officer all orders, a 

report of work in progress, and any useful infor- 
mation. 

8. Report with new officer at Company Headquarters 

on completion of tour. 

9. To report anything unusual to Company Head- 

quarters. 

10. To send dead and wounded to dressing station 

trenches. 

11. To send patrols to front at night. 

Duties of Platoon Leaders. 

1. Must accompany company commander on inspection 
of trenches one day previous to occupying them. 



340 TRENCH WARFARE. 

2. Make necessary reliefs for his men in his segment. 

3. Make a plan of defense and counterattack for his 

position or approve the one left there. 

4. Establish sniping posts and arrange reliefs. 

5. Establish Listening Posts and arrange reliefs. 

6. Assign non-commissioned officer to duty with pla- 

toon and arrange relief. 

7. Instruct every man as to his place in case of attack. 

8. Establish liaison with platoons on both flanks ; and 

one runner to Company Headquarters. 

9. Have one platoon guide report to Company Head- 

quarters on day his platoon is to be relieved. 

10. On completion of posting his platoon, report to his 

company commander. 

11. Turn over to platoon relieving him all orders and 

data pertaining to his position. 

12. Be especially attentive to rigid military discipline; 

i. e., every soldier to be neat ; equipment must be 
clean at all times ; to render the required salute 
when not observing or firing at the enemy. 

13. Have one non-commissioned officer on duty at all 

times. 

14. To inspect rifles, equipment and latrines twice 

daily. 

(a) To have at least one latrine in working order at 

all times. 

(b) To have a sentry on duty at each platoon dugout 

at all times. 

(c) Establish one Observation Post in daytime. 

15. In Front Line Trenches: 

(a) No smoking or talking to be allowed at night. 

(b) Every man to wear his equipment except packs. 

(c) Have rifle within reaching distance. 

(d) All reliefs to be within kicking distance of sol- 

dier on duty. 

16. Inspect at " Stand to " and report results to Com- 

pany Headquarters, especially if each man has 



TRENCH WARFARE. 34 1 

170 rounds of ammunition and necessary gren- 
ades and bombs. 

17. To be especially attentive to sanitation and care of 

the men's feet. 

18. To have one (1) watcher and relief on duty at all 

times near platoon dugouts. 

19. To get a good field of fire to his front and to cover 

the sector of each platoon on his flanks. 

20. Make requisition for material. 

21. To see that all of his men are properly fed. 

22. Report to company commander when relieved. 

23. Must know what every man is doing at all times. 

Duties of Non-Commissioned Officer on Duty (Eaoh 
Platoon). 

1. To make frequent inspections of the position occu- 

pied by his platoon. 

2. To be responsible that each soldier knows his duties. 

3. To report anything of special importance to officer 

on duty. 

4. On being relieved to report with the new non- 

commissioned officer to the officer on duty. 

5. After posting sentinels to report '"All is Well " to 

officer on duty. 

6. Explain to his sentinel his duties, the position of 

Section and Platoon Commanders and of sentries 
on either side ; and to caution his sentries when 
friendly patrols are out, the probable time and 
place of return. 

7. Bayonets will always be fixed in front line trenches. 

8. At night time to have double sentinel. 

9. To see that each sentinel in daytime has a peri- 

scope. 

10. Rifles to be loaded; no cartridge shall be in the 

chamber except when necessary to shoot. 

11. To report to Company Headquarters any change 

in direction of wind. 



342 TRENCH WARFARE. 

Patrols. 

1. Usual orders about patrols. 

2. Always go out at night via the Listening Post; tell 

the men in the Listening Post your mission and 
probable time of return. 

Sentinels. 

1. To sound Klaxon horn on approach of gas attack. 

2. To report immediately to non-commissioned officer 

on duty any change in direction of wind. 

3. In cold weather to work bolt frequently to keep it. 

from freezing. 

4. At night to challenge only in case of necessity, and 

■tfhen only in a low tone. 'Challenge " Hands up." 

5. dumber of posts depends on assumed nearness of 

enemy and local conditions. Normally one per 
platoon by day and three double sentinels per 
platoon at night. 

6. Relief kept close at hand. Report " All is Well," 

or otherwise, when officer passes. 

7. Screened from observation. 

8. Remain standing unless height, of parapet renders 

this impossible. 

Machine Guns. 

1. Non-commissioned officer and one (1) watcher on 

duty at all times. 

2. Except in emergency they will not be fired from 

their regular emplacements. 

3. Unless emplacements are well concealed, guns will 

not be mounted except between evening and 
morning " stand to." 

4. Before dusk each gun will be sighted on some par- 

ticular spot either in front of or behind the 
enemy's line. 

5. Range cards will be prepared and kept with each 

gun, 



TRENCH WARFARE. 343 

Snipers. 

1. Sniping Post consists of one (1) observer and one 

(1) rifleman with relief of two (2) men posted 
close by. 

2. Sniping post should be well concealed. 

3. Daily report from each post of 

(a) Any work done by enemy. 

(b) Enemy seen; place, uniform, apparent age, 

physique, equipment. 

(c) Any other information of interest. 

4. Sniper to be appointed from each section. 

5. Must be intelligent, alert, good scout, good shot, 

courageous. 

6. Snipers should spend 24 hours in trenches with 

those of command which theirs is to relieve, be- 
fore relief takes place. 

7. No night work required of these men since they 

must be constantly on the alert during the day. 



344 TRENCH WARFARE. 



a o 
u 

CO m - -o 

o fl « a -5 10 "O 

7 eg jo a> ai -o^ 1 ^ » 
bo 

J-J a 

(d a 

H § 



^ .a a . ^ 

^ S r- » Vj T-l "O 

TO 5 g ^« fl N N d 

Co, s a ° c »,,t! | 

M s -Sa rt J§ s a 



E 



O "O 05 • 5„is-5 . ■■ ... - .- 

>-' too? h ^OhO, 



*** ^\ a ■" • 4 -' 

a ffi 

o 

o 



Oh 

<M tjh rHCD(N -8 

* i rrt 



-a o 



'o-£2' 



w (U , »-< L- to ,« p ■ ; ■ s r , 



c 
.2 
cd 

N 

o a +J i 

a, O to u «? 

rH 03^ Q.CJ c3 o O > > 
ffi CO J Eh U CQ O fU 0. 



J- 

o 



OQ 



«J 53 ™ d w S o W , J .a 

sr S § i S M ^> „ ! ? 






TRENCH WARFARE. 



345 



^a 



S to 'E 
2. 3 * 



.5 "^t? 
5 fl h«2 






2 o>, 

10 






5 *-i 
3 a 



• ft .2 

rl S O 

ft > o3 



ti a 



to I 



s °~a 

00 <D 



3+j 



0> o 



2* 






* la 

■° to*" 



W 



Is 



o > 
OPh 

1— 1 1— 






|3 
5 I 

IB 






as 






Is 



346 TRENCH WARFARE. 

Deployments. 

Gexeeae Principles : 

(a) The following plans for deployment are not to 
be regarded as rigid. The positions of the various 
squads depends upon tactical considerations. 

(b) The platoon in attack will be used only for 
accomplishment of its offensive mission. Moppers-up, 
additional carriers, etc., will be furnished by other 
organizations. 

A. Being in line, to form single skirmish line to 

the front. 
1. As skirmishers (so many) paces, guide 
right (left or center). 2. March. 

Executed as described in pars. 206 and 
208, i.d.r. 

Xormal interval to be ordered, 4 or 5 paces. 

This formation to be regarded as ex- 
ceptional. 

B. Being in column of squads, to form single skir- 

mish line. Same command as in (A). Exe- 
cuted as described in pars. 207 and 208, i.d.r. 

C. Being in line to form double skirmish line to the 

front (i. e., to take the " Formation for 

Attack" in the diagram.) 
1. In two lines. 2. As skirmishers (so many) 
paces, guide right (left or center). 3 
March. 
Executed according to the principles in 
pars. 206 and 208, i.d.r., except that at 
the command March the even-numbered 
squads stand fast while the odd-numbered 
squads form the first line by deploying 
on the base squad as in the case of de- 
ployment in single line. Similarly, the 
even-numbered squads farm the second 
line by deploying on their base squad 
after the odd-numbered squads have 
moved forward about 20 paces. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 



347 



z 


J< 







2 


CO 

g5 350 YDS 

— j 


> 


O 


r 


x 




CD 


00 


r- 


> 




H 
H 


GO 


> 




r 













z 




■n 









a 




2 




> 




H 













z 


O 




CD 




e 


z 


■o 




d» 




as 


> 


^ 


H 


CO 


H 


m 

CD 


> 


^j 





g 


* 


rt 



150 
YDS. 



25 
YDS- 



> = 

O i- 
z 



o 1 

— 

5~ 



CO 



348 TRENCH WARFARE. 

D. Being in line or column of squads to deploy in 
line of squad columns in one or two lines. 
Use same commands and execute in same 
manner as described in (A), (B), (O 1 ), 
except that in the command " Squad Col- 
umns " is substituted for " as skirmishers," 
and in the execution each corporal on ap- 
proaching the line forms his squad in " squad 
column " instead of deploying it as skir- 
mishers. 



J^UUUUUHUUUUUUUU^UUUUUUUUUUUUUUy 

<:- 41- ai- 



f &>/>ta"> 



q, />/*+<>.* SiT. 



/.//*£■ 



a <r<v-/» 



I I I =1= 



i r , , , , L_^| p ■ , ■ ■ ===*! r ■ ■ ■ ■• ■■ i r==E 

,VJ V ■*#■«- — A r — ••'* — — -A H -■*■ A V — *"'*■ 



^It "T~ " 1 1 

! mo. &■"*"' Yr r ^"' \y*^" &*<"«* 






E. G. 1. In two lines — 2. Squad columns 
(so many) paces, Guide right (left or center^ 
— 3. March. 

This gives a " Formation of Approach " as 
the French describe it, or as an " Artillery 
Formation " as the British describe it, which 
may be used directly or indirectly (by means 
of echelons) for advancing when not liable to 
infantry fire. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 349 

E. Being in above formation to vary the intervals. 
1. Squad col iimns (so many) paces, 2. Guide 
right (left or center). Executed in the 
same manner as similar movement de- 
scribed in i.d.r. 126. 

General Principles of the Platoon Formation in the 

Assault of Fortified Positions in Trenches. 

(Points of Resistance, Etc.). 

1. The platoon is now a complete fighting unit 
within itself. It contains riflemen, bombers, auto- 

•_ . ! j ? : i 

WM^M£ J Icicle I Tcj^l I M I I I I 1 I I l~|/M/M*i 

i r i i i i i 

i I i i ' 

&\c\t\<:&\<?\*\c\s>\i?\s\c\>4*[*f[**W i I \A I L LS\*r\rl*TFJ& 

r I i i i i 



\„„s ,**rr, I I \f.^" 



! ! ! *_ 

^ ^/o- ^s«"><- //V/ r ?i/V7~/r 3 Y /=>/LSl7&a£/ t 

^3 &om&&r- Senear? f 

P3 •*»«*' IS! ^^ 

,gl1 ^.// P .SrMO/^ jgj ^^ 1X| 

I I /?.*/?«"<"? ,°^. _ _ 

1— [5^ Co~>/v. CT/ei-A: 



pr^r Mgioiei»i 






>y£^^a^/t/7/Y/?J /p/zirco/V 



riflemen, and rifle grenadiers. With this combination 
the platoon commander has, under his immediate con- 
trol, all the different kinds of fire available to the in- 
fantry. 



350 TRENCH WARFARE. 

2. This formation Avas developed so that the platoon 
commander could meet the different contingencies that 
arise from being opposed by points of resistance in a 
" Trench-to-Trench " attack or the " Semi-Op en-Wlar- 
f are ; " that is the secondary stage of a push. 

•3. When strong opposition develops, the principle on 
which the platoon works is to develop or surround the 
point of resistance, the platoon acting either alone or 
in conjunction with neighboring platoons. The four 
different kinds of fire are then used to their best ad- 
vantages to silence or diminish the enemy fire thus mak- 
ing this manoeuvre possible. 

4. In order to obtain success it is first necessary to 
impress on the officers and men that the primary ad- 
vantage of the entire formation is its mobility, and the 
scope it gives to the initiative of the platoon section, 
squad and team leaders. In studying this formation 
it is first necessary to free the mind of all parade 
ground formations and to feel that there is nothing to 
hinder any desired movement of the sections, so long 
as the movement is not contrary to the operation orders 
for the attack. Until this idea is grasped thoroughly 
no progress can be made. 

5. There is no typical or " normal formation." The 
one given at the beginning of this instruction here is a 
drill or parade ground formation, and while it may be 
used under actual conditions of warfare, it is simply 
utilized at this time as a basis from which the neces- 
sary variations may be worked out. In an attack, 
every platoon in the battalion may use a different 
formation. 

6. The formation to be used is decided upon after a 
careful study of air-photographs. As far as possible 
all points of resistance are picked out and the best 
method of meeting the situations that may arise are 
then considered. The platoon is then arranged so as to 
best facilitate this manoeuvre. It must be realized that 
there will be other platoons on the flanks and in the rear. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 351 

a.nd their dispositions must be studied with a view of 
their probable bearing on- the points of resistance. 

7. In order to know 'how to get results it is first neces- 
sary to have a very clear conception of the uses and 
limitations of the different weapons in the platoon. 

Briefly they can be used in the following ways: 

(a) The auto-rifles open up a point blank lire on the 
strong point as soon as it is discovered. Their function 
is to either draw the fire of the enemy or to silence him 
by a hit or forcing him to take cover. Their work may 
be compared to the work of the field artillery in a bar- 
rage. They cover the movement of the infantry across 
the open. The auto rifles so place themselves at such 
points that their line of fire will in no way interfere 
with the manoeuvre of the commander of the platoon 
or the remaining units of the platoon interfere with the 
effective use of the auto rifles of the platoon. 

(b) The rifle grenadiers advance at once just as 
close as possible, but at all costs to within effective 
grenade range. They then take cover in shell holes. 
trenches, etc., and open up a rapid fire. They are the 
long distance howitzers of the platoon and are very 
valuable. By a well placed grenade the whole resist- 
ance may be overcome. This section usually works 
around a flank. 

(c) The riflemen work Tip by squad as far as prac- 
ticable and to a flank, when an opportunity presents it- 
self, the squad opens fire in such a manner as to pro- 
tect advance of other squads or teams. 

(d) The bombers 1 endeavor to get well around behind 
the enemy and taking advantage of cover get to within 
bomb range. They may be compared to the close range 
howitzers or trench mortars. 

When all four sections are in action at proper ranges, 
the opposition can probably last but a short time, and 
as soon as the machine guns cease fire the platoon, 
especially the riflemen, go after the remainder of the 
garrison with the bayonet. 



352 



TRENCH WARFARE. 



plarro 
&Z7 



ttCr/OA/ COL C/W/V^ ^~£/£ L Y <£-X7~sfA/£>£~<£) 







/°L^roo/v l,//v£- ■ 



TRENCH WARFARE. 353 



352 TRENCH WARFARE. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 353 

It may happen that the barrage put up will so 
demoralize the enemy that the riflemen can advance be- 
fore his machine guns are even put out of action. This 
operation allows the rifle men to get in with the bayonet, 
if the resistance is not sooner overcome. 

When the different sections are getting to their places, 
they usually find enough shell holes or old trenches to 
obtain cover. They should not move as entire sections, 
but as small groups of three or four at a time. 

&. After the encircling movement has once begun. 
the platoon commander loses all control, and the action 
is then conducted by the section, squad or team leaders. 
They must be trained to act on their own initiative, as 
further orders are rarely practicable. 

The resistance will finally be overcome, either because 
the enemy will retreat or surrender under the menace 
of encirclement, or by the losses caused by our fire or 
by the attack at close range of our bombers or else by 
the final assault with the bayonet led by our riflemen. 

It must be remembered that under an artillery bar- 
rage it is never possible to issue verbal orders, so the 
sections must be trained to understand and obey the arm 
signals of its officer, or more often to work without 
orders. 

9. A sequence of command must be arranged in each 
section, squad and team down to the last man. 

Remarks regarding the formixg of wave from 
close order. 

The sketch of deployment attached is an illustration 
of one of the formations that may be adopted. It is 
given as an example. Any other wave formation may 
be practically as easily formed up. The platoon com- 
mander simply calls out the squads he wants in the first 
line. 

It must not be imagined that tliis transition from 
close order to extended is done in the field when actually 
under fire or as a result of surprise. 
23 



PLATOON 

FROM 

LINE 

TO 

DOUBLE EXTENDED 

SKIRMISH Live 




□ □ Ep eEockzI Z'Lina 



"jzuzuzmi HmnFJ — fnmnn^mm i^l ( i nnn aBHEizi&m CD m /", 



NOTE: In depitj,. 



354 TRENCH WARFARE. 

Before the platoon goes into an attack it is all 
arranged so as to allow it to be changed with ease from 
column of sections at extended intervals (formation for 
approach) to the wave formation decided upon. This 
arrangement is made when the platoon is miles to the 
rear. 

When the change is made from column of sections to 
the wave formation there must he no crossing of sec- 
tions as they go to their places. 

Some of the Many Questions a Platoon Commander 
Should Ask Himself on Taking Over a Trench, 
and at Frequent Intervals Afterwards. 

1. I am here for two purposes: To hold this line 
under all circumstances, and to do as much damage as 
possible to the enemy? Am I doing all I can to make 
this line as strong as possible? Am I as Offensive 
as I might be with organized snipers, sniperscopes, rifle 
grenades, catapults, etc., and patrols? 

2. Do I connect up all right with the platoons on my 
right and left ? Do I know the position of my nearest 
support ? 

3. Does every man know his firing position and can 
he fire from it, over the parapet, at the foot of the wire ? 

4. Where are my S. A. A. and bomb stores ? Are 
they under cover from the weather ? 

5. Do all my men know their duties in case of attack 
— bombers especially ? 

6. Are all my rifles and ammunition clean and in 
good order ? Have all the men got rifle covers ? Are 
the magazines kept charged ? 

7. Is my wire strong enough ? 

8. Are my parapets and traverses bullet-proof every- 
where ? 

9. Where are my sally ports ? 

10. Where are my listening posts? Are my listening 
patrols properly detailed ? 



TRENCH WARFARE. 355 

11. What points in front particularly require pa- 
trolling at night ? 

12. Are my sentries in their right places? Are they 
properly posted by N. C. O's. ? Have they received 
proper instructions ? 

13. Have I got the S. 0. S. message in my pocket, 
and do I know the orders regarding its use ? 

14. Are the trenches as clean and as sanitary as they 
might be ? Are live rounds and cases properly collected ? 
Are my bags for refuse and empties in position ? 

15. Are my trenches as dry as I might make them? 

16. Am I doing all I can to prevent my men getting 
" Trench Feet " ? 

17. How can I prevent my parapets and dugouts from 
falling in ? 

18. Have I got at least one loophole, from which men 
can snipe, for every section ? Have I pointed out to Sec- 
tion Commanders the portion of the enemy's trench they 
are responsible for keeping under fire, and where his 
loopholes are? 

19. Have my men always got their smoke helmets on 
and are they in good order? 

20. Are the arrangements, in case of gas attack, com- 
plete and known to all ranks 9 

21. Are the orders as to wearing equipment carried 
out? 

22. Are my men using wood from the defences as 
firewood ? 

23. Are my men drinking water from any but author- 
ized sources ? 

24. / am here for two purposes: To hold this line 
under all circumstances, and I do as much damage as 
possible to the enemy? Am I doing all I can to make 
this line as strong as possible? Am I as Offensive 
as I might be with organized snipers, sniperscopes, rifle 
grenades, catapults, etc., and patrols? 



356 TRENCH WARFARE. 

Defensive Measure Against Gas Attacks. 

I. Introduction. 

A. General Considerations: 

In the absence of suitable means of protection the 
poison gases used in war are extremly deadly and the 
breathing of only very small quantities of them may 
cause death or serious injury. This being tbe case, it 
is essential that not the slightest time should be lost in- 
putting on the anti-gas device on the gas alarm being 
given. 

It cannot be too strongly insisted on that the meas- 
ures to meet hostile gas attacks afford perfect protection, 
and if they are carried out properly no one will suffer 
from gas: poisoning. 

The whole basis of protecting troops against gas lies 

(a) in keeping the appliances in perfect working order ; 

(b) in learning to adjust them rapidly under all con- 
ditions, and (c) in ensuring that every man is given 
immediate warning. These results can only be attained : 

(1) By frequent and thorough inspection of all pro- 

tective appliances. 

(2) By thorough instruction and training in their 

use. 

(3) By every man understanding and complying 

with all standing orders on the subject of de- 
fense against gas. 
If these are effectually carried out, there is nothing 
to fear from hostile gas •attacks. Officers must impress 
this on their men, as an important object of all anti-gas 
instruction should be to inspire complete confidence in 
the efficacy of the methods which are adopted. 

B. Nature of Gas Attacks: 

(1) G-as Clouds: 

This method of making a gas attack is entirely de- 
pendent on the direction of the wind. The gas is car- 
ried up to the trenches compressed in steel 1 cylinders. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 357 

These are dug in at the bottom of the trench and con- 
nected with pipes leading out over the parapet. When 
the valves of the cylinders are opened, the gas escapes 
with a hissing sound, which, on a still night, can fre- 
quently be heard at a considerable distance. It mixes 
with the air and is carried by the wind towards the 
opposing trenches, spreading out as it goes forward. A 
continuous wave of gas and air is thus formed, the color 
of which may vary : 

(a) Because of the weather conditions. In very 

dry air it may be almost transparent and 
slightly greenish in color, while in damp 
weather it forms a white cloud. 

(b) Because it may be mixed with smoke of any 

color. 

A cloud attack can only take place when there is a 
steady but not too strong wind blowing from the 
enemy's lines towards our own. A wind between 4 and 
8 miles an hour is the most likely condition. An 8-mile 
wind will carry the gas cloud twice as quickly as a man 
walks rapidly. 

G-as attacks may occur at any time of the day, but 
are most likely to be made during the night or in the 
early morning. 

•Gentle rain is without appreciable effect on a gas 
attack, but strong rain washes down the gas. Fogs have 
hardly any effect and may, in fact, be taken advantage 
of to make an attack unexpectedly. Water courses and 
ponds are no obstruction to a gas cloud. 

The gas used by the enemy is generally a mixture of 
chlorine and phosgene, both of which are strongly 
asphyxiating. The gases are heavier than air, and 
therefore, tend to flow along the ground and into 
trenches, shelters, craters and hollows. The gas cloud 
may flow round slight eminences, thus leaving patches 
of country which remain free from gas. 

Chlorine and phosgene strongly attack the mucous 
membranes of the respiratory organs, causing bad 



358 TRENCH WARFARE. 

coughing. In strong concentrations of gas, or by longer 
exposure to low concentrations, the lungs are injured 
and breathing becomes more and more difficult and 
eventually impossible, so that the unprotected man dies 
of suffocation. Death is sometimes caused by two or 
three breaths of the gas. Even when very dilute, chlor- 
ine can be recognized by its peculiar smell, which is like 
chloride of lime, but stronger and more irritating. 

Both chlorine and phosgene also exert a strongly cor- 
rosive action on metals, so that the metal parts of arms 
must be carefully protected by greasing them. 

The speed with which the gas cloud approaches de- 
pends entirely on the wind velocity. Gas attacks have 
been made with wind velocities varying from 3 to 20 
miles per hour, i. e., from 1% to 10 yards per second. 
In a 9-mile wind, the gas would reach trenches 100 
yards distant in 20 seconds. 

'Gas attacks have been made on fronts varying from 
1 to 5 miles ; their effects at points up to 8 miles be- 
hind the front trenches have been sufficiently severe to 
make it necessary to wear helmets. 

(2) Gas Projectiles: 

The use of these is not entirely dependent on the 
direction of the wind. In gas projectiles such as shells, 
hand grenades, and trench mortar bombs, a part or the 
whole of the explosive charge is replaced by a liquid 
which is converted into gas by the explosion. The ex- 
plosive force and noise of detonation of these projectiles 
is less than that of the ordinaary kind, and a large num- 
ber of them are usually discharged into a comparatively 
small space. After the explosion, the irritant chemicals 
form a small gas cloud, though some may sink to the 
ground and remain active for a considerable time. 

For using gas shells, the best condition is calm, or 
a wind of low velocitv. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 359 

Gas projectiles can be used in all types of country. 
Woods, bushes, corn fields and clumps of buildings may 
hold the gas active for a considerable time. 

Two kinds of shell gases are used by the enemy, viz., 
laehrymators, which mainly affect the eyes, and poison 
gases, which may affect the eyes and are just as deadly 
as the gases used in the form of clouds. 

(1) Tear, or Lachrymatory Shells: 

These shells on explosion drive the liquid chemical 
which they contain into the air as a mist. They cause 
the eyes to water strongly and thereby gradually put 
men out of action. 

Their actual smell may be slight. Large concentra- 
tions of laehrymators begin to affect the lungs and cause 
sickness, coughing and general irritation. 

(2) Poison Shells : 

Besides the comparatively harmless laehrymators the 
enemy also uses projectiles which contain a gas;, the 
action of which is very similar to that of phosgene. Be- 
cause of their slight detonation, these shells are liable to 
be mistaken for blinds, but they emit large quantities 
of a gas which attacks: the lungs strongly and is very 
dangerous, and even in slight cases may cause serious 
after effects. 

(3) Smoke: 

The enemy may make use of smoke, either in the 
form of a cloud or emitted from shells and bombs. 
Smoke may be used with gas or between gas clouds ; it 
may also be used alone to distract attention from a real 
discharge of gas, to cover the advance of infantrv, or 
merely as a false gas attack. 

(4) Mine and Explosion Gases : 

The poisonous gases which occur in mines, and which 
are formed in large quantities when high explosive goes 
off in an enclosed sapee, e. g., from a direct hit in a 
shelter, or on the explosion of a charge in a mine, are 
not protected against by the ordinary anti-gas appli- 



360 TRENCH WARFARE. 

anees. The chief of these gases is carbon monoxide. 
Protection against such gases will not be considered in 
these notes. 

Officers are held responsible that all the anti-gas ap- 
pliances for protecting their men are maintained in 
perfect condition, and that all ranks under their com- 
mand are thoroughly trained in the use of these appli- 
ances and in all other measures which may affect their 
safety against gas. 

Summary of Protective Measures : 

(a) Provision to each man of individual protec- 

tive devices. 

(b) Arrangement for the inspection of those appli- 

ances and training in their use and instruc- 
tion in all other measures of gas defense. 

(c) Provision of protected and gas-proof shelters. 

(d) Weather observations to determine periods 

when the conditions are favorable to a hos- 
tile gas attack. 

(e) Arrangement of signals and messages for im- 

mediate warning of a gas attack. 

(f) Provision of appliances for clearing gas from 

trenches and shelters. 

C. Protection of Shelters: 

(1) Methods of Peotectiox : 

Protection of dugouts, cellars, buildings, . etc., is 
given if all entrances are closed by well-fitting doors or 
by blankets sprayed with hypo, solution. Practically 
no gas passes through a wet blanket, and the protection 
depends on getting a good joint at the sides and bottom 
of a doorway, so as to stop all draughts. This can be 
effected by letting the blanket rest on battens, fixed with 
a slight slope, against the door frame. The blanket 
should overlap the outer sides and a fold should lie on 
the ground at the bottom. A pole is fastened to the 
blanket, which allows the latter to be rolled up on the 
frame and causes it to fall evenlv. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 361 

Wherever possible, particularly where there is likely 
to be movement in and out of the shelter, two blankets 
fitted in this way but sloping in opposite directions 
should be provided. There should be an interval of at 
least three feet between the two frames, and the larger 
this vestibule is made the more efficient is the dugout. 

When not in use, the blankets should be rolled up 
and held so that they can be readily released, and should 
be sprayed occasionally with water or a little Vermorel 
sprayer solution. 

If the blankets become stiff from a deposit of chem- 
icals, they should be sprayed with water. 

All ranks must be taught how to use gas-proof dug- 
outs, e. g., how to enter a protected doorway quickly, 
replacing the blanket immediately, and carrying in as 
little outside air as possible. 

The protection afforded by these means is just as 
complete against lachrymatory gases as it is against 
cloud gas and poisonous shell gases. 

(2) Shelters Which Should Be Protected: 
The following should always be protected : 
Medical aid posts and advanced dressing stations ; 
Company, Battalion and Brigade Headquarters; signal 
shelters and any other place where work has to be 
carried out during a gas attack. 

In addition to the above, it is desirable to protect all 
dugouts, cellars and buildings within the shell area, 
particularly those of artillery personnel. It should be 
noted, however, that the protection of dugouts for 
troops in the front line of trenches is usually inadvis- 
able on account of the delay involved in getting men 
out in time of attack. It is desirable to protect stretcher 
bearers' dugouts with a view to putting casualties in 
them. 

D. Protection of Weapons and Equipment: 

Arms and ammunition and the metal parts of special 
equipment (e. g., telephone instruments) must be care- 



362 TRENCH WARFARE. 

fully protected against gas by greasing them or keep- 
ing them completely covered. Otherwise, particularly 
in damp weather, they may rust or corrode so badly 
as .to refuse to act. A mineral oil must be used for this 
purpose. The following in particular should be pro- 
tected : 

(1) Small Arms axd S. A. A. 

Machine guns and rifles must be kept carefully 
cleaned and well oiled. The effects of corrosion of am- 
munition are of even more importance than the direct 
effects of gas upon machine guns and rifles. 

Ammunition boxes must be kept closed. Vickers 
belts should be kept in their boxes until actually re- 
quired for use. The wooden belt boxes are fairly gas- 
tight, but the metal belt boxes should be made gas-tight 
by inserting strips of flannelette in the joint between 
the lid and the box. 

Lewis magazines should be kept in some form of box, 
the joints of which are made as gas-tight as possible 
with flannelette. 

A recess should be made, high up in the parapet if 
possible, for storing ammunition and guns. A blanket 
curtain, moistened with water or sprayer solution, will 
greatly assist in keeping the gas out. 

(2) Haxd axd Rifle Grexades: 

Unboxed grenades should be kept covered as far as 
possible. All safety pins and working parts, especially 
those made of brass, should be kept oiled to prevent 
their setting from corrosion by the gas. 

(3) Light Trexch Mortars axd Their 
Ammexitiox : 

As far as the supply of oil permits, the bore and all 
bright parts of light trench mortars and their spare 
parts should be kept permanently oiled. When not in 
use, mortars should be covered with sacking or similar 
material. 

Unboxed ammunition should be kept covered as far 
as possible and the bright parts oiled immediately after 



TRENCH WARFARE. 363 

arrival. Ammunition which has been in store for some 
time should be used up first. 

Sentries must be prepared to give the alarm on the 
first appearance of gas, as a few seconds delay may in- 
volve very serious consequences. Signals must be passed 
along by all sentries as soon as heard. 

The earliest warning of a gas attack is given : 

(a) By r the noise of the gas escaping from the 

cylinders. 

(b) By the appearance of a cloud of any color 

over the enemy's trenches. If the attack 
takes place at night, the cloud will not be 
visible from a distance. 

(c) By the smell of the gas in listening posts. 

(1) Action to be Taken in the Trenches on Gas 

Alarm : 

(a) Respirators to be put on immediately by all 

ranks (a helmet, if no box respirator is 
available). 

(b) Rouse all men in trenches, dug-outs and mine 

shafts, warn officers and artillery obser- 
vation posts and all employed men. 

(c) Artillery support to be called for by company 

commanders by means of prearranged 
signals. 

(d) Warn battalion headquarters and troops in 

rear. 

(e) All ranks stand to arms in the front trenches 

and elsewhere where the tactical situation 
demands. 

(f) Blanket curtains at entrances to protected 

shelters to be let down and carefully fixed. 

(g) Movement to cease except where necessary. 

(2) Action to be Taken in Billets and Back 

Areas : 
(a) All men in cellars or houses to be roused. 



364 TRENCH WARFARE. 

(b) The blanket curtains of protected cellars, etc., 

to be let down and fixed in position. 

(c) Box respirators to be put on immediately, the 

gas is apparent. 

H. Action During a Gas Attack: 

(1) Protective Measures: 

There should be as little moving about and talking as 
possible in the trenches. Men must be made to realize 
that with the gas now used by the enemy, observance of 
this may be essential for their safety. 

When an attack is in progress, all bodies of troops or 
transport on the move should halt and all working 
parties cease work until the gas cloud has passed. 

If a relief is going on, units should stand fast as 
far as possible until the gas cloud has passed. 

Supports and parties bringing up bombs should only 
be moved up if the tactical situation demands it. 

If troops in support or reserve lines of trenches re- 
main in, or go into, dug-outs, they must continue to 
wear their anti-gas appliances. 

Officers 1 and E". C. O's. must on no account remove or 
open up the masks of the box respirators or raise their 
heimets to give orders. The breathing tube may be re- 
moved from the mouth when it is necessary to speak, 
but it must be replaced. 

Men must always be on the look-out to help each other 
in case an anti-gas device is damaged by fire or acci- 
dent. When a man is wounded, he must be watched to 
see that he does not remove his respirator or helmet 
until he is safely inside a protected shelter ; if neces- 
sary, his hands should be tied. 

Men must be warned that if they are slightly gassed 
before adjusting their respirators or helmets they must 
not remove them. The effect will wear off. 

(2) Tactical Measures: 

From the point of view of protection against gas, 
nothing is gained by men remaining in unprotected 



TRENCH WARFARE. 365 

dug-outs or by moving to a flank or to the rear. It is, 
therefore, desirable that on tactical and disciplinary 
grounds all men in the front line of trenches should be 
forbidden to do these things. In support or reserve 
lines where there are protected dug-outs, it is advisable 
for men to stay in them unless the tactical situation 
makes it desirable for them to come out. 

Nothing is gained by opening rapid rifle fire unless 
the enemy's infantry attacks. A slow rate of fire from 
rifles and. occasional sliort bursts of fire from machine 
guns will lessen the chance of their jamming from the 
action of the gas and tends to occupy and steady the 
infantry. 

It should be remembered that the enemy's infantry 
cannot attack while the gas discharge is in progress and 
is rnlikely to do so for an appreciable time — at least 
10 minutes — after it has ceased. It is, in fact, a com- 
mon practice for the enemy infantry to retire to the 
second and third line of trench whilst gas is being dis- 
charged. There is, therefore, no object in opening an 
intense S. 0. IS. barrage of artillery on " No man's 
land " during the actual gas cloud and it is advisable 
that the warning to the artillery of a gas attack should 
be a signal differing from the ordinary S. 0. S. signal, 
as the latter may have to be sent later if an infantry 
attack develops. 

It must be remembered that smoke may be used by 
the enemy at the same time as, or alternately with, the 
gas and that under cover of a smoke cloud he may send 
out assaulting or raiding parties. A careful look-out 
must, therefore, be kept ; hostile patrols or raiders may 
be frustrated by cross-fire of rifles and machine guns 
and should an assault develop the ordinary S. 0. S. pro- 
cedure should be carried out. 

I. Precautions Against Gas Shells: 

Owing to the small explosion which occurs with these 
shells, they are liable to be mistaken for blinds, and 



366 TRENCH WARFARE. 

even when the gas is smelt men may not realize its pos- 
sibly dangerous character at once and so may delay 
putting on respirators or helmets until too late. Men 
sleeping in dug-outs may be seriously affected unless 
they are roused. Men in the open air are unlikely to be 
seriously affected by poison gas shells, provided they 
put on respirators or helmets on first experiencing the 
gas. The following points should therefore be at- 
tended to: 

(i) All shells which explode with a small detonation 
or appear to be blind should be regarded with particu- 
lar attention; the respirator or helmet should be put on 
at the first indication of gas and blanket protection of 
shelters adjusted. 

(ii) Arrangements must be made for giving a 
Local alarm in the event of a sudden and intense 
bombardment with poison gas shells, but care must be 
taken that this alarm is not confused with the main 
alarm. Strombos horns must on no account be used to 
give warning of a gas shell bombardment. 

(iii) All shelters in the vicinity of an area bom- 
barded with poison gas shells must be visited and any 
sleeping men roused. 

(iv.) Box respirators or helmets should continue to 
be worn throughout the area bombarded with poison gas 
shells until the order is given by the local unit Com- 
mander for their removal. 

Lachrymatory or " tear " shells are frequently used 
by the enemy for the purpose of hindering the move- 
ments of troops, for preventing the bringing up of sup- 
ports, or for interfering with the action of artillery. 
Owing to the deadly nature of poison gas shells, how- 
ever, the precautions given in paragraph 60 above, must 
be taken for all gas shells. The goggles are intended 
for use after lachrymatory bombardments only, in cases 
where the irritant gas persists in the neighborhood. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 367 

K. Action Subsequent to a Gas Attack: 

1. General: 

The most important measure to be taken after a cloud 
gas attack is to prepare for a further attack. The enemy 
frequently sends several successive waves of gas at in- 
tervals varying from a few minutes up to several hours 
and it is therefore necessary to be on the alert to com- 
bat this procedure. The following measures should be 
adopted as soon as the gas cloud has passed: 

(a) Removal of respirators. — Anti-gas fans should 
be used to assist in clearing the trenches of 
gas, so as to admit of respirators being re- 
moved. Respirators and helmets must not be 
removed until permission has been given by 
the Company Commander. 
A sharp look out must be kept for a repetition of the 
gas attack, as long as the wind continues in a dangerous 
quarter. 

2. Movement : 

Owing to the enemy gas sometimes causing bad after 
effects, which are intensified by subsequent exertion, the 
following points should be attended to: 

(a) ~No man suffering from the effects of gas, how- 

ever slightly, should be allowed to walk to the 
dressing station. 

(b) The clearing of the trenches and dugouts should 

not be carried out by men who have been af- 
fected by the gas. 

(c) After a gas attack, troops in the front trenches 

should be relieved of all fatigue and carrying 
work for 24 hours by sending up working par- 
ties from companies in rear. 

(d) Horses which have been exposed to the gas 

should not be worked for 24 hours if it can 
be avoided. 

3. Clearing Dugouts and Other Shelters: 

It is essential that no dugout be entered after a gas 
attack except with box respirators or helmets adjusted, 



368 TRENCH WARFARE. 

until it has been ascertained that it is free from gas. 
The only efficient method of clearing dugouts from gas 
is by thorough, ventilation. The older method of spray- 
ing is not efficient. 

An appreciable quantity of gas may be retained in 
the clothing of men exposed to gas attacks and also in 
bedding, coats, etc., left in shelters. Precaution should, 
therefore, be taken to air all clothing. 

4. Ventilation : 

Natural Ventilation. — Unless a shelter has been thor- 
oughly ventilated by artificial means, as described be- 
low, it must not be slept in or occupied without wearing 
respirators, until at least 12 hours after a gas attack. 
It must not be entered at all without respirators on 
for at least 3 hours. The above refers to cloud gas at- 
tacks. In the case of gas shell bombardments the times 
cannot be definitely stated, as they depend on the nature 
of the gas used and the severity of the bombardment. 
With lachrymatory gases the times after which shelters 
can be used without discomfort may be considerably 
longer than those mentioned above. 

Ventilation by Fire. — All kinds of shelters can be 
efficiently and rapidly cleared of gas by the use of fires. 
Shelters with two openings are the easiest to ventilate 
and where possible, dugouts with only one entrance 
should have a second opening made, even a very small 
one, to assist in ventilation. 

In dugouts provided with a single exit at the end of 
a short passage, the best results are obtained if the fire 
is placed in the center of the floor of the dugout and 
at a, height of about 9 inches. 

In dugouts provided with a single exit at the end of 
a long and nearly horizontal passage, the best results 
are obtained if the fire is placed about one-third of the 
distance from the inner end of the passage. 

In dugouts provided with two or more exits, the fire 
should be placed at the inner end of one of the exit 



TRENCH WARFARE. 369 

In general, 1 pound of dry wood per 200 cubic feet 
of air space is sufficient for clearance of any gas. The 
best fuel is split wood, but any fuel which does not 
smoulder or give off thick smoke can be used. The ma- 
terials for the fire, e. g., the split wood, newspaper, and 
a small bottle of paraffine for lighting purposes, should 
be kept in a sand bag, enclosed in a biscuit tin provided 
with a lid. An improvised brazier should be kept ready 
for use. 

The fire must be kept burning for at least ten minutes 
and the atmosphere in the shelter should be tested from 
time to time. 

Ventilation by Fanning. — Dugouts can be ventilated 
by producing air currents in them by means of special 
anti-gas fans. 

If no anti-gas fans are available, ventilation can be 
assisted by flapping with improvised fans such as sand 
bags, ground sheets, etc. 

5. Cleaning of Arms and Ammunition: 

Rifles and machine guns must be cleaned after a gas 
attack and then re-oiled. Oil cleaning will prevent cor- 
rosion for 12 hours or more, but the first available op- 
portunity must be taken to dismantle machine guns and 
clean all parts in boiling water containing a little soda. 
If this is not done, corrosion continues slowly even after 
oil cleaning and may ultimately put the gun out of 
action. 

After a gas attack, S. A. A. should be carefully ex- 
amined. All rounds affected by gas must be replaced by 
new cartridges immediately and the old ones cleaned 
and expended as soon as possible. 

All hand and rifle grenades exposed to the gas should 
have their safety-pins and working parts cleaned and 
re-oiled. 

All bright parts of light trench mortars, together with 
all accessories and spare parts exposed to the gas, must 
be cleaned and wiped dry as soon as possible after the 
24 



370 TRENCH WARFARE. 

attack and in any case within 24 hours, after which they 
should be thoroughly coated afresh with oil. The same 
applies to ammunition which may have been exposed to 
the gas. 

Ammunition which, for any reason, had not been 
oiled, must be cleaned and oiled and expended as soon 
as possible. 

For details regarding the cleaning of guns and artil- 
lery ammunition and signal equipment, see paragraphs 
116 and 123. 

6. Treatment of Shell Holes: 

In the neighborhood of shelters or battery positions 
where gas from shell holes is causing annoyance, the 
holes and the ground round them should be covered with 
at least a foot of fresh earth. Shell holes so treated 
should not be disturbed, as the chemical is not thereby 
destroyed and only disappears slowly. 

Concealment From Aerial Observers. 

A. 1. An aeroplane cannot conduct reconnaissance at 

a height of less than 5,000 feet without being 
within easy range of anti-aircraft artillery; 
nor of less than 2,000 feet without coming 
into range of machine-gun and rifle fire. 
2. To be observed from such heights, objects on the 
ground must be distinguished by: 
(a) Motion. 
fb) Color contrast. 

(c) Line contrast, or 

(d) Shadows. 

B. Concealment: 

1. (a) On warning of hostile aircraft, troops on 
the march should withdraw to the side 
of the road (if possible, into shade), or 
lie down flat in the road and remain 
motionless. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 371 

B. Concealment — (Continued) : 

(b) If it is necessary to continue the march, 

this should be done in broken detach- 
ments, which are far less distinct than 
continuous column. 

(c) Troops in a trench should crouch down in 

the shadowy side and remain motionless. 

(d) Faces should never be turned up, as the 

high lights on cheek-bones and foreheads 
then show up distinctly. 

(e) Bright metal on arms, equipment and head- 

gear must be kept covered. 

2. Artillery wagon-trains, etc., should if possible 

be halted promptly on w 7 arning. When 
halted, their neutral coloring protects them. 

3. Trenches are best concealed: 

(a) By avoiding, in construction, a too regu- 

lar outline, and following as far as 
possible the contours of the ground. 

(b) By coloring the parapet and parados to 

match the ground. This may be done 
most quickly by painted canvas ; if the 
latter is not available, by planting or 
strewing the loose earth with surround- 
ing herbage. In this work care must be 
taken not to make the covering itself 
too conspicuous by brightness or 
monotony of coloring. 

(c) By covering the trench itself, where con- 

venient, with a thin material, colored 
like the parapet and parados. 

(d) By avoiding all overt movement of troops 

in the trenches under observation. 

4. Buildings, e. g., ammunition dumps, hangars, 

etc., can be completely concealed by being 
painted the color of the ground they stand on 
and fitted with canvas curtains, similarly 
painted and stretched from the eaves to the 



372 TRENCH WARFARE. 

B. Concealment — (Continued) : 

ground at a horizontal angle of 35 degrees. 
These curtains completely eliminate shadows'. 
5. Success in each work of concealment by camou- 
flage is best assured by the assistance of an 
aeroplane observer to test and correct it. 



Orders Governing Intrenchment Problems at Second 
Plattsburg Training Camp. 

Headquarters Plattsburg Training Oamp, 
Plattsburg Barracks, K"ew York. 
September 02, 1917. 
Divisional Entrenching Problem. 

General Situation: 

The Salmon river forms the boundary line between 
two states, the " Blue " on the north and the " Red " on 
the south. "W)ar has been declared and the Red Army 
is mobilizing near Keeseville. 'Mobilization by the 
first Bine Army at Plattsburg has been completed. 
Special Situation, Blue : 

Our advanced troops are holding the line of the 
Salmon river against strong detachments of the Red 
Army. The commanding general of the Blue Army has 
decided to establish a second position on the line, Bluff 
Point to the bend (248) in the Saranac river. 

The following order is issued by the Division Com- 
mander : 

HexYdquarters, 101 st Drv., 

Plattsburg, ~N. Y. 

23 Sept., '17, 9 :00 a. m. 
Field Orders, 

STo. 1. 

1. Our advanced troops are holding the line of the 
Salmon river. 

2. This division and 1 Brigade 102 Division will en- 
trench along the line: Bluff Point — Chateaugay 
Branch Railroad — Saranac River (248). 



TRENCH WARFARE. 373 

3. (a) The Chief of Artillery will prepare the posi- 
tions and lines' of communication for his Brigade, de- 
termine his sectors, and submit his plan of action. 

(b) The 1st Brig, and 2 Bns. 267th Inf. will en- 
trench the sector, Saranac River (24$) to Sand Road, 
exclusive. The 2nd Brig, will entrench the sector Sand 
Road to Bluff Point, both inclusive. The supports will 
entrench on the line, Saranac River (182) — Cliff 
Haven. 

(c) The Reserve — 1 Brig. 102 Div. less 2 Bus., will 
construct crossings on the Saranac River — under 
direction of the Chief of Engineers, and prepare them 
for defense. 

(d) The Chief of Engineers will supply tools for en- 
trenching and lay out the lines of entrenchments. He 
will repair the following trunk roads: Peru Road; 
Sand Road, Lake-Shore Road; and construct a trans- 
verse trunk line road from Pulp Mill to O'ConnelVs 
Farm, and the necessary tram lines. The Engineer 
Depot for stores and material will be established at 
Plattsburg Barracks. 

(e) The Chief Signal Officer will establish necessary 
lines of communication, utilizing equipment at Platls- 
burg Barracks, Central Station. Aero Squadron at 
Cliazy. 

4. (a) The Chief Medical Officer will establish his 
dressing stations in the Butts of the rifle range and in 
ravine on O'ConnelVs Farm. A field hospital will be 
established at the Lozier Works. 

(b) Ammunition train and supply train will be 
parked in the Fair Ground. Ammunition distributing 
stations at railroad spurs, Plattsburg Barracks, and 
O'ConnelVs Farm. The Division Ordnance Officer will 
locate the Ammunition Dumps along transverse trunk 
line road. 

(c) Field trains, until further orders, at north end 
of Plattsburg Barracks Reservation. Distributing 
point, Plattsburg Railroad Station — Regimental 



374 TRENCH WARFARE. 

Supply Stations: Saranac River 18>2; intersection 
Peru Road and Rifle Range Road,, Sand Hole in Rifle 
Range, Sand Road on O'Connell's Farm, Ravine on 
O'ComielVs Farm. 

(d) The commander of trains will establish traffic 
regulations for all roads. 

5. Messages to Statistical Office. 

Wolf, 
Official copy: Major General. 

J. A. Baek, 

GenL Staff, 

Chief of Staff. 
Copies to: 

Brig, and Regt. Commanders. 

C. of E, 

Div. Q. M. 

C. S. O. 

C. M. 0. 

Div. 0. 0. 

C. of Tr. 

Headquarters, 1st Brigade, 101st Division, 

PlATTSE-TJRG BARRACKS, xT. Y. 

23ed Sept., 1917, 6 p. m. 

FlEED ORDERS 

:n t o. i. 

1. Strong detachments of the Red Armv. now mobiliz- 
ing at Keeseville, are south of the Salmon River. Our 
advance troops are holding the line of the Salmon River. 

2. Our division and one brigade, 102nd Division, will 
entrench and occupy the line Bluff Point-Chat eaugay 
Branch (D. & II. R. R.), Saranac River (218). This 
brigade, reinforced by two Battalions, 267th Infantry, 
will entrench and occupy the sector, Saranac River 
(248), Sand Road, exclusive. 

3. (a) The 1st and 2nd Battalions, 267th infantry 
will entrench and occupy the sector from the Saranac 
River to a point 600 yards east. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 375 

(b) The 266th Infantry, the sector from a point 600 
yards east of the Saranac River, connecting with the 
trenches of the 267th Infantry, to a point 100 yards east 
of Peru Road. 

(c) The 265th Infantry, the sector from a point 100 
yards east of the Peru Road, and connecting with the 
trenches of the 266th Infantry, to the Sand Road, ex- 
clusive. 

(d) The Brigade Machine Gun Battalion will organ- 
ize and maintain strong points along line regimental 
reserves. The C. O. of this organization will, at once, 
consult with the regimental commanders relative to 
preparation of machine gun emplacements and probable 
need for re-enforcements within their respective sectors. 

(e) The Brigade Signalmen will establish telephonic 
communications between Brigade and Kegimental Head- 
quarters. 

4. (a) The regimental commanders and senior offi- 
cers of the two battalions, 267th Infantry, will at once 
report to the Chief Engineer of the Division for plan 
of entrenchments in their respective sectors. 

(b) Tools and materials for entrenching will be sup- 
plied at the trench sites. 

5. Messages to Brigade Headquarters near Peru 
Road, east Savoy Hotel. 

Goodrich, 
Brigadier General, Commanding. 
Official Copy: 
Wm. Kirby, 

Major of Cavalry, U. S. B., 
Adjutant. 
Copies to: 

CO., 265th Infantrv. 

C. O., 266th Infantry. 

C. O., 1st and 2nd Battalions, 267th Infantrv. 

C. O., Brigade M. G. Co. 

Headquarters, 101st Division. 



376 TRENCH WARFARE. 

Headquaetees, 1st Battaeiox, 265th Infantry, 

PeATTSBEEG BaEEACKS, X. Y. 

Oct. 16, 1917. 
Field Oedees 

No. 1. 
Blue print of trenches; scale 24 inches equals 1 mile. 

1. The enemy strongly occupies a line of trenches 
immediately South of the Chateaugay Branch Railroad, 
the center of their line being about opposite the center 
sector of our first line of trench, Sand Road-Target 
Range Fence, their line of trenches being within 50 
yards of the railroad at that point, and then retiring 
slightly from the railroad to the East and West. 

The 264th Infantry occupies the section of trenches 
directly to the East of us and the 266th Infantry oc- 
cupies the section of trenches directly to the West of us. 

2. This battalion will take up a defensive position in 
the nearly completed line of trenches, Sand Road-Tar- 
get Range Fence, and as rapidly as possible complete the 
trench system in the following order of work: 

a. Deepen all trenches to at least three feet. 

b. Construct latrines. 

c. Provide cover. 

d. Bevet work previously done. 

3. a. Front lines, *. e., fire, communicating and sup- 
port trenches : Company " B " will occupy the East 
sector, i. e., Sand Road to Belgium Boyau, inclusive, 
including Slum Boyau and the salient at South end 
Reserve Trench immediately in rear of East end of 
■Support trench. 

Company " C " will occupy the Central sector, i. e., 
from East sector (Belgium Boyau, exclusive), to Car- 
dona Boyau, inclusive, including Poire Boyau. 

Company "A" will occupy the West sector, i. e., from 
Central sector (Cardona, Boyau, exclusive), to and in- 
cluding salient near Southwest corner of Target Range 
Fence. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 377 

b. Keserve Line : Company " D " will occupy the 
line from the Target Range Fence on the West to a 
point 16'5 yards East of the Verdun Salient, one-half of 
the Company occupying the sector, Target Range Fence, 
to a point 75 yards Fast of the Rams Horn Boyau, in- 
cluding Rams Horn Boyau, and the other half of the 
Company occupying the sector from a point 75 yards 
Fast of the Rams Horn Boyau to a point 165 yards 
East of the Verdun Salient. 

c. Machine Guns: Headquarters, 1st Platoon and 
1st Platoon Machine Gun Company, will report to the 
Commanding Officer, Company " A," for assignment to 
the shell craters (converted) and dugouts (constructed 
for machine guns), four in all, in the West sector. 

Headquarters, 2nd Platoon and Third Section (2nd 
Platoon) Machine Gun Company, will report to the 
Commanding Officer, Company " C," for assignment to 
the shell crater (converted), and dugout (constructed 
for machine gun), two in all, in the Central sector. 
Fourth section (2nd Platoon), Machine Gun Company, 
will report to the Commanding Officer, 'Company " B." 
for assignment to the shell crater (converted), two in all, 
in the East sector. 

d. Trench Mortars : Two trench mortars have been 
assigned to the Central sector and the Commanding offi- 
cer, Company " C," is charged with the construction 
of emplacements therefor and the manning of them. 

4. a. Dressing stations have been established in the 
Butts of the rifle range and in ravine on O'ConnelVs 
Farm. 

b. Ammunition distributing points are located at 
Plattsburg Barracks and O'ConnelVs Farm. 

c. Eegimental supply stations are located at Saranac 
River (182), intersection Peru Road and Rifle Range 
Road, Sand Hole in Rifle Range, Sand Road on O'Con- 
nelVs Farm, and Ravine on O'ConnelVs Farm. 

5. Battalion Headquarters are located in dugout in 
Support trench (West Tremont), midway between 



378 TRENCH WARFARE. 

Rams Horn and Poire Boyaux. to which place messages 
will be sent. 

Boschex, 
Captain, 56th Infantry. Commanding. 
Copies to: 

C. O., 265th Infantrv. 

C. O., Companies A, B, C and D. 

C. 0., M. G. Company. 

C. 0., Headquarters Company. 

R. S. O. 



Hdqtes. 1st Batt'., 265th IxftyT, 
Peattsbeeg Bcks., X. Y., Oct. 17, 1917. 

FlEED OEDEES 

Xo. 2 

1. Disfositioxs : 

a. The assignment of companies to sectors is as 

announced in Field Orders Xo. 1, these 
headquarters. 

b. Company commanders are charged with the 

details of occupation of the trenches and the 
proper disposition of the " specialists ? ' 
(bombers, grenadiers, auto-riflemen, etc.), 
directing particular attention to the active 
and passive areas of their sectors. - 

2. Fields oe Fiee : Company commanders must 

arrange for and obtain the best fields of fire 
in their own sectors, and provide for protec- 
tion of visible areas in adjoining sectors by 
lateral fire. 

3. Impkovements oe Changes in Teexches: 

Company commanders before making any 
changes or improvements in trenches will 
render to battalion headquarters brief rec- 
ommendations of changes desired. These 
recommendations will be submitted at 11.00 
a. m. and 3.00 p. m., after which hours the 



TRENCH WARFARE. 379 

battalion commander will inspect and if 
deemed necessary will be ordered. 

4. Organization for Watching and Observation : 

a. Each company commander will organize a sys- 

tem for watching the enemy by day and will 
establish look-out posts for this purpose; this 
system will be augumented at night by patrols 
if necessarv. 

b. The watching of the enemy must be continuous 

and long occupation of the sector will not 
warrant any laxity. 

5. Organization for Supply: 

a. Company commanders will make the necessary 

details for obtaining supplies; these details 
to be in charge of Mess or Supply Sergeants 
and will not exceed three squads for each let- 
tered company. 

b. Food: Machine guns details and members of 

the Medical Corps assigned to each sector 
are attached to the lettered companies for 
rations. 

c. Cooked food will be at the Food Station at 6.00 

a. m., 11.50 a. m. and 5.00 p. m. daily, and 
will be distributed at that point. 

d. Company commanders will detail the Mess 

Sergeant, with an appropriate detail (about 
2 squads) to proceed to Food Station, which 
is located at the wire entanglement on the 
west side of the Target Rapige about 400 
yards north of Brigade Headquarters. 

e. The details mentioned above will proceed via 

trenches, leaving same at junction of Tipper- 
ary trench and Bams Horn boyau in the fol- 
lowing order: 
Co. D : Detail will clear junction Bams Horn 
boyau and Tipperary trench at 5.40 a. m., 
11.10 a. m. and 4.40 p. m. 



380 TRENCH WARFARE. 

Co. A: Detail will clear junction Tremont 
trench and Bams Horn boy an at 5.30 a. m., 
11.00 a. m. and 4.30 p. m., proceeding via 
Bams Horn boyau. 

Co. B: Detail will clear junction Tremont 
trench and Poire boyau at 5.35 a. m., 11.05 
a. m. and 4.55 p. m., proceeding via Poire 
boyau and Tipperary trench. 

Co. C: Detail will clear junction Tremont 
trench and Slum boyau at 5.40 a. m., 11.10 
a. m. and 4.40 p. m., proceeding via Slum 
boyau and Tipperafy trench. 

f . These details will return to their respective sec- 

tors via the indicated routes, moving in re- 
verse order at five-minute intervals, and com- 
pany commanders will make necessary ar- 
rangements for distribution of food within 
their respective sectors. 

g. Company commanders will cause the necessary 

police after each meal to insure sanitary con- 
dition of trenches. 

h. Food containers will be held in company until 
the next meal hour when they will be returned 
to the Food Station. 

i. Water: Water wagon will be at the Food Sta- 
tion from 10.00 a. m. to 4.30 p. m. daily. 

j. Containers for water will be furnished by Regi- 
mental Supply Officer at the Food Station. 

k. All men will carry full canteens of water when 
entering the trenches. 

1. Company commanders will detail the Mess 
Sergeant, with an appropriate detail (about 
2 squads), to proceed to the Food Station to 
procure water in containers ; these details will 
proceed via the routes indicated in paragraph 
5, section " e " : €b. D, 2.00 p. m. ; Co. A, 
2.0-5 p. m.; Co. B, 2.10 p. m. ; Co. C, 2.15 
p. m. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 381 

in. These details will return to their respective sec- 
tors in reverse order at five-minute intervals. 

n. Miscellaneous : Details for obtaining tools, am- 
munition, trench supplies, etc., will be 
arranged for as required. 

o. Requisitions for miscellaneous supplies re- 
quired will be submitted by company com- 
manders to the Regimental Supply Officer not 
later than 3.00 p. m., October 17, 1917. 

6. Organization for Liaison : 

a. The Signal Officer will establish necessary tele- 

phonic communications'. 

b. Each organization will detail one runner to re- 

port to the battalion commander at regimen- 
tal headquarters at 8.00 a. m. 

c. Four runners will be detailed for duty with each 

company headquarter® and one runner will 
be detailed for duty with each platoon head- 
quarters. These runners should be lightly 
equipped and wear a distinctive mark. 

d. At least two men per section must be able to 

act as guides to all company headquarters of 
the battalion. 

e. Verbal messages will not be sent by runners ; 

all messages must be written. 

f. Company commanders, or their representatives, 

will report daily at battalion headquarters at 
5.00 p. m. 

g. There must be accurate communication between 

platoons in company, and companies in bat- 
talion, in order to insure co-ordinated action. 

7. Defense: 

a. Immediately after the occupation of the 
trenches', company commanders will make a 
careful estimate of all tactical situations pre- 
sented in their sectors and will plan for a 
stubborn defense. Care must be exercised in 



382 TRENCH WARFARE. 

providing for defense in depth and lateral 
defense. The front line trenches of each 
sector will be held until actually entered by 
the enemy, and no sector will be abandoned 
until the occupants are actually forced out. 

b. The main line of resistance will be the support 

trenches (Tremont) and special attention 
must be given to the preparation for defense. 
If the front line trenches of any sector be 
captured by the enemy there will be no with- 
drawal from any other sector of the front line 
trenches for the purpose of establishing a 
continuous line in the support trench. 

c. The company commander of the reserve will 

organize parties for counterattacks and these 
parties will be held in readiness at convenient 
points to insure prompt movement to the 
front. 

d. Continuous occupation of the trenches without 

fire action must not cause a feeling of se- 
curity and result in being surprised by the 
enemy. 

8. Staxd To: " Stand to" will take place at 5.00 

a. m. and 5.00 p. m., daily. At this forma- 
tion every available man will be present. 
Rifles, ammunition, equipment, clothing, etc.. 
will be inspected. Rapid loading, will be 
practiced. The firing position of every man 
will be tested to see whether he can hit the 
bottom edge of our wire. Gas helmets and 
respirators will be inspected if worn. After 
" stand to " in the morning and before 
" stand to " in the evening rifles will be thor- 
oughly cleaned and oiled. 

9. Trench Orders: 

a. Current " Trench Standing Orders " recently 
published from Brigade Headquarters are in 
force. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 383 

b. During the occupation of the trenches it will be 

assumed that the trenches are under the ob- 
servation and fire of the enemy and all move- 
ment in the trenches will be conducted accord- 
ingly. All movements of troops, either indi- 
viduals or groups, will be via the trenches at 
all times. 

c. No one will be allowed to go overland between 

trenches or to enter the trenches by the flank. 
All persons will enter the trenches from the 
reserve trenches and no visitors will be 
allowed in the trenches except on passes is- 
sued from the Regimental Headquarters. 

d. 'Commanding officers, Companies A and B, are 

responsible for the; posting of the necessary 
sentinels along the flanks of the position (dur- 
ing the day), with instructions covering the 
provisions contained in paragraph 9, sections 
" b " and " c." 

10. Reports: 

a. Company commanders will submit by 1.00 

p. m., October 18, 1917, a report showing the 
dispositions and plan of defense of their re- 
spective sectors. 

b. Frequent reports of information obtained and 

any change of conditions at the front will be 
made to battalion headquarters when neces- 
sary. 

Boscheist, 
Captain, 56th Infantry, 
Commanding. 
Copies to: 

C. O. 265th Infty. 

CO. Cos. A, B, C and D. 

C. O. M. G. Co. 

C. O., Hdq. Co. 

R S. 0. 



384 TRENCH WARFARE. 

Company Organization (in Detail): 
Company Headquarters: 

1 Captain, commanding company, 

1 First Lieutenant (senior), second in command, 

1 First Sergeant, armed with pistol, 

1 Mess Sergeant, armed with rifle, 

1 Supply Sergeant, armed with rifle, 

1 Corporal, company clerk, armed with rifle, 

4 Mechanics, armed with rifle, 

5 Wagoners (from Supply Company), 
4 Cooks, armed with rifle, 

2 Buglers, armed with pistol, 

4 Privates, first class, company agent and signalmen. 
Equipment: 15 rifles, 5 pistols, 8 automatic rifles 
(for replacement), 40 trench knives (to be dis- 
tributed as needed), 2 bicycles. Following from 
Supply Company: 1 rolling kitchen, 4-mule; 
1 combat wagon, 4-mule; 1 ration and baggage 
wagon, 4-mule; 1 ration cart, 2-mule; 1 water 
cart, 2-mule; 16 mules, draft. 

J/- Platoons, each organized as follows (numbered 1 to 4 
in company) : 

Headquarters: 

1 First Lieutenant; 1st and 4th Platoons com- 
manded by First Lieutenants; 2nd and 3rd 
Platoons commanded by Second Lieutenants, 
armed with pistol. 

1 Sergeant, assistant to platoon commander, armed 
with pistol and rifle. 
Equipment: 1 rifle, 2 pistols. 

1st .Section: Bombers and rifle grenadiers: 
1 Sergeant, armed with pistol and rifle, 
3 Corporals, armed with pistol and rifle, 1 trained 
as rifle grenadier; remainder trained a a 
bombers, 



TRENCH WARFARE. 385 

6 Privates, first class, 2 armed with, pistol and 

rifle, and remainder with rifle only ; 1 trained 

■as rifle grenadier, and remainder as bombers. 

12 Privates, armed with rifles; 4 trained as rifle 

grenadiers, remainder trained as bombers. 
Equipment: 22 rifles, 6 pistols. 

2nd Section: Riflemen: 

2 Corporals, armed with pistols and rifles, 

3 Privates, first class, armed with rifle, 

7 Privates, armed with rifle, 
Equipment: 12 rifles, 2 pistols. 

3rd Section : Riflemen : 

2 Corporals', armed with pistol and rifle, 

3 Privates, first class, armed with rifle, 
7 Privates, armed with rifle. 
Equipment: 12 rifles, 2 pistols. 

4th Section: Auto-riflemen: 

1 Sergeant, armed with pistol and rifle, 
1 Corporal, armed with pistol and rifle, 
3 Privates, first class ; 1 armed with rifle, 2 armed 

with pistols; auto-rifle gunners, including 

1 extra, 
6 Privates, armed with rifle. 
Equipment: 9 rifles, 4 pistols, 2 auto-rifles. 

Note. — Sections numbered from 1 to 16 in com- 
pany. 

Personnel: 
Commissioned: 

Captain . .• 1 

First Lieutenants 3 

Second Lieutenants 2 

Total 6 



25 



386 TRENCH WARFARE. 

Enlisted: 

First Sergeant 1 

Mess Sergeant 1 

Supply .Sergeant 1 

Sergeants 12 

Corporals 33 

Mechanics 4 

Wagoners (from Supply 'Company) (5 ) 

Cooks 4 

Buglers 2 

Privates, first class 64 

Privates 128 

Total 250 

Equipment: 

Rifles 239 

Pistols 69 

Auto rifles 16 

Trench knives 40 

Bicycles 2 

From Supply Company: 

Rolling kitchen, 4-mule 1 

Combat wagon, 4^mule 1 

Ration and baggage wagon, 4-mule 1 

Ration cart, 2-mule . 1 

Water cart, 2-mule 1 

Mules, draft 16 



Trench Standing Orders. 

1. Duties. — A. One officer per company and one 
non-commissioned officer per platoon will always be on 
duty. During their tour of duty they will not be in 
their dugouts. They will frequently visit all trenches 
occupied by their units. Every listening post will be 
vi sited at least once by an officer during his tour of 
duty. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 387 

B. The officer and non-commissioned officer on duty 
will, when his tour of duty is completed, turn over to the 
officer or non-commissioned officer relieving him all 
orders, a report of the w r ork in progress, if any, and any 
other information of use. 

C. At night the officer and non-commissioned officer 
on duty will frequently patrol the trench line, to see 
that the sentries are alert and to receive any reports 
they may desire to make. 

I). The non-commissioned officer coming on duty will 
go round and post new sentinels with the non-commis- 
sioned officer coming off duty. 

E. The length of the tour of duty will depend upon 
the number of officers and non-commissioned officers ou 
duty. Normally each tour should be, by night, two 
hours ; by day, four hours. This may be modified, how- 
ever, so that all officers and non-commissioned officers 
will have an equal amount of this duty while in the 
trenches. 

F. Non-commissioned officers, after posting sentinels, 
will report " all is well " or otherwise to the officers on 
duty. 

G. No man will be detailed for a duty in the trench 
without being given suitable warning of this duty and 
be informed at which hour he will come on duty. 

H. The Company Commander will be responsible for 
sending any report required by Battalion Headquarters. 

2. Sentries. — A. The number of sentry posts re- 
quired will depend on the assumed propinquity or dis- 
tance of the enemy, strength of obstacles, ease with which 
sentry posts can be re-enforced and other local condi- 
tions. Normally by day this should be one sentinel for 
each platoon and at night three double sentinels for 
each platoon. There must be sentries enough to insure 
alarm being given promptly in case of attack and that 
local resistance is sufficient until help can arrive. 



388 TRENCH WARFARE. 

B. The next relief will remain within an easy dis- 
tance of the sentry on post, usually in shelters provided 
for this purpose. 

'C. Every sentry is to be regularly posted by a non- 
commissioned officer who will explain to him his duties 
and ascertain that the sentry is aware of the position 
of the section and platoon commanders and of the sen- 
tries on either side, and whether there are any patrols 
or working parties out in front. 

D. Every sentinel will report when an officer passes 
his post, ''All is well," or otherwise. 

E. Every sentinel by day will be provided with a 
head-cover to blend with the ground (this may be im- 
provised), and while observing the ground to the front 
will remain perfectly still. An empty sand bag or some 
other suitable material may be utilized for this purpose. 

3. Patrols. — A. It is the duty of all the troops hold- 
ing the front lines to establish a command of the ground 
in front of their parapet up to the enemy's wire. This 
can be done by extended and constant patrolling by 
night and reconnaissance by day so that the ground is 
thoroughly well known to as large a portion as possible 
of officers and men and so no enemy can move or remain 
in his front by night or day without detection. One of 
the particular duties of these patrols is to observe the 
condition of the wire entanglements. 

B. Every patrol must have definite orders as to its 
mission ; broadly speaking, patrols may be divided into 
two classes: (1) reconnoitering patrols, (2) fighting 
patrols. 

C. The first duty of reconnoitering patrols is to 
obtain the information for which they are sent out. 
They fight only in self-defense or if any especially 
favorable opportunity arises to inflict loss upon the 
enemy without prejudice to their mission. They usu- 
ally consist of two to six men, under an officer or non- 
commissioned officer. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 389 

I). Fighting patrols are sent out for the express pur- 
pose of causing loss or damage to the enemies by such 
means as engaging the enemy's patrols or working par- 
ties, or by raiding saps, listening posts or trenches. For 
identification purposes they should always endeavor to 
secure at least one prisoner. _ Their strength depends 
upon the resistance they are likelv to meet with. 

E. Company commanders are responsible for the 
orders given to patrols, subject to any instructions which 
may be issued by higher authority. They are also re- 
sponsible that all troops, whom it concerns, including 
companies! on both flanks., are warned when and where 
patrols will be out, length of time they will be out, and 
of the points to which they will return. 

F. Information gained by patrols is of little value 
unless transmitted quickly to those whom it concerns. 
Patrol reports will be made out by the commander of 
the patrol immediately upon his return and sent at once 
to the company commander unless orders to the con- 
trary have been given. 

4. Stand To. — A. " Stand to " will take place one- 
half hour after a relief has been posted and one-half 
hour before being relieved. At this parade every avail- 
able man will be present. Rifles, equipment, clothing, 
etc., will be inspected. Firing steps will be tested as 
soon as practicable after reliefs have been posted to see 
that each man can fire on the foot of the nearest part 
of the wire entanglement which he is required to cover 
by his fire. The same procedure will be gone through 
at the " stand to " one-half hour before being relieved. 
Other " stand tos " may be ordered in the discretion of 
the company commander. These should be "sufficiently 
often to insure that every man turns out promptly and 
knows his place in case of attack. 

5. Machine Guns. — A. The concealment of machine 
gun emplacements is important. Consequently, it is 
only at night or in case of attack that machine gun 



390 TRENCH WARFARE. 

crews will occupy their defense emplacements. At night 
guns should take up other position than their defense 
emplacements and fire a stated number of rounds in 
order to test out the guns and mislead the enemy as to 
their numbers and real emplacements, after which they 
will at once go back to their defense emplacements. 

B. The guns and their crews will be tactically under 
the orders of the company commander in whose sector 
they are located, but no alteration will be made by him 
in their disposition or arcs of fire; he will, however, 
bring before the senior machine gun instructor any sug- 
gestions for improvements in machine gun dispositions 
for defense. 

C. Two men per gun will always be on duty with the 
guns. 

D. Range cards will be prepared and kept with each 
gun. 

E. Ofiicers and non-commissioned officers in charge 
of guns will remain in close proximity to the guns. They 
will frequently inspect their guns, emplacements, etc. 
They are responsible for cleanliness and maintenance of 
the emplacements. 

F. Machine gun commanders are responsible for guns 
always being ready for action, and that emplacements 
are clear of all material except such as is required for 
the service of the guns; that embrasures or loopholes 
are kept clear of all obstructions which may interfere 
with fire or view. 

6. Reliefs. — A. Reconnaissance. Prior to taking 
over the line of trenches the company commander, ac- 
companied by his senior First Lieutenant and First 
Sergeant, will reconnoiter the trenches. 

B. Points to be noted by the company commanders. 
The following points will be specially noted by company 
commanders before taking over trenches : 

1. Plan of occupation (number of men holding 
lines to be taken over, their distribution and 
duties) . 



TRENCH WARFARE. 391 

2. Shelter accommodations. 

3. Work being done and proposed. 

4. Conditions of the wire and defenses generally. 

5. Information as to the enemy, his habits, snipers, 

and the work he is doing, etc. 

6. Water supply. 

7. Artillery support. 

8. Communications. 

9. Danger points. 

10. Location and condition of stores. 

11. Liaison. 

7. Guides. — A. Arrangements will be made between 
the company commanders of the incoming and outgoing 
companies as to the rendezvous where guides will be pro- 
vided by the latter to conduct the incoming troops to 
the trenches. 

B. One guide per platoon, one for each company and 
one for battalion headquarters will be provided. • These 
guides must know the exact spot where they will meet 
the relief troops and the best way to conduct the units 
to the particular section of the trench they will occupy. 

8. Smoking and Talking.— A. After leaving the 

rendezvous there will be no smoking and talking until 
arrival in trenches. Strictest march discipline will be 
enforced on the way to and from the trenches 1 . 

9. Procedure on Arrival at Trenches.— A. The 

troops being relieved will 1 not leave the trenches until 
the relieving troops are in position and the new sentries 
have been posted, all trench stores have been handed 
over and receipted for, and orders to move have been 
received from the Company Commander. 

B. Platoon commanders will at once personally see 
that all sentinels are properly posted, that the non- 
commissioned officer is on duty, that every man knows 
his place in case of attack, and that both flanks of his 
platoon are in liaison with the adjoining platoon. 



392 TRENCH WARFARE. 

0. When reliefs are completed, Platoon 'Commanders 
will report to that effect to the Company Commander. 

D. Men will not be dismissed until the Company 
Commander has received the reports from all of his 
Platoon Commanders that everything is in order. 

10. Log Books. — A. Each Company Commander 
will keep a log book in which will be entered : 

1. Work done. 

2. Number of men working. 

3. Hours worked. 

4. Any information obtained from sentries, pa- 

trols, or other sources. 
They will also enter in this; book a list of any trench 
stores that come into their possession. 

11. Equipment. — A. Equipment will be worn in the 

front trenches. Haversacks, packs, and trench tools 
need not be worn, these will be left in the shelters. In 
support and reserve trenches, they will be worn at the 
discretion of the Company Commander. 

B. Ration and carrying parties will wear equipment 
and carry rifles unless otherwise ordered. 

C. Pieces will be assumed to be loaded and locked at 
all times. 

D. In the firing trenches bayonets will be fixed at 
night. 

E. ^on-commissioned officers and men of the firing 
line will at all times be in possession of their rifles and 
bayonets. The rifles of men in the support and reserve 
trenches or dugouts will be where they can be quickly 
seized, even in the dark. 

12. Stretcher Bearers. — A. Stretcher bearers will 
be stationed at a point designated by the Company Com- 
mander. 

13. Discipline. — A. Sleeping in the firing trenches 
will not be permitted. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 393 

B. ]STo man will enter the firing trench, except in dis- 
charge of his duty, unless so ordered by his Company 
or Platoon Commander. 

C. Sentries will remain standing unless the height of 
the parapet renders this impossible. 

D. Saluting and standing at attention, etc., will be 
as carefully adhered to as when in camp except that 
sentinels will not let this interfere with their duties. 

14. Rations and Cooking. — A. Cooking will be done 
in the rear of the reserve at a point to be designated. 

B. Company Quartermaster Sergeants will accom- 
pany ration parties, which, will be limited in size to> the 
actual needs for bringing up cooked rations from the 
point where cooking is done, to the trenches. At no time 
should this exceed ten per cent of the effective strength 
of the unit from which sent. 

'C. Care will be taken that as little noise as possible 
be made by these carrying parties. 

15. Sanitation. — A. The importance of strict atten- 
tion to sanitation will be impressed upon all ranks. 

B. The commanding officer of each unit is respon- 
sible for sanitation in his sector. He will make fre- 
quent inspections of latrines, refuse pits and trenches 
to ascertain that no unsanitary conditions exist. 

C. Latrines will be constructed in the trenches, ex- 
creta kept covered at all times and such disinfectants as 
may be provided will be used at regular intervals. When 
filled within eighteen inches of the tap, pits will be 
filled with earth and labeled. 

D. Urinal cans will be provided and men required 
to use these cans and contents will be emptied as 
often as necessary into deep pits at least one hundred 
yards from the trenches. Empty tin cans, particles of 
food and other refuse will be collected in receptacles 
kept in the trenches for that purpose and carried to the 
rear and buried in pits. This is usually done at night. 



394 TRENCH WARFARE. 

Emergency Dumps for Companies (Material), 

1. Any large shell crater will do for these or hole: 
can be dug 10' x 10' x 5' deep. 

Contents or Dump. 

10 rolls barbed wire. 

8 coils French accordion wire. 
30 long screw stakes. 
50 short screw stakes. 

± prepared wire blocks (gooseberries). 

Stores foe Company. 



100 


very flares. 


6 


S. O. S. rockets. 


2 


verminal sprayers. 


1 


strombos horn. 




(gas alarm) 




rubber boots. 




periscopes. 


200 


revolver ammunition 


1 


log book. 


1 


set maps. 


1 


set air photos. 


1 


defense scheme. 



2. These are taken over and signed for. Each dug- 
out must have a gas blanket and some form of gas 
alarm (usually empty shell case.) 

Stokes at Battalion Headquarters. 

1 strombos horn. 

2 verminal sprayers. 
300 very flares. 

20 S. O. S. rockets. 
500 revolver ammunition. 
50 ground flares. 



TRENCH WARFARE. 

FIRING TRENCH 



395 



7>LA-r-jr t*-£0 



r 



Empty S.AA 



WM^'WM 



FIRING STEP 



INTERMEDIATE 



Munition 
Shelter 




10 Boxes Mills 
2 Boxes S.AA 



SUPPORT LINE 



FIRING 



STEP 



m unition 

Shelter 




60 Boxes Mills 
4 Boxes S.AA. 



396 CONCLUSION. 

Conclusion. 

The present army of the United. States had its in- 
ception at Plattsburg in 1915. The first regiment of 
the Business Mens' Training Camp will go down in 
history as the first chapter of preparedness. 

The training camps of 1916, not only at Plattsburg, 
but at various other places throughout the United 
States, constituted the second chapter. 

We are just finishing chapter three in the officers' 
training camps of 1917. 

This book brings together the essential points of the 
instruction given at the second and probably the last 
of the officers' training camps at Plattsburg, in such 
a way that an officer may refresh his memory when he 
is about to take up with his men any of the subjects 
covered. 

It is hardly necessary to add that no attempt has 
been made to cover fully any branch of the work. The 
bibliography provides for further study and the books 
in it should be at every officer's command. 

As the war progresses many changes will be made; 
not only will methods change but some branches now 
considered essential may be cast aside as useless. 

Nothing but work can make the pages of any mili- 
tary book have real meaning. This book gives what 
are now considered the essentials of military training. 
If it has brought to the conscientious officer points he 
might otherwise have forgotten to the detriment of his 
command, it will have served its purpose. 



BIBLIOGRAPHY. 397 

Bibliography. 

Chapter II. i.d.r. 

Balck " T actios' Vol. 1. Infantry. 

Howell " Lectures on the Swiss Army." 

Bjornstadt " Lectures on the German Army." 

" Drill and Field Training " (English) — ■ Imperial 
Army Series. 

" Instructions on the Offensive Conduct of Small 
Units." War Department, May, 1917. 

" Notes on the methods of attack and defense to 
meet the Conditions of Modern Warfare." Army War 
College, April, 1917. 

Privates Manual. (Moss.) 

" Instructions for assembling the Infantry Pack," 
Ordnance Department. Pamphlet No. 1717 Manual 
of Military Training. (Moss.) 

Chapter III. Physical Training. 

" Manual of Physical Training." (Koehler.) 
" Field Physical Training of the Soldier." Special 
Regulation No. 23. 

Voice Culture. (Robert Lloyd.) (In lecture form.) 

Chapter IV. Small Arms Firing Manual. 

Bull's Eye Scorebook. 

U. S. Marines Scorebook. 

" How to Shoot." (Moss.) 

" Notes on training for Rifle Fire in Trench War- 
fare." Army War Coll., April, 1917. 

" The Rifle in War." (Eames.) 

" Suggestions to Military Riflemen." (Whelen.) 

" Musketry " sheets from First Camp, Plattsburg, 
New York. 

" Control of the Firing Line." Army Service 
School. 

" Musketry Training." (Pickering.) 



398 BIBLIOGRAPHY. 

" A Synopsis of the Rifle in War." Army Service 
Schools. 

British — " Aids in Musketry." " Fire Problems." 
(Pilcher.) 

" Fire Orders " — " Direction and Control " — 
Musketry " — Imperial Army Series. 

■" Lecture and Lessons on Musketry and Instruc- 
tions for Officers and N. C. O. S. Musketry Dia- 
grams. ' ' ( Clutterbuck. ) 

" Notes on Bayonet Training." Army War College, 
March, 1917. 

" British Manual of the Bayonet." Ordnance 
Pamphlet No. 1715 and No. 1866. (Pistol.) 

" Notes on Bombing." (McClintock.) 

" Notes on Grenade Training " — Plattsburg Train- 
ing Camp. 

" Notes on Grenade Warfare." Army War College. 

Chapter V. Military Sketching and Map 
Reading. 

"Military Map Reading." (Sherrill.) 

" Military Sketching and Map Reading." (Grieves.) 

"An Officer's Notes." (Parker.) 

" Topography." (Sherrill.) 

Engineers Field Manual. 

" Manual of Infantry Training." (Moss.) 

'' Training Manual in Topography, Map Reading and 
Reconnaissance." (By Major .Spalding, IT. S. A.) 

" Military Sketching and Map Reading." (Capt. 
Barnes.) 

Chapter VI. Articles of War. 

" A Guide to the Articles of War." (Professor 
Eugene Wambaugh.) 

Manual of Courts Martial. 



BIBLIOGRAPHY. 399 

Chapter VII. Army Regulations. 

" Manual for Commanders of Infantry Platoons. " 
Translated from the French by the Army War 
College, 1917, War Department Document No. 626. 
a.r., 1913. 

Chapter VIII. (Field Work.) 

" Notes' on Field Fortification.'' Army Service 
Schools, 1916. 

ik E. F. M." and Addendum thereto. 

" Elements of Trench Warfare." (Waldron.) 

" Field Entrenchments." (Solano.) 

" Scouting and Patrolling." (Waldron.) 

" Scout Instruction." (McKenney.) 

" Scout's Handwork." (McKenney.) 

" The 2nd Matabele War." (Baden Powell.) 

k> Aids to Scouting." (Baden Powell.) 

" Manual of Military Training." (Moss.) 

" Small Problems in Infantry." (Bjornstadt.) 

" S. M. Tactics," 

" A Military Primer." (Marshall & Simonds.) 

" Technique of Modern Tactics." (Von Allen.) 

" Night Movements." (Burnett.) 

" Night Operations for Infantry." (Dawkins.) 

Chapter IX. (Feeding Men.) 

" Manual for Army Cooks." 

" Mess Sergeant's Handbook." (Holbrook.) 

" Mess Officer's Assistant." 

" Mess Account Book." (Frink.) 

" Handling the Straight Army Ration." (Holbrook.) 

•* Manual of Military Training." (Moss.) 

" Field Service." (Moss.) 

Chapter X. (Personal Hygiene and First Aid.) 

" Manual of Military Training." (Moss.) 
" Lectures on Military Sanitation and Management 
of Sanitation Service," Army Service Schools. 



400 BIBLIOGRAPHY. 

" Lectures " delivered at Plattsburg Training Camp, 
1917. 

" Elements of Military Hygiene." (Ashburn.) 
" Ked Cross Pamphlet on First Aid." 
" Manual for Non-Cams, and Privates." 

Chapter XI. (Signaling.) 

" United States Signal Book." 
" Infantry Drill Regulations." 

Chapter XII. (Guard Duty.) 
" Manual of Interior Guard Duty." 

Chapter XIII. (Company Administration.) 

"Company Administration." (Waldron.) 
" Army Paper Work." (Perrin-Smith Pub. Co.) 
" Notes on Organizations." (Waldron.) 
" Synopsis of Work Done at 1st Plattsburg Camp." 
(Farley.) 

" Army Paper Work." (Moss.) 

" Army Regulations." ' 

Chapter XIV. ('Conferences. Study. S. P. I. 
Examinations. ) 

" Examinations in Military Science," Harvard Uni- 
versity, 1917. 

Chapter XV. (Trench Warfare.) 

" Field Fortifications," (Lt. Henri Poire.) Platts- 
burg, N. Y., 1917. 

" Tbe French Automatic Rifle." (Capt. Gene 
Loriot.) 

" Notes on Liaison in Modern Warfare." 

" Notes on tbe Method of Attack and Defense to 
Meet tbe Conditions of Modern Warfare." 



BIBLIOGRAPHY. 401 

" Machine Gun Tactics." (Applin.) 

" Grenades, Hand, and Rifle." (Solano.) 

" Training for the Trenches." (Vickers.) 

" Studies in Leading Troops." (Vernois.) 

" Tactical Decisions and Orders." (Buddecke.) 

" Problems in Leading Troops — Army Service 

Schools. ) 

" Battle Orders." (Von Kiesling.) 

" 70 Problems." (Morrison.) 

" Tactical Principles and Problems." (Hanna.) 

" Technique of Modern Tactics." (Bond and Mc- 

Donough.) 

" Estimating Tactical Situations." (Fitch.) 

The Book Department, Army Service Schools, Port 
Leavenworth, Kansas, or the United States Infantry 
Association, Washington, D. 0., will get any books 
available. 



26 



INDEX. 



CHAPTER 1. page. 

Schedules 1 

CHAPTER 2. 

Infantry drill regulations 31 

School of the soldier 31 

Instruction without arms 31 

Attention 32 

Position of 32 

Heels together and on a line 32 

Feet turned out equally, forming angle of 45 degrees 32 

Knees extended without stiffness 32 

Trunk erect upon hips 32 

Shoulders falling naturally 32 

Arms hanging naturally 33 

Head erect, chin raised 33 

Rests 33 

Position of rest and at ease 33 

Fall out 34 

Rest 34 

At ease 34 

Parade rest 34 

Eyes right 34 

Right face 34 

Right half face 34 

About face 34 

Hand salute 34 

Forward march 34 

Double time, march 34 

Mark time, march 34 

Half step, march 34 

Right step, march 34 

Squad, halt 34 

By right flank, march 34 

To the rear, march 34 

Change step, march 34 

Manual of arms 35 

Purpose 35 

Commands and cautions 35 

Order, arms 35 

Present, arms 35 

Port, arms 35 

Right shoulder, arms 35 

Left shoulder, arms 35 

Parade, rest 35 

Trail, arms 35 

Rifle salute 35 

Fix bayonet 35 



404 INDEX. 

Infantry drill regulations — (Continued): 

Commands and cautions — (Continued) : page. 

Unfix bayonet 36 

Inspection arms 36 

School of the squad 36 

Object 36 

Composition of squad 36 

Fall in 36 

Fall out 36 

Count off 36 

Inspection arms — right dress, front 36 

Guide right 37 

Take interval 37 

To reform 37 

Take distance 37 

Assemble, march 37 

Stack arms 37 

Take arms 37 

Oblique, march 37 • 

In place, halt 37 

Resume march 38 

Right turn 38 

Right half turn 38 

Squads right 38 

Squad right about 38 

School of the company 38 

Object 38 

Composition 39 

Fall in 39 

Platoon movements 40 

Leading platoon 40 

Rear platoon 40 

Questions which come up in daily military life 40 

Answers 41 

Insignia 41 

For second lieutenants 41 

Company right, march 42 

Platoons right, march 42 

Squads right, march 42 

Right turn, march 42 

Column right, march 42 

Platoons, column right, march 42 

Squads right, column right, march 42 

Squads right, platoons, column right, march 42 

Squads right about, march 43 

Right into line, march 43 

Right front into line, march 43 

Platoons, right front into line, march 43 

Route step, march 43 

Right by twos, march 43 

Squads right front into line, march 43 



INDEX. 405 

Infantry drill regulations — {Continued): 

School of the company — (Continued) : page. 

Dismiss the company 43 

To fall in company when it cannot be formed by 

squads 44 

For muster 44 

In aligning company 44 

To march squad without unnecessary commands .... 44 

As skirmishers, march 44 

Assemble, march 45 

Kneel 45 

Lie down 45 

Rise 45 

Loadings and firings 45 

Aiming 45 

Sight-setting announced 45 

Fire at will 45 

Clip fire 45 

Unload 45 

Extended order 45 

Corporal cautions 46 

Left face 46 

Company right 46 

Deployments 46 

As skirmishers, guide right, march 46 

To deploy from column or squad 46 

Assemble, march 47 

Platoons, assemble 47 

Platoons, columns 47 

Squad columns 47 

No. l's forward, march 48 

Captain points out new line 48 

Disadvantage 48 

Advantage 48 

Being in skirmish line 48 

By platoon 48 

Commands 48 

School of the Battalion 49 

Basis 49 

Arrangement 49 

Number 49 

Center 49 

Band 49 

Dressing 49 

To form the battalion 49 

Other than ceremonies 49 

For ceremonies 49 

To dismiss the battalion 50 

To rectify the alignment 50 

To rectify the column 50 

Helpful hints to beginners 50 



406 INDEX. 

Infantry drill regulations — (Continued): 

To form the battalion — {Continued): page. 

In column of squads 50 

In column of companies 51 

Line of companies 53 

In battalion line 54 

Inspections 55 

Special points of company 55 

Battalion inspection 56 

Regimental inspection 56 

Ceremonies 56 

Batalion review 56 

Battalion parade 57 

Regimental parade 58 

Regimental review 58 

Fire direction 58 

Fire control 58 

Fire discipline 58 

The colonel 59 

Position 59 

Duties 60 

The major 60 

Position 60 

The general 61 

Duties 61 

Special 62 

Battalion staff 63 

Positions 63 

Duties 64 

Position 65 

Duties : before fire action 65 

during the action 65 

Buglers 66 

Position 66 

Duties 66 

Must be proficient in 67 

Range estimators 67 

Platoon leader 68 

Position 68 

Duties 68 

Thereafter 69 

First sergeant 70 

Guides 70 

General rules 70 

Equipment 70 

Close order 71 

Taking intervals and distances 71 

To form the company 72 

Alignments 72 

Exercise for 74 

Result 74 



INDEX. 407 

Infantry drill regulations — {Continued): page. 

Platoon Guides 75 

Position 75 

Duties 75 

Corporal 76 

Position 76 

Duties 76 

Thereafter . . 76 

The private 78 

Position 78 

Duties 79 

Packs 81 

Cartridge belt 81 

To attach first-aid pouch •. . . 82 

To attach canteen cover A. 82 

To attach pack carrier to haversack 82 

To attach cartridge belt to haversack 83 

To attach bayonet scabbard to haversack 83 

To attach intrenching tool carrier to haversack 83 

To assemble the full equipment (without rations) ... 84 

To make the pack 85 

To assemble the pack 85 

To assemble the full equipment (with rations) 86 

To make the pack 86 

To assemble the pack 86 

To adjust to the soldier 86 

To assemble full equipment, less the pack (with 

rations ) 87 

To assemble full equipment, less the pack (without 

rations) 88 

To discard pack without removing equipment from 

body 88 

Care of equipment 89 

Leather 89 

Woolen clothes 89 

Mending 89 

Cloth equipment — dry cleaning 89 

Washing 89 

Instructions on making packs 89 

Methods . . 89 

Adjusting cartridge belt 90 

Distribution of intrenching tools in the squad 90 



CHAPTER 3. 

Physical training 91 

Physical training 91 

Bayonet training 91 

Time schedule 91 

Formations 92 

Second formation 93 



408 INDEX. 

Physical training — (Continued) : page 

Commands 93 

Kinds of and how given 93 

First lesson . 94 

Second lesson 95 

Third lesson 96 

Fourth lesson 98 

Fifth lesson 99 

Voice culture 103 



CHAPTER 4. 

Use of modern arms 105 

Small arms firing 106 

Slow fire 109 

Rapi<fr fire 109 

Pistol 112 

Nomenclature and care 112 

Manual for the pistol 112 

Position 116 

The grip 116 

The trigger squeeze 117 

Position and aiming drills 117 

Quick fire 118 

Classes of fire 118 

Slow fire 118 

Quick fire 118 

Automatic fire 118 

Trench 118 

Score 119 

Course 120 

Slow fire 120 

Quick fire 120 

Automatic fire 120 

Trench fire 120 

Bayonet training 120 

Functions of . 120 

General practice 120 

Technique of bayonet combat 121 

Manual of the bayonet 122 

Progressive exercises 124 

Machine guns 128 

Mode of action 128 

Fire 129 

Inconspicuousness 129 

Offensive reinforcement of a front momentarily 

stationary 130 

Defensive 130 

General rules for installation 131 

Employment of fire and instruction 132 

Resume 132 

Points before firing 133 



INDEX. 409 

Use of modern arms — (Continued) : 

Machine guns — (Continued): page. 

Points during firing 133 

Points after firing 133 

Grenade instruction 134 

Introduction 134 

Working of grenades in use 136 

Instruction in throwing 138 

Instruction in grenade organization 139 

Points to remember 141 

CHAPTER 5. 

Map sketching 143 

Class room — map reading 143 

Taking up map scales 143 

Field work — strict scale map making 145 

Road sketch 146 

Area sketch ! 46 

Problem 150 

Class room — problem 150 

Field work — problem 154 

Class room — problem 155 

Field work — problem 157 

problem 158 

Map reading 159 

CHAPTER 6. 

Helpful references to the articles of war 161 

Military law 161 

Article 1 161 

Definitions 161 

Article 2 161 

Persons subject to military law 161 

Articles 3-18 162 

Courts martial classified 162 

Method of entering a charge against a man 163 

Specification 164 

General remarks 164 

Article 31 164 

Order of voting 164 

Article 39 164 

Limit upon prosecutions 164 

Article 54 165 

Fraudulent enlistment 165 

Article 58 165 

Desertion 165 

Article 61 166 

Absence without leave 166 

Article 62 166 

Disrespect toward President and others 166 

Article 63 166 

Disrespect toward a superior officer 166 



410 INDEX. 

Helpful references to the articles of war — (Continued) : page. 

Article 64 167 

Assaulting or wilfully disobeying superior officer. . . . 167 

Article 65 167 

Insubordinate conduct toward a non-commissioned 

officer 167 

Article 68 167 

Disorders 167 

Article 69 168 

Breaking arrest 168 

Article 75 169 

Misbehavior before the enemy 169 

Article 83 169 

Neglect of military property 169 

Article 84 169 

Waste or unlawful disposal of property issued to 

soldiers 169 

Article 85 169 

Drunk on duty 169 

Article 86 170 

Misbehavior of sentinel 170 

Article 92 170 

Murder or rape 170 

Article 93 '. 170 

Various crimes 170 

Article 94 17 

Frauds against the government 7 7 

Article 95 

Conduct unbecoming an officer and a gentleman ' V 

Article 96 7 

General articles, the catch all 17 

Examples 172 

Problem 1 172 

Problem 2 172 

Problem 3 172 



CHAPTER 7. 

Notes on army regulations 175 

Authority exercised 175 

Abusive language 175 

Respect to superiors 175 

Remarks by officers 175 

Furloughs 175 

Men on furloughs 175 

Men in foreign countries 175 

No payments 175 

Desertion 175 

Abandoned clothes 175 

Reward 175 

Costs of apprehension 176 

No pay or clothes 176 



INDEX. 411 

Notes on army regulations — (Continued): page. 

Will be restored 176 

Absent without leave 176 

Discharge of enlisted men 176 

Final statements .,...- 176 

Certificate 176 

Loss of discharge certificate 177 

Physical disability certificate 177 

Death of soldier 177 

Effects 177 

Will be delivered 177 

Medal of honor 178 

Certificate of merit 178 

Quarters , 178 

Saturday 178 

Neglect of rooms 178 

Destruction of tableware 178 

Chiefs of squads 178 

Premises 178 

Company commanders 178 

Arms 178 

Accountability and responsibility 178 

Example 179 

Loss of public property 179 

Ration 179 

Forfeiture 179 

Pay 179 

Allotments 180 

Class A 180 

Class B 180 

Compensation for death or disability 181 

Additional insurance 182 

Deposits 182 

A lost deposit book 182 

Payment 183 

Withdrawal of deposits 183 

Interest 183 

Forfeiture 183 

Officers and men 183 

Furloughed to reserve ... 183 

Transportation 183 

Discharged soldier 183 

Transfer of claims 183 

Notes on the laws of war 183 



CHAPTER 8. 

Practice marches 187 

Field work 188 

An order 188 

Do not deploy too early 188 

Fire direction 189 



412 INDEX. 

Field Work — (Continued) : page. 

The troops 189 

Defense 190 

Leadership 190 

Communications 191 

Night operations N . 191 

Patrols 191 

Leader 191 

Conduct of 192 

Report 192 

Return 193 

Advance guard 193 

Rear guard 194 

Flank guard 194 

Camps 194 

March outpost 194 

Outpost 195 

Outline of field service regulations 197 

Land forces of U. S 197 

Military information 197 

Transmission of information 198 

Questions and answers on 206 

CHAPTER 9. 

Feeding men 213 

In camp 213 

On the march 214 

For individual cooking 214 

In the trenches 215 

Rations and cooking 215 

Camping and camp sanitation 216 

General principles 216 

CHAPTER 10. 

Personal hygiene and first aid 221 

Personal hygiene 221 

Bathing 221 

Sexual indulgence 222 

Exercise 222 

Cleanliness of surroundings 223 

Preventable diseases 223 

Typhoid fever 223 

Dysentry 223 

Malaria" 224 

Tonsilitis and colds 224 

Measles 224 

First aid 224 

Grounds 224 

Poisoned wounds 225 

Diagnosis tag 225 

Treatment of wounds 225 



INDEX. 413 

Personal hygiene and first aid — (Continued) : page. 

Bleeding wounds 225 

Fainting, heat exhaustion and shock 226 

Sunstroke 226 

Burns and scalds 226 

Freezing and frostbites 226 

Fractures 226 

Treatment 227 

Artificial respiration 227 

Trench foot 227 

CHAPTER 11. 

Signaling 229 

Semaphore 229 

First cycle 229 

Second cycle 229 

Third cycle 229 

Fourth cycle 230 

Doubles 230 

Instructing 230 

Second step 230 

Third step 230 

Fourth step 230 

Wig wag 232 

Points to remember 233 

Letter codes 233 

Arm signals . 234 

Forward, march 234 

Halt 234 

Double time, march 234 

Squads right, march 234 

Squads left, march 234 

Squads right about, march 234 

Change direction or column right, march 234 

As skirmishers, march 234 

As skirmishers, guide center, march 235 

As skirmishers, guide right, march 235 

Assemble, march 235 

Range, or change elevation 235 

What range are you using ? 235 

Are you ready ? 235 

Commence firing 235 

Fire faster 235 

Fire slower 235 

To swing the cone of fire 235 

Fix bayonet 236 

Suspend firing 236 

Cease firing 236 

Platoon 236 

Squad 236 

Rush 236 



414 INDEX. 

CHAPTER 12. page. 

Guard duty 237 

Guards 237 

Formal guard mounting 238 

Ceremony 238 

First detail 239 

Other details 239 

Sergeant major 239 

Adjutant 239, 240, 241 

Officer of the guard 240 

New officer of the day 240 

Commander of the guard 241 

Guard duty in the trenches 241 

CHAPTER 13. 

Company administration 245 

Notes on organization 245 

Prepare in advance to receive men 245 

Duties 245 

If in cantonments 246 

If in tents 246 

Men reporting 246 

Issue of equipment 247 

Organization . . * 248 

Day's routine 249 

Reveille 250 

Mess 250, 251 

Sick call 250, 251 

Morning instruction 250 

Afternoon instruction 251 

Retreat 251 

School call 251 

Tattoo 251 

Call to quarters 251 

Taps 251 

Sundays and holidays 252 

Details 252 

Paper work 252 

Military correspondence 253 

Morning report 254 

Ration return 254 

Sick report 254 

Duty roster 254 

Monthly return 255 

Service record 255 

Discharge 255 

Final statement 255 

Muster roll 255 

Pay roll 256 

Names 257 

Losses 257 



INDEX. 415 

CHAPTER 14. page. 

Conferences 259 

Study 250 

Syllabus: Small problems for infantry 261 

Examinations 269 

Military science and tactics 275 

Minor tactics 275 

CHAPTER 15. 

Trench warfare 287 

General principles 287 

Instructions to be issued by battalion commander 287 

Attack of a defensive position 289 

Attacking from trenches 291 

Defense of trenches 296 

Liaison 298 

Trench orders 299 

Selection of site 302 

Trench construction 303, 307 

General arrangement 303 

System of laying- out trenches 307 

Revettments 308 

Sod 310 

Sand bags 310 

Concrete work 310 

Gabions 310 

Trench armament 311 

Loopholes 311 

Trench bottoms 311 

Communication trench 313 

Latrines 315 

Shelters 315 

Dugouts 317 

Sentries 317 

Position 317 

Entrances 317 

Galleries 318 

Bomb-traps 318 

Interior 318 

Depots for supplies 318 

Telephones 319 

Departure parallel 319 

Machine gun emplacements 319 

Listening posts 321 

Wire entanglements 321 

High entanglements 321 

Tracing entanglements 322 

Low entanglements 322 

Loose wire 322 

Criticisms by Lieut Henri Poire 322 

Occupation . . . .' 325 

Two main classes of relief 325 



416 INDEX. 

Occupation — (Continued): page. 

General principles of relief 325 

Mechanism of relief 325 

Attack during the march 328 

The stay in the trenches 329 

Four objects of a trench commander 329 

His plan of defense 329 

Organization of defense 329 

Liaison 331 

Observation 331 

Trench work 333 

Offensive operations 334 

Rule of the trench commander 335 

Duties of the company commander 335 

Duties of platoon leaders as officers on duty 339 

Duties of platoon leaders 339 

In front line trenches 340 

Duties of non-commissioned officer on dutv 341 

Patrols 342 

Sentinels 342 

Machine guns 342 

Snipers 343 

Organization of a platoon 344 

Deployments 346 

Xormal battalion formation in attack 347 

General principles of the platoon formation in assault of 

fortified positions 349 

Remarks regarding forming of wave from close order. . . . 353 
Some questions a platoon commander should ask himself. 354 

Defensive measure against gas attacks 356 

General considerations 356 

Nature of gas attacks 356 

Gas clouds 356 

Gas projectiles 358 

Tear or lashrymatory shells 359 

Poison shells 359 

Smoke 359 

Mine and explosion gases 359 

Protection of shelters 360 

Methods of protection 360 

Shelters which should be protected 361 

Protection of weapons and equipment 361 

Small arms and S. A. A 362 

Hand and rifle grenades 362 

Light trench mortars 362 

Action to be taken in trenches on gas alarm 363 

Action to be taken in billets and back areas 363 

Action during gas attack 364 

Protective measures 364 

Tactical measures 364 

Precautions against gas shells 365 

Action subsequent to a gas attack 367 



INDEX. 417 



Occupation — (Continued) : 

Defensive measure against gas attacks — (Continued) : page. 

General 367 

Movement 367 

Clearing dugouts and other shelters 367 

Ventilation 368 

Natural 368 

By fire 368 

By fanning 369 

Cleaning arms and ammunition 369 

Treatment of shell holes 370 

Concealment from aerial observers 370 

Orders governing intrenchment problems 372 

Company organization 384 

Company headquarters 384 

Headquarters 384 

Personnel 385 

Commissioned 385 

Enlisted 386 

Equipment 386 

Trench standing orders 386 

Duties 386 

Sentries 387 

Patrols 388 

Stand to 389 

Machine guns 389 

Reliefs 390 

Guides 391 

Smoking and talking 391 

Procedure on arrival at trenches 391 

Log books 392 

Equipment 392 

Stretcher bearers 392 

Discipline 392 

Rations and cooking 393 

Sanitation 393 

Emergency dumps for companies (material) 394 

Contents of dump 394 

Stores for company 394 

Stores at battalion headquarters 394 

Conclusion 396 

Bibliography 397 



ALBANY 

THE ARGUS COMPANY 

1917 



